Copyright: (c) 2002 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: (c) 2002 Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


Adding three-dimensional effects to objects

You can create the illusion of three-dimensional depth in CorelDRAW objects by adding contour, perspective, extrusion, or drop shadow effects.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	contouring objects

•	applying perspective to objects

•	creating vector extrusions

•	creating drop shadows


Contouring objects

You can contours an object to create a series of concentric lines that progress to the inside or outside of the object. CorelDRAW also lets you set the number and distance of the contour lines.

After contouring an object, you can copy or clone its contour settings to another object.

You can also change the colors of the fill between the contour lines and the contour outlines themselves. You can set a color progression in the contour effect, where one color blends into another. The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or counterclockwise path through the color range of your choice.

Related Topics

To contour an object

To copy or clone a contour

To set the fill color for a contour object

To specify an outline color for the contour object

To set the fill progression


To contour an object

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive contour tool.

2	Click an object or a set of grouped objects, and drag the start handle toward the center to create an inside contour.

3	Move the object slider to change the number of contour steps.

You can also
Specify the number of contour lines	Click the Inside button on the property bar, and type a value in the Contour steps box on the property bar.
Specify the distance between contour lines	Type a value in the Contour offset box on the property bar.
Accelerate contour line progression	Click the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar, and move the object slider.
 Tip

•	You can create an outside contour by dragging the start handle away from the center.

Related Topics

Contouring objects

To copy or clone a contour

To set the fill color for a contour object

To specify an outline color for the contour object

To set the fill progression


To copy or clone a contour

1	Select the object you want to contour.

2	Click Effects and click one of the following:

•	Copy effect [image] Contour from

•	Clone effect [image] Contour from

3	Click a contour object.

Related Topics

Contouring objects

To contour an object

To set the fill color for a contour object

To specify an outline color for the contour object

To set the fill progression


To set the fill color for a contour object

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive contour tool.

2	Select a contour object.

3	Open the Fill color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

If the original object has a fountain fill, a second color picker displays.

 Tips

•	You can accelerate the fill color progression by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar.

•	You can change the contour center's color by dragging a color from the color palette to the end fill handle.

Related Topics

Contouring objects

To contour an object

To copy or clone a contour

To specify an outline color for the contour object

To set the fill progression


To specify an outline color for the contour object

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive contour tool.

2	Select a contour object.

3	Open the Outline color picker on the property bar, and click a color.

Related Topics

Contouring objects

To contour an object

To copy or clone a contour

To set the fill color for a contour object

To set the fill progression


To set the fill progression

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive contour tool.

2	Select a contour object.

3	Click one of the following buttons on the property bar:

•	Linear contour colors

•	Clockwise contour colors

•	Counterclockwise contour colors

Related Topics

Contouring objects

To contour an object

To copy or clone a contour

To set the fill color for a contour object

To specify an outline color for the contour object


Applying perspective to objects

You can create a perspective effect by shortening one or two sides of an object. This effect gives an object the appearance of receding in one or two directions, thereby creating a one-point perspective or a two-point perspective.

Perspective effects can be added to objects or grouped objects. You can also add a perspective effect to linked groups, such as contours, blends, extrusions, and objects created with the Artistic media tool. You can't add perspective effects to paragraph text, bitmaps, or symbols.

After you apply a perspective effect, you can copy it to other objects in a drawing, adjust it, or remove it from the object.

Related Topics

To apply a perspective

To copy an object's perspective effect

To adjust the perspective

To remove an object's perspective effect


To apply a perspective

To
Apply a one-point perspective	Click Effects [image] Add perspective. Press Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) and drag a node.
Apply a two-point perspective	Click Effects [image] Add perspective. Drag the nodes on the outside of the grid to apply the effect you want.
 Note

•	Pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) constrains the node's movement to the horizontal or vertical axis to create a one-point perspective effect.

 Tip

•	You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions, by pressing Ctrl + Shift (Windows) or Command + Shift (Mac OS) as you drag.

Related Topics

Applying perspective to objects

To copy an object's perspective effect

To adjust the perspective

To remove an object's perspective effect


To copy an object's perspective effect

1	Select an object to which you want to apply a perspective effect.

2	Click Effects [image] Copy effect [image] Perspective from.

3	Select an object whose perspective effect you want to copy.

Related Topics

Applying perspective to objects

To apply a perspective

To adjust the perspective

To remove an object's perspective effect


To adjust the perspective

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select an object that has a perspective effect.

3	Drag a node to a new position.

 Tips

•	You can also adjust the perspective by dragging one or both of the vanishing points.

•	You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by pressing Ctrl + Shift (Windows) or Command + Shift (Mac OS) while dragging the node.

Related Topics

Applying perspective to objects

To apply a perspective

To copy an object's perspective effect

To remove an object's perspective effect


To remove an object's perspective effect

1	Select an object that has a perspective effect.

2	Click Effects [image] Clear perspective.

Related Topics

Applying perspective to objects

To apply a perspective

To copy an object's perspective effect

To adjust the perspective


Creating vector extrusions

You can make objects appear three-dimensional by creating vector extrusions. You can create vector extrusions by projecting points from an object and joining them to create an illusion of three dimensions. CorelDRAW also lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object in a group.

After you create an extrusion, you can copy or clone its attributes to a selected object. Cloning and copying transfer the extrusion attributes of an extruded object to another. However, the cloned extrusion settings cannot be edited independently from the master.

You can change an extruded form by rotating it, changing its direction, and rounding its corners.

CorelDRAW also lets you remove a vector extrusion.

Bevels

Another way in which you can give an object a three-dimensional appearance is by applying a beveled edge to an extrusion. A bevel creates the illusion that an object's extruded edges are cut on an angle. You can specify the angle and depth values of the bevel to control the effect.

Extruded fills

You can apply fills to an entire vector extrusion or to the extruded surfaces of a vector extrusion. You can cover each surface individually with the fill, or you can drape the fill so that it blankets the entire object with no breaks to the pattern or texture.

Lighting

You can enhance vector extrusions by applying light sources. You can add up to three light sources to project toward the extruded object with varying intensity. When you no longer need light sources, you can remove them.

Vanishing points

You can create a vector extrusion in which the lines of the extrusion converge at a vanishing point. The vanishing point of a vector extrusion can be copied to another object so that both objects appear to recede toward the same point.

You can also give two vector extrusions different vanishing points.

Related Topics

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To create a vector extrusion

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive extrude tool.

2	Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion type list box on the property bar.

3	Select an object.

4	Drag the object's selection handles to set the direction and depth of the extrusion.

If you want to reset the extrusion, press Esc before releasing the mouse button.

You can also
Apply preset settings to a vector extrusion	Select an extrude object, click Interactive extrude tool, and choose a preset setting from the Preset list box on the property bar.
Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To copy or clone a vector extrusion

1	Select the object you want to extrude.

2	Click Effects and click one of the following:

•	Copy effect [image] Extrude from

•	Clone effect [image] Extrude from

3	Click an extruded object.

Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To change a vector extrusion's form

To	Do the following
Rotate an extrusion	Select an extruded object. Click the Extrude rotation button on the property bar. Drag the extrusion in the direction you want.
Change the direction of an extrusion	Click an extrusion twice. Drag in the direction you want.
Round the corners of an extruded rectangle or square	Open the Shape edit flyout,and click the Shape tool. Drag a corner node along the outline of the rectangle or square.
Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To remove a vector extrusion

1	Select an extruded object.

2	Click Effects [image] Clear extrude.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a vector extrusion by clicking the Clear extrude button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

1	Select an extruded object with the Interactive extrude tool.

2	Click the Color button on the property bar.

3	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Use object fill [image] applies the object's fill to the extrusion.

•	Use solid color [image] applies a solid color to the extrusion

•	Use color shading [image] applies a gradient fill to the extrusion

 Tip

•	You can apply an unbroken pattern or texture fill to an object by enabling the Drape fills check box before you click the Use object fill button.

Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive extrude tool.

2	Select an extruded object.

3	Click the Bevels button on the property bar.

4	Enable the Use bevel check box.

5	Type a value in the Bevel depth box.

6	Type a value in the Bevel angle box.

 Tips

•	You can also set the bevel depth and angle by using the Interactive display box in the bevel list box.

•	You can show only the bevel and hide the extrusion by enabling the Show bevel only check box.

Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To add light to a vector extrusion

1	Select an extruded object.

2	Click the Lighting button on the property bar.

3	Click any of the three Light buttons.

The lights appear as numbered circles in the preview window.

4	Drag the numbered circles in the Light intensity preview window to position the lights.

If you want to create more realistic shading, enable the Use full color range check box.

You can also
Adjust the intensity of a light source	Select a light in the Light intensity preview window and move the Intensity slider.
Remove a light source	Click an active Light button.
Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion


To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion

To	Do the following
Lock a vanishing point	Double-click an extruded object. Choose VP locked to object or VP locked to page from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar.
Copy a vanishing point	Double-click an extruded object whose vanishing point you want to change. Choose Copy VP from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Select the extruded object that has the vanishing point you want to copy.
Set one vanishing point for two extrusions	Double-click an extruded object. Choose Shared vanishing point from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Select the extruded object that has the vanishing point you want to share.
Related Topics

Creating vector extrusions

To create a vector extrusion

To copy or clone a vector extrusion

To change a vector extrusion's form

To remove a vector extrusion

To apply a fill to a vector extrusion

To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion

To add light to a vector extrusion


Creating drop shadows

Drop shadows simulate light falling on an object from one of five particular perspectives: flat, right, left, bottom, and top. You can add drop shadows to most objects or groups of objects, including artistic text, paragraph text, and bitmaps.

When you add a drop shadow, you can change its perspective, and you can adjust attributes such as color, opacity, fade level, angle, and feathering.

After you create a drop shadow, you can copy it or clone it to a selected object. When you copy a drop shadow, the original and copy have no connection and can be edited independently. With cloning, the master object's drop shadow attributes are automatically applied to its clone.

By separating a drop shadow from its object, you can gain more control over the drop shadow itself. Drop shadows are bitmaps, so any feature or effect that can be used to modify a bitmap can be applied to a drop shadow. You can also set the rendering resolution of a drop shadow.

You can also remove a drop shadow.

Related Topics

To add a drop shadow

To copy or clone a drop shadow

To separate a drop shadow from an object

To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To add a drop shadow

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive drop shadow tool.

2	Click an object.

3	Drag from the center or side of the object until the drop shadow is the size you want.

4	Specify any attributes on the property bar.

 Note

•	You can't add drop shadows to linked groups, such as blended objects, contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, objects created with the Artistic media tool, or other drop shadows.

Related Topics

Creating drop shadows

To copy or clone a drop shadow

To separate a drop shadow from an object

To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To copy or clone a drop shadow

1	Select the object to which you want to copy or clone a drop shadow.

2	Click Effects and click one of the following:

•	Copy effect [image] Drop shadow from

•	Clone effect [image] Drop shadow from

3	Click the drop shadow of an object.

Related Topics

Creating drop shadows

To add a drop shadow

To separate a drop shadow from an object

To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To separate a drop shadow from an object

1	Select an object's drop shadow.

2	Click Arrange [image] Break drop shadow group apart.

3	Drag the shadow.

Related Topics

Creating drop shadows

To add a drop shadow

To copy or clone a drop shadow

To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow

To remove a drop shadow


To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	Type a value in the Resolution box.

Related Topics

Creating drop shadows

To add a drop shadow

To copy or clone a drop shadow

To separate a drop shadow from an object

To remove a drop shadow


To remove a drop shadow

1	Select an object's drop shadow.

2	Click Effects [image] Clear drop shadow.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a drop shadow from an object by clicking the Clear drop shadow button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Creating drop shadows

To add a drop shadow

To copy or clone a drop shadow

To separate a drop shadow from an object

To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow


Working with Asian text

If you are running CorelDRAW on an Asian operating system, or if you have a language support installed on another operating system, you can take advantage of the Asian text formatting capabilities available with CorelDRAW.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	formatting Asian text

•	using Asian line-breaking rules


Formatting Asian text

You can choose a default font and text orientation (either horizontal or vertical) when typing text on an operating system that has Asian language support. When you type artistic or paragraph text, CorelDRAW uses a default artistic or paragraph text style. When you use the language kit, CorelDRAW uses the default Asian font and font attributes (such as size, style, outline, and fill). Asian character input is only supported in CorelDRAW when using an Asian operating system or when a language kit is installed on a non-Asian operating system.

You can also mix Latin and Asian text in one text object and set the spacing between the two. You can change the font properties of one or both languages in a block of Latin or Asian text.

You can type and format Asian artistic and paragraph text the same way you do Latin text. You can also apply the same effects to Asian text that you can apply to Latin text, such as fitting text to a path or converting text to curves. For information about formatting text, see "Adding and formatting text."

Related Topics

To choose a default font for Asian text

To choose a text orientation

To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text

To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text


To choose a default font for Asian text

1	Click a blank space in the drawing window.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Choose Asian from the Script list box.

4	Choose a font from the Font list box.

 Tip

•	You can change the font for Asian text by selecting the text you want to change.

Related Topics

Formatting Asian text

To choose a text orientation

To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text

To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text


To choose a text orientation

To	Do the following
Choose a default text orientation	Click a blank space in the drawing window, click Text [image] Format text, click the Paragraph tab, and choose either Horizontal or Vertical from the Orientation list box.
Change the text orientation	Using the Pick tool, select the text and click Text [image] Format text. Click the Paragraph tab, and choose either Horizontal or Vertical from the Orientation list box.
 Notes

•	The default orientation for Asian text is horizontal.

•	When you change the text orientation from horizontal to vertical, underlines become left lines and overlines become right lines.

Related Topics

Formatting Asian text

To choose a default font for Asian text

To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text

To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text


To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text

1	Click Text [image] Format text.

2	Click the Paragraph tab.

3	Type a value in the Language box.

 Note

•	The inter-language spacing is based on the percentage of a standard space. For example, two spaces are represented by typing a value of 200.

Related Topics

Formatting Asian text

To choose a default font for Asian text

To choose a text orientation

To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text


To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Character tab and choose one of the following from the Script list box:

•	Latin

•	Asian

4	Change any font properties.

 Note

•	Text orientation applies to the entire text object. You cannot mix orientations in one text object.

Related Topics

Formatting Asian text

To choose a default font for Asian text

To choose a text orientation

To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text


Using Asian line-breaking rules

CorelDRAW includes line-breaking rules for use with Asian text when you have an Asian operating system. For most Asian languages, a line of text can break between any two characters, with a few exceptions. Some characters cannot appear at the end of a line. These characters are referred to as "leading characters." Other characters [image] referred to as "following characters" [image] cannot appear at the beginning of a line. The line breaks either after the following character or before the character that precedes the following character. Still others [image] referred to as "overflow characters" [image] are not wrapped but are, instead, allowed to extend beyond the right or bottom margin.

To enforce one or more of the line-breaking rules, you can enable any of the rules. To customize the rules, you can add or remove characters. You can also reset the rules to the CorelDRAW default.

Related Topics

To disable or enable line-breaking rules

To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule

To reset a line-breaking rule to the default


To disable or enable line-breaking rules

1	Click Text [image] Format text.

2	Click the Rules tab.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Leading characters [image] ensures CorelDRAW does not break a line after any of the characters in the list

•	Following characters [image] ensures CorelDRAW does not break a line before any of the characters in the list

•	Overflow characters [image] ensures CorelDRAW allows the characters in the list to extend beyond the margin of the line

 Note

•	You must have an Asian operating system to view the Rules tab.

Related Topics

Using Asian line-breaking rules

To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule

To reset a line-breaking rule to the default


To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule

1	Click Text [image] Format text.

2	Click the Rules tab.

3	Type or remove the characters in the appropriate box.

 Note

•	You must have an Asian operating system to view the Rules tab.

Related Topics

Using Asian line-breaking rules

To disable or enable line-breaking rules

To reset a line-breaking rule to the default


To reset a line-breaking rule to the default

1	Click Text [image] Format text.

2	Click the Rules tab.

3	Click the Default button beside a rule.

Related Topics

Using Asian line-breaking rules

To disable or enable line-breaking rules

To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule


Changing color modes in bitmaps

Changing an image to another color mode, such as RGB, CMYK or Grayscale, changes a bitmap's color structure.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing the color mode of bitmaps

•	changing bitmaps to a black-and-white image

•	changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

•	changing bitmaps to a duotone


Changing the color mode of bitmaps

The colors of the images that you work with in CorelDRAW are based on color modes. Color modes define the color characteristics of images and are described by their component colors. The CMYK color mode is composed of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black values and the RGB color mode is composed of red, green, and blue values.

Although you may not be able to see the difference between an image in the CMYK color mode and an image in the RGB color mode on screen, the images are quite different. For the same image dimensions, an RGB image has a smaller file size than a CMYK image and the RGB color space, or gamut, can display more colors. Therefore, images intended for the Web or desktop printers that require accurate color fidelity, are generally in RGB mode. Where accurate print reproduction is needed, such as on a commercial printing press, images are generally created in CMYK mode. Paletted color images attempt to preserve color fidelity while reducing the small file size, making them ideal for on-screen uses.

Each time you convert an image, you may lose color information. For this reason, you should save an edited image before you change it to a different color mode.

For more information about color modes, see "Working with color".

CorelDRAW supports the following color modes:

Color
Black-and-White (1-bit)	Grayscale (8-bit)
Duotone (8-bit)	Paletted (8-bit)
RGB Color (24-bit)	Lab Color (24-bit)
CMYK Color (32-bit)
Related Topics

To change the color mode of a bitmap


To change the color mode of a bitmap

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Mode, and click one of the following:

•	Black and White (1-bit)

•	Grayscale (8-bit)

•	RGB color (24-bit)

•	Lab color (24-bit)

•	CMYK color (32-bit)

 Note

•	The mode which the selected bitmap is in will not be available in the menu.

Related Topics

Changing the color mode of bitmaps


Changing bitmaps to a black-and-white image

You can change any image to a black-and-white image. In addition to conversion settings such as threshold, screen type, and intensity, there are seven conversion options that affect how the converted images will look.

Conversion
Line art	Produces a high-contrast, black-and-white image. Colors with a grayscale value lower than the threshold value that you set change to black, while colors with a grayscale value higher than the threshold value change to white.
Ordered	Organizes the gray levels into repeating geometric patterns of black and white pixels. Solid colors are emphasized and image edges are hard. This option is best suited for uniform colors.
Halftone	Creates different shades of gray by varying the pattern of black and white pixels in an image. You can choose the screen type, angle for the halftone, lines per unit, and the unit of measure.
Cardinality-Distribution	Creates a textured look by applying a calculation and distributing the result to the screen.
Jarvis	Applies the Jarvis algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images.
Stucki	Applies the Stucki algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images.
Floyd-Steinberg	Applies the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images.
Related Topics

To change a bitmap to a black-and-white image


To change a bitmap to a black-and-white image

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Mode [image] Black-and-white (1-bit).

3	Choose an option from the Conversion list box.

4	Move the slider.

If you want to view different parts of the image, you can drag the image in the Preview window.

Related Topics

Changing bitmaps to a black-and-white image


Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

The paletted color mode, also called indexed color mode, is sometimes used for images on the World Wide Web. When you convert an image to the paletted color mode, a fixed color value is assigned to each pixel. These values are stored in a compact color table, or palette containing up to 256 colors. As a result, the paletted color mode image contains less data than a 24 bit color mode image, and it has a smaller file size. Conversion to paletted color mode works best on images that have a limited range of colors.

Choosing, editing, and saving a color palette

When you change an image to the paletted color mode, you can use a predefined palette or you can customize a color palette by replacing individual colors.

Saving conversion settings

After you choose a color palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for changing an image to the paletted color mode, you can save the settings as a conversion preset that you can use with other images. You can add as many conversion presets as you want.

The color palette you use is called the processed color palette. It can be saved for use with other images.

For more information about the predefined color palettes available for the paletted color mode, see "Palette types." For more information about creating and opening custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes".

Dithering

Changing images to the paletted color mode lets you use dithering to enhance color information. Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels of a specific color. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates the appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the color palette.

You can use two types of dithering: ordered dithering and error diffusion. Ordered dithering approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are emphasized and edges appear harder. Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg are conversion options that provide error diffusion.

The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than the error diffusion options (Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg) but is less accurate.

Specifying a range sensitivity color

You can change an image to the paletted color mode and specify a focus color and a range sensitivity for the focus color, so that the focus color and colors that fall within the range settings are included in the processed color palette. You can also specify how much emphasis to place on the range sensitivity. Because the palette has a maximum of 256 colors, emphasizing a focus color reduces the number of colors that fall outside the range sensitivity.

Related Topics

Palette types

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To create a custom processed color palette

To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity


Palette types

Palette type	Description
Uniform	Provides a range of 256 colors with equal parts of red, green, and blue
Standard VGA	Provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette
Adaptive	Provides colors original to the image and preserves the individual colors (the entire color spectrum) in the image
Optimized	Creates a color palette based on the highest percentage of colors in the image. You can also specify a range sensitivity color for the color palette. This is the most common color palette for photographic images.
Black Body	Contains colors that are based on temperature. For example, black may represent cold temperatures, while red, orange, yellow, and white may represent hot temperatures
Grayscale	Provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black to white
System	Provides the predefined palette of colors used by the operating system.
Web-safe	Provides a predefined palette of 216 non-dithered colors that will display the same on the Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator browsers. This palette is not recommended for use with photographs and only benefits users with older computers.
Custom	Lets you add colors to create a customized color palette
Related Topics

Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To create a custom processed color palette

To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity


To change an image to the paletted color mode

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Mode [image] paletted (8-bit).

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Choose a color palette type from the Palette list box.

5	Choose an option from the Dithering list box.

6	Move the Dithering intensity slider.

If you want to save the conversion settings as a preset, click the Add preset button, and type a name in the Save preset box.

 Note

•	You can achieve better color fidelity by choosing the palette you want to use when you change an image to a paletted bitmap or when you export a GIF or JPEG. For example, the standard color palette provides more colors than necessary for an image with a limited range of colors, but you can choose an optimized palette to ensure that color representation is accurate.

 Tips

•	You can choose a custom color palette by clicking Open, locating the color palette file you want, and double-clicking the filename.

•	You can load preset conversion settings by choosing a preset from the Preset list box.

Related Topics

Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

Palette types

To create a custom processed color palette

To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity


To create a custom processed color palette

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Mode [image] paletted (8-bit).

3	Click the Processed palette tab.

4	Click a color, and click the Edit button.

5	In the Color table, specify the color you want, and click Edit Color.

6	Edit the color, and click OK.

7	Click the Save palette as button to save a new palette.

8	Choose the disk and folder where you want to store the color palette.

9	Type a name in the Name box, and click Save.

Related Topics

Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

Palette types

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity


To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Mode [image] paletted (8-bit).

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Choose Optimized from the Palette list box.

5	Enable the Color range sensitivity to check box.

6	Click the Eyedropper tool,and click a color in the image.

7	Click the Range sensitivity tab.

8	Move the range sensitivity sliders.

If you want to preview the color palette, click the Processed palette tab.

Related Topics

Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode

Palette types

To change an image to the paletted color mode

To create a custom processed color palette


Changing bitmaps to duotones

To convert an image to a duotone, you change a bitmap to the grayscale color mode and enhance it using one to four additional colors, giving the image greater tonal depth.

The following four variations of the color mode correspond to the number of additional inks:

•	Monotone [image] a grayscale image colored with a single tone

•	Duotone [image] a grayscale image colored with two tones. In most cases, one is black and the other is colored.

•	Tritone [image] a grayscale image colored with three tones. In most cases, one is black and the other two are colored.

•	Quadtone [image] a grayscale image colored with four tones. In most cases, one is black and the other three are colored.

Adjusting tone curves

When you change an image to a duotone, a tone curve grid that represents the dynamic tone curves that are used throughout the conversion is displayed. The horizontal plane (x-axis) displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane (y-axis) indicates the intensity of a color (from 0 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values. For example, a grayscale pixel with a color value of 25 is printed with a 25-percent tint of the color. By adjusting the tone curves, you can control the color and intensity of the tone that is added to an image.

Saving and loading inks

You can save an adjusted duotone tone curve and ink settings and then load them for use with other bitmaps.

Specifying how overprint colors display

When you change an image to a duotone, you can specify which colors will overprint when you print an image. Overprint colors are the colors that have too much ink when two or more colors overlap. When you display the image, each color is applied on the screen in sequence, creating a layered effect.

You can view all instances in which the colors you choose for the duotone conversion overlap. Associated with each instance is the color that is produced by the overlap. You can also choose new overprint colors to see how they overlap.

Duotones will hold their color ink information when saving to EPS, PDF, CorelDRAW (CDR), and Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file formats. Other file formats don't support duotone images.

Related Topics

To change an image to a duotone


To change an image to a duotone

1	Click a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Mode [image] Duotone (8-bit).

3	Click the Curves tab.

4	Choose a duotone type from the Type list box.

5	Double-click an ink color in the Type window.

6	In the Select color dialog box, choose a color, and click OK.

If you want to adjust the color's tone curve, click the ink tone curve on the grid to add a node and drag the node to adjust the percentage of color at that point on the curve.

7	Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each ink color you want to use.

You can also
Display all the ink tone curves on the grid.	Enable the Show all check box.
Save the ink settings	Click Save. Choose the disk and folder where you want to save the file, and type a filename in the Name box.
Specify how overprint colors display	Click the Overprint tab, and enable the Use overprint check box. Double-click the color you want to edit, and choose a new color.
 Tip

•	You can load preset ink colors by clicking Load, locating the file in which the ink settings are stored, and double-clicking the filename.

Related Topics

Changing bitmaps to duotones


Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes

CorelDRAW lets you add lines and brush strokes using a variety of techniques and tools. After you draw lines or apply brush strokes to lines, you can format them. You can also format the outlines that surround objects.

CorelDRAW provides preset objects that you can spray along a line.

You can create flow and dimension lines in drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	drawing lines

•	formatting lines and outlines

•	closing multiple line segments

•	applying brush strokes

•	spraying objects along a line

•	drawing flow and dimension lines


Drawing lines

CorelDRAW lets you draw all kinds of different lines, from curved or straight lines to calligraphic lines. You can create a line that is drawn as you drag the mouse. You can create segments that are straight and curved in the same line. You can draw straight or curved segments and then add one node at a time. You can also draw a curve by specifying width and height.

Some lines have nodes and control points that you can manipulate to shape lines as you draw. For information about node types, see "Working with curve objects."

CorelDRAW also lets you simulate the effect of a calligraphic pen when you draw lines. Calligraphic lines vary in thickness according to the direction of the line and the angle of the pen nib. By default, calligraphic lines display as closed shapes drawn with a pencil. You can control the thickness of a calligraphic line by changing the angle of the line you draw in relation to the calligraphic angle you choose. For example, when the line you draw is perpendicular to the calligraphic angle, the line is at the maximum thickness specified by the pen width. Lines drawn at the calligraphic angle, however, have little or no thickness.

CorelDRAW lets you create pressure-sensitive lines which vary in thickness. You can create this effect using the mouse or a pressure-sensitive pen and graphics tablet. Both methods result in lines with curved edges and varying widths along a path. For information about using a pressure-sensitive pen on a graphics tablet, see the manufacturer's instructions.

CorelDRAW provides preset lines that let you create thick strokes in a variety of shapes. After you draw a calligraphic or preset line, you can apply a fill to it as you would to any other object. For information about applying fills, see "Filling objects."

Related Topics

To draw a straight line

To draw a curved line

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

To draw a calligraphic line

To draw a pressure-sensitive line

To draw a preset line


To draw a straight line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2	Click where you want to start the line, and click where you want to end it.

You can also
Draw a straight line using the Polyline tool	Open the Curve flyout and click the Polyline tool. Click where you want to start the line segment, and click where you want to end the line segment. Double-click to end the line.
Draw a straight line using the Bézier tool	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Bézier tool. Click where you want to start the line. Double-click where you want to end the line. If you want to create a multi-segment line, click where you want each new line segment to end. Double-click to finish the line.
Draw a straight line using the Pen tool	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Pen tool. Click where you want to start the line. Double-click where you want to end the line. If you want to create a jagged line, click where you want each new line segment to end. Double-click to finish the line.
Add line segments to an existing line	Using the Freehand tool, click the end node of a selected line, and click where you want the new segment to end.
Create a closed shape from a multi-segment line	Using the Freehand tool, click the end node of a multi-segment line. Click the first node.
 Tip

•	You can constrain a line created with the Freehand tool to a straight vertical or horizontal line by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) while you drag. You can change the angle of this line by clicking Tools [image] Options (Windows) or clicking CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences (Mac OS), clicking Edit in the Workspace list of categories and changing the value in the Constrain Angle box.

Related Topics

Drawing lines

To draw a curved line

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

To draw a calligraphic line

To draw a pressure-sensitive line

To draw a preset line


To draw a curved line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Freehand tool.

2	Click where you want to start the curve, and drag to draw the line.

You can also
Draw a curved line using the Polyline tool	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Polyline tool. Click where you want to start the curve, and drag across the drawing page. Double-click to finish the curve.
Draw a curved line using the Bézier tool	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Bézier tool. Click where you want to place the first node, and drag the control point in the direction you want the curve to bend. Release the mouse button. Position the cursor where you want to place the next node, and drag the control point to create the curve you want. Double-click to finish the curve.
Draw a curved line using the Pen tool	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Pen tool. Click where you want to place the first node, and drag the control point in the direction you want the curve to bend. Release the mouse button. Position the cursor where you want to place the next node, and drag the control point to create the curve you want. Double-click to finish the curve.
 Tips

•	You can erase a portion of a curved freehand line by holding down Shift and dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse button.

•	You can close an open curve object by selecting the curve object and clicking the Auto-close curve button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Drawing lines

To draw a straight line

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

To draw a calligraphic line

To draw a pressure-sensitive line

To draw a preset line


To draw a curve by specifying width and height

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the 3 point curve tool.

2	Click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to end.

3	Release the mouse button, and click where you want the center of the curve to be.

Related Topics

Drawing lines

To draw a straight line

To draw a curved line

To draw a calligraphic line

To draw a pressure-sensitive line

To draw a preset line


To draw a calligraphic line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic media tool.

2	Click the Calligraphic button on the property bar.

3	Type a value in the Calligraphic angle box on the property bar.

If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar.

4	Drag until the line is the shape you want.

If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar.

 Note

•	The width you set is the maximum line width. The angle of the line you draw in relation to the calligraphic angle determines the line's actual width.

 Tip

•	You can also access calligraphic lines by clicking Effects [image] Artistic media, and specifying the settings you want on the Artistic media Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Drawing lines

To draw a straight line

To draw a curved line

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

To draw a pressure-sensitive line

To draw a preset line


To draw a pressure-sensitive line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic media tool.

2	Click the Pressure button on the property bar.

If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar.

3	Drag until the line is the shape you want.

If you want to change the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar.

 Note

•	The width you set represents the line's maximum width. The amount of pressure you apply determines the line's actual width.

 Tips

•	If you are using the mouse, press the Up arrow or Down arrow to simulate the pen pressure, and, therefore, the width of the line.

•	You can also access pressure-sensitive lines by clicking Effects [image] Artistic media.

Related Topics

Drawing lines

To draw a straight line

To draw a curved line

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

To draw a calligraphic line

To draw a preset line


To draw a preset line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic media tool.

2	Click the Preset button on the property bar.

3	Choose a preset line shape from the Preset stroke list list box.

If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar.

4	Drag until the line is the shape you want.

If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar.

Related Topics

Drawing lines

To draw a straight line

To draw a curved line

To draw a curve by specifying width and height

To draw a calligraphic line

To draw a pressure-sensitive line


Formatting lines and outlines

You can change the appearance of both lines and outlines. For example, you can specify their color, width, style, corner shape, and cap style. You can also remove a line or outline, and you can create your own line or outline style by adjusting the distance between segments in the line.

CorelDRAW also lets you copy the color of an outline to other objects, convert outlines to objects so that you can apply a fill to them, and create calligraphic outlines. For more information about filling objects, see "Filling Objects."

You can also add arrowheads to lines and curves. In addition, you can create new arrowhead and edit current or new ones.

Setting the miter limit for outlines lets you specify at what angle a sharp corner is either mitered (pointed) or beveled (squared-off).

Related Topics

To specify line and outline settings

To copy outline color to another object

To convert an outline to an object

To create a calligraphic outline

To remove an object's outline

To add an arrowhead

To set the miter limit


To specify line and outline settings

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Outline tool flyout, and click the Outline pen dialog button.

3	Specify the settings you want.

You can also
Create a line style	Click Edit style, and move the slider in the Edit line style dialog box. By clicking the boxes to the left of the slider, you can specify the placement and frequency of the dots in the new line style you create.
Edit a line style	Choose a line style from the Style list box, and click Edit style. Create a line style in the Edit line style dialog box, and click Replace.
 Tip

•	You can change the outline color of a selected object by choosing a color from the color picker in the Outline pen dialog box.

Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To copy outline color to another object

To convert an outline to an object

To create a calligraphic outline

To remove an object's outline

To add an arrowhead

To set the miter limit


To copy outline color to another object

1	Open the Eyedropper flyout, and click the Eyedropper tool.

2	Click the Eyedropper fill/outline button on the property bar.

3	Click the edge of the object whose outline you want to copy.

4	Open the Eyedropper flyout, and click the Paintbucket tool.

5	Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the outline.

 Notes

•	The color of copied outlines may not exactly match the color of the original outline. In some cases, the closest equivalent RGB color displays.

•	The outline's thickness is not copied.

Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To specify line and outline settings

To convert an outline to an object

To create a calligraphic outline

To remove an object's outline

To add an arrowhead

To set the miter limit


To convert an outline to an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Arrange [image] Convert outline to object.

Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To specify line and outline settings

To copy outline color to another object

To create a calligraphic outline

To remove an object's outline

To add an arrowhead

To set the miter limit


To create a calligraphic outline

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Outline tool flyout, and click the Outline pen dialog button.

3	In the Corners area, enable a corner style option.

4	Type a value in the Stretch box.

5	Type a value in the Angle box.

Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To specify line and outline settings

To copy outline color to another object

To convert an outline to an object

To remove an object's outline

To add an arrowhead

To set the miter limit


To remove an object's outline

1	Select and object.

2	Open the Outline tool flyout and click No Outline.

 Tip

•	You can also remove an object's outline by selecting the object and right-clicking (Windows) or holding Option and clicking (Mac OS) No Color on the color palette.

Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To specify line and outline settings

To copy outline color to another object

To convert an outline to an object

To create a calligraphic outline

To add an arrowhead

To set the miter limit


To add an arrowhead

1	Select a line or curve.

2	Open the Outline tool flyout, and click the Outline pen dialog button.

3	In the Arrows area, open the Start Arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape.

4	Open the End Arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape.

You can also
Create an arrowhead	In the Arrows area, click Options [image] New. Drag the side handles and hollow nodes to shape the arrowhead.
Edit an arrowhead	Using the Pick tool, select an object with an arrowhead. Click the Arrowhead Selector button on the property bar. In the arrowhead picker, click Other. In the Edit window, drag the side handles and hollow nodes to shape the arrowhead.
Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To specify line and outline settings

To copy outline color to another object

To convert an outline to an object

To create a calligraphic outline

To remove an object's outline

To set the miter limit


To set the miter limit

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Edit.

3	Type a value the Miter limit box.

Related Topics

Formatting lines and outlines

To specify line and outline settings

To copy outline color to another object

To convert an outline to an object

To create a calligraphic outline

To remove an object's outline

To add an arrowhead


Closing multiple line segments

You can quickly create a closed object from line segments by selecting which lines you want to connect and the shape of the connecting line.

You can connect lines using the closest nodes between lines. The connecting line can be either straight or curved. You can also connect lines using the start to end nodes of the lines. The end node of the first selected line connects directly with the starting node of the closest selected line. The connected lines will take on the properties of the first line selected.

Related Topics

To close multiple line segments


To close multiple line segments

1	Hold down Shift, and select each object using the Pick tool.

2	Click Arrange [image] Close path, and click one of the following:

•	Closest nodes with straight lines

•	Closest nodes with curvy lines

•	Start to end with straight lines

•	Start to end with curvy lines

 Note

•	Text and blends fitted to a path will be detached from their paths when the paths are closed.

 Tips

•	You can also connect the subpaths in a group of objects.

•	You can also select lines by marquee selecting. If the lines are marquee selected, the properties from the top object on a layer are used. To see which object is the top one, open the Object manager Docker window/palette by clicking Window [image] Dockers / Palette [image] Object manager.

Related Topics

Closing multiple line segments


Applying brush strokes

CorelDRAW lets you apply a variety of preset brush strokes, ranging from strokes with arrowheads to ones that are filled with rainbow patterns. When you draw a preset brush stroke, you can specify some of its attributes. For example, you can change the width of a brush stroke and specify its smoothness.

You can also create custom brush strokes using an object or a group of vector objects. When you create a custom brush stroke, you can save it as a preset.

Related Topics

To apply a preset brush stroke

To create a custom brush stroke


To apply a preset brush stroke

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic media tool.

2	Click the Brush button on the property bar.

3	Choose a brush stroke from the Brush stroke list box.

If you want to smooth the edges of the brush stroke, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar.

4	Drag until the stroke is the shape you want.

If you want to set the width of the stroke, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar.

 Tip

•	If you have access to a brush stroke that isn't listed in the Brush stroke list box, you can apply it by clicking the Browse button on the property bar, and locating the brush stroke file.

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes

To create a custom brush stroke


To create a custom brush stroke

1	Select an object or a set of grouped objects.

2	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic media tool.

3	Click the Brush button on the property bar.

4	Click the object or grouped objects.

5	Click the Save artistic media stroke button on the property bar.

6	Type a filename for the brush stroke.

7	Click Save.

 Tip

•	You can create custom brush strokes by clicking Effects [image] Artistic media, and specifying the settings you want on the Artistic media Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Applying brush strokes

To apply a preset brush stroke


Spraying objects along a line

CorelDRAW lets you spray a series of objects in a line. Besides graphic and text objects, you can import bitmaps and symbols to spray along a line.

You can control how a sprayed line appears by adjusting the spacing between objects, so they are closer or farther apart from each other. You can also vary the order of objects in the line. For example, if you are spraying a series of objects that includes a star, a triangle, and a square, you can change the spray order so that the square appears first, followed by the triangle and then the star. CorelDRAW also lets you shift the position of objects in a sprayed line by rotating them along the path or offsetting them in one of four different directions: alternating, left, random, or right. For instance, you can choose a left offset direction to align the objects you spray to the left of the path.

You can also create a new spraylist with objects of your own.

Related Topics

To spray a line

To rotate the lines that you spray

To offset the lines that you spray

To create a new spray list


To spray a line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Artistic media tool.

2	Click the Sprayer button on the property bar.

3	Choose a spraylist from the Spraylist file  list box on the property bar.

If the spraylist you want is not listed, click the Browse button on the property bar to select the folder in which the file is located.

4	Drag to draw the line.

You can also
Adjust the number of objects sprayed at each spacing point	Type a number in the top box of the Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar.
Adjust the spacing between dabs	Type a number in the bottom box of the Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar.
Set the spray order	Choose a spray order from the Choice of spray order list box on the property bar.
Adjust the size of spray objects	Type a number in the top box of the Size of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar.
Increase or decrease the size of the spray objects as they progress along the line	Type a number in the bottom box of the Size of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar.
Reset a spraylist to its saved settings	Click the Reset values button on the property bar.
 Notes

•	Increasing the value for the size of spray objects along the line causes objects to become larger as they are distributed along the path.

•	Spraylists that have more complex objects use more system resources. CorelDRAW takes longer to produce lines using complex objects, and these objects will increase the file size. Using symbols for each group in the list can help reduce file size and demands on your system. For more information about creating symbols, see "Working with symbols."

Related Topics

Spraying objects along a line

To rotate the lines that you spray

To offset the lines that you spray

To create a new spray list


To rotate the lines that you spray

1	Select the spraylist that you want to adjust.

2	Click the Rotation button on the property bar.

3	Type a value between zero and 360 in the Angle box on the property bar.

If you want each object in the spray to rotate incrementally, enable the Use Increment check box and type a value in the Increment box.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Path based [image] rotates objects in relation to the line.

•	Page based [image] rotates objects in relation to the page.

5	Press Enter.

Related Topics

Spraying objects along a line

To spray a line

To offset the lines that you spray

To create a new spray list


To offset the lines that you spray

1	Select a spraylist.

2	Click the Offset button on the property bar.

3	Enable the Use offset check box to offset objects from the path of the line sprayed.

If you want to adjust the offset distance, type a new value in the Offset box.

4	Choose an offset direction from the Offset direction list box.

If you want to alternate between the left and right of the line, choose Alternating.

Related Topics

Spraying objects along a line

To spray a line

To rotate the lines that you spray

To create a new spray list


To create a new spray list

1	Click Effects [image] Artistic media.

2	Select an object, a set of grouped objects, or a symbol.

3	Click the Save button on the Artistic media Docker window/palette.

4	Enable Object sprayer.

5	Click OK.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

Related Topics

Spraying objects along a line

To spray a line

To rotate the lines that you spray

To offset the lines that you spray


Drawing flow and dimension lines

You can draw flow lines in flowcharts and organizational charts to connect chart shapes. Objects stay connected by these lines even when you move one or both objects. For information about drawing flowchart shapes, see "Drawing pre-defined shapes."

You can draw callout lines that label and draw attention to objects.

You can also draw dimension lines to indicate the distance between two points in a drawing or the size of objects. Dimension lines and the measurements shown on the lines change with an object. You can also set how dimension lines are displayed.

Related Topics

To draw a flow line between two or more objects

To draw a callout

To draw a dimension line

To set how the dimension units are displayed


To draw a flow line between two or more objects

To	Do the following
Draw a flow line	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Interactive connector tool. Drag from a node on one object to a node on another object.
Move a flow line	Select a flow line using the Shape tool, and drag the node you want to move.
 Note

•	You can draw a flow line horizontally or vertically, but not both. All angles in a flow line, therefore, are right angles.

Related Topics

Drawing flow and dimension lines

To draw a callout

To draw a dimension line

To set how the dimension units are displayed


To draw a callout

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool.

2	Click the Callout tool on the property bar.

3	Click where you want the first callout segment to start.

4	Click where you want the second segment to start.

5	Type the callout text.

 Note

•	When you draw a callout line, a text cursor displays at the end of line, showing where to type a label for the object.

Related Topics

Drawing flow and dimension lines

To draw a flow line between two or more objects

To draw a dimension line

To set how the dimension units are displayed


To draw a dimension line

1	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Vertical dimension tool

•	Horizontal dimension tool

•	Slanted dimension tool

3	Click the start and end points of the dimension line.

4	Click where you want to place the dimension text.

You can also
Draw an angular dimension line	Open the Curve flyout, and click the Dimension tool. Click the Angular dimension tool button on the property bar. Click where you want the two lines that measure the angle to intersect. Click where you want the first line to end, and click where you want the second line to end. Click where you want the angle's label to appear.
Related Topics

Drawing flow and dimension lines

To draw a flow line between two or more objects

To draw a callout

To set how the dimension units are displayed


To set how the dimension units are displayed

1	Select a dimension line.

2	Click the Show units for dimension button on the property bar.

3	On the property bar, choose options from the following list boxes:

•	Dimension style

•	Dimension precision

•	Dimension units

You can also
Specify the position of the dimension units	Click the Text position drop down button on the property bar, and click a text position.
Change the point size and font of the dimension units	Select a dimension line. Click Text [image] Format text. Choose a font style from the Font list box, and type a value in the Size box.
Related Topics

Drawing flow and dimension lines

To draw a flow line between two or more objects

To draw a callout

To draw a dimension line


Drawing shapes

CorelDRAW lets you draw basic shapes, which you can modify using special effects and reshaping tools.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	drawing rectangles and squares

•	drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges

•	drawing polygons and stars

•	drawing spirals

•	drawing grids

•	drawing predefined shapes


Drawing rectangles and squares

CorelDRAW lets you draw rectangles and squares. You can draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally or draw a rectangle by specifying the width and height.

After you draw a rectangle or square, you can reshape it by rounding one or more of its corners.

Related Topics

To draw a rectangle or a square by dragging diagonally

To draw a rectangle by specifying height and width

To round the corners of a rectangle or a square


To draw a rectangle or a square by dragging diagonally

To draw	Do the following
A rectangle	Open the Rectangle flyout, and click the Rectangle tool. Drag in the drawing window until the rectangle is the size you want.
A square	Open the Rectangle flyout, and click the Rectangle tool. Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), and drag in the drawing window until the square is the size you want.
 Tips

•	You can draw a rectangle from its center outward by holding down Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag. You can also draw a square from its center outward by holding down Shift + Ctrl (Windows) or Shift + Option (Mac OS) as you drag.

•	You can draw a rectangle that covers the drawing page by double-clicking the Rectangle tool.

Related Topics

Drawing rectangles and squares

To draw a rectangle by specifying height and width

To round the corners of a rectangle or a square


To draw a rectangle by specifying height and width

1	Open the Rectangle flyout, and click the 3-point rectangle tool.

2	In the drawing window point to where you want to start the rectangle, drag to draw the width, and release the mouse button.

3	Move the mouse perpendicularly to the first line to draw the height, and click.

To adjust the size of the rectangle, type values in the Object(s) size boxes on the property bar.

 Tip

•	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag to constrain the angle of the baseline to 15 degree increments.

Related Topics

Drawing rectangles and squares

To draw a rectangle or a square by dragging diagonally

To round the corners of a rectangle or a square


To round the corners of a rectangle or a square

1	Click a rectangle or a square.

2	Type values in the Corner roundness areas on the property bar.

 Tips

•	To apply the same roundness to all corners click the Round corners together button on the property bar.

•	To set default corner roundness do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options, double-click Toolbox in the list of categories, click Rectangle tool, and move the slider or enter a number.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences, double-click Toolbox in the list of categories, click Rectangle tool, and move the slider or enter a number.

Related Topics

Drawing rectangles and squares

To draw a rectangle or a square by dragging diagonally

To draw a rectangle by specifying height and width


Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges

You can draw an ellipse or circle by dragging diagonally or you can draw an ellipse by specifying its width and height. You can draw an ellipse or circle and change the shape into an arc or wedge.

Related Topics

To draw an ellipse or a circle by dragging diagonally

To draw an ellipse by specifying width and height

To draw an arc or a wedge


To draw an ellipse or a circle by dragging diagonally

To draw	Do the following
An ellipse	Open the Ellipse flyout, and click the Ellipse tool. Drag in the drawing window until the ellipse is the shape you want.
A circle	Open the Ellipse flyout, and click the Ellipse tool. Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), and drag in the drawing window until the circle is the size you want.
 Tip

•	You can draw an ellipse or a circle from its center outward by holding down Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag.

Related Topics

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges

To draw an ellipse by specifying width and height

To draw an arc or a wedge


To draw an ellipse by specifying width and height

1	Open the Ellipse flyout, and click the 3-point ellipse tool.

2	Click in the drawing window, drag to draw the centerline of the ellipse, and release the mouse button.

The centerline runs through the center of the ellipse and determines its width.

3	Move the mouse perpendicularly to the first line to define the height of the ellipse, and click.

Related Topics

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges

To draw an ellipse or a circle by dragging diagonally

To draw an arc or a wedge


To draw an arc or a wedge

To draw	Do the following
An arc	Open the Ellipse flyout and click the Ellipse tool. Click the Arc button on the property bar. Drag in the drawing window until the arc is the shape you want.
A wedge	Open the Ellipse flyout and click the Ellipse tool. Click the Wedge button on the property bar. Drag in the drawing window until the wedge is the shape you want.
 Note

•	To draw an arc, the ellipse or circle must have an outline.

 Tips

•	You can change the direction of a selected arc or a wedge by clicking the Clockwise/counterclockwise arcs or pies button on the property bar.

•	You can constrain the movement of the node to 15-degree increments by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag.

Related Topics

Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and wedges

To draw an ellipse or a circle by dragging diagonally

To draw an ellipse by specifying width and height


Drawing polygons and stars

CorelDRAW lets you draw polygons and stars and then reshape them. For example, you can convert polygons to stars and stars to polygons, change the number of sides on a polygon or the number of points on a star, and sharpen the points of a star.

You can also draw a predefined star shape. For more information, see "To draw a predefined shape."

Related Topics

To draw a polygon or a star

To reshape a polygon or a star


To draw a polygon or a star

To draw	Do the following
A polygon	Open the Object flyout, click the Polygon tool, and drag in the drawing window until the polygon is the size you want.
A star	Open the Object flyout, click the Polygon tool, drag in the drawing window until the polygon is the size you want, and click the Star button on the property bar.
 Tips

•	You can draw a polygon or a star from its center by holding down Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag.

•	You can draw a symmetrical polygon or a star by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag.

Related Topics

Drawing polygons and stars

To reshape a polygon or a star


To reshape a polygon or a star

To	Do the following
Change a polygon to a star or a star to a polygon	Select a polygon or a star, and click the Polygon button or the Star button on the property bar.
Reshape a polygon or a star	Click the Shape tool and click a node on the object. Drag the node to change the object's shape.
Change the number of sides of a polygon or number of points on a star	Select a polygon or star, type a value in the Number of points on polygon box on the property bar, and press Enter.
Sharpen a star's points	Select a star, and move the Sharpness slider on the property bar.
 Note

•	The Sharpness slider displays only if the star you select has at least seven points. The sensitivity of the slider increases with the number of points.

 Tip

•	You can change a polygon to a star by selecting the polygon, clicking a node on one of the sides, and dragging toward the center of the polygon.

Related Topics

Drawing polygons and stars

To draw a polygon or a star


Drawing spirals

You can draw two types of spirals: symmetrical and logarithmic. Symmetrical spirals expand evenly so that the distance between each revolution is equal. Logarithmic spirals expand with increasingly larger distances between revolutions. You can set the rate by which a logarithmic spiral expands outward.

Related Topics

To draw a spiral


To draw a spiral

1	Open the Object flyout, and click the Spiral tool.

2	Type a value in the Spiral revolutions box on the property bar.

3	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Symmetrical spiral

•	Logarithmic spiral

If you want to change the amount by which the spiral expands as it moves outward, move the Spiral expansion slider.

4	Drag diagonally in the drawing window until the spiral is the required size.

 Tips

•	You can draw a spiral from its center outward by holding down Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag.

•	You can also draw a spiral with even horizontal and vertical dimensions by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag.

Related Topics

Drawing spirals


Drawing grids

You can draw a grid and set the number of rows and columns. A grid is a grouped set of rectangles, which you can ungroup.

Related Topics

To draw a grid

To ungroup a grid


To draw a grid

1	Open the Object flyout, and click the Graph paper tool.

2	Type values in the top and bottom portions of the Graph paper columns and rows box on the property bar.

The value you type in the top portion specifies the number of columns; the value in the bottom portion specifies the number of rows.

3	Point to where you want the grid to display.

4	Drag diagonally to draw the grid.

 Tip

•	If you want to draw the grid from its center point outward, hold down Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) as you drag; if you want to draw a grid with square cells, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) as you drag.

Related Topics

Drawing grids

To ungroup a grid


To ungroup a grid

1	Select a grid using the Pick tool.

2	Click Arrange [image] Ungroup.

 Tip

•	You can also break apart a grid by clicking the Ungroup button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Drawing grids

To draw a grid


Drawing predefined shapes

You can draw predefined shapes, such as basic shapes, arrows, stars, and callouts using the Perfect Shapes collection. Basic shapes, arrows shapes, star shapes, and callout shapes have glyphs which let you modify their appearance.

You can add text to the inside or outside of the shape. For example, you might want to put a label inside a flowchart symbol or a callout.

Related Topics

To draw a predefined shape

To modify a predefined shape

To add text to a predefined shape


To draw a predefined shape

1	Open the Perfect Shapes flyout, and click one of the following tools:

•	Basic shapes

•	Arrows shapes

•	Flowchart shapes

•	Star shapes

•	Callout shapes

2	Open Perfect Shapes picker on the property bar, and click a shape.

3	Drag in the drawing window until the shape is the size you want.

 Note

•	Perfect Shapes can be modified like any other shapes.

Related Topics

Drawing predefined shapes

To modify a predefined shape

To add text to a predefined shape


To modify a predefined shape

1	Select a shape with a glyph.

2	Drag a glyph until the shape is the form you want.

 Note

•	The right-angle, heart, lightning bolt, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not have glyphs.

Related Topics

Drawing predefined shapes

To draw a predefined shape

To add text to a predefined shape


To add text to a predefined shape

1	Click the Text tool.

2	Position the cursor inside the shape's outline until it changes to a Text cursor box.

3	Type and format the font inside the shape.

Related Topics

Drawing predefined shapes

To draw a predefined shape

To modify a predefined shape


File formats

A file format defines how an application stores information in a file. If you want to use a file created in a different application than the one you are currently using, you must import that file. Conversely, if you create a file in one application and want to use it in another application, you must export the file to a different file format.

(Windows) When you name a file, an application automatically appends a filename extension, usually three characters in length; for example, .cdr, .bmp, .tif, and .eps. This filename extension helps you and the computer differentiate between files of different formats.

The following file formats are used in CorelDRAW, and most of them are supported across both Windows and Macintosh platforms:

Adobe Illustrator (AI)

Windows Bitmap (BMP)

CorelDRAW (CDR)

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT)

Microsoft Word Document (DOC)

Corel DESIGNER (DSF)

AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

Macromedia Flash (SWF)

GIF

GIMP (XCF)

HTML

JPEG (JPG)

JPEG 2000 (JP2)

Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD)

PaintBrush (PCX)

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

PICT (PCT)

Portable Document Format (PDF)

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

Painter (RIF)

Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)

Targa Bitmap (TGA)

TIFF Bitmap (TIF)

WordPerfect Document (WPD)

WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

Other file formats

Recommended formats for importing graphics from other applications

Recommended formats for exporting graphics


Adobe Illustrator (AI)

The Adobe Illustrator file format (AI) was developed by Adobe Systems, Incorporated for the Macintosh and Windows platforms. It is primarily vector-based although later versions support bitmap information.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an Adobe Illustrator file

To export an Adobe Illustrator file


To import an Adobe Illustrator file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Illustrator from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

Related Topics

Adobe Illustrator (AI)

To export an Adobe Illustrator file


To export an Adobe Illustrator file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Illustrator from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	From the Compatibility list box, choose an Adobe Illustrator file format.

7	In the Destination area, enable one of the following options:

•	PC [image] lets you export a file that can be edited on a Windows operating system

•	Macintosh [image] lets you export a file that can be edited on a Macintosh operating system

8	In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options:

•	Curves [image] lets you export text as curves

•	Text [image] lets you export text as editable characters

9	Enable any of the check boxes corresponding to conversion options.

Related Topics

Adobe Illustrator (AI)

To import an Adobe Illustrator file


Windows Bitmap (BMP)

The Windows bitmap (BMP) file format was developed as a standard for representing graphic images as bitmaps on Windows operating system.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a bitmap file

To export a bitmap file


To import a bitmap file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Windows bitmap from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
Related Topics

Windows Bitmap (BMP)

To export a bitmap file


To export a bitmap file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Windows bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

Windows Bitmap (BMP)

To import a bitmap file


CorelDRAW (CDR)

CorelDRAW (CDR) files are primarily vector graphic drawings. Vectors define a picture as a list of graphic primitives (rectangles, lines, text, arcs, and ellipses). Vectors are mapped point by point to the page, so if you reduce or increase the size of a vector graphic, the original image will not be distorted.

Vector graphics are created in graphics design applications, such as CorelDRAW, or bitmap-tracing applications, such as CorelTRACE, but you can also edit them in image-editing applications like Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can use vector images of various formats in desktop publishing programs.

To import a CorelDRAW file

To export a CorelDRAW file

Technical notes


Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX)

Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) is a metafile format that supports bitmap and vector information and the full range of PANTONE, RGB, and CMYK colors. It was developed to save files created in CorelDRAW with the data necessary to open and edit them in other Corel applications.

To import a Corel Presentation Exchange file

To export a Corel Presentation Exchange file

Technical notes


Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT)

Files saved to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format are bitmaps that represent shapes as pixels arranged to form an image. When you save a graphic to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, masks, floating objects, and lenses are saved with the image. CorelDRAW can import and export files in Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, including files that contain color and grayscale information.

To import a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file


To export a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose CPT - Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Save.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

 Notes

•	You can export CorelDRAW layers as objects in the CPT file format.

•	You can export to an image without a background.

Related Topics

Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT)


Microsoft Word Document (DOC)

CorelDRAW supports Microsoft Word (DOC) files from Microsoft Word for Windows version 2 to Microsoft Word 2000. This file format is not supported on the Mac platform.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Microsoft Word file (Windows)

To export a Microsoft Word file (Windows)


To import a Microsoft Word file (Windows)

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose DOC - MS Word 97/2000 from the Files of type list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Position the import placement start cursor in the drawing window, and click.

 Note

•	Only text is imported from Microsoft Word. If the file contains graphical elements or tables, these are lost during conversion and do not display in CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Microsoft Word Document (DOC)

To export a Microsoft Word file (Windows)


To export a Microsoft Word file (Windows)

1	Open a drawing that contains a text object.

2	Click File [image] Export.

3	Choose DOC - MS Word for Windows 97/2000 from the Files of type list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box.

5	Click Export.

 Note

•	The filename extension for the format you choose is appended to the filename automatically.

•	Only text in drawings can be exported to the Microsoft Word. Other graphical elements, such as lines, curves, and rectangles are lost during conversion and do not display in the file.

Related Topics

Microsoft Word Document (DOC)

To import a Microsoft Word file (Windows)


Corel DESIGNER (DSF)

You can import Corel DESIGNER (formerly Micrografx Designer) files.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Corel DESIGNER file


To import a Corel DESIGNER file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DSF, DWR - Corel/Micrografx Designer from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Micrografx Designer 6.0 from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	In the Designer import dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

Corel DESIGNER (DSF)


AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) files are vector files used as a native format for AutoCAD drawings.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file

To export an AutoCAD Drawing Database file


To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DWG-AutoCAD from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose AutoCAD DWG from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	From the 3D projection list box in the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point.

If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable Auto-reduce nodes.

7	In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file

•	English (1 unit - 1 inch) [image] lets you scale the drawing in inches

•	Metric (1 unit - 1 mm) [image] lets you scale the drawing in millimeters

 Notes

•	If your file has specified views, they will appear automatically in the 3D projection list box.

•	If you are importing a file that does not have the font installed on your system, a PANOSE font matching dialog box will display and let you substitute the font.

Related Topics

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)

To export an AutoCAD Drawing Database file


To export an AutoCAD Drawing Database file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DWG-AutoCAD from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose AutoCAD DWG from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, choose an AutoCAD version from the Export version list box.

7	Choose a unit of measure from the Export units list box.

8	In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options:

•	Curves [image] lets you export text as curves

•	Text [image] lets you export text as editable characters

9	In the Export bitmap as area, enable one of the options to export the bitmaps in a drawing to a supported bitmap format.

Related Topics

AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG)

To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file


AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

The Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) is a tagged data representation of the information contained in an AutoCAD drawing file. The Drawing Interchange format is a native file format of AutoCAD. It has become a standard for exchanging CAD drawings and is supported by many CAD applications. The Drawing Interchange format is vector-based and supports up to 256 colors.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file

To export an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file


To import an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DXF - AutoCAD from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose AutoCAD DXF from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	In the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point from the 3D projection list box.

If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable Auto-reduce nodes.

7	In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file

•	English (1 unit - 1 inch) [image] lets you scale the drawing in inches

•	Metric (1 unit - 1 mm) [image] lets you scale the drawing in millimeters

 Note

•	If you are importing a file that does not have the font installed on your system, a PANOSE font matching dialog box will display and let you substitute the font.

Related Topics

AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

To export an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file


To export an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose DXF-AutoCAD from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose AutoCAD DXF from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Export AutoCAD file dialog box, choose an AutoCAD version from the Export version list box.

7	Choose a unit of measure from the Export units list box.

8	In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options:

•	Curves [image] lets you export text as curves

•	Text [image] lets you export text as editable characters

9	In the Export bitmap as area, enable one of the options to export the bitmaps in a drawing to a supported bitmap format.

Related Topics

AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

To import an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file


Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file is a metafile supported by most illustration and page layout programs. To view or print an EPS file, you must have a PostScript printer installed.

When you export to an encapsulated Postscript file format, you set general and advanced exporting options.

To set general exporting options

To set advanced exporting options

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an encapsulated PostScript file

To export an encapsulated PostScript file


To import an encapsulated PostScript file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose EPS - Encapsulated PostScript from the Files of type list box

•	(Mac OS) Choose Encapsulated PostScript from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

Related Topics

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

To export an encapsulated PostScript file


To export an encapsulated PostScript file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose EPS - Encapsulated PostScript from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Encapsulated PostScript from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

Related Topics

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

To import an encapsulated PostScript file


GIF

GIF is a bitmap-based format designed for use on the Web. It is highly compressed to minimize file transfer time and supports images with up to 256 colors. The GIF format provides the ability to store multiple bitmaps in a file. When the multiple images are displayed in rapid succession, the file is called an animated GIF file.

For Internet use, you can also save images to the JPEG and PNG formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and you are not sure which format to use, see To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a GIF file

To export a GIF file


To import a GIF file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose GIF - CompuServe bitmap from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose CompuServe bitmap from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tip

•	You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

GIF

To export a GIF file


To export a GIF file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose GIF - CompuServe bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose CompuServe bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

7	In the GIF export dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparency area:

•	None [image] lets you specify that you do not want any colors to be transparent when viewed in a Web browser

•	Image color [image] lets you make the color you click on the color palette transparent

 Tips

•	You can specify the transparent color by using the Eyedropper tool to click a color in the original image window or by moving the Index slider.

•	To display the image in the Web browser gradually so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading, enable the Interlace image check box.

Related Topics

GIF

To import a GIF file


HTML

HTML files are plain-text (also known as ASCII) files that can be created using any text editor, including SimpleText and TextEdit. HTML files are intended for display on a Web browser.

You can import HTML files into CorelDRAW to edit text and add Web objects, bookmarks, and hyperlinks. You can also publish files to the Web. For more information about preparing files and objects for Web publishing and uploading to the Web, see "Publishing to the Web."

To import an HTML file

To publish a file to the Web

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an HTML file


To import an HTML file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose HTML - HyperText Markup Language from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose HyperText Markup Language from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	In the Use default text colors area, enable one of the following options:

•	Yes [image] lets you use the default color for text and for visited, unvisited, and active links, ignoring the colors specified in the HTML file

•	No [image] lets you use the colors specified in the HTML file

7	Click the drawing page.

Related Topics

HTML


JPEG

JPEG is a standard format developed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group, allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques. JPEG supports 8-bit grayscale and color depths up to 32-bit CMYK.

For Internet use, you can also save images to the GIF and Portable Network Graphics (PNG) formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and you are not sure which format to use, see To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a JPEG file

To export a JPEG file


To import a JPEG file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JPG - JPEG bitmaps from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG bitmaps from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tip

•	You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

JPEG

To export a JPEG file


To export a JPEG file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JPG - JPEG bitmaps from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG bitmaps from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

7	Click OK.

8	In the Encoding method area, enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Progressive [image] loads the image gradually in certain browsers so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading

•	Optimize [image] uses the optimal encoding method to produce the smallest file size

9	From the Sub format list box, choose one of the following encoding methods:

•	Standard (4:2:2) [image] creates a smaller file with some image quality loss

•	Optional (4:4:4) [image] creates a larger file, but preserves image quality

You can also	Do the following
Set the quality of the image resolution	Move the Compression slider.
Smooth the transitions between adjacent pixels of different colors	Move the Smoothing slider.
Related Topics

JPEG

To import a JPEG file


JPEG 2000 (JP2)

The JPEG 2000 (JP2) file format is a JPEG image with advanced compression and file data capabilities. JP2 files can store more descriptive file data (or metadata) than JPEG 2000 codestream files, which are optimized for network transmission.

You can import either JP2 or JPC files but export to the JP2 format.

When you export the image to a JP2 file, you can choose to view download progression by resolution, quality, and position.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a JPEG 2000 file

To export a JPEG 2000 file


To import a JPEG 2000 file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JP2 - JPG 2000 bitmaps from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG 2000 bitmaps from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

Related Topics

JPEG 2000 (JP2)

To export a JPEG 2000 file


To export a JPEG 2000 file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose JP2 - JPEG 2000 Codestream or JP2 - JPEG 2000 Standard from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose JPEG 2000 Codestream or JPEG 2000 Standard from the Format list box.

4	Specify the compression ratio in the Compression box.

5	From the Progression list box, choose one of the following:

•	Quality [image] lets you set the image download by the amount of detail in the image

•	Resolution\Quality [image] lets you set the image download from low to high resolution, where the size of the entire image increases

•	Position\Quality [image] lets you set the image download from the top-left corner of the image to the bottom-right

•	Channels

6	Click OK.

7	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Click Export.

 Note

•	Setting a progression by image quality lets the user with a "slow" network connection to stop downloading a file when the desired quality is reached.

Related Topics

JPEG 2000 (JP2)

To import a JPEG 2000 file


Kodak Photo CD image

Kodak Photo CD image file is a raster format developed by Eastman Kodak for scanning photographic images onto compact discs. Photo CD allows high-quality digital storage and manipulation of photographic images. It is typically used by photofinishers and service bureaus who provide the service of placing photographs on CDs.

This file format is not supported on the Mac platform.

To import a Kodak Photo CD image file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Kodak Photo CD image file (Windows)


To import a Kodak Photo CD image file (Windows)

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose PCD - Kodak Photo-CD image from the Files of type list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	In the PCD import dialog box, move any of the following sliders:

•	Brightness [image] lets you set the amount of light

•	Contrast [image] lets you specify the contrast between the pixels in the image

•	Saturation [image] lets you specify the purity of a color

•	Red [image] lets you specify the amount of red in the image

•	Green [image] lets you specify the amount of green in the image

•	Blue [image] lets you specify the amount of blue in the image

7	Choose an image size from the Resolutions list box.

8	Choose a color mode from the Image type list box.

9	Position the import placement start cursor on the drawing window, and click.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tips

•	You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

•	You can remove the adjustments made by the photofinisher at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk by enabling the Subtract scene balance check box.

•	You can identify out-of-gamut areas of the image by enabling the Show colors out of gamut check box which renders the out-of-gamut pixels in pure red or pure blue.

Related Topics

Kodak Photo CD image


PICT

The Macintosh PICT file format was developed for the Macintosh platform by Apple Computer Inc. It is a native file format of QuickDraw and can contain both vectors and bitmaps. The Macintosh PICT file format is widely used in Macintosh applications where graphics are used.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a PICT file

To export a PICT file


To import a PICT file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Macintosh PICT from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

 Tip

•	You can drag on the drawing page to place the graphic proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

PICT

To export a PICT file


To export a PICT file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Macintosh PICT from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

Related Topics

PICT

To import a PICT file


PaintBrush (PCX)

The PaintBrush (PCX) file format is a bitmap format originally developed by the ZSoft Corporation for the PC Paintbrush program.

To import a PaintBrush file

To export a PaintBrush file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a PaintBrush file

To export a PaintBrush file


To import a PaintBrush file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose PCX PaintBrush from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

Related Topics

PaintBrush (PCX)

To export a PaintBrush file


To export a PaintBrush file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose PCX PaintBrush from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, specify any options.

6	Click OK.

Related Topics

PaintBrush (PCX)

To import a PaintBrush file


Portable Document Format (PDF)

The Portable Document Format (PDF) is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file. Using Adobe Acrobat Reader and Adobe Acrobat Exchange, a PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed by Macintosh, Windows, and UNIX users.

You can import an entire PDF file, individual pages from the file or multiple pages.

For more information about publishing to the Portable Document Format, see "Publishing to PDF."

To save a document as a Portable Document Format file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Portable Document Format file


To import a Portable Document Format file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Portable Document Format from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

Related Topics

Portable Document Format (PDF)


Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) file format is an excellent file format for lossless, portable, and well-compressed storage of bitmaps. It takes up a minimum amount of disk space and can be easily read and exchanged between computers. The Portable Network Graphics format provides a replacement for the GIF format and can also replace many common uses of the TIFF format.

The Portable Network Graphics format is designed to work well in online viewing, such as on the Web, and it's fully streamable with a progressive display option. You can export images to the Portable Network Graphics file format if you want to use transparent backgrounds, image interlacing, image maps, or animation in your Web pages.

Exporting drawings to the Portable Network Graphics format converts them to bitmaps that can be used in desktop publishing programs. You can also edit Portable Network Graphics in paint programs such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Adobe Photoshop.

For Internet use, you can also save images to the GIF and JPEG formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and you are not sure which format to use, see To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format..

To import a Portable Network Graphics file

To export a Portable Network Graphics file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import a Portable Network Graphics file

To export a Portable Network Graphics file


To import a Portable Network Graphics file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Portable Network Graphics from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
 Tip

•	You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose.

Related Topics

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

To export a Portable Network Graphics file


To export a Portable Network Graphics file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Portable Network Graphics from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, specify any options.

7	In the PNG export dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparency area:

•	None [image] lets you specify that you do not want any colors to be transparent when viewed in a Web browser

•	Image color [image] lets you make the color you click on the Color Palette transparent

 Tips

•	To display the image in the Web browser gradually so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading, enable the Interlace image check box.

•	You can specify the transparent color by typing values in the Index boxes or by using the Eyedropper tool to click a color in the original image window.

Related Topics

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

To import a Portable Network Graphics file


Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

The Adobe Photoshop (PSD) file format is the native bitmap file format for Adobe Photoshop.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To import an Adobe Photoshop file

To export an Adobe Photoshop file


To import an Adobe Photoshop file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Photoshop from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
Related Topics

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

To export an Adobe Photoshop file


To export an Adobe Photoshop file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Adobe Photoshop from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

 Notes

•	You can export Corel PHOTO-PAINT objects as layers in the Adobe Photoshop file format.

•	You can export to an image without a background.

Related Topics

Adobe Photoshop (PSD)

To import an Adobe Photoshop file


Painter (RIF)

Importing a Painter (RIF) file retains all the information of a project, such as floating objects, making Painter files much larger than GIF or JPEG files. Painter files can be opened for editing, resizing, and adjusting floaters and shapes and can be compressed using a lossless compression method.

Related Topics

To import a Painter file


To import a Painter file

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose RIFF - Painter 5/6 from the Files of type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Painter 5/6 from the Show list box.

4	Click the filename.

5	Click Import.

6	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Resample a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To resample a graphic while importing."
Crop a graphic while importing	For more information, see "To crop a graphic while importing."
Related Topics

Painter (RIF)


Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)

Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) is a graphics file format that allows designers to put the power of vector graphics to work on the Web. Scalable Vector Graphics are described in Extensible Markup Language (XML). Scalable Vector Graphics are vector graphic images, which can provide superior detail and faster download times than bitmaps. Compressed Scalable Vector Graphics files have an .svgz filename extension.

You can choose to embed all fonts in an Scalable Vector Graphics file if you want to have full editing capabilities, or you can embed the fonts used and common English or common Roman fonts. You can also specify from 1 to 256 the number of steps inside the fountain fill you want to export.

Reference information can be added to a drawing and retained in an exported Scalable Vector Graphics object or file. You can information to a drawing so that the information appears in the file's XML tags. These tags are derived from the data field names each of which is formatted as general text, data and time, linear and angular dimensions, or numbers. For example, you can name individual objects in the drawing and add comments for each of these objects. The name and comments for each object display in the tags of the exported Scalable Vector Graphics file. Similarly, you can preserve CorelDRAW page property information in an Scalable Vector Graphics file, where the data field categories are maintained as inline tags in the Scalable Vector Graphics file. You can also rename the default author name, classification, description, and keywords categories.

To import a Scalable Vector Graphics file

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a Scalable Vector Graphics file

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file (Windows)


To export a Scalable Vector Graphics file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose SVG - Scalable vector graphics or SVGZ - Compressed SVG from the Save as type list box (Windows) or the Format list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Export text area, enable one of the following options:

•	As text [image] lets you export text as editable characters

•	As curves [image] lets you export text as curves

7	In the CSS options area, enable one of the following options:

•	CSS data embedded in internal style sheet [image] lets you embed the style sheet in the Scalable Vector Graphics file by using the STYLE element

•	Presentation attributes [image] lets you export the attributes as they appear in the original file

•	External CSS file [image] creates an external cascading style sheet file and links it to the Scalable Vector Graphics file

You can also
Embed a font	Enable the Embed font in file check box.
Give an embedded font priority over the default browser font	Enable the Give embedded font priority check box. Choose which fonts you want to embed from the Character subsetting list box.
Set the drawing precision	From the Drawing precision list box, select the drawing precision defined as a number of units per inch.
Set the number of fountain fill steps to export	From the Fountain steps box, type number of fill levels.
Export a bitmap to the JPEG, GIF, or PNG file format	Choose a bitmap format from the Bitmap export type list box.
 Notes

•	You should embed fonts when you require the display of a specific font that the users may not have installed on their computers.

•	As the number of fonts or fountain fill steps increases, so does the size of the file.

Related Topics

Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file (Windows)


To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object

1	Select an object using the Pick tool.

2	Click Tools [image] Object data manager.

3	In the Field/value list, click a data field name.

4	Type the information in the text box.

You can also
Rename a data field	Click the right-arrow button and Field editor. Choose the name of the data field and type a new name.
Add a data field	Click the right-arrow button and Field editor. Click the Create new field button and type the name of the new field.
Change the data field format	Click the right-arrow button and Field editor. Click a field name and the Change button. Enable a field type option.
 Note

•	Fields containing no values are ignored when a file is exported to Scalable Vector Graphics.

Related Topics

Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)

To export a Scalable Vector Graphics file

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file (Windows)


To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file (Windows)

1	Click Window [image] Dockers [image] Properties.

2	Click the Page tab.

3	Type information in one or more of the following:

•	Page title box

•	Content boxes in the Page information area

You can also
Rename the data field categories	Click any of the Name data fields and type a new name.
 Notes

•	For the Page tab to appear, you must not have any objects selected.

•	Any information in the HTML file box will not be retained in the Scalable Vector Graphics file.

•	A valid Scalable Vector Graphics file must contain unique field names and no spaces or special characters.

Related Topics

Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)

To export a Scalable Vector Graphics file

To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object


Macromedia Flash (SWF)

Macromedia Flash is a file format for creating and displaying vector-based images and animation. Macromedia Flash files are extremely compact and high quality, making them ideal for use on the Web.

Before you save a file to the Macromedia Flash file format, you can determine if there are potential export problems. You can check the current file and display a summary of errors, possible problems, and a suggestion for resolving the issue. To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Internet, you have to create a HTML file that activates the Macromedia Flash file and specifies browser settings. CorelDRAW lets you generate the required HTML document automatically.

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a Macromedia Flash file

To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file

To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Web


To export a Macromedia Flash file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose SWF-Macromedia Flash from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Macromedia Flash from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Flash export dialog box, choose values from any of the following list boxes:

•	JPG compression [image] lets you determine the amount of JPEG file compression

•	Resolution [image] lets you set the resolution of the image

•	Smoothing [image] lets you tone down differences between adjacent pixels

7	Enable one of the following options in the Bounding box size area:

•	Page [image] lets you apply the bounding box to the page

•	Objects [image] lets you align the bounding box exactly to the objects in the file

8	Enable any of the following check boxes in the Optimization area:

•	Convert dashed outlines [image] converts dashed outlines to solid lines

•	Rounded caps and corners [image] rounds the corners and endpoints of lines and curves

•	Use default fountain steps [image] lets you use default fountain steps for fountain fills

You can also
Prevent a Macromedia Flash file from being loaded into the Macromedia Flash editor.	Enable the File Protection from import check box.
Export sounds	Enable the Use sound behaviors check box and choose a value for the sound compression from the Compression list box below the Use sound behaviors check box.
 Note

•	The more you compress a sound, the smaller the size and the lower the sound quality.

 Tips

•	You can save the settings in the Flash export dialog box to a preset by clicking Add preset and typing a name in the Setting name box.

•	To preview a Macromedia Flash file in a browser, you must have the Macromedia Flash Player plug-in installed on your computer.

Related Topics

Macromedia Flash (SWF)

To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file

To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Web


To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose SWF-Macromedia Flash from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Macromedia Flash from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Flash export dialog box, click the Issues tab.

7	Click an error or warning in the error list to see the details and suggestions for resolving the issue.

If you want to overlook certain issues, click Settings, and disable the check boxes that correspond to those issues.

 Note

•	The Issues tab heading indicates the number of issues. The icon on the tab heading changes depending on the severity of the issue(s) identified.

Related Topics

Macromedia Flash (SWF)

To export a Macromedia Flash file

To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Web


To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Web

1	Click File [image] Publish to the Web [image] Flash embedded in HTML.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

4	Click Export.

5	In the Flash export dialog box, click the HTML tab.

6	Choose a template from the Flash HTML template list box.

7	Type values in the Width and Height boxes to specify the dimensions of the HTML document.

If you want to set the movie dimensions relative to the browser window, type percentage values in the Width and Height boxes.

8	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Paused at start [image] pauses the movie until you initiate play

•	Loop [image] repeats the movie when it reaches the last frame

•	Display menu [image] displays a shortcut menu when you right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the movie

9	Choose any of the options available in the following list boxes:

•	Quality [image] lets you set the level of anti-aliasing

•	Window mode [image] lets you use the absolute positioning, transparent movie, and layering capabilities of Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later.

•	HTML alignment [image] lets you define the position of the movie within the browser window

•	Scale [image] determines how the movie is placed within the boundaries set in the Width and Height boxes

 Notes

•	You can type values in the Width and Height boxes only when you disable the Match movie check box. Match movie is the default and sets the dimensions of the HTML document to the size of the movie.

•	You should have the latest Macromedia Flash Player plug-in installed on your computer to preview a Macromedia Flash file file in a browser.

 Tips

•	You can also set the dimensions of the HTML document in pixels by typing values in the Width and Height boxes.

•	You can also choose a template by clicking Open.

•	You can preview a movie in a Web browser window by clicking Preview.

Related Topics

Macromedia Flash (SWF)

To export a Macromedia Flash file

To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file


Targa (TGA)

The Targa (TGA) graphics format is a format for describing bitmaps. It supports various compression systems and is capable of representing bitmaps ranging from black and white to RGB color.

To import a Targa file

To crop a graphic while importing

To resample an image while importing

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a Targa file


To export a Targa file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose TGA-Targa bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Targa bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

7	Click OK.

8	In the TGA export dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Normal

•	Enhanced

 Note

•	You can't save black-and-white images as Targa files.

 Tip

•	To compress an image while exporting, choose a compression type from the Type list box.

Related Topics

Targa (TGA)


TIFF

The Tagged Image File format (TIFF) is a raster format designed as a standard. Almost every graphics application can read and write TIFF files. There are many variations of TIFF, considering that TIFF supports six different encoding routines and three different image modes: black and white, grayscale, and color. Uncompressed TIFF images may be 1, 4, 8, 24 bits per pixel. TIFF images compressed using the LZW algorithm may be 4, 8, or 24 bits per pixel. TIFF files can save RGB, CMYK, and Lab color mode information, but not duotones.

To import a TIFF file

To crop a graphic while importing

To resample an image while importing

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a TIFF file


To export a TIFF file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose TIF - TIFF bitmap from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose TIFF bitmap from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings.

Related Topics

TIFF


WordPerfect Document (WPD)

The WordPerfect Document format (WPD) is the native file format for WordPerfect files. CorelDRAW supports WPD files from WordPerfect 4.2 to 10. When you import or export a WordPerfect file only text is transferred. Graphic elements are not imported to or exported from CorelDRAW. WordPerfect files for versions 4 and 5 have the file extensions .wp4 and .wp5.

To import a WordPerfect file

To export a WordPerfect file

Technical notes


WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)

The Corel WordPerfect Graphic file format (WPG) is primarily a vector graphic format, but it can store both bitmap and vector data. The WPG files may contain up to 256 colors chosen from a palette of more than one million colors.

To import a WordPerfect Graphic file

Technical notes

Related Topics

To export a WordPerfect Graphic file


To export a WordPerfect Graphic file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Choose WPG - Corel WordPerfect Graphic from the Save as type list box.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Corel WordPerfect Graphic from the Format list box.

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Click Export.

6	 Enable one of the following options in the Export colors area:

•	16 colors [image] lets you export the image as a 16 color image

•	256 colors [image] lets you export the image as a 256 color image

7	Enable one of the following options in the Export text as area:

•	Text [image] lets you export text as editable characters

•	Curves [image] lets you export text as curves

8	Enable one of the following options, in the Export file as area:

•	WordPerfect Version 1.0 [image] supported by WordPerfect 5.1 and earlier

•	WordPerfect Version 2.0 [image] supported by WordPerfect 6 and later

Related Topics

WordPerfect Graphic (WPG)


GIMP

XCF is the native GIMP format. It supports layers and other GIMP-specific information.

To import a GIMP file

Related Topics

To set general exporting options

To set advanced exporting options


To set general exporting options

To	Do the following
Specify an image header	In the EPS export dialog box, click the General page tab. In the Image header area, enable the Include header option. Choose a preview format from the Format list box. Choose a color depth for the preview from the Type list box. Type a value in the Resolution box.
Apply an ICC profile	In the EPS export dialog box, click the General tab. Enable the Apply ICC profile option in the Color management area. Enable one of the following options: • Composite printer profile • Separations printer profile
Select a color mode	In the EPS Export dialog box, click the General tab. Choose a color mode from the Send bitmaps as list box.
Specify how to export text	In the EPS export dialog box, click the General tab. Enable one of the following options in the Export text as area: • Curves [image] lets you export text as curves • Text [image] lets you export text as editable characters If you want to include PostScript font information with your file, enable the Include fonts check box.
Maintain OPI link	In the EPS export dialog box, click the General tab. Enable the Maintain OPI links check box to use low-resolution images as place holders for high-resolution images.
Auto-increase fountain steps	In the EPS export dialog box, click the General tab. Enable the Auto-increase fountain steps check box to automatically increase the number of steps used to create fountain fills.
Change the number of fountain steps	In the EPS Export dialog box, click the General tab. Type a value in the Fountain steps box.
 Note

•	If you output all objects as grayscale objects, no color profiles are available. If you output objects as colors, composite color profiles are available. If you output colors as CMYK, composite or separations color profiles are available.

 Tip

•	If you choose a bitmap format, you can make the background of the bitmap transparent by enabling the Transparent background check box in the Image header area.

Related Topics

GIMP

To set advanced exporting options


To set advanced exporting options

To	Do the following
Apply a bounding box	In the EPS export dialog box, click the Advanced tab. In the Bounding box area, enable any of the following options: • Objects [image] lets you align the bounding box exactly to the objects in the file • Page [image] lets you align the bounding box to the page • Bleed area [image] lets you set the amount the bleed extends beyond the edge of the area to be printed • Crop marks [image] lets you use crop marks as alignment aids when you trim the print output to its final size • Floating point numbers [image] lets you use numbers with decimals
Apply bitmap compression	In the EPS export dialog box, click the Advanced tab. In the Bitmap compression area, enable Use JPEG compression. Move the Quality factor slider to adjust the compression quality scale of the bitmap.
Apply a trapping option	In the EPS export dialog box, click the Advanced tab. In the Trapping area, enable any of the following options: • Preserve document overprint settings [image] lets you maintain current settings on objects • Always overprint black [image] lets you create a color trap by causing any objects that contain 95 percent or more black to overprint any underlying objects • Auto-spreading [image] lets you create a color trap by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as its fill and having it overprint underlying objects • Maximum [image] lets you specify the amount of spread that the Auto-Spreading option assigns to an object • Text Above [image] lets you specify the minimum font size to which Auto-Spreading is applied to If you want the outlines of all objects on the page to have the same width, enable the Fixed width check box.
Choose a compatibility option	In the EPS export dialog box, click the Advanced tab. Choose a PostScript level from the Compatibility list box.
 Note

•	The Use JPEG compression check box remains disabled until you choose a PostScript level that supports this feature.

Related Topics

GIMP

To set general exporting options


Other file formats

CorelDRAW also supports the following file formats:

Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB)	ANSI Text (TXT)	Windows Metafile Format (WMF)
CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL)	Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)	Corel ArtShow 5 (CPX)
Corel Presentations (SHW)	Corel R.A.V.E. (CLK)	Compressed(CDX)
CorelDRAW Template (CDT)	Frame Vector Metafile (FMV)	GEM File(GEM)
GEM Paint (IMG)	HPGL Plotter File (PLT)	Lotus PIC (PIC)
MacPaint Bitmap (MAC)	Macromedia FreeHand (FH)	MET Metafile (MET)
Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW)	OS/2 Bitmap (BMP)	Microsoft PowerPoint (PPT)
NAP Metafile (NAP)	Micrografx Picture Publisher 5 (PP5)	Pattern File(PAT)
Picture Publisher 4 (PP4)	TrueType Font (TTF)	Rich Text Format (RTF)
SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT)	XPixMap Image (XPM)	Visio (VSD)


Recommended formats for importing graphics from other applications

Application	Recommended import format
Adobe Illustrator	AI
AutoCAD	DXF, HPGL (PLT files)
Text	Clipboard and Paragraph text import
CorelDRAW	CDR, Clipboard
Deneba Canvas, Macromedia FreeHand and other vector packages	PCT, .AI
Micrografx Designer	DRW, AI


Recommended formats for exporting graphics

The following recommendations are based on the type of printer you are using and a page layout or desktop publishing program that doesn't support graphics editing capabilities. If you have a PostScript printer and the desktop publishing program supports PostScript, use the Encapsulated PostScript file format. Otherwise, use the format shown in the table.

Application	Recommended format for PostScript printers	Recommended format for Non-PostScript printers
Adobe PageMaker	EPS	WMF
The following table contains recommended file formats for exporting to page layout and desktop publishing packages that have graphics editing capabilities:

Application	Recommended format
Adobe Illustrator	AI
AutoCAD	DXF
Macromedia FreeHand and other vector programs	PCT, AI
Micrografx Designer	CGM
The following table contains recommended file formats for exporting to graphics devices:

Device	Recommended format
Machines, plotters, and computer-driven cutters	HPGL or DXF outlines


Filling objects

You can add colored, patterned, textured, and other fills to the inside of objects. You can customize a fill and set it as a default, so that each object you draw has the same fill.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	applying uniform fills

•	applying fountain fills

•	applying pattern fills

•	applying texture fills

•	applying PostScript texture fills

•	applying mesh fills

•	working with fills


Applying uniform fills

You can apply a uniform fill to objects. Uniform fills are solid colors you can choose or create using color models and color palettes. For information about creating colors, see "Working with color."

Related Topics

To apply a uniform fill


To apply a uniform fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

3	Choose Uniform fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4	Specify the settings you want on the property bar, and press Enter.

 Tips

•	You can also fill a selected object by clicking a color on the color palette.

•	You can mix colors in a uniform fill by selecting a filled object, pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and clicking another color on the color palette.

Related Topics

Applying uniform fills


Applying fountain fills

A fountain fill is a smooth progression of two or more colors that adds depth to an object. There are four types of fountain fills: linear, radial, conical, and square. A linear fountain fill flows in a straight line across the object, a conical fountain fill creates the illusion of light hitting a cone, a radial fountain fill radiates from the center of the object, and a square fountain fill is dispersed in concentric squares from the center of the object.

You can apply preset fountain fills, two-color fountain fills, and custom fountain fills to objects. Custom fountain fills can contain two or more colors, which you can position anywhere in the fill's progression. After you create a custom fountain fill, you can save it as a preset.

When you apply a fountain fill, you can specify attributes for the fill type you choose; for example, the direction of a fill's color blend, the fill's angle, center point, midpoint, and edge pad. You can also adjust the print and display quality of the fountain fill by specifying the number of fountain steps. By default, the fountain step setting is locked so that the print quality of the fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the print settings and the display quality is determined by the default value you set. However, you can unlock the fountain steps setting when you apply a fountain fill and specify a value that applies to both the print and view quality of the fill. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see "Fine-tuning print jobs."

Related Topics

To apply a preset fountain fill

To apply a two-color fountain fill

To apply a custom fountain fill

To change the fountain fill print and display quality

To set the display quality for fountain fills


To apply a preset fountain fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fountain fill dialog button.

3	Choose a fill from the Presets list box.

4	Specify the settings you want.

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a two-color fountain fill

To apply a custom fountain fill

To change the fountain fill print and display quality

To set the display quality for fountain fills


To apply a two-color fountain fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

3	Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4	Open the Fill dropdown picker on the property bar, and click a color.

5	Open the Last fill picker on the property bar, and click a color.

6	Specify the settings you want.

 Tips

•	You can mix colors in a two-color fountain fill by selecting one of the interactive vector handles, pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and clicking a color on the color palette.

•	You can add a color to a fountain fill by dragging a color from the color palette to an object's interactive vector handle.

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

To apply a custom fountain fill

To change the fountain fill print and display quality

To set the display quality for fountain fills


To apply a custom fountain fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fountain fill dialog button.

3	Choose a fountain fill from the Type list box on the property bar.

4	Enable the Custom option.

5	Click the box at one end of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette.

6	Click the box at the opposite end of the area just above the color band, and click a color.

7	Specify the attributes you want.

You can also
Add an intermediate color	Double-click between the two ends of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette.
Change a color	Click the vector just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette.
Delete a color	Double-click the vector just above the color you want to delete.
Change the position of a color	Drag the vector just above the color to a new location.
Save the fill as a preset	Type a name in the Presets box, and click the Add preset button.
 Tip

•	You can also create a custom fountain fill by dragging colors from the color palette in the drawing window onto the object's interactive vector handles.

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

To apply a two-color fountain fill

To change the fountain fill print and display quality

To set the display quality for fountain fills


To change the fountain fill print and display quality

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

3	Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4	Click the Fountain step lock/unlock button on the property bar, type a value in the Fountain step box, and press Enter.

 Note

•	When the Fountain step box is locked, the number of steps in the printed fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the Print dialog box. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see "Fine-tuning print jobs."

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

To apply a two-color fountain fill

To apply a custom fountain fill

To set the display quality for fountain fills


To set the display quality for fountain fills

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Display.

3	Type a value in the Preview fountain steps box.

Related Topics

Applying fountain fills

To apply a preset fountain fill

To apply a two-color fountain fill

To apply a custom fountain fill

To change the fountain fill print and display quality


Applying pattern fills

You can fill objects with two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills. A two-color pattern fill is composed of only the two colors that you choose. A full-color pattern fill is a more complex vector graphic that can be composed of lines and fills. A bitmap pattern fill is a bitmap image whose complexity is determined by its size, image resolution, and bit depth.

CorelDRAW provides preset pattern fills that you can apply to objects; however, you can also create your own pattern fills. For example, you can create pattern fills from objects that you draw or images that you import.

You can change the tile size of pattern fills. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first pattern, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill.

You can choose how the pattern fill appears by specifying whether to mirror the fill so that alternating tiles are the reflections of one another. If you want a pattern fill to change according to actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you want it to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a pattern that transforms, the pattern becomes larger instead of increasing the number of tiles.

Related Topics

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To apply a two-color pattern fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

3	Choose Two color pattern from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4	Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern.

5	Open the Front color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Back color picker, and click a color.

 Tips

•	You can also mix colors in a two-color pattern fill by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and clicking a color on the color palette.

•	You can mix a color with only one of the colors in the fill by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and dragging a color to the interactive handle.

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

3	Choose one of the following from the Fill type list box on the property bar:

•	Full-color pattern

•	Bitmap pattern

4	Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern.

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To create a two-color pattern fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Pattern fill dialog button.

3	Enable the 2-color option.

4	Open the following color pickers, and click a color:

•	Front [image] to choose a foreground color

•	Back [image] to choose a background color

5	Click Create.

6	In the Two-color pattern editor dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Bitmap size area:

•	16 X 16 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 16 x 16 squares

•	32 X 32 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 32 x 32 squares

•	64 X 64 [image] changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 64 x 64 squares

7	In the Pen size area, enable one of the following options:

•	1 X 1 [image] changes the pen size to a 1-grid square

•	2 X 2 [image] changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square

•	4 X 4 [image] changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square

•	8 X 8 [image] changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square

8	Click in the grid to enable a square. If you want to disable a square, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the square.

Squares that are enabled form the foreground, and squares that are disabled form the background.

 Tip

•	You can also create a foreground pattern by dragging in the grid.

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

1	Click Tools [image] Create [image] Pattern.

2	Enable the Two-color option.

3	In the Resolution area, enable one of the following options:

•	Low [image] creates a low-resolution, two-color pattern

•	Medium [image] creates a medium-resolution, two-color pattern

•	High [image] creates a high-resolution, two-color pattern

4	Click OK.

5	Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern.

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To create a full-color pattern from an image

1	Click Tools [image] Create [image] Pattern.

2	Enable the Full color option.

3	Click OK.

4	Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern.

5	In the Create pattern dialog box, click OK.

6	Type a filename for the pattern in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To create a pattern fill from an imported image

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Pattern fill dialog button.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	2-color

•	Full-color

•	Bitmap

4	Click Load.

5	In the Import dialog box, locate the image you want to use, and double-click the filename.

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To change the size of pattern tiles


To change the size of pattern tiles

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Pattern fill dialog button.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	2-color

•	Full-color

•	Bitmap

4	Type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	Width [image] lets you change the width of a pattern tile

•	Height [image] lets you change the height of a pattern tile

You can also
Set the tile origin of a pattern fill	Type values in the X and Y boxes in the Origin area.
Offset the tile origin of a pattern fill	Enable the Row or Column option, and type a value in the % of tile size box.
Rotate a pattern fill	Type a value in the Rotate box.
Skew a pattern fill	Type a value in the Skew box.
Mirror a pattern fill	Enable the Mirror fill check box.
Transform a pattern fill with the object	Enable the Transform fill with object check box.
 Tips

•	You can also change the size of pattern tiles by opening the Interactive fill flyout, clicking the Interactive fill tool, selecting an object, and clicking the Small tile for pattern, Medium tile for pattern, or Large tile for pattern button on the property bar.

•	You can skew or rotate tiles by opening the Interactive fill flyout, clicking the Interactive fill tool, selecting an object, and dragging the skewing or rotation handles to change the appearance of the pattern.

Related Topics

Applying pattern fills

To apply a two-color pattern fill

To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill

To create a two-color pattern fill from an image

To create a full-color pattern from an image

To create a pattern fill from an imported image


Applying texture fills

A texture fill is a randomly generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. CorelDRAW provides preset textures, and each texture has a set of options that you can change. You can use colors from any color model or palette to customize texture fills. Texture fills can hold only RGB colors, however, other color models and palettes can be used as reference to select colors. For information about color models, see "Understanding color models."

You can change the tile size of texture fills. Increasing the resolution of a texture tile increases the accuracy of the fill. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first tile, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill.

You can rotate, skew, adjust the tile size, and change the center of the texture to create a custom fill.

If you want a texture fill to change according to the actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you want it to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a texture that transforms, the texture becomes larger instead of increasing the number of tiles.

Texture fills are powerful features that can enhance a drawing. However, they also increase the size of a file and the time it takes to print, so you may want to use them in moderation.

Related Topics

To apply a texture fill


To apply a texture fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Texture fill dialog button.

3	Choose a texture library from the Texture library list box.

4	Choose a texture from the Texture list.

You can also
Create a custom texture fill	Specify the settings you want in the Style name area.
Change the size of texture tiles	Click Tiling, and type values in the Width and Height boxes.
Set the tile origin of a texture fill	Click Tiling, and type values in the X and Y boxes in the Origin area.
Offset the tile origin of a texture fill	Click Tiling, and enable the Row or Column option. Type an amount of offset in the % of tile size box.
Rotate a texture fill	Click Tiling, and type a value in the Rotate box.
Skew a texture fill	Click Tiling, and type a value in the Skew box.
Mirror a texture fill	Click Tiling, and enable the Mirror fill check box.
 Note

•	You can modify the texture you choose from the texture library and save it to another library, but you cannot save textures to or overwrite textures in the texture library.

 Tip

•	You can save a custom texture fill by clicking the plus sign (+) in the Texture fill dialog box, and typing a name in the Texture name box.

Related Topics

Applying texture fills


Applying PostScript texture fills

You can apply PostScript texture fills to objects. A PostScript texture fill is created using the PostScript language. Some textures are very complex, and large objects that contain PostScript texture fills may take time to print or to update on the screen. Depending on the view mode you are using, the letters "PS" may display rather than the fill. For more information about displaying PostScript fills, see "Working with views."

When you apply a PostScript texture fill, you can change several parameters, such as the size, line width, and the amount of gray that appears in the texture's foreground and background.

Related Topics

To apply a PostScript texture fill


To apply a PostScript texture fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive fill tool.

3	Choose PostScript fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar.

4	Choose a PostScript fill from the PostScript fill textures list box.

If you want to change the fill's parameters, click the Edit fill button on the property bar, and specify the settings you want.

Related Topics

Applying PostScript texture fills


Applying mesh fills

When you fill an object with a mesh fill, you can create unique effects. For example, you can create smooth color transitions in any direction without having to create blends or contours.

When you apply a mesh fill, you specify the number of columns and rows in the grid, and you specify the grid's intersecting points.

After you have created a mesh object, you can edit the mesh fill grid by adding and removing nodes or intersections. You can also remove the mesh.

A mesh fill can be applied only to closed objects or a single path. If you want to apply a mesh fill to a complex object, you must first create a mesh-filled object and combine it with the complex object to form a Powerclip object. For more information about working with PowerClip objects, see "Creating PowerClip objects."

You can add color to a patch of a mesh fill and to the individual intersection nodes. You can also choose to mix colors for a more blended appearance.

Related Topics

To apply a mesh fill to an object

To add color to a patch in a mesh fill


To apply a mesh fill to an object

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive mesh fill tool.

3	Type the number of columns in the top portion of the Grid size box on the property bar.

4	Type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the Grid size box on the property bar, and press Enter.

5	Adjust the grid nodes on the object.

You can also
Add an intersection	Click once within a grid, and click the Add intersection button on the property bar.
Add a node	Hold down Shift, and double-click where you want to add the node.
Remove a node or an intersection	Click a node, and click the Delete node(s) button on the property bar.
Shape the mesh fill	Drag a node to a new location.
Remove the mesh fill	Click the Clear mesh button on the property bar.
 Note

•	If the mesh object contains color, adjusting the intersection nodes of the mesh affects how the colors blend together.

 Tips

•	You can also marquee select or freehand marquee select nodes to shape an entire area of the mesh.

•	You can add an intersection by double-clicking in a space, or you can add a single line by double-clicking a line.

Related Topics

Applying mesh fills

To add color to a patch in a mesh fill


To add color to a patch in a mesh fill

1	Select a mesh-filled object.

2	Open the Interactive fill flyout, and click the Interactive mesh fill tool.

3	Drag a color from the color palette to a patch in the object.

You can also
Color an intersection node in a mesh fill	Click an intersection node, and click a color on the color palette.
Mix a color in a mesh fill	Select part of the mesh, press Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) , and click a color on the color palette.
 Tips

•	You can also drag a color from the color palette to an intersection node.

•	You can also freehand marquee select nodes to apply a color to an entire area of the mesh.

Related Topics

Applying mesh fills

To apply a mesh fill to an object


Working with fills

There are a number of tasks that are common to all types of fills. You can choose a default fill color so that every object you add to a drawing has the same fill. You can also remove any fill, copy it to another object, or use it to fill an area surrounded by an open curve.

Related Topics

To choose a default fill color

To remove a fill

To copy a fill to another object

To show fills in open curves


To choose a default fill color

1	Click a blank area on the drawing page to deselect all objects.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog.

3	In the Uniform fill dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Graphic [image] applies the default fill color to shapes you draw

•	Artistic text [image] applies the default fill color to artistic text you add

•	Paragraph text [image] applies the default fill color to paragraph text you add

4	Specify any fill settings.

Related Topics

Working with fills

To remove a fill

To copy a fill to another object

To show fills in open curves


To remove a fill

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the No fill button.

Related Topics

Working with fills

To choose a default fill color

To copy a fill to another object

To show fills in open curves


To copy a fill to another object

1	Open the Eyedropper flyout, and click the Eyedropper tool.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Fill/outline [image] lets you choose the color of the object's fill or outline

•	1X1 [image] lets you choose the average color in a 1X1 pixel area of the object

•	3X3 [image] lets you choose the average color in a 3X3 pixel area of the object

•	5X5 [image] lets you choose the average color in a 5X5 pixel area of the object

•	Selection [image] lets you choose the average color in marquee selected areas of the object

3	Click the object whose fill you want to copy.

4	Open the Eyedropper flyout, and click the Paintbucket tool.

5	Click the object to which you want to apply the fill.

 Note

•	Fills you copy may not match the original fill. The closest equivalent RGB color is applied.

Related Topics

Working with fills

To choose a default fill color

To remove a fill

To show fills in open curves


To show fills in open curves

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click General.

3	Enable the Fill open curves check box.

Related Topics

Working with fills

To choose a default fill color

To remove a fill

To copy a fill to another object


Managing fonts

CorelDRAW has several features that allow you to manage fonts.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	substituting unavailable fonts

•	embedding fonts

•	using Font Reserve (Mac OS)

•	using Font Navigator (Windows)


Substituting unavailable fonts

You can use PANOSE font matching to access a list of fonts that can be used as substitutes for fonts used in a drawing but not installed on your computer.

You can set font matching options. You can use font matching in text only, in both text and text styles, or you can turn off font matching.

With font matching, you can accept the default substitute font, or you can choose another font to substitute for the missing font. You can apply the substitution temporarily or permanently to the active drawing.

You can build a list of exceptions to font substitutions. Exceptions override default font substitutions. You can also specify font equivalents for the Windows and Macintosh platforms. This is useful when sharing drawings across the two platforms, because sometimes the same font has a different spelling for its name on each platform.

Related Topics

To set font matching options

To substitute a missing font

To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions

To match Windows and Macintosh fonts


To set font matching options

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.

3	Click PANOSE font matching.

4	In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Never use font matching [image] applies default font substitutions for both text in the document and text styles

•	Use font matching for text [image] lets you select font substitutions for text in the document and applies default font substitutions for text styles

•	Use font matching for text and styles [image] lets you select font substitutions for both text in the document and text styles

Related Topics

Substituting unavailable fonts

To substitute a missing font

To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions

To match Windows and Macintosh fonts


To substitute a missing font

1	Open a drawing.

2	In the Font matching results dialog box, choose a missing font.

If you want to override the default substitution, choose a font from the bottom list box.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Temporary [image] replaces the missing font with the substitution, but only in the current session of the drawing.

•	Permanent [image] permanently makes the font substitution in the document. When you save the file and reopen it, the new font automatically displays.

 Note

•	In order for the Font matching results dialog box to display, the drawing that you open must contain fonts that aren't installed on your computer.

Related Topics

Substituting unavailable fonts

To set font matching options

To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions

To match Windows and Macintosh fonts


To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences

2	In the list of categories, click Text, and click Fonts.

3	Click PANOSE font matching.

4	In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, click Exceptions.

5	In the PANOSE font matching exceptions dialog box, click Add.

6	In the Add matching exception dialog box, type the name of the font you want to replace in the Missing font box.

7	Choose a font that is installed on your computer from the Substituted font list.

Related Topics

Substituting unavailable fonts

To set font matching options

To substitute a missing font

To match Windows and Macintosh fonts


To match Windows and Macintosh fonts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts.

3	Click PANOSE font matching.

4	In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, click Spellings.

5	Click Add.

6	Choose a Windows font name from the Windows name list box.

7	Type the Macintosh spelling for the font in the Macintosh name list box.

Related Topics

Substituting unavailable fonts

To set font matching options

To substitute a missing font

To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions


Embedding fonts

You can choose to embed fonts in a drawing. Embedding fonts ensures that all fonts used in a drawing are available when the drawing is opened on another computer. When fonts are embedded, font substitution is not required, and a drawing displays and prints the same way on all computers. For more information about font substitution, see "Substituting unavailable fonts."

Related Topics

To embed fonts in a file


To embed fonts in a file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Enable the Embed fonts using TrueDoc check box.

3	Click Save.

Related Topics

Embedding fonts


Using Font Navigator (Windows)

Bitstream Font Navigator is a font management system included with your application. Font Navigator lets you store up to 2000 fonts in a database (or "catalog"). You can access fonts quickly, organize them, and preview them before using them.

See the Font Navigator documentation for information about installing and using Font Navigator.


Using Font Reserve (Mac OS)

Bitstream Font Reserve is a font management system included with your application. Font Reserve lets you store up to 2000 fonts in a database (or "catalog"). You can access fonts quickly, organize them, and preview them before using them.

See the Font Reserve documentation for information about installing and using Font Reserve.


Importing and exporting files

Your application provides filters that convert files from one format to another when you import or export files.

In this section, you will learn about

•	importing files

•	exporting files


Importing files

Your application lets you import files created in other applications. For example, you can import a Portable Document Format (PDF), JPEG, or Adobe Illustrator (AI) file. You can import a file and place it in the active application window as an object. The imported file becomes part of the active file. While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to reduce the file size or crop it to eliminate unused areas of the photo. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact area and size of the image you want to import.

Related Topics

To import a file into an active drawing

To resample an image while importing

To crop an image while importing


To import a file into an active drawing

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the filename.

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Link bitmap externally [image] lets you link a bitmap externally instead of embedding it in a file

•	Combine multi-layer bitmap [image] automatically merges the layers within a bitmap

•	Extract embedded ICC profile [image] lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed

•	(Windows) Check for watermark [image] lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains, such as copyright

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] lets you use the filter's default settings without opening its dialog box

•	Maintain layers and pages [image] lets you maintain layers and pages when importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer

•	(Mac OS) Link to high resolution file for output using OPI [image] lets you insert a low-resolution version of a bitmap into a document, used in combination with an OPI server where the high resolution image resides

6	Click Import.

7	Click the drawing page.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Open Prepress Interface (OPI) is a method that positions high-resolution bitmaps on the printed page by using low-resolution replicas. A high-resolution version is kept on file and a low-resolution equivalent is created. The low-resolution image is imported into the current document and used for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps file size smaller and reduces the time needed to redraw the screen. When you send the file to the service bureau for final imaging to film, the high-resolution bitmap is positioned in place of the FPO image.

Tip

•	Multi-layered bitmaps can be imported by default.

Related Topics

Importing files

To resample an image while importing

To crop an image while importing


To resample an image while importing

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the image is stored.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the filename.

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Link bitmap externally [image] lets you link a bitmap externally instead of embedding it in a file

•	Combine multi-layer bitmap [image] automatically merges the layers within a bitmap

•	Extract embedded ICC profile [image] lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed

•	(Windows) Check for watermark [image] lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] lets you use the filter's default settings without opening its dialog box

•	Maintain layers and pages [image] lets you maintain layers and pages when importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer

•	(Mac OS) Link to high resolution file for output using OPI [image] lets you insert a low-resolution version of a bitmap into a document, used in combination with an OPI server where the high resolution image resides

6	Choose Resample from the list box, and click Import.

7	In the Resample image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Width [image] specifies the width of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original width

•	Height [image] specifies the height of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original height

8	In the Resolution area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi)

•	Vertical [image] lets you specify the vertical resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi)

9	Click the drawing page.

You can also	Do the following
Maintain the width-to-height ratio of the image	Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box.
Change the units of measurement	Choose a unit type from the Units list box.
Maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values automatically	Enable the Identical values check box.
 Notes

•	If a dialog box for the import format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see "File formats."

•	You cannot increase the resolution of a file when importing.

•	(Mac OS) Open Prepress Interface (OPI) is a method that positions high-resolution bitmaps on the printed page by using low-resolution replicas. A high-resolution version is kept on file and a low-resolution equivalent is created. The low-resolution image is imported into the current document and used for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps file size smaller and reduces the time needed to redraw the screen. When you send the file to the service bureau for final imaging to film, the high-resolution bitmap is positioned in place of the FPO image.

Related Topics

Importing files

To import a file into an active drawing

To crop an image while importing


To crop an image while importing

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the image is stored.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the filename.

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Link bitmap externally [image] lets you link a bitmap externally instead of embedding it in a file

•	Combine multi-layer bitmap [image] automatically merges the layers within a bitmap

•	Extract embedded ICC profile [image] lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed

•	(Windows) Check for watermark [image] lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] lets you use the filter's default settings without opening its dialog box

•	Maintain layers and pages [image] lets you maintain layers and pages when importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer

•	(Mac OS) Link to high resolution file for output using OPI [image] lets you insert a low-resolution version of a bitmap into a document, used in combination with an OPI server where the high resolution image resides

6	Choose Crop from the list box, and click Import.

7	In the Crop image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Top [image] specifies the area to remove from the top of the graphic

•	Left [image] specifies the area to remove from the left edge of the graphic

•	Width [image] specifies the width of the graphic you want to keep

•	Height [image] specifies the height of the graphic you want to keep

8	Click the drawing page.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Open Prepress Interface (OPI) is a method that positions high-resolution bitmaps on the printed page by using low-resolution replicas. A high-resolution version is kept on file and a low-resolution equivalent is created. The low-resolution image is imported into the current document and used for position only (FPO). Working with FPO images keeps file size smaller and reduces the time needed to redraw the screen. When you send the file to the service bureau for final imaging to film, the high-resolution bitmap is positioned in place of the FPO image.

 Tips

•	You can also resize a graphic by dragging the selection box in the preview window.

•	You can change the units of measurement by choosing a unit type from the Units list box in the Crop image dialog box.

Related Topics

Importing files

To import a file into an active drawing

To resample an image while importing


Exporting files

You can export and save images to a variety of file formats that can be used in other applications. For example, you can export a file to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) or GIF format.

You can export a file to a selected file format. You can also export a file by saving the open file under a different name or to a different file format while leaving the open file in its existing format.

Related Topics

To export a file

To save a file to a different format


To export a file

1	Click File [image] Export.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	(Mac OS) Export this page only [image] exports the current page

•	Selected only [image] saves only the objects selected in the active drawing

•	Web_safe_filenames [image] replaces the white space in a filename with an underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based filenames.

•	Do not show filter dialog [image] suppresses dialog boxes that provide other options when exporting

6	Click Export.

You can also	Do the following
Compress a file on export	Choose a compression type from the Compression type list box.
Specify information about a file	Type any comments you want in the Notes box.
 Notes

•	Not all of the options or the compression types in the Export dialog are available for all file formats.

•	If a dialog box for the export format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see "File formats."

Related Topics

Exporting files

To save a file to a different format


To save a file to a different format

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

3	Choose a file format from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

5	Enable any of the following active check boxes:

•	Selected only [image] saves only the objects selected in the active drawing

•	Web_safe_filenames [image] replaces the white space in a filename with an underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based filenames.

•	Embed fonts using TrueDoc [image] lets you save fonts to the file using TrueDoc

•	(Windows) Save with embedded VBA project [image] lets you save macros you have created in the VBA editor with the file

6	Click Save.

You can also	Do the following
Specify information about a file	Type any comments you want in the Notes box.
 Notes

•	Not all of the options or the compression types in the Save drawing dialog are available for all file formats.

•	(Mac OS) The file extension for the file format you choose is appended to the filename automatically, but can be removed.

Related Topics

Exporting files

To export a file


Working with layers

You can work with layers in the CorelDRAW application to help you organize and arrange objects in complex illustrations.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating layers

•	changing layer properties and stacking order

•	moving and copying objects between layers

•	printing layers


Creating layers

All CorelDRAW drawings consist of stacked objects. The vertical order of these objects [image] the stacking order [image] contributes to the appearance of the drawing. You can organize these objects using invisible planes called layers.

Layering gives you added flexibility when organizing and editing the objects in complex drawings. You can divide a drawing into multiple layers, each containing a portion of the drawing's contents. For example, using layers can help you organize an architectural plan for a building. You can organize the building's various components (for example, plumbing, electrical, structural) by placing them on separate layers. You can display pages only and layers only.

You can also display selected objects. Hiding a layer lets you identify and edit the objects on other layers. You also reduce the time CorelDRAW needs to refresh your drawing when you edit it.

Each new file has one Master Page that contains and controls three default layers: the Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers. The Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers contain the grid, guidelines, and objects outside the borders of the drawing page. The Desktop layer lets you create drawings you might want to use later. You can specify settings for the grid and guidelines on the Master Page. You can specify settings, for example color, for each layer on the Master Page.

You can add one or more master layers to a Master Page. This layer contains information that you want to display on every page of a multipage document. For example, you can use a master layer to place a header, footer, or static background on every page.

Related Topics

To create a layer

To display or hide a layer

To display pages, layers, and objects

To delete a layer

To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page


To create a layer

To	Do the following
Create a layer	Click Tools [image] Object manager. Click the flyout button, and New layer.
Create a master layer	Click Tools [image] Object manager. Click the flyout button, and click New master layer.
 Notes

•	To use a layer in the drawing, you must first make the layer active. In the Object manager Docker window/palette, the active layer is highlighted in red. When you start a drawing, the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer.

•	When you create a master layer, it moves to the Master Page.

 Tips

•	You can also add a layer by clicking the New layer button in the Object manager Docker window/palette.

•	You can make any layer a master layer by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the layer name and clicking Master.

Related Topics

Creating layers

To display or hide a layer

To display pages, layers, and objects

To delete a layer

To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page


To display or hide a layer

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Click the Eye icon beside the layer name.

The layer is hidden when the Eye icon is grayed.

 Tip

•	You can also display or hide a layer by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the layer in the Object manager Docker window/palette and clicking Visible.

Related Topics

Creating layers

To create a layer

To display pages, layers, and objects

To delete a layer

To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page


To display pages, layers, and objects

To
Display pages	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Object manager. Click the flyout button and then Show pages.
Display layers	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Object manager. Click the Layer manager view button.
Display objects	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Object manager. Click the flyout button and then Expand to show selection.
Related Topics

Creating layers

To create a layer

To display or hide a layer

To delete a layer

To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page


To delete a layer

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Click the name of a layer.

3	Click the flyout button, and click Delete layer.

 Notes

•	When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on it. To keep an object on the layer you're deleting, move it to a different layer first.

•	You can delete any unlocked layer except the three default layers of the Master Page (Grid, Guides, or Desktop). For more information about locking and unlocking layers, see "To set a layer's editing properties".

Related Topics

Creating layers

To create a layer

To display or hide a layer

To display pages, layers, and objects

To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page


To specify settings for a layer on the Master Page

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the layer, and click Properties.

3	Change the settings and click OK.

Related Topics

Creating layers

To create a layer

To display or hide a layer

To display pages, layers, and objects

To delete a layer


Changing layer properties and stacking order

By default, each new layer has its editing, printing, and display properties enabled and its master layer property disabled; however, you can change these properties.

You can set a layer's editing properties to make a layer active, and allow the editing of all layers or the active layer only. When you are making changes to a drawing, you can lock a layer to prevent accidental changes to its objects. When you lock a layer you cannot select or edit it.

Renaming layers can be used to indicate their contents, position in the stacking order, and relationship with other layers.

You can change a layer's place in the stacking order.

Related Topics

To set a layer's editing properties

To rename a layer

To change the position of a layer in the stacking order


To set a layer's editing properties

To	Do the following
Make a layer active	Click Tools [image] Object manager. Click the name of a layer.
Allow editing of all layers	Click Tools [image] Object manager. Click the flyout button and click Edit across layers.
Allow editing of the active layer only	Click Tools [image] Object manager. Click the flyout button, and enable Edit across layers.
Lock or unlock a layer	Click Tools [image] Object manager. Click the Pencil icon beside the layer name.
 Notes

•	If you disable the Edit across layers button, you can work on the active layer and the Desktop layer only. You can't select or edit objects on inactive layers.

•	You can't "lock" or "unlock" the Grid layer.

 Tips

•	You can also allow editing of the active or of all layers by enabling or disabling the Edit across layers button in the Object manager Docker window/palette. Editing across layers is enabled when the button appears pressed.

•	You can also lock or unlock a layer by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the layer in the Object manager Docker window/palette and clicking Editable.

Related Topics

Changing layer properties and stacking order

To rename a layer

To change the position of a layer in the stacking order


To rename a layer

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the layer name, and click Rename.

 Tip

•	You can also rename a layer by clicking the layer name and typing a new name.

Related Topics

Changing layer properties and stacking order

To set a layer's editing properties

To change the position of a layer in the stacking order


To change the position of a layer in the stacking order

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	In the Layers list, drag a layer name tag to the new position.

Related Topics

Changing layer properties and stacking order

To set a layer's editing properties

To rename a layer


Moving and copying objects between layers

You can move or copy selected objects to new layers, including layers on the Master Page to another page and back.

Moving or copying an object to a layer below its current layer causes the object to become the top object on its new layer. Similarly, moving or copying an object to a layer above its current layer causes the object to become the bottom object.

Related Topics

To move or copy an object to another layer


To move or copy an object to another layer

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Click an object in the Object manager.

3	Click the flyout button, and click one of the following:

•	Move to layer

•	Copy to layer

4	Point to the layer to which you want to move or copy the object, and click.

 Note

•	When moving objects to or from a layer, the layers must be unlocked.

 Tip

•	You can move and copy an object to another layer by dragging an object to a new layer in the Object manager Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Moving and copying objects between layers


Printing layers

Enabling the print setting of a layer lets you print the layer and its contents. If you disable a layer's print setting, the layer and its contents won't appear when you print the drawing.

Related Topics

To enable or disable printing for a specific layer


To enable or disable printing for a specific layer

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Click the Printer icon beside the layer name.

 Note

•	Disabling the printing of a layer prevents its contents from displaying in full-screen previews. For information about full-screen previews, see "Previewing a drawing".

 Tip

•	You can also enable or disable the printing of a layer by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the layer in the Object manager Docker window/palette and clicking Printable.

Related Topics

Printing layers


Working with drawing pages and layout tools

The CorelDRAW application allows you to specify the size, orientation, unit of scale, and background of the drawing page. You can customize and display page grids and guidelines to help you organize objects and place them exactly where you want. For example, if you are designing a newsletter, you can set the dimensions of the pages and create guidelines for positioning columns and heading text. When you are laying out an advertisement, you can align graphics and advertisement copy along guidelines and arrange graphic elements within a grid. Rulers can help you position grids, guidelines, and objects along a scale using units of your choosing. You can add and delete pages as well.

Page layout settings and tools are fully customizable and can be used as defaults for other drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	specifying the page layout

•	choosing a page background

•	adding, renaming, and deleting pages

•	using the rulers

•	calibrating the rulers

•	setting up the grid

•	setting up guidelines

•	setting the drawing scale


Specifying the page layout

You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and layout style of the page.

There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size or creating your own. You can choose from many preset page sizes ranging from legal paper and envelopes to posters and Web pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs, you can create a custom page size by specifying a drawing's dimensions.

The orientation of the page can be landscape or portrait. With landscape orientation the drawing's width is greater than its height, and with portrait orientation the drawing's height is greater than its width. Any pages you add to a drawing project assume the current orientation; however, you can give single pages in a drawing project a different orientation. The options you choose when specifying the page layout can be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing.

Related Topics

To set the page size and orientation

To set the default page layout

To match the page settings to the printer settings


To set the page size and orientation

To	Do the following
Choose a preset page size	Click Layout [image] Page setup / Document setup, and choose a paper type from the Paper list box.
Specify a custom page size	Click Layout [image] Page setup / Document setup, and choose Custom from the Paper list box, and type values in the Width and Height boxes.
Set the page orientation	Click Layout [image] Page setup / Document setup, and enable the Landscape or the Portrait option.
Set the page orientation for an individual page in a multi-page document	Go to the page. Click the bottom half of the Set default or current page size and orientation button on the property bar, and click the Landscape or Portrait button.
 Tips

•	To apply page size and orientation settings to all pages in a drawing, select the top half of the Set default or current page size and orientation button, and disable the Resize current page only check box in the Size dialog box.

•	You can also specify the page size and orientation for individual pages by clicking View [image] Page sorter view, selecting the bottom half on the Set default or current page size and orientation button, clicking a page, and specifying your options using the buttons on the property bar.

Related Topics

Specifying the page layout

To set the default page layout

To match the page settings to the printer settings


To set the default page layout

1	Do one of the following:

(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, click Document.

3	Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box.

4	Enable the Page options check box.

 Note

•	The next new document is created with the page size and orientation options that were last specified with the Resize current page only check box disabled.

Related Topics

Specifying the page layout

To set the page size and orientation

To match the page settings to the printer settings


To match the page settings to the printer settings

1	Click Layout [image] Page setup / Document setup.

2	Enable the Normal paper option.

3	Click Set from printer.

Related Topics

Specifying the page layout

To set the page size and orientation

To set the default page layout


Choosing a page background

You can choose the color and type of background for a drawing. For example, you can use a solid color if you want a uniform background. If you want a more intricate or dynamic background, you can use a bitmap. Some examples of bitmaps include textured designs, photographs, and clipart.

When you choose a bitmap as the background, it is embedded in the drawing by default. This is the recommended option. However, you can also link the bitmap to the drawing so that if you later edit the source image, the change is automatically reflected in the drawing. If you send a drawing with a linked image to someone else, you must also send the linked image.

You can make a background bitmap printable and exportable, or you can save computer resources by exporting and printing a drawing without the background bitmap.

If you no longer need a background, you can remove it

Related Topics

To use a solid color as the background

To use a bitmap as the background

To remove a background


To use a solid color as the background

1	Click Layout [image] Page background.

2	Enable the Solid option.

3	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

Related Topics

Choosing a page background

To use a bitmap as the background

To remove a background


To use a bitmap as the background

1	Click Layout [image] Page background.

2	Enable the Bitmap option.

3	Click Browse.

4	Choose a file format from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS).

5	Locate the folder where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

7	Enable one of the following options:

•	Linked [image] links the bitmap to the drawing so that changes made to the source file are reflected in the bitmap background

•	Embedded [image] embeds the bitmap in the drawing so that changes made to the source file are not reflected in the bitmap background

If you want the background to be printed and exported with the drawing, enable the Print and export background check box.

8	Enable one of the following options:

•	Default size [image] lets you use the bitmap's current size

•	Custom size [image] lets you specify the dimensions of the bitmap. Type values in the H and V boxes.

If you want to specify nonproportional height and width values, disable the Maintain aspect ratio check box.

 Notes

•	If the bitmap is smaller than the drawing page, it is tiled across the drawing page. If it is larger than the drawing page, it is cropped to fit the drawing page.

•	A background bitmap is not an object and cannot be edited.

Related Topics

Choosing a page background

To use a solid color as the background

To remove a background


To remove a background

1	Click Layout [image] Page background.

2	Enable the No background option.

Related Topics

Choosing a page background

To use a solid color as the background

To use a bitmap as the background


Adding, renaming, and deleting pages

CorelDRAW lets you add a page to a drawing, rename it anytime, and delete a single page or an entire range of pages.

You can also change the order of pages after you have created a multi-page drawing.

Related Topics

To add a page

To rename a page

To delete a page

To change the order of pages


To add a page

1	Click Layout [image] Insert page.

2	Type the number of pages you want to add in the Insert pages box.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Before

•	After

If you want to insert before or after a page other than the current page, type the page number in the Page box.

 Tips

•	You can also add pages by clicking the Add page button on the Document window, if you're on the first or last page.

•	You can also choose where to add a page by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) a page tab in the Document window, and clicking Insert page after or Insert page before.

Related Topics

Adding, renaming, and deleting pages

To rename a page

To delete a page

To change the order of pages


To rename a page

1	Click Layout [image] Rename page.

2	Type the name of the page in the Page name box.

Related Topics

Adding, renaming, and deleting pages

To add a page

To delete a page

To change the order of pages


To delete a page

1	Click Layout [image] Delete page.

2	In the Delete page dialog box, type the number of the page you want to delete.

 Tip

•	You can delete a range of pages by enabling the Through to page check box and typing the number of the last page to delete in the Through to page box.

Related Topics

Adding, renaming, and deleting pages

To add a page

To rename a page

To change the order of pages


To change the order of pages

1	Click View [image] Page sorter view.

2	Drag a page to its new location.

You can also
Copy a page (Windows)	Right-click, drag the page to its new location, and choose Copy here from the list box.
Copy a page (Mac OS)	Hold down Command, and drag the page to its new location.
Return to normal view	Double-click a page.
 Tip

•	You can also change the order of pages by dragging the page tabs on the Document Navigator at the bottom of the drawing window.

Related Topics

Adding, renaming, and deleting pages

To add a page

To rename a page

To delete a page


Using the rulers

You can display rulers in the drawing window to help you draw, size, and align objects precisely. You can hide the rulers or move them to another position in the drawing window. You can also customize the ruler settings to suit your needs. For example, you can set the ruler origin, choose a unit of measure, and specify how many marks or ticks display between each full unit mark.

By default, CorelDRAW applies the same units used for the rulers to the duplicate and nudge distances. You can change the default so that you can specify different units for these and other settings. For information about nudging, see "Positioning objects."

Related Topics

To hide or display the rulers

To move a ruler

To customize ruler settings


To hide or display the rulers

•	Click View [image] Rulers.

A check mark beside the Rulers command indicates the rulers are displayed.

Related Topics

Using the rulers

To move a ruler

To customize ruler settings


To move a ruler

•	Hold down Shift, and drag a ruler to a new position in the drawing window.

Related Topics

Using the rulers

To hide or display the rulers

To customize ruler settings


To customize ruler settings

1	Click View [image] Grid and ruler setup.

2	In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.

3	In the Units area, choose a unit of measure from the Horizontal list box.

If you want to use a different unit of measure for the vertical ruler, disable the Same units for horizontal and vertical rulers check box, and choose a unit of measure from the Vertical list box.

4	In the Origin area, type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

5	Type a value in the Tick divisions box.

 Note

•	If you change the unit of measure for rulers, the unit of measure for nudge distances automatically changes as well, unless you first disable the Same units for duplicate distance, nudge and rulers check box in the Nudge area.

 Tips

•	You can access ruler settings directly by double-clicking a ruler.

•	You can specify nudge settings by typing values in the Nudge, Super nudge, and Micro nudge boxes in the Nudge area.

Related Topics

Using the rulers

To hide or display the rulers

To move a ruler


Calibrating the rulers

You can have one inch on your screen equal one inch of "real" distance. This lets you work using real-world distances as opposed to relative distances that depend on screen resolution. This tool is particularly useful when working with signs, or when drawing in 1:1 zoom mode.

Before you can perform this procedure, you must have a clear plastic ruler for comparing real-world and on-screen distances. This ruler should use the same unit of measurement you set for the CorelDRAW rulers. For information about ruler settings, see "Using the rulers."

Related Topics

To calibrate the rulers to match real-world distance


To calibrate the rulers to match real-world distance

1	Do one of the following:

(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, hand tool.

3	Click Calibrate rulers.

4	Place a clear plastic ruler under the on-screen horizontal ruler.

5	Click the Up or Down Arrow on the Horizontal box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler.

6	Place the ruler beside the on-screen vertical ruler.

7	Click the Up or Down Arrow button on the Vertical box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler.

Related Topics

Calibrating the rulers


Setting up the grid

The grid is a series of intersecting dashed lines or dots that you can use to precisely align and position objects in the drawing window. You can set the distance between the grid lines or dots by specifying the frequency or spacing. Frequency refers to the number of lines or dots that display between each horizontal and vertical unit. Spacing refers to the exact distance between each line or dot. High frequency values or low spacing values can help you align and position objects more precisely.

You can have objects snap to the grid so that when you move the objects, they jump between grid lines.

Related Topics

To display or hide the grid

To set the distance between the grid lines

To have objects snap to the grid


To display or hide the grid

•	Click View [image] Grid.

 Note

•	A check mark beside the Grid command indicates that the grid is displayed.

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To set the distance between the grid lines

To have objects snap to the grid


To set the distance between the grid lines

1	Click View [image] Grid and ruler setup.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Frequency [image] specifies grid spacing as the number of lines per unit of measure

•	Spacing [image] specifies grid spacing as the distance between each grid line

3	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Note

•	The unit of measure used for grid spacing is the same as that used for rulers. For information about ruler settings, see "To customize ruler settings."

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To display or hide the grid

To have objects snap to the grid


To have objects snap to the grid

1	Click View [image] Snap to grid.

2	Move the objects using the Pick tool.

Related Topics

Setting up the grid

To display or hide the grid

To set the distance between the grid lines


Setting up guidelines

Guidelines are lines that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object placement. There are three types of guidelines: horizontal, vertical, and slanted. By default, CorelDRAW displays guidelines you add to the drawing window, but you can hide them at any time.

You can add a guideline wherever you need one; however, you can also choose to add preset guidelines. There are two types of preset guidelines: Corel presets and user defined presets. Examples of Corel presets include guidelines that display at one-inch margins, and guidelines that display at newsletter column borders. User defined presets are guidelines whose location you specify. For example, you can add preset guidelines that display margins at a distance you specify, or that define a column layout or grid.

After you add a guideline, you can select it, move it, rotate it, lock it in place, or delete it.

You can have objects snap to the guidelines so that when an object is moved near a guideline, it can only be centered on the guideline or lined up on either side of the guideline.

Guidelines always use the unit of measure specified for rulers. For information about ruler settings, see "To customize ruler settings."

Related Topics

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

To add a slanted guideline

To add preset guidelines

To modify guidelines

To have objects snap to the guidelines


To display or hide the guidelines

•	Click View [image] Guidelines.

 Note

•	A check mark beside the Guidelines command indicates that the guidelines are displayed.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

To add a slanted guideline

To add preset guidelines

To modify guidelines

To have objects snap to the guidelines


To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

1	Click View [image] Guidelines setup.

2	In the list of categories, click one of the following:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

3	Specify the guideline settings you want.

4	Click Add.

 Tip

•	You can also add a guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler in the drawing window.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a slanted guideline

To add preset guidelines

To modify guidelines

To have objects snap to the guidelines


To add a slanted guideline

1	Click View [image] Guidelines setup.

2	In the Guidelines list of categories, click Guides.

3	From the Specify list box, choose one of the following:

•	2 points [image] lets you specify two points to be joined to create a guideline

•	Angle and 1 point [image] lets you specify one point and an angle. The guideline crosses through the point at the angle specified.

4	Choose a unit of measurement from the list box.

5	Specify the x and y coordinates and, if applicable, the angle.

6	Click Add.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

To add preset guidelines

To modify guidelines

To have objects snap to the guidelines


To add preset guidelines

1	Click View [image] Guidelines setup.

2	In the Document, Guidelines list of categories, click Presets.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Corel presets

•	User defined presets

4	Enable the check boxes beside each guideline setting you want.

If you enabled the User defined presets option, type values in the Margins, Columns or Grid boxes.

5	Click Apply presets.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

To add a slanted guideline

To modify guidelines

To have objects snap to the guidelines


To modify guidelines

To	Do the following
Select a single guideline	Click the guideline using the Pick tool.
Select all guidelines	Click Edit [image] Select all [image] Guidelines.
Move a guideline	Drag a guideline to a new position in the drawing window.
Rotate a guideline	Click a guideline twice using the Pick tool, and rotate it when skewing handles display.
Lock a guideline	Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and click Arrange [image] Lock object.
Unlock a guideline	Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and click Arrange [image] Unlock object.
Delete a guideline	Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and press Delete.
Delete a preset guideline	Click View [image] Guidelines setup, and click Presets in the list of categories. Disable the check box beside the preset guideline you want to delete.
 Tips

•	You can also lock or unlock a guideline by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the guideline, and then clicking Lock object or Unlock object.

•	You can access the guidelines setup directly by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) a ruler, and then clicking Guidelines setup.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

To add a slanted guideline

To add preset guidelines

To have objects snap to the guidelines


To have objects snap to the guidelines

1	Click View [image] Snap to guidelines.

2	Drag the object to the guideline.

If you want to snap the center of an object to a guideline, select the object and move it over the guideline until its center of rotation snaps to the guideline.

Related Topics

Setting up guidelines

To display or hide the guidelines

To add a horizontal or vertical guideline

To add a slanted guideline

To add preset guidelines

To modify guidelines


Setting the drawing scale

You can choose a preset or custom drawing scale to relate distances in a drawing to real-world distances. For example, you can specify that one inch in the drawing corresponds to one meter in reality. A preset drawing scale lets you set a typical scale, such as 1:2 or 1:10, while a custom drawing scale lets you set any distance on the page equal to a real-world distance. For example, you can set a more accurate, precise scale that includes decimal numbers, such as 4.5 to 10.6.

Drawing scales are particularly useful if you are creating a technical or architectural drawing with dimension lines. For information about dimension lines, see "Drawing flow and dimension lines."

Related Topics

To choose a preset drawing scale

To create a custom drawing scale


To choose a preset drawing scale

1	Click View [image] Grid and ruler setup.

2	In the list of categories, click Rulers.

3	Click Edit scale.

4	Choose a drawing scale from the Typical scales list box.

Related Topics

Setting the drawing scale

To create a custom drawing scale


To create a custom drawing scale

1	Click View [image] Grid and ruler setup.

2	In the list of categories, click Rulers.

3	Click Edit scale.

4	Choose Custom from the Typical scales list box.

5	Specify the settings you want.

 Notes

•	The Edit scale button does not display if the ruler's unit of measure is pixels.

•	If the drawing scale is set to anything other than 1:1, the vertical ruler's units will always be the same as the horizontal ruler units.

Related Topics

Setting the drawing scale

To choose a preset drawing scale


Using lenses with objects

Lenses contain creative effects that let you change their appearance without actually changing the object.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	applying lenses

•	editing lenses


Applying lenses

Lenses change how the object area beneath the lens appears, not the actual properties and attributes of the objects. You can apply lenses to any vector object, such as a rectangle, ellipse, closed path, or polygon. You can also change the appearance of artistic text and bitmaps. When you apply a lens over a vector object, the lens itself becomes a vector image. Likewise, if the lens is placed over a bitmap, the lens also becomes a bitmap.

After you apply a lens, you can copy it and use it with another object.

The following are the types of lenses you can apply to objects.

Lens	Description
Brighten	Lets you brighten and darken object areas and set the rate of the brightness and darkness
Color add	Lets you simulate a light model by shining three spotlights [image] red, blue, and green [image] on a black background. You can choose the color and the amount of color you want to add.
Color limit	Lets you view an object area with only black and the lens color showing through. For example, if you place a green color limit lens over a bitmap, all colors except green and black are filtered out in the lens area.
Custom color map	Lets you change all the colors of the object area beneath the lens to a color ranging between two colors you specify. You can choose the range's start and end colors and the progression between the two colors. The progression can follow a direct, forward, or reverse route through the color spectrum.
Fish eye	Lets you distort, magnify, or shrink the objects beneath the lens, according to the percentage value you specify
Heat map	Lets you create the effect of an infrared image by mimicking the heat levels of colors in object areas beneath the lens
Invert	Lets you change the colors beneath the lens to their complementary CMYK colors. Complementary colors are colors that are opposite one another on the color wheel.
Magnify	Lets you magnify an area on an object by an amount that you specify. The magnify lens overrides the original object's fill, making the object look transparent.
Tinted grayscale	Lets you change the colors of object areas beneath the lens to their grayscale equivalents. Tinted grayscale lenses are particularly effective for creating sepia-tone effects.
Transparency	Lets you make an object look like a piece of tinted film or colored glass
Wireframe	Lets you display the object area beneath the lens with the outline or fill color you choose. For example, if you set red for the outline and blue for the fill, all areas beneath the lens appear to have red outlines and blue fills.
Related Topics

To apply a lens

To copy a lens


To apply a lens

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] Lens.

3	Choose a lens type from the list box in the Lens Docker window/palette.

4	Specify the settings you want.

 Note

•	You cannot apply the lens effect directly to linked groups such as blended objects, contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, drop shadows, paragraph text or objects created with the Artistic media tool.

 Tips

•	You can preview the different types of lenses in real-time before auto-applying one to a drawing by clicking the Lock button and then choosing a lens and settings to preview. When you find the lens you want to use, click the Lock button again, and click Apply.

•	You can apply a lens to a linked group by selecting an unrelated object, applying a lens to that object, and dragging the object over the linked group.

Related Topics

Applying lenses

To copy a lens


To copy a lens

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] Copy effect [image] Lens from.

3	Click the object whose lens you want to copy.

Related Topics

Applying lenses

To apply a lens


Editing lenses

You can edit a lens to change how it affects the area beneath it. For example, you can change the viewpoint of a lens, indicated by an X in the drawing window, to display any part of a drawing. The viewpoint represents the center point of what is being viewed through the lens. You can position the lens anywhere in the drawing window, but it always shows the area around its viewpoint marker. For example, you can use the viewpoint marker on the Magnify lens to enlarge part of a map.

You can also display a lens only where it overlaps other objects or the background. As a result, the lens effect is not seen where the lens covers blank space (white space) in the drawing window.

Freezing the current view of a lens lets you move the lens without changing what's displayed through it. In addition, changes you make to the areas beneath the lens have no effect on the view.

Related Topics

To edit a lens


To edit a lens

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] Lens.

3	Enable the Viewpoint check box on the Lens Docker window/palette.

If you want to display a lens only where it covers other objects, enable the Remove face check box.

4	Click Edit to display the viewpoint marker.

5	Drag the viewpoint marker in the drawing window to a new location.

6	Click End.

If you want to freeze the current view of a lens, enable the Frozen check box.

7	Click Apply.

 Note

•	The Remove face check box is not available for Fish Eye and Magnify lenses.

Related Topics

Editing lenses


Changing the transparency of objects

You can apply a transparency to an object so that all objects behind it show through. The CorelDRAW application also lets you specify how the color of the transparent object combines with the color of the object beneath it.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	applying transparencies

•	applying merge modes


Applying transparencies

When you apply a transparency to an object, you make the objects beneath it partially visible. You can apply transparencies using the same kind of fills you apply to objects; that is, uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern. For more information about these fills, see "Filling objects."

By default, CorelDRAW applies all transparencies to the object's fill and outline; however, you can specify whether you want the transparency to apply only to the object's outline or fill.

You can also copy a transparency from one object to another.

When you position a transparency over an object, you can freeze it, making the view of the object move with the transparency.

Related Topics

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To copy a transparency to another object

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To apply a uniform transparency

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

3	On the property bar, choose Uniform from the Transparency type list box.

4	Click a color on the color palette.

5	Type a value in the Starting transparency box on the property bar, and press Enter.

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To copy a transparency to another object

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To apply a fountain transparency

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

3	On the property bar, choose one of the following fountain transparencies from the Transparency type list box:

•	Linear

•	Radial

•	Conical

•	Square

4	Reposition the interactive vector handles that display, or point to where you want the transparency to start on the object, and drag to where you want the transparency to end.

If you want to reset the transparency, press Esc before releasing the mouse button.

5	Type a value in the Transparency midpoint box on the property bar, and press Enter.

 Tip

•	You can create a custom fountain transparency by dragging colors, whose shades convert to grayscale, from the color palette onto the object's interactive vector handles.

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To copy a transparency to another object

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To apply a textured transparency

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

3	Choose Texture from the Transparency type list box on the property bar.

4	Choose a sample from the Texture library list box on the property bar.

5	Open the First transparency picker on the property bar and click a texture.

6	On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:

•	Starting transparency [image] lets you change the opacity of the starting color

•	Ending transparency [image] lets you change the opacity of the ending color

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To copy a transparency to another object

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To apply a pattern transparency

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

3	From the Transparency type list box on the property bar, choose one of the following:

•	Two-color pattern [image] a simple picture composed of "on" and "off" pixels. The only shades included in the picture are the two that you assign.

•	Full-color pattern [image] a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of color like bitmaps. These vector graphics are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and are easier to manipulate.

•	Bitmap pattern [image] a color picture composed of patterns of light and dark or differently colored pixels in a rectangular array.

4	Open the First transparency picker on the property bar and click a pattern.

5	On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:

•	Starting transparency

•	Ending transparency

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To copy a transparency to another object

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To specify the extent of a transparency

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

2	Select an object to which a transparency has been applied.

3	From the Apply transparency to list box on the property bar, choose one of the following:

•	Fill

•	Outline

•	All

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To copy a transparency to another object

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To copy a transparency to another object

1	Select an object to which you want to apply a transparency.

2	Click Effects [image] Copy effect [image] Lens from.

3	Using the horizontal cursor, select the object with the transparency you want to copy.

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To freeze the contents of a transparency


To freeze the contents of a transparency

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

2	Select an object to which a transparency has been applied.

3	Click the Freeze button on the property bar.

 Note

•	The view of the object beneath the transparency moves with it; however, the actual object remains unchanged.

Related Topics

Applying transparencies

To apply a uniform transparency

To apply a fountain transparency

To apply a textured transparency

To apply a pattern transparency

To specify the extent of a transparency

To copy a transparency to another object


Applying merge modes

You can apply a merge mode to a transparency to specify how the color of a transparency is combined with the color of the object behind it.

Merge mode	Description
Normal	Applies the transparency color on top of the base color
Add	Adds the values of the transparency color and the base color
Subtract	Adds the values of the transparency color and the base color together, and then subtracts 255
Difference	Subtracts the transparency color from the base color and multiplies by 255. If the transparency color value is 0, the result will always be 255.
Multiply	Multiplies the base color by the transparency color, and then divides by 255. This has a darkening effect, unless you are applying color to white. Multiplying black with any color results in black. Multiplying white with any color leaves the color unchanged.
Divide	Divides the base color by the transparency color, or conversely, divides the transparency color by the base color, depending on which color has the higher value
If lighter	Replaces any base color pixels that are a darker color with the transparency color. Base color pixels that are lighter than the transparency color are not affected.
If darker	Replaces any base color pixels that are a lighter color with the transparency color. Base color pixels that are darker than the transparency color are not affected.
Texturize	Converts the transparency color to grayscale, and then multiplies the grayscale value by the base color
Hue	Uses the hue of the transparency color, as well as the saturation and lightness of the base color. If you are adding color to a grayscale image, there will be no change because the colors are desaturated.
Saturation	Uses the lightness and hue of the base color and the saturation of the transparency color
Lightness	Uses the hue and saturation of the base color and the lightness of the transparency color
Invert	Uses the transparency color's complementary color. If a transparency color value is 127, there will be no change because the color value falls in the center of the color wheel.
Logical AND	Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula AND to these values
Logical OR	Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula OR to these values
Logical XOR	Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula XOR to these values
Red	Applies the transparency color to the red channel of RGB objects
Green	Applies the transparency color to the green channel of RGB objects
Blue	Applies the transparency color to the blue channel of RGB objects
Related Topics

To apply a merge mode


To apply a merge mode

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive transparency tool.

2	Select an object with a transparency.

3	Choose a merge mode from the Transparency operation list box on the property bar.

Related Topics

Applying merge modes


Object linking and embedding (Windows)

Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a method of exchanging information between applications. Using OLE, you can take selected objects or entire files from one application, called the source application, and place them into another application, called the destination application. Objects that are placed into an application using OLE are called OLE objects. You can freely move objects and files between applications as long as all the applications involved support OLE. CorelDRAW lets you create and edit OLE objects, as well as insert objects and files created in other applications.

Linking is useful when you want to use an object several times in the same file or in multiple files. A linked object remains connected to its source file; whereas an embedded object is not linked to its source file but is integrated into the new file. Embedding results in a larger file size but is useful when you want to include all objects in one file.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	inserting linked or embedded objects

•	editing linked or embedded objects


Inserting linked or embedded objects (Windows)

You can insert a linked or embedded object in CorelDRAW. A linked object remains connected to its source file; whereas an embedded object is not linked to its source file but is integrated into the new file. Linking is useful when you want to use an object several times in the same file or in multiple files. Embedding results in a larger file size, but is useful when you want to include all objects in one file. You can insert an embedded object or create an embedded object. You can also insert a linked or embedded object by copying it from the source application and pasting it to the destination application.

Related Topics

To insert a linked object (Windows)

To insert an embedded object (Windows)


To insert a linked object (Windows)

1	In the source application, select an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In CorelDRAW, click Edit [image] Paste special.

4	Enable the Paste link option.

 Note

•	The file from which you copy the object in the source application must be saved before you insert the object in CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Inserting linked or embedded objects (Windows)

To insert an embedded object (Windows)


To insert an embedded object (Windows)

1	Click Edit [image] Insert new object.

2	Enable the Create from file option.

3	Click the Browse button.

4	Click a filename.

 Tips

•	You can also create an embedded object by enabling the Create new option, and choosing the application in which you want to create the object from the Object type list box.

•	You can also insert an embedded object by selecting an object in the source application, and dragging it to the application window of CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Inserting linked or embedded objects (Windows)

To insert a linked object (Windows)


Editing linked or embedded objects (Windows)

You can edit a linked or embedded object. You can edit a linked object by editing its source file. Any changes you make to the source file are automatically applied to the linked object. You can also modify a linked object; for example, you can update a linked object, substitute the source file of a linked object for another, or break a link between a linked object and its source file.

Related Topics

To edit a linked or embedded object (Windows)

To modify a linked object (Windows)


To edit a linked or embedded object (Windows)

1	Double-click the linked or embedded object to start the source application.

2	Edit the object in the source application.

3	Save the changes in the source application.

4	Close the source application.

5	Return to the active application window to review the edits.

 Note

•	In most cases, you can edit OLE objects only in the source application. If you try to change an OLE object using CorelDRAW, note the following limitations. Depending on the source of the OLE object, you might not be able to rotate, skew, clone, trim, weld, intersect, use as symbols, or combine OLE objects. Also, you might not be able to apply any of the effects in the Effects menu to OLE objects, except for PowerClip objects. You can only size, move, copy OLE objects and place them into PowerClip containers.

 Tip

•	You can also edit linked or embedded objects by starting the source application and opening the file directly.

Related Topics

Editing linked or embedded objects (Windows)

To modify a linked object (Windows)


To modify a linked object (Windows)

1	Select a linked object using the Pick tool.

2	Click Edit [image] Links.

3	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Update now [image] updates the linked object to reflect changes made in the source file

•	Open source [image] opens the object in the source application

•	Change source [image] redirects the link to another file

•	Break link [image] disconnects the link so that the object is embedded in the file

Related Topics

Editing linked or embedded objects (Windows)

To edit a linked or embedded object (Windows)


AVI

Audio video interleaved format is a Microsoft multi-media format where audio and video elements are stored in alternating segments.


BMP (OS/2)

This type of bitmap file is designed for the OS/2 operating system.


CAL

CALS Raster (CAL) is a bitmap format used mainly for document storage by high-end CAD programs. It supports a monochrome (1-bit) color depth and is used as a data graphics exchange format for computer aided design and manufacturing, technical graphics, and image processing applications.


CDX

The CDX file format is a compressed CorelDRAW file.


CGM

Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) is a metafile format used for transferring vector graphics between drawing applications. It supports RGB color. CGM files can contain both vectors and bitmaps, but usually contain one graphic type or the other [image] rarely both.


CLK

The CLK file format is an animation file native to Corel R.A.V.E.


CPX

The CPX file format is a native file format of Corel ArtShow 5. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps.


DCS

The DCS file format, developed by QuarkXPress, is an extension of the standard encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file format. Generally, the DCS file format consists of five files. Four of the five files contain information about high-resolution color. This information is expressed in CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) format. The fifth file, considered the master file, contains a PICT preview of the DCS file.


EMF

Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) is the native internal file format of Windows 95 and Windows NT. It supports both bitmap and vector information and 24-bit RGB color. EMF is a metafile format used to import graphics from Windows applications.


FH

The FH format is the native vector file format for Macromedia Freehand. Corel graphics applications only support Macromedia FreeHand versions 7 and 8.


IMG

GEM Paint (IMG) is a bitmap format that is the native bitmapped file format of the GEM environment. IMG files support 1 and 4-bit paletted color. and are compressed using an RLE method. IMG was a common format in the early days of desktop publishing.


MAC

MacPaint (MAC) is a bitmap format that uses the file extensions MAC, PCT, PNT and PIX. It is the format used by the MacPaint program that was included with the Macintosh 128. It supports only 2 colors and a palette of patterns. It is used mainly by Macintosh graphics applications to store black-and-white graphics and clipart. The maximum size for MAC images is 720x576.


MCW

The MCW file format is a native format of Microsoft Word for Macintosh.


MIF

Maker Interchange Format (MIF) is an ANSI format for exchanging files between Adobe FrameMaker and other applications. When you import or export MIF files to or from CorelDRAW, only the formatted text is transferred. Any graphic elements in the file are not transferred.


PBM

Portable bitmap format (PBM) supports only monochrome bitmaps. It is supported by the PNM format.


PLT

The PLT file format, developed by Hewlett-Packard is vector-based. It is used in programs, such as AutoCAD, for printing drawings on plotters. Other Corel applications can interpret a SUBSET of the HPGL and HPGL/2 command set. A scaling factor of 1016 plotter units = 1 inch is used.


PGM

Portable Grayscale image (PGM) is a bitmap format that supports grayscale.


PNM

Portable Anymap (PNM) format is a bitmap format that supports PGM, PGM, or PPM.


PP4

The PP4 file format is a native file format for Micrographx Picture Publisher 4.


PP5

The PP5 file format is a native file format for Micrographx Picture Publisher 5.


PPM

Portable Pixel bitmap (PPM) is a bitmap format that supports full-color images.


PPT

The PPT file format is native to Microsoft PowerPoint.


PRN

PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import .PS, .PRN, and .EPS PostScript files.


PS

PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import .PS, .PRN, and .EPS PostScript files.


RTF

Rich Text Format (RTF) is a text format that stores plain text plus text formatting such as bold. When you import an RTF file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in your file they will not be imported to or exported from CorelDRAW.


SAM

The SAM file format is a native format of Ami Professional, a word processing application. When you import a SAM file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file, they will not be imported or exported.


SCT

The SCT file format is used for importing 32-bit color and grayscale SCITEX images. SCITEX bitmaps are created from high-end scanners. The bitmaps are then processed for output by film recorders or high-end page layout programs.


SHW

The SHW file format is a native format for Corel Presentations.


SVG

Scaleable Vector Graphics format (SVG) is used for vector graphics based on Extensible Markup Language (XML).


TTF

The TrueType Font (TTF) file format was created jointly by Apple Computer and Microsoft Corporation. It is the most common format for fonts used in both Macintosh and Windows operating systems. The TTF file format prints a font as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. True Type fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.


TXT

ANSI Text (TXT) is a vector format that stores ANSI characters. This format is able to store text information but not formatting information, such as the font type or size. When you import a TXT file to, or export it file from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file, they will not be imported or exported.


VSD

VSD is the Visio drawing format. It can contain bitmaps and vectors.


WK

The WK file format, developed by Lotus, is the native format for Lotus 1-2-3 files.


WMF

Windows Metafile Format (WMF), developed by Microsoft Corporation, stores both vector and bitmap information. It was developed as the internal file format for Microsoft Windows 3. It supports 24-bit RGB color and is supported by most Windows applications.


WPM

The WPM file format is a native format of Corel WordPerfect for Macintosh.


WQ

The WQ, WB file format is the native file format for Corel Quattro Pro.


WB

The WQ, WB file format is the native file format for Corel Quattro Pro.


WS*

The WS* file format is a native format of the word processing application, Wordstar version 3.3 to 6.0. When you import a WS* file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be imported or exported.


WSD

The WSD file format is a native format of the word processing application, Wordstar 7. When you import a WSD file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be imported or exported.


WSW

The WSW file format is a native format of the word processing application, Wordstar 2000. When you export a WSW file from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be exported to the WSW file.


XLS

The XLS file format, developed by Microsoft Corporation, is the native file format for Microsoft Excel.


XY

The XY file format is a native format of the word processing application, XY Write. When you import an XY file to, or export it from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If there are graphic elements in the file they will not be imported or exported.


PAT

The PAT file format is for a pattern file.


CDT

The CDT file format is for a CorelDRAW template file.


AIF

The AIF file format is a Macintosh AIFF sound file.


WAV

The WAV file format is for a Windows waveform file.


DRW

The DRW file format is for a Micrografx 2.x or 3.x file.


FMV

The FMV file format is for a Frame Vector Metafile.


GEM

The GEM file format is for a GEM file.


PIC

The PIC file format is for a Lotus PIC file.


MET

The MET file format is for a MET Metafile.


NAP

The NAP file format is for a NAP Metafile.


PFB

The PFB file format is for an Adobe Type 1 Font file.


XPM

The XPM file format is used with an XPixMap Image file.


XCF

The XCF file format is used with a Gimp Image file.


WI

The WI file format is used for low file degradation under high compression in grayscale and 24-bit images.


WPG

The WPG file format is used with a WordPefect Graphic file.


FPX

The FlashPIX file format stores images at different resolutions in a single file.


Printing

CorelDRAW provides extensive options for printing your work.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	printing your work

•	laying out print jobs

•	previewing print jobs

•	applying print styles

•	fine-tuning print jobs

•	printing colors accurately

•	printing to a PostScript printer

•	using the Print merge wizard


Printing your work

In the CorelDRAW application, you can print one or more copies of the same drawing. You can specify what to print, as well as which parts of a drawing to print; for example, you can print selected vectors, bitmaps, text, or layers.

Before printing a drawing, you can specify printer properties, including paper size and device options.

Related Topics

To set printer properties

To print your work

To print selected vectors, bitmaps, or text

To print selected layers


To set printer properties

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click Properties (Windows) or Printer (Mac OS).

4	Set any properties in the dialog box.

Related Topics

Printing your work

To print your work

To print selected vectors, bitmaps, or text

To print selected layers


To print your work

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose a printer from the Name list box (Windows) or the Printer list box (Mac OS).

4	Type a value in the Number of copies box.

If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Current document [image] prints the active drawing

•	Current page [image] prints the active page

•	Pages [image] prints the pages that you specify

•	Documents [image] prints the documents that you specify

•	Selection [image] prints the objects that you have selected

 Notes

•	You must select objects before printing a selection.

•	The Collate check box is only available for documents with more than one page.

Related Topics

Printing your work

To set printer properties

To print selected vectors, bitmaps, or text

To print selected layers


To print selected vectors, bitmaps, or text

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	In the Proofing options area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Print vectors

•	Print bitmaps

•	Print text

 Tips

•	You can print graphics in full color, monochrome, or grayscale, by enabling the corresponding check boxes in the Bitmap downsampling area.

•	You can print all text in black by enabling the Print all text in black check box.

Related Topics

Printing your work

To set printer properties

To print your work

To print selected layers


To print selected layers

1	Click Tools [image] Object manager.

2	Click the printer icon that corresponds to a layer.

If the icon appears grayed, the layer will not print.

3	Click File [image] Print.

Related Topics

Printing your work

To set printer properties

To print your work

To print selected vectors, bitmaps, or text


Laying out print jobs

You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper.

If the orientation of a print job differs from the orientation specified in the printer properties, a message prompts you to adjust the paper orientation of the printing device. You can disable this prompt, so that the printer adjusts paper orientation automatically.

Related Topics

To specify the size and position of a print job

To tile a print job

To change the page orientation prompt


To specify the size and position of a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	As in document [image] maintains the image size, as it is in the document.

•	Fit to page [image] sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page

•	Reposition images to [image] lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position from the list box

 Note

•	Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and scale in the corresponding boxes.

Related Topics

Laying out print jobs

To tile a print job

To change the page orientation prompt


To tile a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Print tiled pages check box.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Tile overlap [image] lets you specify the number of inches by which to overlap tiles

•	% of page width [image] lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles will occupy

 Tip

•	Enable the Tiling marks check box to include tiling alignment marks.

Related Topics

Laying out print jobs

To specify the size and position of a print job

To change the page orientation prompt


To change the page orientation prompt

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Page orientation prompt from the Option list.

4	Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:

•	Off [image] always match orientation

•	On [image] ask if orientations differ

•	Off [image] don't change orientation

Related Topics

Laying out print jobs

To specify the size and position of a print job

To tile a print job


Previewing print jobs

You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear on paper. For a detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the individual color separations will appear when printed. You can also increase the speed of a print preview by hiding the graphics.

Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues.

Related Topics

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To preview a print job

•	Click File [image] Print preview.

 Tip

•	You can quickly preview a print job in the Print dialog box by clicking File [image] Print, and clicking one of the following:

•	(Windows) Mini preview button

•	(Mac OS) Mini preview button

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To magnify the preview page

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click View [image] Zoom.

3	Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the box.

 Tips

•	You can also magnify the preview page by choosing a preset zoom level.

•	You can also zoom in on a portion of the print preview by clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox and marquee selecting an area.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To preview color separations

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button.

 Tips

•	You can preview the composite by clicking View [image] Preview separations [image] Composite.

•	You can view individual color separations by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the application window.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To hide or display graphics

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To hide or display graphics

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click View [image] Show image.

A check mark beside the menu command name indicates that graphics are displayed.

 Note

•	When the Show image menu command is disabled, the print job is represented by a bounding box that you can use to position and size the job.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To view a summary of issues for a print job


To view a summary of issues for a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Issues tab.

If you don't want Preflight to check for certain issues, click Settings, double-click Printing, and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you want overlooked.

 Tip

•	You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

Related Topics

Previewing print jobs

To preview a print job

To magnify the preview page

To preview color separations

To hide or display graphics


Applying print styles

A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This lets you move a print style from one computer to another, back up a print style, and keep document-specific styles in the same directory as the document file.

You can select an existing print style, create a new print style, or edit a print style and save the changes. You can also delete print styles.

Related Topics

To choose a print style

To create a print style

To edit a print style

To delete a print style


To choose a print style

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose one of the following from the Print Style list box:

•	CorelDRAW defaults

•	Browse

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To create a print style

To edit a print style

To delete a print style


To create a print style

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Set any printing options.

4	Click Save as.

5	Choose the folder where you want to save the print style.

6	Type a name for the style in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

 Tips

•	(Windows) When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called Settings to include. The settings in this section correspond to the printing options you have already selected. You can also specify which settings to include in a print style in this dialog box.

•	You can also save a print style by clicking File [image] Print preview, and clicking the Save print style as button..

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To choose a print style

To edit a print style

To delete a print style


To edit a print style

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Choose a print style from the Print style list box.

3	Modify any of the printing options.

4	Click Save as.

5	Choose the folder where the print style is stored.

6	Click the filename.

 Note

•	You should save the modified settings as a print style or apply the changes before canceling; otherwise, you'll lose all of the modified settings.

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To choose a print style

To create a print style

To delete a print style


To delete a print style

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Select a print style.

3	Click the Delete print style button.

Related Topics

Applying print styles

To choose a print style

To create a print style

To edit a print style


Fine-tuning print jobs

Problems sometimes occur when you are printing text to a non-PostScript printing device; for example, lower numbers of fountain steps can result in banding. You can specify the number of steps in the fountain fills in a print job. A higher value results in a smoother blend, but the printing time is longer. You can decrease printing time by specifying driver compatibility for non-PostScript printing devices.

If a printing device has difficulty processing large bitmaps, you can divide a bitmap into smaller, more manageable chunks by setting an output threshold. If any lines appear when the printing device prints the chunks, you can set an overlap value to produce a seamless image.

When printing color print jobs to a black-and-white printing device, you can specify whether to print in black or grayscale.

You can rasterize a page of a print job. Rasterizing a page converts it to a bitmap and improves the print speed when printing to non-PostScript printing devices. In the Mac OS, pages are rasterized automatically when printing to non-PostScript printing devices.

To reduce file size, you can downsample bitmaps. Because bitmaps are made up of pixels, when you downsample a bitmap, the number of pixels per line decreases, which decreases the file size.

Related Topics

To specify fountain steps in a print job

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

To rasterize a page (Windows)

To downsample bitmaps


To specify fountain steps in a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Type a value in the Fountain steps box.

 Note

•	Specifying the number of fountain steps in the Fountain fill dialog box will override the settings you specify on the Misc page. For information about specifying the number of fountain steps in the Fountain fill dialog box, see "To change the fountain fill quality."

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

To rasterize a page (Windows)

To downsample bitmaps


To specify driver compatibility settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, Printing, and click Driver compatibility.

3	Choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box.

4	Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the settings you want to specify.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify fountain steps in a print job

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

To rasterize a page (Windows)

To downsample bitmaps


To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	From the Option list, choose one of the following :

•	Bitmap output threshold (K)

•	Bitmap chunk overlap pixels

4	Choose a value from the Setting list box.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify fountain steps in a print job

To specify driver compatibility settings

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

To rasterize a page (Windows)

To downsample bitmaps


To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	All colors as black

•	All colors as grayscale

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify fountain steps in a print job

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To rasterize a page (Windows)

To downsample bitmaps


To rasterize a page (Windows)

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the Rasterize entire page check box, and type a number in the box.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify fountain steps in a print job

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

To downsample bitmaps


To downsample bitmaps

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	From the Bitmap downsampling area, enable any of the following check boxes and type a value in the corresponding box:

•	Color

•	Grayscale

•	Monochrome

 Note

•	Downsampling bitmaps affects them only when their resolution is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area.

Related Topics

Fine-tuning print jobs

To specify fountain steps in a print job

To specify driver compatibility settings

To choose a threshold and chunk overlap

To print color print jobs in black or grayscale

To rasterize a page (Windows)


Printing colors accurately

To print colors accurately, you can apply an International Color Consortium (ICC) color profile.

Using color management also helps you ensure accurate color reproduction. You can output color bitmaps as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. For more information on color management, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

Related Topics

To apply an ICC color profile

To output color bitmaps


To apply an ICC color profile

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the Apply ICC profile check box.

 Note

•	Applying an ICC color profile on the Misc page will use the settings that you specified for separations printer profiles in the Color management dialog box, when printing separations, and it will use the composite printer profiles when printing composites. For information about applying an ICC color profile in the Color management dialog box, see "To choose a color profile."

Related Topics

Printing colors accurately

To output color bitmaps


To output color bitmaps

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Choose one of the following from the Output color bitmaps as list box:

•	CMYK

•	RGB

•	Grayscale

 Note

•	The CMYK option is available only for PostScript devices.

Related Topics

Printing colors accurately

To apply an ICC color profile


Printing to a PostScript printer

PostScript is a page-description language that sends printing instructions to a PostScript device. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document. For improved compatibility you can choose a device independent PostScript device. You can also select a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. A PostScript Printer Description file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer and is available from your printer's manufacturer.

You can print to a PostScript printing device. To ensure that a print job prints properly on a PostScript Level 1 device, you can test for potential issues such as complex graphics and banding in fountain fills. You can automatically increase the fountain steps in a fountain fill to decrease banding. To ensure that your print jobs print properly, you can reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness. Curve flatness determines how smooth a curve appears when printed

A print job that contains too many fonts may not print properly, and a print job that contains too many spot colors increases file size. You can set the PostScript options to warn you when a print job contains more than a set number of fonts or spot colors.

By default, the printing device driver downloads Type 1 fonts to the printing device. You can disable the Download Type 1 Fonts option, so that fonts are printed as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful when the file contains many fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download or would fail to download because of their file size. Bitmap versions of TrueType fonts look better in small print and print faster than regular fonts. You can choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts that a print job can contain.

Related Topics

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To select a PostScript Printer Description file

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box (Windows) or the Printer list box (Mac OS).

4	Enable the Use PPD check box.

5	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To print to a PostScript device

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box (Windows) or the Printer list box (Mac OS).

4	Click the PostScript tab.

5	From the list box in the Compatibility area, choose the PostScript level that corresponds to the printer.

If you want to compress bitmaps when printing, enable the Use JPEG compression check box in the Bitmaps area, and move the Quality factor slider.

 Note

•	Bitmap compression settings can be saved in PostScript Interpreted (PS or PRN) files when you print to a file. For information about printing to a file, see "To print to a file."

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To test for complex graphics

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Issues tab.

3	Click Settings.

4	Double-click Printing.

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Text with texture fills (PS Level1 Only)

•	Bitmaps in complex clipping paths (PS Level1 only)

•	Texture fills in complex objects (PS Level1 only)

•	Complex clipping regions (PS Level1 only)

•	Objects with outline having many nodes (PS Level1 only)

•	Objects with outline and fill having many nodes (PS Level1 only)

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To test fountain fills for banding

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Issues tab.

3	Click Settings.

4	Double-click Printing.

5	Enable the Banded fountain fills check box.

If you want to optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity, enable the Optimize fountain fills check box under the PostScript tab.

 Note

•	Testing fountain fills for banding applies only to linear fountain fills.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To automatically increase fountain steps

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the PostScript tab.

3	Enable the Auto increase fountain steps check box.

 Note

•	Enabling the Auto increase fountain steps check box increases the number of steps used to render fountain fills, which may increase printing time.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To reduce curve complexity

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the PostScript tab.

3	Type a value in the Maximum points per curve box.

4	Type a value in the Set flatness to box.

5	Enable the Auto increase flatness check box.

 Notes

•	Reducing curve complexity can help alleviate printing problems caused by curves that have too many points on each curve, but it results in increased printing time.

•	As the flatness increases, curves begin to appear as connected straight lines.

 Tips

•	When the Auto increase flatness check box is enabled, the maximum allowable flatness value, specified in the Set flatness to box, increases by a value of 10. If a curve is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds this limit, the printing device skips the problematic curve. If the printing device skips a curve, it does not appear in the final output. For this reason, it is important to inspect proofs before you publish the work.

•	If you are having problems printing complex objects, type 10 in the Set flatness to box. If this does not achieve the required results, continue to increase the flatness value by increments of two, and evaluate the results.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To set color separations and font warning options

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Spot color separations warning from the Option list.

4	Choose one of the following from the Setting list box:

•	If any spot colors are used

•	If more than 1 spot color used

•	If more than 2 spot colors used

•	If more than 3 spot colors used

5	Choose Fonts warning threshold from the Option list.

6	Choose a number from the Setting list box.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the PostScript tab.

3	Disable the Download Type1 fonts check box.

 Notes

•	Type 1 fonts can be downloaded only for PostScript devices.

•	When the Download Type1 fonts check box is enabled, the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box is enabled by default. This ensures that TrueType fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Disable the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box only if the output device has difficulty interpreting Type 1 fonts.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts


To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Bitmap font limit (PS) from the Option list.

4	Choose a value from the Settings list box.

If you want to set a maximum bitmap font size, choose a font size from the Bitmap font size threshold (PS) list box.

Related Topics

Printing to a PostScript printer

To select a PostScript Printer Description file

To print to a PostScript device

To test for complex graphics

To test fountain fills for banding

To automatically increase fountain steps

To reduce curve complexity

To set color separations and font warning options

To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts


Using the Print merge wizard

You can use the Print merge wizard to combine text with a drawing; for example, you can personalize an invitation by printing a different recipient's name on each invitation.

The following steps provide a general overview of the process of merging a document.

A	Create or open an existing data file [image] You can open a new file or an existing data file. CorelDRAW supports the following files: Text (TXT), Comma-separated Values (CSV), and Rich Text Format (RTF).

B	Create data fields [image] You can specify data field names.

C	Input data in the data fields [image] Once you have created a list of data fields, you can input data under the data field names.

D	Save the data file [image] You can save information in the data fields in a text file.

E	Insert the fields in the drawing [image] You can specify fields and their position in a drawing by clicking on the Insert selected print merge field icon, choosing a field name from the list box, and clicking anywhere on the drawing.

F	Merge the data file and the drawing [image] You can preview the merged document in the Print Preview window. Data fields are merged with a drawing when you print the document.

Related Topics

To create merge fields

To edit merge fields

To perform a merge


To create merge fields

1	Click File [image] Print merge [image] Create merge fields.

2	Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard.

 Tip

•	You can also create merge fields by clicking the Create/Load print merge fields button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Using the Print merge wizard

To edit merge fields

To perform a merge


To edit merge fields

1	Click File [image] Print merge [image] Edit merge fields.

2	Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard.

 Tip

•	You can also edit merge fields by clicking the Edit print merge fields button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Using the Print merge wizard

To create merge fields

To perform a merge


To perform a merge

1	Click File [image] Print merge [image] Perform merge.

2	Specify any printer settings.

3	Click Print.

If you want to ensure that all fields and pages print, enable the Current document option.

Related Topics

Using the Print merge wizard

To create merge fields

To edit merge fields


Commercial printing

With CorelDRAW, you can prepare a print job for commercial printing.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	preparing a print job for a service bureau

•	working with imposition layouts

•	printing printer's marks

•	maintaining OPI links

•	printing color separations

•	working with color trapping

•	specifying In-RIP trapping settings

•	printing to film

•	understanding commercial printing

•	using Preflight


Preparing a print job for a service bureau

You can use the Prepare for service bureau wizard to guide you through the process of sending a file to a service bureau. The wizard simplifies processes such as creating PostScript and PDF files; gathering different pieces required for outputting an image; and copying the original image, embedded image files, and fonts to a user-defined location.

You can print a drawing to a file, which lets the service bureau send the file directly to an output device. If you are unsure about which settings to choose, consult the service bureau.

You can include a job information sheet with all the pre-press settings that you have specified.

For more information about commercial printing, see "Understanding commercial printing."

Related Topics

To use the Prepare for Service Bureau wizard

To print to a file

To include a job information sheet with the print job


To use the Prepare for Service Bureau wizard

1	Click File [image] Prepare for service bureau.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Gather all files associated with this document

•	Choose a profile provided by your service bureau

 Notes

•	The PDF file settings for the service bureau and the PDF for prepress settings are identical. For information about the PDF for prepress style settings, see "Saving documents as PDF files."

•	To create a service bureau profile, you need the Service Bureau Profiler utility, which you can custom install with CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Preparing a print job for a service bureau

To print to a file

To include a job information sheet with the print job


To print to a file

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Enable the Print to file check box.

(Mac OS) If the Print to file check box is grayed, choose Device independent PostScript file from the Printer list box. This enables the Print to file check box automatically.

4	Click the flyout arrow, and click one of the following commands:

•	(Windows) For Mac [image] saves the drawing to be readable on a Macintosh computer

•	Single file [image] prints pages to a single file

•	Pages to separate files [image] prints pages to separate files

•	Plates to separate files [image] prints plates to separate files

5	Click Print.

6	Choose one of the following from the Save as type list box (Windows) or Format list box (Mac OS):

•	Print file [image] saves the file as a PRN file

•	PostScript file [image] saves the file as a PS file

7	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

8	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

 Note

•	If you prefer not to prepare PostScript files, service bureaus equipped with the application in which you created your work can take the original files (for example, CorelDRAW files) and apply the required prepress settings.

Related Topics

Preparing a print job for a service bureau

To use the Prepare for Service Bureau wizard

To include a job information sheet with the print job


To include a job information sheet with the print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Misc tab.

3	Enable the Print job information sheet check box.

4	Click Info settings.

5	In the Information area, disable any of the options.

6	In the Destination area, enable one of the following:

•	Send to text file

•	Send to printer

Related Topics

Preparing a print job for a service bureau

To use the Prepare for Service Bureau wizard

To print to a file


Working with imposition layouts

Working with imposition layouts lets you print more than one page of a document on each sheet of paper. You can choose a preset imposition layout to create documents such as magazines and books to print on a commercial printing press; produce documents that involve cutting or folding, such as mailing labels, business cards, pamphlets, or greeting cards; or print multiple thumbnails of a document on one page. You can also edit a preset imposition layout to create your own layout.

You can select a binding method by choosing from three preset binding methods or you can customize a binding method. When you choose a preset binding method, all but the first signature are automatically arranged.

You can arrange pages on a signature manually or automatically. When you arrange the pages automatically, you can choose the angle of the image. If you have more than one page across or down, you can specify the size of gutters between pages; for example, you can choose the automatic gutter spacing option, which sizes gutters so that the document's pages fill the entire available space in the layout.

When printing on a desktop printer, you can adjust the margins to accommodate the non-printable area of a page. If the margin is smaller than the non-printable area, the edges of some pages or some printer's marks may be clipped by your printer.

Related Topics

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To choose a preset imposition layout

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box.

 Note

•	The layout you choose does not affect the original document, only the way it is printed.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To edit an imposition layout

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box.

4	Click Edit.

5	Edit any imposition layout settings.

6	Click Save layout on the property bar.

7	Type a name for the imposition layout in the Save as box.

 Note

•	When editing an imposition layout, you should save it with a new name; otherwise the settings for a preset imposition layout will be overwritten.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To select a binding method

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit basic settings from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Type values in the Pages across/down boxes.

If you want the page to be double-sided, click the Single/double sided button.

5	Choose one of the following binding methods from the Binding mode list box:

•	Perfect binding

•	Saddle stitch

•	Collate and cut

•	Custom binding

If you choose either Perfect binding or Custom binding, type a value in the corresponding box.

 Note

•	When you click the Single/double sided layout for double-sided printing, and you are printing on a non-duplex printing device, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the paper into the printer, so that you can print on both sides of the page.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To arrange pages

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To arrange pages

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit page placements from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Intelligent auto-ordering

•	Sequential auto-ordering

•	Cloned auto-ordering

If you want to arrange the page numbering manually, click on the page and specify the page number in the Page sequence number box.

5	Choose an angle from the Page rotation list box.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To edit gutters

To adjust margins


To edit gutters

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit gutters and finishing from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Auto gutter spacing

•	Equal gutters

5	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Cut location

•	Fold location

 Notes

•	If you click the Equal gutters button, you must specify a value in the Gutter size box.

•	You can edit the gutters only if you've selected an imposition layout with two or more pages across and down.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To adjust margins


To adjust margins

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Imposition layout tool.

3	Choose Edit margins from the What to edit list box on the property bar.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Auto margins

•	Equal margins

 Notes

•	If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes.

•	When preparing a job for a commercial press, the service bureau may request minimum margin sizes, such as for page grippers and printer's marks.

Related Topics

Working with imposition layouts

To choose a preset imposition layout

To edit an imposition layout

To select a binding method

To arrange pages

To edit gutters


Printing printer's marks

Printing printer's marks lets you display information on a page about how a work should be printed. You can specify the position of the printer's marks on the page.

The available printer's marks are as follows:

•	Crop/fold marks [image] represent the size of the paper and print at the corners of the page. You can print crop/fold marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you print multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns) you can choose to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop/fold marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. Composite crop/fold marks ensure that marks appear on each separation plate of an imported CMYK file.

•	Bleed limit [image] determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size.

•	Registration marks [image] are required to line up film for proofing or printing plates on a color press. They print on each sheet of a color separation.

•	Color calibration bars [image] are color scales that print on each sheet of a color separation and ensure accurate color reproduction To see calibration bars, the page size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing.

•	Densitometer scale [image] is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

•	Page numbers [image] helps you collate pages of an image that do not include any page numbers or do not contain page numbers that correspond to the actual number of pages.

•	File information [image] prints file information, such as, the color profile; halftone settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name.

Related Topics

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print crop and fold marks

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Crop/fold marks check box.

If you want to print only the exterior crop/fold marks, enable the Exterior only check box.

 Note

•	To print crop and fold marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

 Tip

•	To set crop and fold marks, see "To edit gutters."

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print composite crop/fold marks

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Composite crop marks from the Option list.

4	Choose Output in CMYK from the Setting list box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To set a bleed limit

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Layout tab.

3	Enable the Bleed limit check box.

4	Type a value in the Bleed limit box.

 Note

•	Usually, a bleed limit of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print registration marks

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Print registration marks check box.

4	Choose a registration mark style from the Style list box.

 Note

•	To print registration marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	In the Calibration bars area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Color calibration bar

•	Densitometer scales

If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares, choose a number from the Densities list (lower values represent lighter squares) and type a new density for that square.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print page numbers

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print page numbers

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Print page numbers check box.

If you want to position the page number inside the page, enable the Position within page check box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print file information

To position printer's marks


To print file information

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Print file information check box.

4	Type a job name in the Job name/slug line box.

If you want to position the file information inside the page, enable the Position within page check box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To position printer's marks


To position printer's marks

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	Click the Marks placement tool.

3	Click the Auto-position marks rectangle button on the property bar.

4	Type values in the Marks alignment rectangle boxes.

 Tips

•	You can also change the position of printer's marks by clicking on a printer's mark icon in the print preview window and dragging the bounding box.

•	If you want to affix printer's marks to the object's bounding box instead of to the page bounding box, click the Prepress tab in the Print dialog box, and enable the Marks to objects check box.

Related Topics

Printing printer's marks

To print crop and fold marks

To print composite crop/fold marks

To set a bleed limit

To print registration marks

To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales

To print page numbers

To print file information


Maintaining OPI links

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a service bureau receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution placeholders.

Related Topics

To maintain OPI links


To maintain OPI links

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the PostScript tab.

3	Enable the Maintain OPI links check box.

 Notes

•	The Maintain OPI links option is available for PostScript devices only.

•	You can reduce your work time by using OPI and print management server solutions, such as ScenicSoft Color Central. Low-resolution samples are automatically created from the high-resolution originals and are placed in CorelDRAW. These files contain their own OPI comments, which the ScenicSoft Color Central server recognizes when it receives the job and then substitutes the high-resolution version of the file for the low-resolution version.

•	When you import the low-resolution images into your document, they must be flagged as OPI images using third-party software.

Related Topics

Maintaining OPI links


Printing color separations

When you send color work to a service bureau or printing shop, either you or the service bureau must create color separations. Color separations are necessary because a typical printing press applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. You can specify the color separations to print, including the order in which they print.

Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot color, or both. You can convert the spot colors to process colors at printing time. For more information on spot and process colors, see "Choosing colors."

Corel also supports PANTONE Hexachrome, a type of printing process that increases the range of printable colors. Talk to the service bureau about whether you should use PANTONE Hexachrome color.

When setting halftone screens to print color separations, we recommend that you use default settings; otherwise, screens can be improperly set and result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. However, if you are using an imagesetter, the screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the service bureau uses. Before customizing a halftone screen, consult the service bureau to determine the correct setting.

Related Topics

To print color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

To customize a halftone screen


To print color separations

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

If you want to print specific color separations, enable the corresponding check box in the list of color separations.

 Tips

•	Although not recommended, you can print separations in color by enabling the Print separations in color check box in the Options area.

•	You can change the order in which color separations print, by enabling the Use advanced settings check box, clicking Advanced, and choosing an order from the Order list box.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

To customize a halftone screen


To convert spot colors to process colors

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Convert spot colors to process check box in the Options area.

 Note

•	Changing the spot colors to process colors when you print does not affect the document, only the way it is printed.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To print color separations

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

To customize a halftone screen


To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Hexachrome plates check box in the Options area.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To print color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To customize a halftone screen


To customize a halftone screen

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Use advanced settings check box.

5	Click Advanced.

6	Change any of the following settings:

•	Screening technology

•	Resolution

•	Basic screen

•	Halftone type

 Note

•	You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees.

Related Topics

Printing color separations

To print color separations

To convert spot colors to process colors

To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color


Working with color trapping

Trapping intentionally overlaps colors so that minor problems with the alignment of printing plates are not noticed. To overlap colors and create color trapping, one color must overprint the other. Overprinting works best when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color may result (for example, cyan over yellow may result in a green object).

You can choose to preserve overprint settings if you want to trap objects in a document. You can set specific objects to overprint; you can overprint each object's fill, outline, or both. You can also overprint specific color separations, specify in which order they will print, and specify whether you want to overprint graphics, text, or both.

The two methods for color trapping automatically are always overprinting black and auto-spreading. Always overprinting black creates a color trap by causing any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint any underlying objects. This option is useful for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content. You can adjust the threshold, if the service bureau recommends a black threshold value other than 95%.

Auto-spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill and having it overprint underlying objects. Auto-spreading is created for all objects in the file that meet three conditions: they do not already have an outline, are filled with a uniform fill, and have not already been designated to overprint.

For advanced trapping options, see "Specifying In-RIP trapping settings."

Related Topics

To preserve document overprints

To trap by overprinting selected objects

To overprint selected color separations

To trap by always overprinting black

To set the overprint black threshold

To trap by auto-spreading


To preserve document overprints

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Preserve document overprints check box in the Trapping area.

Related Topics

Working with color trapping

To trap by overprinting selected objects

To overprint selected color separations

To trap by always overprinting black

To set the overprint black threshold

To trap by auto-spreading


To trap by overprinting selected objects

1	Click the Pick tool, and right-click an object (Windows) or Control + click an object (Mac OS).

2	Click any of the following options:

•	Overprint fill

•	Overprint outline

Related Topics

Working with color trapping

To preserve document overprints

To overprint selected color separations

To trap by always overprinting black

To set the overprint black threshold

To trap by auto-spreading


To overprint selected color separations

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Use advanced settings check box.

5	Click Advanced.

6	In the Advanced separations settings dialog box, choose a color separation from the Screening technology list box.

7	In the Overprint column, click one or both of the following icons:

•	Overprint graphics

•	Overprint text

 Note

•	The icons appear darker when the separation is set to overprint.

 Tip

•	You can change the order in which color separations print by selecting a color separation and choosing an order from the Order list box.

Related Topics

Working with color trapping

To preserve document overprints

To trap by overprinting selected objects

To trap by always overprinting black

To set the overprint black threshold

To trap by auto-spreading


To trap by always overprinting black

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Always overprint black check box in the Trapping area.

Related Topics

Working with color trapping

To preserve document overprints

To trap by overprinting selected objects

To overprint selected color separations

To set the overprint black threshold

To trap by auto-spreading


To set the overprint black threshold

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing.

3	Choose Overprint black threshold (PS) from the Option list.

4	Choose a number from the Setting list box.

The number you choose represents the percentage of black above which black objects overprint.

Related Topics

Working with color trapping

To preserve document overprints

To trap by overprinting selected objects

To overprint selected color separations

To trap by always overprinting black

To trap by auto-spreading


To trap by auto-spreading

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the Print separations check box.

4	Enable the Auto-spreading check box.

5	Type a value in the Maximum box.

6	Enable the Fixed width check box.

The Maximum box changes to the Width box when you enable the Fixed width check box.

7	Type a value in the Text above box.

 Notes

•	The value that you type in the Text above box represents the minimum size to which auto-spreading is applied. If you set this value too low, small text may be rendered illegible when auto-spreading is applied.

•	The amount of spread assigned to an object depends on the maximum trap value specified in the Maximum box and the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

Related Topics

Working with color trapping

To preserve document overprints

To trap by overprinting selected objects

To overprint selected color separations

To trap by always overprinting black

To set the overprint black threshold


Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

In-RIP trapping allows you to specify advanced trapping settings. Before selecting In-RIP trapping, ensure that your PostScript 3 printer has In-RIP options.

You can select a trap width [image] the amount that one color spreads into another. You can also specify image trap placement, which determines where the trap occurs. You can, for example, specify whether the trap is a choke or a spread, depending upon the neutral densities of adjacent colors. Neutral density indicates the lightness or darkness of a color and helps determine how adjacent colors spread into one another.

You can specify a threshold at which a trap will be created by specifying a step trap limit. If trap colors are of similar neutral densities, the trap placement will be adjusted accordingly. The step trap limit specifies a threshold at which a trap will adjust.

Before trapping, you can set the inks; for example, you can set an ink to opaque, as in the case of a metallic ink, so that nothing shows through it. To reduce the visibility of a trap, you can decrease the amount of ink color in a trap. This is especially helpful in the case of pastel colors, contrasting colors, and colors with similar neutral densities.

Related Topics

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To select a trap width

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Type a value in the Trap width box.

If you are trapping to black, type a value in the Black trap width box.

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To specify image trap placement

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	From the Image trap placement list box, choose one of the following placements:

•	Neutral density [image] used to determine the lighter object and thus, the direction and placement of the trap

•	Choke [image] used to trap a dark foreground object to a light background image

•	Spread [image] used to trap a light foreground object to a dark background image

•	Centerline [image] used when adjacent images and objects have similar neutral densities or when image density changes along an object's edge

If you want to trap an object to an image, enable the Trap objects to images option.

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To specify a threshold

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Type a value in one or any of the following boxes:

•	Step limit [image] specifies a threshold between color variations. The lower the threshold value, the more likely it is that a trap will be created

•	Black limit [image] specifies the threshold at which process black is considered pure black

•	Black density limit [image] specifies a neutral density value for the black ink

•	Sliding trap limit [image] specifies the difference between the neutral densities of adjacent colors at which a trap adjusts (slides) from the darker side of a color edge toward the centerline. The lower the sliding trap limit, the more gradual the transition

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To set inks for trapping

To select a trap color reduction


To set inks for trapping

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Click Type, and for each color separation, select one of the following:

•	Transparent [image] the selected ink doesn't get trapped, but anything beneath it does

•	Neutral density [image] the neutral density of the selected ink determines how it is treated

•	Opaque [image] the selected ink is treated as opaque

•	Opaque ignore [image] the selected ink doesn't get trapped nor does anything beneath it

 Note

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To select a trap color reduction


To select a trap color reduction

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Separations tab.

3	Enable the In-RIP trapping check box.

4	Click Settings.

5	Type a value in the Trap color reduction box.

 Notes

•	A reduction value of 100% indicates no reduction, while a lower value reduces the neutral density.

•	To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box.

Related Topics

Specifying In-RIP trapping settings

To select a trap width

To specify image trap placement

To specify a threshold

To set inks for trapping


Printing to film

You can set up a print job to produce negative images. An image-setter produces images on film that may need to be produced as negatives depending on which printing device you are using. Consult the service bureau or printing shop to determine whether you can produce images on film.

You can specify to print with the emulsion down. Printing with the emulsion down produces a backward image on desktop printers.

Related Topics

To print a negative

To specify film with the emulsion down


To print a negative

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Invert check box.

 Note

•	Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printer.

Related Topics

Printing to film

To specify film with the emulsion down


To specify film with the emulsion down

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Mirror check box.

Related Topics

Printing to film

To print a negative


Understanding commercial printing

If you use commercial printing services for your print jobs, you probably use a service bureau or a printing shop. The service bureau takes your file and converts it directly to film or to plates. The printing shop uses the film from a service bureau to make printing plates.

When you prepare a print job for commercial printing, you can send camera-ready paper output or the work on disk. If you send the work on disk, the service bureau needs either a PostScript file or a native file from the application that you use. If you are creating a file to send to an image-setter or a plate-setter, speak with the service bureau about the best file format and printing device settings to use. Always provide a final printout of the work to the service bureau, even if it is only a black-and-white representation. This helps the service bureau to identify and assess any potential problems.

Before printing a drawing, you must choose and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver. Consult the printing device manufacturer instructions, or the service bureau or printing shop that you use to print the work, to find out the best way to set up the printing device driver.


Using Preflight

Preflight checks the status of your file before you decide to output it. A summary of issues of potential problems and suggestions for resolving them is provided. You can specify which issues Preflight checks for. You can also save Preflight settings. For more information about specific Preflight settings, see any of the following:

•	To check for issues relating to printing a file

•	To check for issues relating to publishing a PDF file

•	To check for issues relating to publishing to the Web

•	To check for issues relating to exporting a SWF file

•	To check for issues relating to exporting a SVG file


Managing color for display, input, and output

You may find that the colors displayed on your monitor don't match the colors of a scanned image or of a printer's output. Color management lets you reproduce colors accurately by using color profiles and by correcting colors for display.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	understanding the Color management dialog box

•	working with color profiles

•	choosing advanced color management settings

•	correcting colors for display


Understanding the Color management dialog box

Color management is the process of matching colors between devices, such as scanners, digital cameras, printers, and monitors. Your application features color management controls designed to help you achieve the best possible color matches.

The Color management dialog box, with its default settings, looks like this

You can activate the following visual elements :

•	Scanner/digital camera icon

•	Separations printer icon

•	Monitor icon

•	Composite printer icon

•	Import/export icon

•	Internal RGB icon

•	Arrows

You can click the Monitor icon, the Import/export icon, the Internal RGB icon, and the Arrows to choose color management options and advanced settings.

You can click the caption text under the icons to choose color profiles for each device. You can also get other color profiles from the application CD or online. For more information, see "Working with color profiles." To help you choose the appropriate profile, check the manufacturer's documentation for a device.

In addition, you can click the arrows between device icons to turn the color profiles on or off. The arrows appear orange when on, and grayed and broken when off. You can use the arrows to correct colors between devices, and control how colors are displayed.

The following table contains descriptions of what happens when an arrow is on or off.

When a device is corrected for color, at least two profiles are used [image] one for each device. For instance, if the printer colors are being corrected using Internal RGB, both the Internal RGB and printer profiles are used. If you use simulation to display colors on your monitor as they are printed, three profiles are used: the Internal RGB, printer, and monitor profiles.

Arrow	On	Off
From the Scanner/digital camera to Internal RGB	The scanner/digital camera profile and the Internal RGB profiles are used for color correction.	The profiles are not used.
From Internal RGB to the Monitor	Colors are calibrated for display using the Internal RGB and monitor color profiles.	The profile is not used.
From Internal RGB to the Composite printer	The printer and Internal RGB profile are used for color correction.	The profile is not used.
From the Composite printer to the Monitor	The monitor simulates a composite printer output.	The monitor does not simulate a composite printer output.
From Internal RGB to the Separations printer	The separations printer and RGB profiles are used for color correction.	The profile is not used. You can override this setting in the Print dialog box.
From the Separations printer to the Monitor	The monitor simulates color separations printer output.	The monitor does not simulate color separations printer output.
From the Separations printer to the Composite printer	The composite printer simulates separations printer display.	The composite printer does not simulate separations printer display.
From Internal RGB to Import/Export	Internal RGB profiles are embedded.	ICC profiles are not embedded.
From Import/Export to Internal RGB	Embedded ICC profiles are used.	ICC profiles are ignored.


Working with color profiles

A color management system helps you achieve accurate colors across a variety of devices consistently. The first stage in setting up your color management system is to choose color profiles for your monitor and each of the devices you use, such as scanners, digital cameras, and printers.

Understanding color management

Each device has a range of colors, or color space, that it uses. For example, a monitor displays a different set of colors than a printer reproduces. So, you may see some colors on the screen that cannot be printed.

You can use a color management system to translate colors from one device to another. Color profiles define the color space for your monitor and for the input and output devices you use.

For more information about using color management in your application, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box."

Choosing color profiles

Different brands and models of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, and printers have different color spaces, and thus require different color profiles. Some widely used profiles are installed with your application.

Standard ICC (International Color Consortium) color profiles are used in your application. You can choose color profiles for a:

•	monitor

•	scanner/digital camera

•	composite printer

•	separations printer

•	internal RGB color space

Obtaining additional color profiles

If you need additional profiles or updates, you can get them from the application CD, or you can download them.

Related Topics

To choose a color profile

To copy a color profile from the CD

To download a color profile


To choose a color profile

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click a profile name under one of the following icons:

•	Scanner/digital camera

•	Separations printer

•	Monitor

•	Composite printer

•	Internal RGB

3	Choose a profile from the list box.

 Note

•	By default, color profiles are stored in the application's Color folder.

 Tip

•	You can access other color profiles. For more information, see "To copy a color profile from the CD" and "To download a color profile."

Related Topics

Working with color profiles

To copy a color profile from the CD

To download a color profile


To copy a color profile from the CD

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Get profile from disk.

3	Insert the application CD.

4	In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose the folder where the profiles are located.

If you want to load color profiles that you have stored in a different location, such as on a network or on your hard disk, you can choose the folder where the profiles are located.

5	In the Install from disk dialog box, choose the color profile you want to copy.

6	Click Choose.

Related Topics

Working with color profiles

To choose a color profile

To download a color profile


To download a color profile

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Download profiles.

3	In the dialog box, enable the check box for each profile you want to download.

4	Click Download.

5	In the Save as dialog box, choose a destination for the color profile.

If you want to store the new color profile with the existing profiles, download it to the application's Color folder.

You can also
Choose a different profile type	Click the Profile type list box, and choose a type.
Specify your connection speed	Click the Connection speed list box, and choose a speed. The faster your connection speed, the shorter the download time.
Update the profiles list	Click Refresh.
Return to the main Color management dialog box	Click Cancel.
Related Topics

Working with color profiles

To choose a color profile

To copy a color profile from the CD


Choosing advanced color management settings

Once you choose color profiles, the color management system uses a Color Matching Module (CMM) to match colors between devices as closely as possible. Your application uses the Kodak Color Management System by default. You can also choose different rendering intents, which control how the color management system converts colors between different color spaces.

When you import or export graphics, you can embed, or attach, color profiles. By embedding a color profile, you can ensure color integrity; anyone viewing or printing your work will use the same colors that you used.

By enabling the gamut alarm, you can preview which on-screen colors cannot be printed. The colors that cannot be reproduced are highlighted.

In Windows, there are advanced settings for separations and composite printers; you can link a color profile to a specific printer.

Using color styles, you can choose to turn color management off or to optimize the color display.

Related Topics

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To choose a color engine and rendering intent

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click on the Internal RGB icon.

3	In the Advanced settings dialog box, from the Rendering intent list box, choose one of the following:

•	Absolute colorimetric [image] preserves the white point throughout conversion

•	Automatic [image] default setting, which uses saturation for vector graphics and perceptual for bitmaps

•	Perceptual [image] good for a variety of images, especially bitmaps and photographic images

•	Relative colorimetric [image] good for producing proofs on inkjet printers

•	Saturation [image] good for vector graphics (lines, text, and solid colored objects)

4	Choose an option from the Color engine list box.

 Note

•	(Windows) The Microsoft ICM 2.0 Color Matching Module (CMM) is not available for Windows NT 4.0.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To embed color profiles

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click the Import/export icon.

3	In the Import area, enable one of the following options :

•	Use embedded ICC profile

•	Always convert using

•	Ignore embedded ICC profile

4	In the Export area, enable one of the following options:

•	Embed internal RGB profile

•	Always embed using

•	Do not embed ICC profiles

 Notes

•	When you enable the Always convert using import options, as well as the Always embed using export option, you can choose a profile from the list box.

•	When you enable the Embed internal RGB profile or the Always embed using export options, certain file formats are exported with an embedded ICC profile. These file formats are: TIFF, encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT), CorelDRAW (CDR), JPEG, Portable Document Format (PDF), and Adobe Photoshop (PSD).

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To enable the gamut alarm

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Click the Monitor icon.

3	Enable the Highlight display colors out of printer gamut check box.

If you want to show CMYK in percentages, enable the Show CMYK in percentages check box.

 Tips

•	 You can map spot colors into CMYK gamut by enabling the Map spot colors into CMYK gamut check box.

•	You can change the warning color of the gamut alarm by opening the Warning color picker and choosing a color.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

To use color management styles


To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Color management.

2	Click one of the following icons:

•	Composite printer

•	Separations printer

3	Choose a setting from the list box.

 Note

•	If you choose an advanced setting, that setting overrides the profile that displays under the printer icon in the Color management dialog box.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To use color management styles


To use color management styles

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

2	Choose one of the following from the Style list box:

•	Color management off

•	Default settings

•	Optimized for desktop printing

•	Optimized for professional output

•	Optimized for the Web

•	ColorSync workflow (Mac OS)

 Notes

•	Some color management settings, such as Default, Optimized for desktop printing, and Optimized for professional output, can result in on-screen colors appearing dull. This is due to an on-screen printer simulation of the output. For more information, see "Correcting colors for display."

•	(Mac OS) The ColorSync workflow style affects color management at the system level, and uses the settings from the system preferences' ColorSync dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can add or delete a color management style by clicking the Add preset or Remove preset buttons.

Related Topics

Choosing advanced color management settings

To choose a color engine and rendering intent

To embed color profiles

To enable the gamut alarm

To choose advanced printer settings (Windows)


Correcting colors for display

You can correct colors so that they display as accurately as possible on screen. If you correct only the display colors, the colors are shown according to the internal RGB, and monitor color profiles.

If you display colors as they will print, on-screen colors simulate output using the Internal RGB, monitor, and printer color profiles. Simulating printer output may cause on-screen colors to appear dull.

Related Topics

To correct colors for display


To correct colors for display

•	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Color management.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Color management.

To	Do the following
Correct display colors	Click the arrow from the Internal RGB icon to the Monitor icon.
Display simulation of a composite printer output	Click the arrow from the Composite printer icon to the Monitor icon.
Display simulation of a color separations printer output	Click the arrow from the Separations printer icon to the Monitor icon.
Display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer	Click the arrow from the Separations printer icon to the Composite printer icon.
 Note

•	Arrows appear orange when they are turned on, and grayed and broken when they are turned off. For more information about using the arrows for color correction, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box."

•	The display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer does not affect output.

Related Topics

Correcting colors for display


Working with color

Your application lets you choose and create colors using a wide variety of industry-standard palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can create and edit custom color palettes to store frequently used colors for future use.

You can also customize how color palettes display on your screen by changing the size of swatches, the number of rows in palettes, and other properties.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	choosing colors

•	creating custom color palettes

•	opening and editing custom color palettes

•	setting color palette properties

•	understanding color models


Choosing colors

You can choose fill and outline colors using fixed or custom color palettes, color viewers, color harmonies, or color blends.

For information about applying the colors you choose, see "Applying uniform fills" and "Formatting lines and outlines."

When you want to use a color that already exists in an object or document, you can sample the color to achieve an exact match. For more information, see "To copy a fill to another object."

Choosing a color using the default color palette

A palette is a collection of color swatches. You can choose fill and outline colors using the default palette, which contains 99 colors from the CMYK color model. The selected fill and outline colors display in the color swatches on the status bar.

Choosing a color using fixed or custom color palettes

Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers. Some examples of these are PANTONE, HKS Colors, and TRUMATCH. It may be useful to have on hand a manufacturer's swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows exactly what each color looks like when printed.

Some fixed color palettes [image] PANTONE, HKS Colors, TOYO, DIC, Focoltone, and SpectraMaster [image] are collections of spot colors. If you create color separations when you print, each color from these color palettes requires a separate printing plate. This can significantly affect the cost of your print job. If you want to use these colors, but you don't want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process colors when printing. For more information, see "Printing color separations."

Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette. You can save a custom color palette for future use. For more information about working with custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes" and "Opening and editing custom color palettes."

Choosing a color using color viewers

Color viewers give a representation of a range of colors using either one-dimensional or three-dimensional shapes. The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model, but you can use this viewer to choose CMYK, CMY, or RGB colors. For information about color models, see "Understanding color models."

Choosing a color using color harmonies

Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape, such as a rectangle or a triangle, over a color wheel. Each vertical row in the color grid begins with the color located at one of the points on the superimposed shape.

The colors at each corner of the shape are always complementary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you choose. The color harmonies allow you to choose the color model you prefer to use, and are most useful when you're choosing several colors for a project.

Choosing a color using color blends

When you choose a color using color blends, you combine base colors to get the color you want. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from the four base colors you choose.

Related Topics

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using the default color palette

To	Do the following
Choose a fill color for a selected object	Click a color swatch.
Choose an outline color for a selected object	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a color swatch.
Choose from different shades of a color	Click and hold a color swatch to display a pop-up color picker, and click a color.
View more colors in the default color palette	Click the scroll arrows at the top and bottom of the color palette.
 Tip

•	You can display color names by pointing to a swatch.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

1	Select an object.

2	Open one of the following flyouts:

•	the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool.

•	the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool.

3	Click the Palettes tab.

4	Choose a fixed or custom palette from the Palette list box.

5	Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area.

6	Click a color in the color selection area.

 Notes

•	Each color swatch on a fixed color palette is marked with a small white square.

•	You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output. For more information about reproducing colors accurately, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

 Tips

•	You can display or hide the names of fixed or custom colors by clicking Options [image] Show color names.

•	You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options [image] Swap colors.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using a color viewer

1	Select an object.

2	Open one of the following flyouts:

•	the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool.

•	the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool.

3	Click the Models tab.

4	Choose a color model from the Model list box.

5	Click Options [image] Color viewers, and click a color viewer.

6	Move the color slider.

7	Click a color in the color selection area.

 Notes

•	If you choose a color that is out of the printer's gamut, CorelDRAW displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For information about color correction, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

•	You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output.

 Tip

•	You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options [image] Swap colors.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To choose a color using color harmonies

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using color harmonies

1	Select an object.

2	Open one of the following flyouts:

•	the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool.

•	the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool.

3	Click the Mixers tab.

4	Click Options [image] Mixers [image] Color harmonies.

5	Choose a shape from the Hues list box.

6	Choose an option from the Variation list box.

7	Drag the black dot on the color wheel.

8	Click a color swatch on the color palette below the color wheel.

 Note

•	If you choose a color that is out of the printer's gamut, CorelDRAW displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For information about color correction, see "Managing color for display, input, and output."

 Tips

•	You can change the number of swatches in the color grid by dragging the Size slider.

•	You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options [image] Swap colors.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color blends


To choose a color using color blends

1	Select an object.

2	Open one of the following flyouts:

•	the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool.

•	the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool.

3	Click the Mixers tab.

4	Click Options [image] Mixers [image] Color blend.

5	Open each color picker, and click a color.

6	Click a color in the color selection area.

 Note

•	You can only blend colors that are in the default color palette. If you want to blend other colors, change the default color palette. For information, see "To open a custom color palette."

 Tips

•	You can change the cell size of the color grid by moving the Size slider.

•	You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options [image] Swap colors.

Related Topics

Choosing colors

To choose a color using the default color palette

To choose a color using a fixed or custom color palette

To choose a color using a color viewer

To choose a color using color harmonies


Creating custom color palettes

Custom color palettes are collections of colors that you save. A number of preset custom color palettes are available; however, you can create color palettes from scratch. Custom color palettes are useful when you frequently choose the same colors, or when you want to work with a set of colors that look good together.

You can create a custom color palette by choosing each color manually, or by using colors in an object or an entire document.

Related Topics

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from an object

To create a color palette from a document


To create a custom color palette

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Palette editor.

2	Click New palette.

3	Type a filename.

4	Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a color palette from an object

To create a color palette from a document


To create a color palette from an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Create palette from selection.

3	Type a filename

4	Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from a document


To create a color palette from a document

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Create palette from document.

2	Type a filename.

3	Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating custom color palettes

To create a custom color palette

To create a color palette from an object


Opening and editing custom color palettes

You can open a custom color palette, and you can set it as the default color palette. For more information about customizing color palettes, see "Setting color palette properties."

When you create a custom color palette, the color palette is empty; however, you can edit it by adding the colors you want to include, as well as changing, deleting, sorting, and renaming colors.

Related Topics

To open a custom color palette

To edit a custom color palette


To open a custom color palette

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Open palette.

2	Choose the folder where the custom color palette is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

If you want to set the opened custom color palette as the default palette, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) anywhere on the edge of the color palette border, and click Set as default.

 Tip

•	You can close a custom color palette by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the edge of the color palette, and clicking Palette [image] Close.

Related Topics

Opening and editing custom color palettes

To edit a custom color palette


To edit a custom color palette

1	Click Window [image] Color palettes [image] Palette editor.

2	Choose a palette from the list box.

3	Modify any colors.

To	Do the following
Add a color	Click Add color. Click a color in the color selection area, and click Add to palette.
Change a color	In the color selection area, click the color that you want to change, click Edit color, and click the new color in the color selection area.
Delete a color	Click a color in the color selection area, and click Delete color.
Sort colors	Click Sort colors, and click a color sorting method.
Rename a color	Click a color in the color selection area, and type a color name in the Name box.
 Tip

•	You can delete multiple colors from a custom color palette by holding down Shift or Ctrl, and clicking in the color selection area.

Related Topics

Opening and editing custom color palettes

To open a custom color palette


Setting color palette properties

Your application offers you the option of customizing color palettes.

If you are using Windows, color palettes can be either docked or floating. Docking a color palette attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a color palette pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around.

You can set the right mouse button action (Windows) or the Control-click action (Mac OS) for color swatches to either display a context menu or to set the outline color. You can also adjust the color swatch border and size, and you can hide or display the No Color well.

Related Topics

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

To customize the color swatches


To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To	Do the following
Dock a color palette	Click the top of the color palette border, and drag the color palette to any edge of the application window until a thin black toolbar outline displays.
Undock a color palette	Click the color palette border, and drag the color palette away from the edge of the application window.
Change the number of rows on a docked color palette	Click Tools [image] Customization. In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. Type a value in the Maximum palette rows when docked box.
 Note

•	You can set a maximum of seven rows in a color palette.

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

To customize the color swatches


To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.

3	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Context menu

•	Set outline color

 Tip

•	If you enable Set outline color, you can still display the context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the border of a color palette.

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

To customize the color swatches


To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)

1	Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.

3	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Context menu

•	Set outline color

 Tip

•	If you enable Set outline color, you can still display the context menu by Control + clicking anywhere on the border of a color palette.

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To customize the color swatches


To customize the color swatches

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette.

3	Enable or disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Wide borders

•	Large swatches

•	Show No Color well

Related Topics

Setting color palette properties

To dock or undock a color palette (Windows)

To set the right mouse button action for color swatches (Windows)

To set the Control-click action for color swatches (Mac OS)


Understanding color models

You need a precise method to define colors. Color models provide various methods to define colors, each model defining colors through the use of specific color components. There are a range of color models to choose from when creating graphics.

CMYK color model

The CMYK color model defines color using the following components:

•	cyan (C)

•	magenta (M)

•	yellow (Y)

•	black (K)

The cyan, magenta, yellow, and black components are the amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink that a CMYK color contains and are measured in percent from 0 to 100.

The CMYK color model is a subtractive color model. Subtractive color models use reflected light to display color. Printed materials are produced using the CMYK color model. When you combine cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, so that the value of each component is 100, the result is black. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure white.

RGB color model

The RGB color model defines color using the following components:

•	red (R)

•	green (G)

•	blue (B)

The red, green, and blue components are the amounts of red, green, and blue light that an RGB color contains and are measured in values ranging from 0 to 255.

The RGB color model is an additive color model. Additive color models use transmitted light to display color. Monitors use the RGB color model. When you add red light, blue light, and green light together, so that the value of each component is 255, the color white displays. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure black.

HSB color model

The HSB color model defines color using the following components:

•	hue (H)

•	saturation (S)

•	brightness (B)

Hue describes the pigment of a color and is measured in degrees from 0 to 359 (for example, 0 degrees is red, 60 degrees yellow, 120 degrees green, 180 degrees cyan, 240 degrees blue, and 300 degrees magenta). Saturation describes the vividness or dullness of a color and is measured in percent from 0 to 100 (the higher the percentage, the more vivid the color). Brightness describes the amount of white that the color contains and is measured in percent from 0 to 100 (the higher the percentage, the brighter the color).

Grayscale color model

The Grayscale color model defines color using only one component, lightness, and is measured in values ranging from 0 to 255. Each Grayscale color has equal values of the red, green, and blue components of the RGB color model.


Publishing to PDF

PDF is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	saving documents as PDF files

•	including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files

•	reducing PDF file size

•	working with fonts in PDF files

•	Specifying the encoding format for PDF files

•	setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files

•	outputting objects in PDF files

•	preparing PDF files for a service bureau

•	viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files

•	optimizing PDF files


Saving documents as PDF files

You can save a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform provided that users have Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Acrobat Reader installed on their computers. A PDF file can also be uploaded to an intranet or the World Wide Web. You can also export an individual selection or an entire document to a PDF file.

When you save a document as a PDF file, you can choose from five preset PDF styles, which apply settings that are specific to that particular PDF style. For example, with the PDF for the Web style, the resolution of the images in the PDF file will be optimized for the World Wide Web. You can also create a new PDF style or edit any preset style.

If you have used symbols in a document, they will be supported in the PDF file. For more information on symbols, see "Working with symbols."

Related Topics

To save a document as a PDF file

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To create a PDF style

To edit a PDF style


To save a document as a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	From the PDF style list box, choose one of the following:

•	PDF for document distribution [image] enables JPEG bitmap image compression, and is best used for general document delivery. These documents can include bookmarks and hyperlinks and can be printed on a laser or desktop printer.

•	PDF for prepress [image] enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options best designed for high-end quality printing. Consult the service bureau for their preferred settings.

•	PDF for the Web [image] enables JPEG bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, compresses text, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails for publishing the document to the World Wide Web.

•	PDF for editing [image] enables LZW compression, embeds fonts, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all the fonts, with all of the images at full resolution, and with hyperlinks, so that you can edit the file at a later date.

•	PDF/X-1 [image] enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options. This style contains the basic settings for prepress and is the standard format used for ad distribution.

3	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

4	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

 Note

•	The embedded fonts, compressed text, and preserved spot color options are available only in CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To create a PDF style

To edit a PDF style


To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the General tab.

4	Enable the Documents option.

5	Enable the check box for each document you want to save.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save a document as a PDF file

To create a PDF style

To edit a PDF style


To create a PDF style

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Publish to PDF dialog box, specify any settings.

4	Click the General tab.

5	Click the Add PDF style button.

6	Type a name for the style in the Save PDF style as list box.

 Tip

•	If you want to delete a PDF style, select the style and click the Delete PDF style button.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save a document as a PDF file

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To edit a PDF style


To edit a PDF style

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Publish to PDF dialog box, specify any settings.

4	Click the General tab.

5	Click the Add PDF style button.

6	Choose a style from the Save PDF style as list box.

 Note

•	If you save changes you make to preset style settings, the original settings will be overwritten. To avoid this, save any changes to preset style settings with a new name.

Related Topics

Saving documents as PDF files

To save a document as a PDF file

To save multiple documents as a single PDF file

To create a PDF style


Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files

You can include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file. Hyperlinks are useful for adding jumps to Web pages or to Internet URLs. Bookmarks allow you to link to specific areas in a PDF file. You can specify whether bookmarks or thumbnails are displayed when the PDF file is first opened in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader.

For information about assigning hyperlinks and bookmarks, see "Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks" in the Help.

Related Topics

To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file


To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file

1	Choose File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Document tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Include hyperlinks

•	Generate bookmarks

•	Generate thumbnails

If you want to display bookmarks or thumbnails on startup, enable the Bookmarks or Thumbnails button in the On start, display area.

Related Topics

Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files


Reducing PDF file size

You can compress bitmap images, text, and line art to reduce the size of a PDF file. Bitmap image compression options include JPEG, LZW, or ZIP. Bitmap images using JPEG compression have a quality scale ranging from 2 (high) to 255 (low). The higher the image quality, the larger the file size.

You can also reduce the size of a PDF file by downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images or converting complex fills to bitmaps.

Related Topics

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

To compress text and line art in a PDF file

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file

To render complex fills as bitmaps


To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Compression type list box:

•	None

•	LZW

•	JPEG

•	ZIP

 Tip

•	If you choose JPEG compression, you can specify the compression quality by moving the Quality factor slider.

Related Topics

Reducing PDF file size

To compress text and line art in a PDF file

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file

To render complex fills as bitmaps


To compress text and line art in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable the Compress text and line art check box.

Related Topics

Reducing PDF file size

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file

To render complex fills as bitmaps


To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes, and type a value in the corresponding box:

•	Color

•	Grayscale

•	Monochrome

 Note

•	Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images is effective only when the resolution of the bitmap image is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area.

Related Topics

Reducing PDF file size

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

To compress text and line art in a PDF file

To render complex fills as bitmaps


To render complex fills as bitmaps

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Enable the Render complex fills as bitmaps check box.

Related Topics

Reducing PDF file size

To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file

To compress text and line art in a PDF file

To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file


Working with fonts in PDF files

You can embed fonts in a PDF file, including PostScript base 14 fonts, which increases the file size but makes a PDF file more portable since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems. When you embed base 14 fonts, CorelDRAW adds the fonts to your PDF file, thus eliminating font variances on different systems. The base 14 fonts are resident on all PostScript devices.

You can also convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts, which can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file. When you convert fonts, you can reduce file size by subsetting Type 1 fonts if you use only a smaller number of characters (for example English characters A to E). You can also include a percentage of fonts used. For example, you can create a subset of 50 percent of fonts. If the number of characters used in the document exceeds 50 percent, the whole set of characters is embedded. If the number of characters used in the document is less than 50 percent, only the characters used are embedded.

You can also eliminate font variances on different computers by exporting text as curves. For example, if you are using unusual text characters, you can export the text as curves. Exporting text as curves increases the complexity of the file and can increase file size. For general document publication, embed fonts in a document rather than convert text to curves.

Related Topics

To embed fonts in a PDF file

To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts

To export text as curves


To embed fonts in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable the Embed fonts in document check box.

If you want to install the basic fonts to your PDF file, enable the Embed base 14 fonts check box.

 Note

•	Enabling the Embed base 14 fonts check box increases file size, and, therefore, it is not recommended for publishing to the World Wide Web.

Related Topics

Working with fonts in PDF files

To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts

To export text as curves


To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable the Convert TrueType to Type 1 check box.

If you want to reduce file size, you can create a subset of Type 1 fonts by enabling the Subset fonts check box and typing a percentage of fonts used in the Under % of charset box.

 Note

•	If you create a subset of Type 1 fonts, you should not edit or correct the PDF file using Adobe Acrobat, since the characters you add when editing may not be present in the file.

Related Topics

Working with fonts in PDF files

To embed fonts in a PDF file

To export text as curves


To export text as curves

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable the Export all text as curves check box.

Related Topics

Working with fonts in PDF files

To embed fonts in a PDF file

To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts


Specifying the encoding format for PDF files

ASCII and binary are encoding formats. When you publish a file to PDF, you can choose between exporting ASCII or binary files. ASCII creates files that are fully portable to all platforms. Binary creates smaller files that are less portable, since some platforms cannot handle the file format.

Related Topics

To specify an encoding format for a PDF file


To specify an encoding format for a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Objects tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	ASCII 85

•	Binary

Related Topics

Specifying the encoding format for PDF files


Setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files

You can increase or decrease the number of steps for fountain fills. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may be rather coarse. The number of fountain steps can be set between 1 and 256.

Related Topics

To set the number of steps for fountain fills in a PDF file


To set the number of steps for fountain fills in a PDF file

1	Choose File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Type a value in the Fountain steps box.

Related Topics

Setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files


Choosing an EPS file format

You can choose how encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are treated in a PDF document. EPS files are PostScript files that are embedded in a document. They contain two parts: the PostScript portion and the preview portion. The PostScript portion includes high-resolution images, and is best suited to publishing to prepress. The Preview portion includes low-resolution images. Because of its small file size, it is best suited to publishing to the World Wide Web.

Related Topics

To choose an EPS file format


To choose an EPS file format

1	Choose File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the EPS files list box:

•	PostScript

•	Preview

Related Topics

Choosing an EPS file format


Outputting objects in PDF files

You can output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale. If you choose to output objects as CMYK, you can apply a generic ICC profile to define the CMYK color space of your printer. For more information on ICC color profiles, see "Working with color profiles."

Related Topics

To output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale


To output objects in a PDF file as RGB, CMYK, or grayscale

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Output all objects as list box:

•	RGB

•	CMYK

•	Grayscale

•	Native

If you want to use ICC profiles to define the CMYK color space of your printer, enable the Apply ICC profile check box and enable a printer profile from the list.

 Note

•	The ICC color profile option is only available for CMYK.

Related Topics

Outputting objects in PDF files


Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

A job ticket is useful when you want to send a PDF file to a service bureau, where the file is converted to film or plates. You can include specifications for publishing PDF files, including information about the customer, delivery, and the finishing of a job.

Generating a job ticket lets you embed a job ticket file or save an external file. When you embed a job ticket file, you create a PDF file that contains a Portable Job Ticket object. When you create an external file, you create two separate files; a PDF file and a JTF file, which can be opened by a Job Ticket Editor. Consult the service bureau or print shop before sending a JTF file.

Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a service bureau receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the low-resolution images for the high-resolution images.

Document settings can be preserved to maintain how a PDF file looks. You can preserve document overprints, halftone screen information, and spot colors.

Printer's marks provide information to the service bureau. You can specify which printer's marks to include on the page. The available printer's marks are as follows:

•	Crop marks [image] represent the size of the paper and appear at the corners of the page. You can add crop marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you output multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns) you can add the crop marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. A bleed determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the image area must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size.

•	Registration marks [image] are required to line up the film, analog proofs, or print plates on a color press. Registration marks print on each sheet of a color separation.

•	Densitometer scale [image] is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale.

•	File information [image] can be printed, including the color profile; name, date, and time the image was created; and page number.

Related Topics

To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

To maintain OPI links in a PDF file

To preserve document settings in a PDF file

To include printer's marks in a PDF file


To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Prepress tab.

3	Enable the Include job ticket check box.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	External file [image] lets you create two separate files, a PDF file and a JTF file

•	Embedded [image] lets you create a PDF file that contains a portable job ticket object

5	Click Settings.

6	In the Job ticket settings dialog box, type job specifications on any of the following pages:

•	Customer info

•	Delivery

•	Finishing

 Tip

•	If you enable the External option, you can save the JTF file by clicking Browse and typing a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

To maintain OPI links in a PDF file

To preserve document settings in a PDF file

To include printer's marks in a PDF file


To maintain OPI links in a PDF file

1	Choose File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Enable the Maintain OPI links check box.

 Note

•	Don't use OPI links if you are not sure whether your PDF file is destined for an OPI server.

Related Topics

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

To preserve document settings in a PDF file

To include printer's marks in a PDF file


To preserve document settings in a PDF file

1	Choose File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Preserve document overprints [image] lets you trap objects in a document

•	Preserve halftone screen information [image] useful for color separation screening

•	Preserve spot colors [image] instead of converting to RGB or CMYK

Related Topics

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

To maintain OPI links in a PDF file

To include printer's marks in a PDF file


To include printer's marks in a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Prepress tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Crop marks

•	File information

•	Registration marks

•	Densitometer scales

If you want to include a bleed, enable the Include bleed check box, and type a bleed amount in the corresponding box.

 Notes

•	The bleed option is only available for Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, and PDF/X-1. A third party plug-in is required to view printer's marks in Adobe Acrobat.

•	Usually, a bleed amount of .125 to .25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper.

Related Topics

Preparing PDF files for a service bureau

To set up a job ticket for a PDF file

To maintain OPI links in a PDF file

To preserve document settings in a PDF file


Viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files

Before printing your work, you can use Preflight to find potential problems. Preflight checks and displays a summary of errors, possible problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. By default, Preflight checks for many PDF issues, but you can disable the issues that you do not want Preflight to check.

Related Topics

To view the Preflight summary for a PDF file


To view the Preflight summary for a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Preflight tab.

If there are issues that you don't want Preflight to check, click the Settings button, double-click Publishing to PDF, and disable the check boxes that correspond to the issues that you want Preflight to overlook.

 Tip

•	You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style box.

Related Topics

Viewing Preflight summaries for PDF files


Optimizing PDF files

You can optimize PDF files for different versions of Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. You can select a compatibility depending upon what kind of viewer the recipients have. In CorelDRAW, you can select one of four compatibilities: Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, or PDF/X-1. Different compatibilities have different options; for example, the bleed option is only available for Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, and PDF/X-1.

To optimize viewing of a PDF document on the Web, you can linearize a PDF file. Linearizing a file speeds up processing time by loading one page at a time.

Related Topics

To select a compatibility

To linearize a PDF file


To select a compatibility

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the General tab.

4	From the Compatibility list box, choose one of the following:

•	Acrobat 3.0

•	Acrobat 4.0

•	Acrobat 5.0

•	PDF/X-1

Related Topics

Optimizing PDF files

To linearize a PDF file


To linearize a PDF file

1	Click File [image] Publish to PDF.

2	Click Settings.

3	Click the Advanced tab.

4	Enable the Optimize for Web check box.

Related Topics

Optimizing PDF files

To select a compatibility


Color Correction Arrows
 Allows you to correct colors between devices, and control how colors are displayed. The arrows appear orange when on, and grayed and broken when off.


Uniform Fill button
 Opens the Uniform fill dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a uniform fill color.


Fill button
 Opens the Fill flyout. The Fill flyout provides preset fills, as well as various tools for setting uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern fills.


Advanced Import/Exporting Settings button
 Opens the Advanced import/export settings dialog box, which allows you to choose import and export options for profiles.


Advanced Settings button
 Opens the Advanced settings dialog box, which allows you to choose Rendering intent and color engine settings.


Advanced Display Settings button
 Opens the Advanced display settings dialog box, which allows you to choose settings for the out-of-gamut warning color and mapping colors into CMYK gamut.


Create New Custom Palette button
 Lets you create a new custom color palette.


Open Custom Palette button
 Lets you open a custom color palette.


Outline Color button
 Opens the Outline color dialog box, which allows you to create and apply a custom outline color. You can also create and select colors from a custom palette.


Advanced Printer Settings button
 Opens the Advanced printer settings dialog box, which allows you to link a color profile to a composite printer.


Save Custom Palette button
 Lets you save a custom color palette.


Save Custom Palette As button
 Lets you save a custom color palette.


Scanner/Digital Camera button
 Represents a scanner and digital camera.


Advanced Printer Settings button
 Opens the Advanced printer settings dialog box, which allows you to link a color profile to a separations printer.


Paint Color swatch
 Opens the Foreground color dialog box, which lets you choose or create a foreground color.


Paper Color swatch
 Opens the Background color dialog box, which lets you choose or create a background color.


Select Fill button
 Opens the Select fill dialog box, which lets you choose a fill color or texture.


Add Preset button
 Adds a preset color management style to the Color management dialog box.


Remove Preset button
 Removes a preset color management style from the Color management dialog box.


Eyedropper 3X3 button
 Samples and averages the colors of 9 pixels in a 3 x 3 pixel area.


Eyedropper 5X5 button
 Samples and averages the colors of 25 pixels in a 5 x 5 pixel area. This sample size is suitable for high-resolution images.


Eyedropper selection
 Samples and averages the colors of pixels in the selected area.


Color separations button
 Lets you preview color separations before printing.


Mini preview button
 Lets you view the Mini preview window in the Print dialog box.


Mini preview button
 Lets you view the Mini preview window in the Print dialog box.


double sided layout button
 Lets you print on both sides of the page.


imposition layout tool
 Lets you create and edit imposition layouts.


auto margins
 Sets the margins automatically.


auto gutter spacing
 Sets gutter spacing automatically.


cloned auto ordering
 Arranges the same page at each location on a signature.


cut location
 Positions where the document is cut.


equal margins
 Sets the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


equal gutters
 Applies equal horizontal and vertical gutter sizes.


fold location
 Positions where the document is folded.


intelligent auto ordering
 Arranges pages on a signature automatically.


Marks placement tool
 Lets you add, remove, and position printers' marks.


sequential auto ordering
 Arranges pages in reading order, from left to right and top to bottom.


maintain document page size
 Crops the edge of the signature, instead of scaling down the document page.


Add preflight settings button
 Lets you save customized settings as a preset.


Add preflight settings button
 Lets you save customized settings as a preset.


Remove Preflight settings
 Deletes a customized preset.


Add PDF style
 Lets you save a customized PDF style as a preset.


Remove PDF style
 Deletes a customized PDF style preset.


CorelDRAW Poptool File

Tools and buttons listed alphabetically


Three-point ellipse tool
    Lets you draw ellipses by specifying height and width


Three-point rectangle tool
    Lets you draw rectangles by specifying height and width


Three-point curve tool
    Lets you draw curves by specifying height and width


Add layer button
   Lets you save and add to a list of items


Add intersection button
   Lets you add an intersection to a mesh fill


Add node button
   Adds nodes to a selected curve or envelope


Add button
   Lets you add a filter to the Web image optimizer.


Align nodes button
  Aligns selected nodes of an object and their associated control points


Angle reflection tool
 Lets you scale an object or mirror an object vertically or horizontally


Arrows tool
   Lets you draw perfect shape arrows


Artistic brush button
   Lets you apply brush strokes to a curve


Artistic media tool
   Lets you apply strokes or objects to a curve using one of five modes: preset, brush, object sprayer, calligraphic, and pressure-sensitive


Preset button
   Lets you draw curves using preset strokes


Auto-close curve button
   Closes an open path


Auto-close on cut button
   Lets you automatically close objects that are open after you cut them using the Knife tool


Auto-create color styles button
   Opens the Automatically create color styles dialog box, which lets you create color styles from the selected objects in a drawing


Auto-reduce on erase button
   Lets you maintain the nodes of an object's area being erased


Auto apply button
 Allows text formatting changes to be applied as they are made


Basic shapes tool
   Lets you draw a wide variety of shapes, such as triangles, cans, parallelograms, and smiley faces


Bezier tool
   Lets you draw curves by placing nodes and shaping the segments between the nodes


Background color picker
   Lets you pick a background color for hypergraphics [image]    hyperlink navigation tools you can add to Web documents


Accelerate sizing for blend button
Lets you control the rate of change in the size of intermediate objects in a blend


Clockwise blend button
   Applies a color progression that passes clockwise through the spectrum between the colors in a blend's start and end objects


Counterclockwise blend button
   Applies a color progression that passes counterclockwise through the spectrum between the colors in a blend's start and end objects


Miscellaneous options button
   Lets you map the start and end nodes in a blend, split a blend, or fuse a split blend


Use steps or fixed spacing for blend button
   The top button lets you specify the number of intermediate objects between a blend's start and end objects. The bottom button lets you specify the spacing between the intermediate objects of a blend that's fitted to a path.


Object and color acceleration button
   Lets you adjust the object and color acceleration of a selected blend


Path properties button
   Lets you select a new path, detach from a path, or show the path to which a blend is fit


Start and end object properties
   Lets you show the start or end object of a blend and select a new start or end object


Direct blend button
   Applies a color progression that passes directly through the spectrum between the colors in a blend's start and end objects


Bold button
   Lets you apply bold formatting to selected text


Browse button
   Lets you navigate to a spraylist file


Calligraphic button
   Lets you draw curves as if you were using a calligraphic pen


Callout tool
   Lets you draw callouts on a dimension line


Callouts tool
   Lets you draw predefined callouts


Centre distort button
   Lets you position a selected object's distortion effect at the center of the object


Center of rotation position boxes
   Lets you set the horizontal (top box) and vertical (bottom box) position of an object's center of rotation


Circle/square button
   Lets you change the shape of the eraser nib to a circle or a square


Clear extrude button
   Lets you remove an effect from an object


Color picker
Displays a color palette that lets you select a color or create a custom color


Combine button
   Lets you combine selected objects


Counterclockwise contour colors
   Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a counterclockwise path from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color


To center button
Creates a contour to the center


Clockwise contour colors
   Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a clockwise path from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color


Inside button
   Lets you create an inside contour effect and set the number of contour steps in an object


Linear contour colors
   Creates a color progression that passes through the color spectrum in a straight line from the original object's fill color to the last contour shape's fill color


Convert line to curve button
   Changes the selected curve or envelope segment from curved to straight


Convert curve to line button
   Lets you convert a line segment of an envelope into a curve


Convert to curves button
   Lets you convert an object to curves so that you can freely shape the object


Copy button
 Lets you copy selected objects onto the Clipboard


Copy distortion properties button
Copies an object's distortion properties and applies them to the selected object


Application launcher
   Starts another Corel application


Corel online
   Links to the Corel Designer.com Web site


Clockwise/counterclockwise arcs or pies button
   Lets you change the direction of an arc or wedge


New child color(s) button
   Opens the Create a new child color dialog box, which lets you create a child color based on the selected color style


Cross-hatch color picker
   Lets you choose a crosshatch color for Internet objects


Crop bitmap button
   Crops a bitmapped image to the area inside its bounding box. To reposition the bounding box around the area of the bitmapped image, use the Shape tool.


   Curve flyout


Make node a cusp button
 Changes the selected node to a cusp node


Cut button
 Lets you remove selected objects from the drawing window and place them on the Clipboard


Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed bottom box
   Lets you adjust the spacing between dabs


Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed top box
   Lets you adjust the number of objects sprayed at each spacing point


Delete button
   Lets you delete the selected item


Delete current view button
   Deletes the selected view


Dimension tool
   Lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, and angular dimension lines, as well as callouts


Drop shadow vector button
   The start handle lets you change the perspective type. The end handle lets you change the angle of the drop shadow. The slider lets you change the opacity.


Edit bitmap button
   Opens the Bitmap editor, allowing you to edit a bitmapped image


Edit color style button
   Opens either the Edit color style or the Edit child color dialog box, which let you change the color of a color style


Edit preset button
   Lets you edit the new or current file type preset for optimizing an image for the Web


Edit fill button
   Lets you edit the properties of a fill


Missing topic title
   Lets you specify export options for the selected Web-compatible file format


Edit across layers button
   Lets you edit all the layers in a drawing


Clear blend button
   Removes an effect from an object


Ellipse tool
   Lets you draw ellipses and circles


   Ellipse flyout


Add new envelope button
   Adds a rectangular envelope to the selected object so that you can reshape the object, based on the shape you give the envelope


Envelope double arc mode button
   Shapes an envelope by applying a double-arc curve to a segment of an envelope


Envelope single arc mode button
   Shapes an envelope by applying a single-arc curve to a segment of the envelope


Envelope straight line mode button
   Shapes an envelope by applying a straight line to a segment of the envelope


Envelope unconstrained mode button
   Shapes an envelope by moving envelope nodes freely and using control points to make precise adjustments


Eraser tool
   Lets you erase portions of an object


Export button
   Lets you save a drawing to a different file format


Extend curve to close button
   Draws a line between two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


Missing topic title
   Lets you resize an object by scaling it along the horizontal and vertical axes, relative to its anchor point


Missing topic title
   Lets you slant the horizontal and vertical lines of an object, relative to the object's anchor point


Extract subpath button
   Lets you extract a path from an object


Missing topic title
   Adds a point light, which you can position to cast a light in a specific direction


Missing topic title
   Provides controls that let you apply ambient light to a bitmapped image extrusion


Use extrude fill for bevel
   Provides additional controls that let you set bevel properties for the selected control object


Missing topic title
   Provides additional controls that let you set bevel properties for the selected bitmapped image extrusion


Color button
   Provides additional controls that let you set color properties for extruded surfaces of the selected object


Missing topic title
   Lets you specify the size of an extrusion in a bitmapped object


Lighting button
   Provides additional controls that let you set lighting properties for the selected extrusion


Lights button
   Lets you add or remove a simulated light source. A light source projects toward the selected extruded object when the button appears pressed.


Interactive display box
   Provides additional controls that let you set a bevel for the control object interactively


Missing topic title
   Removes the selected point light from the bitmapped image extrusion


Extrude rotation button
   Provides additional controls that let you specify rotation values for the selected extrusion


Use solid color button
   Lets you apply a color, other than that of the control object, to the extruded surfaces


Use color shading button
   Lets you blend two colors along the length of the extruded surfaces


Use object fill button
   Applies the fill of the control object to all of its extruded surfaces


Bevels button
   Provides additional controls that let you set bevel properties for the selected control object


Vector extrusion mode button
   Lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object


Eyedropper fill/outline button
   Lets you fill an object with a color that you select from another object using the Eyedropper tool


Paintbucket tool
   Lets you fill an object with a color that you select from another object using the Eyedropper tool


   Eyedropper flyout


Eyedropper tool
   Lets you select a fill color from an object in a drawing


   Fill flyout


Fill tool
   Lets you apply fills to the selected object


Flowchart shapes tool
   Lets you draw flowchart shapes


Flyout arrow button
   Opens a flyout menu


Conical fountain fill button
Lets you apply a conical fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a circular path that radiates from the center of the object


Fountain fill dialog button
   Opens the Fountain fill dialog box, which lets you specify attributes for a fountain fill


Radial fountain fill button
Lets you apply a radial fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a series of concentric circles that radiates from the center of the object


Square fountain fill button
Lets you apply a square fountain fill, which displays a progression of colors in a series of concentric squares that radiates from the center of the object outwards


Free transform tool
   Lets you change the orientation and appearance of objects and gives you access to the four free-transform tools on the property bar


Freehand tool
   Lets you draw freehand lines and shapes by dragging the cursor across the drawing page


Freeze button
   Fixes the contents of a transparency so that you can move the transparency without changing its appearance


First page button
   Lets you move to the first page in a drawing using the document navigator located at the bottom left of the drawing window


Fuse end button
   Fuses a split or compound blend component from the end object


Fuse start button
   Fuses a split or compound blend component from the start object


Graph paper columns and rows box
   Lets you specify the number of rows and columns in the grid you want to draw with the Graph paper tool


Graph paper tool
   Lets you draw a grid with the Graph paper tool


Ungroup button
   Lets you ungroup a grid object into its component rectangles.


Hand tool
   Lets you move a drawing around in the drawing window like you would move a paper around on a desk with your hand


Horizontal mirror button
   Mirrors an object horizontally


Import button
   Lets you bring another drawing into the active drawing


Import placement start cursor
   Lets you choose where you want to position an imported file in the drawing window


Missing topic title
   Rescans the entire drawing to check for HTML object conflicts


Missing topic title
   Opens the HTML conflicts page of the Options dialog box, which lets you set the type of conflicts you want displayed


Interactive dropshadow tool
   Lets you create the illusion of lighting in a two-dimensional drawing by adding a shadow to an object. You can adjust properties such as feathering, opacity, edge style, and color.


Interactive blend tool
   Lets you blend one object into another through a series of intermediate shapes


Interactive connector tool
   Lets you draw a flow line between two shapes


Interactive contour tool
   Lets you create a series of concentric shapes radiating into, or out of an object


Interactive distortion tool
   Lets you apply a push or pull distortion, a zipper distortion, or a twister distortion to the selected object


Interactive envelope tool
   Lets you distort the shape of an object by applying an envelope to it and shaping the envelope


Interactive extrude tool
   Lets you give objects a three-dimensional look


Interactive fill tool
   Lets you apply fills to the selected object


   Interactive fill flyout


   Interactive tools flyout


Interactive horizontal spacing arrow
   Lets you adjust the space between characters or words you select with the Shape tool


Interactive transparency tool
   Lets you apply a transparency to an object


Missing topic title
   Automatically repairs HTML object conflicts that don't need manual repair


Show hotspots button
   Lets you view Internet hotspot objects


Intersect button
   Lets you create a new object from the area where multiple objects overlap


Missing topic title
   Lets you set the ruler origin by dragging the ruler onto the drawing window


Interactive vector handles
   Lets you change the attributes of a fill such as the angle, center point, and opacity by dragging the handles and moving the slider


Italic button
   Lets you apply italic formatting to the selected text


Keep lines button
   Lets you keep the lines of an object straight or convert them to curves. Straight lines are applied when the button appears pressed.


Knife tool
   Lets you break an object into separate objects


Last page button
   Lets you move to the last page in a drawing using the document navigator located at the bottom left of the drawing window


Eye icon
   Lets you display or hide a layer


Pencil icon
   Lets you lock and unlock a layer to prevent or allow editing


Printer icon
   Lets you print or export a layer


Layer manager view button
   Switches to layer manager view, displaying lists of layers, but no objects or sublevels


Leave as one object button
   Lets you split an object into two subpaths rather than two objects


Pop-up slider button
   Lets you access the pop-up slider


Refresh button
   Lets you update all links in Web-enabled objects in Link manager Docker window/palette.


Link to pointer
   Indicates that text can flow into the text frame or object being pointed to


Magnifying glass icon
   Lets you access the magnification level stored with a saved view and apply it to any page of a drawing


Interactive mesh fill tool
   Lets you apply a mesh object to simple objects, curves, and bitmapped images


Back one
   Lets you move back one page in a drawing using the document navigator located at the bottom left of the drawing window


Navigator button
   Lets you reposition your view of a drawing after you change the zoom level. A miniature, pop-up version of the drawing window lets you control the position of the actual drawing window.


Forward one
   Lets you move forward one page in a drawing using the document navigator located at the bottom left of the drawing window


Page number
   Lets you choose a specific page number to move to in a drawing using the document navigator located at the bottom left of the drawing window


New button
   Begins a new file by creating a blank drawing page


New color style button
   Lets you create a new color style


New layer button
   Adds a layer to a drawing


No color swatch button
   Lets you remove the fill or outline color from the selected object, leaving it transparent


Nonprinting characters button
   Lets you display or hide nonprinting characters


No fills button
   Lets you remove a fill from an object


No outline button
   Lets you remove an outline


Object and color acceleration button
   Lets you adjust the acceleration for contour color and lines


   Object flyout


Open button
   Lets you open an existing file or style template


Outline tool
   Opens the Outline pen dialog box, which lets you specify outline properties for objects


   Outline flyout


Page icon
   In a multipage drawing, lets you revert to the magnification level stored with a saved view and apply it to the specific page the view was saved at


Paintbucket tool
   Lets you fill an object with a color that you select from another object using the Eyedropper tool


Save button
   Lets you save the current palette's changes.


Save as button
   Lets you save a new palette.


Paste button
   Pastes Clipboard contents into a drawing


Pattern fill dialog button
   Opens the Pattern fill dialog box, which lets you apply a pattern fill to an object


Pen tool
   Lets you draw curves one segment at a time


   Perfect Shapes flyout


Pick tool
   Lets you select objects and then move or resize them


Polygon button
Lets you change a star to a polygon


Polygon tool
   Lets you draw polygons and stars


Polyline tool
  Lets you draw lines and curves one segment at a time in preview mode.


Missing topic title
   Lets you position an object precisely using the Transformation Docker window/palette on the property bar


Missing topic title
   Opens the PostScript texture dialog box, which lets you apply a PostScript texture fill to an object


Missing topic title
   Lets you draw curves using preset strokes


Preset pop-up menu
   Lets you select preset extrusions for vector objects


Single pane button
  Lets you display a Web optimizer preview in a single pane.


Double horizontal panes button
  Lets you display the two Web optimizer previews in horizontal panes


Double vertical panes button
  Lets you display the two Web optimizer previews in vertical panes


Four panes button
 Lets you display four Web optimizer previews


Pressure button
 Lets you draw curves with a pressure-sensitive pen controlling the width of the stroke


Print button
   Lets you print a drawing, modify print options, and change the printer and its properties


Push and pull distortion button
Distorts the selected object either by pushing the object's nodes away from the center of the distortion or by pulling the object's nodes toward the center of the distortion


Random distortion button
Lets you make the zipper distortion random or return it to a uniform pattern. Random zipper distortion is applied when the button appears pressed.


    Rectangle flyout


Rectangle tool
    Lets you draw rectangles and squares


Redo button
   Lets you restore an action you have cancelled


Relative to object button
   Lets you move an object a specified distance from its current position in the drawing window


Delete node(s) button
   Deletes the selected node or nodes


Remove preset button
    Removes the selected preset. The conversion options specified in the preset are no longer available


Resample button
   Opens the Resample dialog box, which lets you change the dimensions or resolution of the selected bitmapped image


Reverse curve direction button
   Reverses the direction of a curve


Right-arrow button
   Opens a menu which lets you choose display options for a window


Rotate button
   Lets you specify rotation settings such as the angle and center of rotation for an object


Rotate and skew nodes button
   Displays eight rotating/skewing handles that let you rotate and skew selected parts of a curve


Rotation handles
   Lets you drag an object in circular motions to rotate it around its current position


Roughen brush
 Lets you apply roughening to the outline of an object


Enter a fixed value for bearing settings box
 Lets you set the Roughen brush bearing angle to determine the direction of the roughening spikes.


Save artistic media stroke button
Saves the selected object or objects as a preset artistic media stroke


Save button
   Saves the active drawing


Missing topic title
 Saves the current configuration of settings for a preview area in the Web image optimizer


Large icons
   Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result files as large icons


Small icons
   Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result files as small icons


List icons
   Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result files in a list


Detail view
   Displays Scrapbook Docker window search result files in a detailed list


Contents on the Web button
    Allows you to search the Corel http site for images, clip art, and photos.


   Shape edit flyout button


Shape flyout
   Shape edit flyout


Shape tool
   Lets you manipulate nodes and paths to change the shape of objects


Show units for dimension button
   Lets you show the dimension units of a dimension line


Make node smooth button
 Changes the selected node to a smooth node


Use stylus bearing box
   Lets you set the bearing angle for the Smudge or Roughen brush


Smudge brush
   Lets you apply smudging to an object


Use stylus bearing button
  Lets you change the bearing angle of the Smudge brush or Roughen brush by using the graphics tablet stylus.


Nib size box
   Lets you select the size of the Roughen brush or Smudge brush tip


Use stylus pressure button
   Lets you use the graphics stylus pressure to apply the Roughen brush and Smudge brush effects


Use stylus tilt box
   Lets you change the height of the spikes by using the Roughen brush and the shape of the distortion by using the Smudging brush.


Add dry out to the effect box
   Lets you creating a narrowing or widening to the smudging effect.


Use stylus tilt button
   Lets you use the angle of tilt when using the graphics tablet stylus.


Enter a value for frequency of spikes box
   Lets you set the number of spikes in an area by using the Roughen brush.


Snap to guidelines button
 Snaps objects to guidelines


Logarithmic spiral button
   Lets you draw logarithmic spirals so that the distance between each revolution increases towards the spiral's outer edge


Symmetrical spiral button
   Lets you draw symmetrical spirals so that the distance between each revolution is constant


Spiral tool
   Lets you draw symmetrical and logarithmic spirals


Split blend tool
   Lets you split a blend


Sprayer button
   Lets you draw a sprayline object


Spraylist file pop-up menu
   Lets you choose from preset or customized spraylines


Offset button
   Lets you offset objects from the path of the line sprayed


Reset values button
   Lets you reset a spraylist to its saved settings


Rotation button
   Lets you rotate a sprayline


Star shapes tool
   Lets you draw a star


Star button
   Lets you change a polygon to a star


Stretch and scale nodes button
   Displays eight stretching/scaling handles that let you stretch and scale selected parts of a curve


Delete button
   Lets you delete a filter from the Web image optimizer.


Make node symmetrical button
   Changes the selected node to a symmetrical node


Target pop-up menu
   Lets you choose the browser frame in which the target file will appear


Insert in object pointer
   Lets you insert a paragraph text frame inside an object


Fit to path pointer
   Lets you add artistic text along a path or outline


Insert object pointer
   Lets you insert an object into paragraph or artistic text


Text tool
   Lets you type words directly on the screen as artistic text or create a paragraph text frame and enter text in the frame


Text tool
   Lets you type directly in the drawing window or drag to create a text frame in which you can type


Add preset button
Lets you add a preset texture fill


Delete preset button
Lets you delete the selected preset texture fill


Add texture fill button
Lets you add a texture to one of the libraries or modify an existing texture. You can also specify and apply a texture fill.


Delete texture fill button
Deletes the selected texture from the library


Texture fill dialog button
   Opens the Texture fill dialog box, which lets you apply a texture fill to an object


Trim button
   Lets you trim objects to create new, irregularly shaped objects by removing the areas that overlap other selected objects


Twister distortion button
Lets you apply a Twister distortion to the selected object


Text position drop down button
   Lets you specify where you will place dimension text on the dimension line


Horizontal text shift
Lets you shift a character horizontally


Rotate text
Lets you rotate a character clockwise or counterclockwise


Vertical text shift
Lets you shift a character vertically


{whatsthis.bmp}   No explanation required


Underline button
   Lets you underline selected text


Undo button
   Lets you cancel your previous action


Ungroup all button
   Divides the selected group into its original components. Use this command if the selected group is composed of nested groups and you want to work with the individual objects.


Ungroup button
   Lets you ungroup objects in a group.


Fountain step lock/unlock button
   Lets you move an object a specified distance from its position in the drawing window


Vertical mirror button
   Mirrors an object vertically


Missing topic title
   Opens the Web tab, which lets you specify Web properties


Weld button
   Lets you weld objects together to create one object with a single outline


Zipper distortion button
Lets you apply a zipper distortion to the selected object


Zoom flyout
 Lets you access the Zoom and Hand tools


Zoom tool
   Lets you magnify or reduce the view of a drawing


Zoom in button
   Zooms in on a drawing by a factor of two


Zoom out button
   Zooms out of a drawing by a factor of two or to the previous level of magnification


Zoom to selected button
   Fits all selected objects inside the drawing window


Zoom to page height button
   Fits the height of the drawing page inside the drawing window


Zoom to page width button
   Fits the width of the drawing page inside the drawing window


Zoom to page button
   Fits the entire drawing page inside the drawing window


Zoom to all objects button
   Fits all objects in the drawing window


Edit symbol button
  Lets you edit the selected symbol


Delete symbol button
  Lets you delete the selected symbol


Symbol icon
  Displays next to a symbol name in the Object Manager Docker window/palette


# pgx_3d_zoom


# pgx_3d_slide


# pgx_3d_rotate


# pgx_add light


# pgx_imgprop_button$ Image Properties button


# pgx_imgprop_button_exp$ Image Properties button


# pgx_add_preset$ Add Preset button


Reference information

This reference section provides additional information and technical notes about customizing recovery and warning options, memory, filters, and file associations.


Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)

Corel Application Recovery Manager (C.A.R.M.) is an online wizard that allows you to save your work and exit in case the application becomes unstable. You can also send an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it.

The C.A.R.M. wizard opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action:

•	saving the drawing and closing the application

•	exiting the application without saving the drawing

•	continue working

With the last option, there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your drawing after the last time you saved or kept the program open.

After you have made your selection, you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log. Your report will be vital part of Corel's product improvement efforts.

You can disable C.A.R.M., but doing so can result in your losing any work since the last time you saved.

Related Topics

To disable Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)


To disable Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, click Global.

3	Disable the Enable CARM check box.

 Notes

•	All Corel applications installed on your computer are affected when C.A.R.M. is disabled.

Related Topics

Corel Application Recovery Manager (Windows)


Specifying memory options

You can increase the amount of memory available using swap disks (Windows) or scratch disks (Mac OS). When you perform an action that requires more RAM than is available in your computer, image information can be swapped to the hard disk. If you have two hard disks, or two partitions, you can set up both a primary and a secondary disk.

Although swap disks (Windows) or scratch disks (Mac OS) let you artificially increase the amount of memory available on your computer, swapping image information to hard disks requires more processing time than when it is sent to your computer's RAM.

If you are using Windows, you can also choose how much of the available RAM on your computer is reserved for storing the images you open and edit. Set the amount of memory based on the type of work you perform and the number of applications you usually run simultaneously. If you increase the amount of memory reserved for images and find the application's performance has decreased, you might need to reduce this amount so that more RAM is available to run the application.

Related Topics

To create swap disk space for temporary storage

To specify how much RAM is used to store drawings (Windows)


To create swap disk space for temporary storage

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	Click Workspace, and click Memory in the list of categories.

3	Choose a disk from the Primary disk list box.

4	Choose a disk from the Secondary disk list box.

5	Click OK.

6	Restart the application to apply the changes.

 Notes

•	You should set the total amount of disk space two or three times larger than the size of your uncompressed images.

•	(Windows) Primary and secondary swap disk space are allocated to the user's temp folder by default. You can change the swap disk space folder only if you have sufficient privileges on your system.

Related Topics

Specifying memory options

To specify how much RAM is used to store drawings (Windows)


To specify how much RAM is used to store drawings (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	Click Workspace, and click Memory in the list of categories.

The Memory usage area of the Memory page displays the total amount of memory available on your computer.

3	In the Max box, type the percentage of the total memory you want to make available for storing drawings.

The amount of memory this percentage corresponds to appears to the right of the Max box.

4	Restart CorelDRAW for the new settings to take effect.

Related Topics

Specifying memory options

To create swap disk space for temporary storage


Disabling warning messages

You may encounter warning messages while working in the application. Warning messages explain the consequences of an action you are about to perform, and inform you of permanent changes that might result from that action. Although the warnings are helpful, you can disable them so you don't have to view them after you become familiar with the software. Avoid disabling warning messages until you are comfortable with the application and familiar with the results of the commands you use.

Related Topics

To disable warning messages


To disable warning messages

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	Click Workspace, and click Warnings in the list of categories.

3	Disable one or more of the check boxes

Related Topics

Disabling warning messages


Viewing system information (Windows)

You can view information about your computer as well as information about the application itself. For example, you can view details about your computer's setup. You can view detailed information about your system, display and printing properties, Corel applications and DLL files, and system DLL files. This feature is useful, for instance, to find out how much memory you have on the drive to which you want to save a file.

Related Topics

To view system information (Windows)


To view system information (Windows)

1	Click Help [image] About CorelDRAW.

2	Click System info.

3	Choose a category from the Choose a category list box.

 Tip

•	Click the Save button to store system information for printing.

Related Topics

Viewing system information (Windows)


Customizing filters

Filters are used to convert files from one format to another. They are organized into four types: raster, vector, animation, and text. You can customize filter settings by adding or removing filters so that only the filters you need are loaded. You can also change the order of the list of filters and reset filters to the default setting.

Related Topics

To add a filter

To remove a filter

To change the order of the list of filters


To add a filter

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Double-click a type of filter in the Available file types list.

4	Click a filter.

5	Click Add.

Related Topics

Customizing filters

To remove a filter

To change the order of the list of filters


To remove a filter

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click a filter in the List of active filters.

4	Click Remove.

Related Topics

Customizing filters

To add a filter

To change the order of the list of filters


To change the order of the list of filters

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click a filter in the List of active filters.

4	Click one of the following:

•	Move up [image] moves the filter up the list

•	Move down [image] moves the filter down the list

 Tip

•	You can reset the List of active filters to the default setting by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing filters

To add a filter

To remove a filter


Customizing file associations (Windows)

You can associate a number of different file types with Corel applications. When you double-click a file you have associated with an application, the application starts and the file opens. When you no longer need a file type association, you can break it.

Related Topics

To associate a file type with CorelDRAW (Windows)

To break a CorelDRAW file type association (Windows)


To associate a file type with CorelDRAW (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click Associate.

4	In the Associated file extensions with CorelDRAW 11 list, enable the check box of the file type you want to associate.

 Note

•	You can reset file associations by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing file associations (Windows)

To break a CorelDRAW file type association (Windows)


To break a CorelDRAW file type association (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters.

3	Click Associate.

4	In the Associated file extensions with CorelDRAW 11 list, disable the check box of the file type association you want break.

 Note

•	You can reset file associations by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing file associations (Windows)

To associate a file type with CorelDRAW (Windows)


Shaping objects

CorelDRAW lets you shape objects in various ways.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	working with curve objects

•	skewing and stretching objects

•	smudging objects

•	roughening objects

•	applying distortion effects

•	shaping objects using envelopes

•	splitting and erasing portions of objects

•	trimming objects

•	welding and intersecting objects

•	blending objects

•	creating PowerClip objects

For more information about working with paths and subpaths, see Reference: Shaping objects.


Working with curve objects

CorelDRAW lets you shape objects by manipulating their nodes and segments. An object's nodes are the tiny squares that display along the object's outline. The line between two nodes is called a segment. Moving an object's segments lets you make coarse adjustments to the object's shape, while changing the position of its nodes lets you fine tune the shape of the object.

Most objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of spirals and freehand and Bèzier lines. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape of an object, it is recommended that you convert that object to a curve object. By converting objects to curves, you can shape them by adding, removing, positioning, as well as aligning and transforming their nodes.

Before you can manipulate an object's nodes, you must select them. When working with curve objects you can select individual, multiple, or all of the object's nodes. Selecting multiple nodes lets you shape different parts of an object simultaneously.

When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments, and therefore the amount of control you have over the shape of the object. You can also remove nodes to simplify an object's shape.

When you create an object, it is made up of one or multiple paths. If you are working on an open object, such as a freehand line, you can join its start and end nodes. When you join the start and end nodes, the two nodes are pulled together to create a closed object. You can add color to the inside of closed paths that you create. For information on applying fills, see "Filling objects." If the paths consist of multiple subpaths, you can break paths apart to extract subpaths. For information on breaking paths apart see "Splitting and erasing portions of objects."

After you create a curve object, you can align its nodes horizontally or vertically.

You can change the nodes on a curve object to one of four types: cusp, smooth, symmetrical, or line. Cusp nodes make the node's intersecting line take on the shape of a corner or point when you adjust the position of the node's control points. Smooth nodes make the node's intersecting line take on the shape of a curve. Each control point can be shortened or lengthened independently, giving you smaller or larger angles to work with. Symmetrical nodes make the node's intersecting line take on the shape of a curve as well as intersect the node at exactly the same angle. Line nodes let you shape objects by changing the shape of their segments. You can make a curve segment straight or a straight segment curved.

You can also change the direction of a segment by reversing the position of its start and end nodes. The effect is transparent only when the ends of a segment are different.

You can also shape objects by stretching, scaling, rotating, and skewing their nodes. For example, you can scale the corner nodes of a curve object to enlarge the curve object proportionally. Stretching, on the other hand, elongates a curve object so that its shape is distorted. All or parts of a curve object can be rotated in a counterclockwise or clockwise direction. You can also skew nodes to shape a curve object.

Related Topics

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To convert objects to curve objects

1	Select the object.

2	Click Arrange [image] Convert to curves.

 Note

•	You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual characters.

 Tip

•	You can also convert an object to a curve object by selecting the object and clicking the Convert to curves button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To select a node

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select a curve object.

3	Click a node.

You can also
Select multiple nodes	Press Shift, and click each node.
Select all nodes on a selected curved	Click Edit [image] Select all [image] Nodes.
Deselect a node	Press Shift, and click a selected node.
Deselect multiple nodes	Press Shift, and click each selected node.
Deselect all nodes	Click a blank space in the drawing window.
 Tips

•	(Windows) When a curve is selected by using the Shape tool, you can select the first node in a curve object by pressing Home, or the last node by pressing End.

•	(Mac OS) When a curve is selected by using the Shape tool, you can select the first node in a curve object by pressing Home. If you have an enhanced keyboard, you can select the last node by pressing End.

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To add or remove a node

To	Do the following
Add a node	Open the Shape edit flyout, click the Shape tool, select a curve object, and double-click where you want to add a node.
Delete a node	Open the Shape edit flyout, click the Shape tool, select a curve object, and double-click a node.
 Tip

•	You can also add a node on a selected line by opening the Curve flyout, clicking the Pen tool, and clicking a point between any two nodes.

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To join the end nodes of a single subpath

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Click a subpath.

3	Click the Auto-close curve button on the property bar.

 Tip

•	You can close multiple subpaths by clicking Arrange [image] Close path. For more information, see "Closing multiple line segments."

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Press Shift, and click a node from each subpath.

3	Click the Extend curve to close button on the property bar.

 Note

•	If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine them into a single curve object, and then join the end nodes of the new subpaths. For information about combining objects, see "Combining objects."

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To align nodes

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select a curve object.

3	Press Shift, and select the nodes you want to align.

4	Click the Align nodes button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Click a node.

3	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Make node a cusp

•	Make node smooth

•	Make node symmetrical

 Tip

•	You can also change an existing node from one type to another using shortcut keys. To change a smooth node to a cusp node or a cusp node to a smooth node, click the node using the Shape tool and press C. To change a symmetrical node to a smooth node or a smooth node to a symmetrical node, click the node using the Shape tool and press S.

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To manipulate a curve object's segments

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To manipulate a curve object's segments

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select a curve object.

3	Drag a segment until it's the shape you want.

You can also
Straighten a curve segment	Click a curve segment, and click the Convert curve to line button on the property bar.
Curve a straight segment	Click a straight segment, and click the Convert line to curve button on the property bar.
Change the direction of the curve	Click a segment, and click the Reverse curve direction button on the property bar.
Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes


To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select a curve object.

3	Select the nodes along the curve you want to transform.

4	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Stretch and scale nodes

•	Rotate and skew nodes

5	Drag a set of handles to transform the nodes.

Related Topics

Working with curve objects

To convert objects to curve objects

To select a node

To add or remove a node

To join the end nodes of a single subpath

To join the nodes of multiple subpaths

To align nodes

To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical

To manipulate a curve object's segments


Skewing and stretching objects

You can skew and stretch objects in CorelDRAW. When you skew an object, you specify the degree by which you want to slant the object.

Stretching changes an object's vertical and horizontal dimensions nonproportionally.

CorelDRAW also lets you change the skew and sizing anchor point of an object from its default center position.

Related Topics

To skew an object

To stretch an object


To skew an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Arrange [image] Transformations [image] Skew.

3	In the Transformations Docker window/palette, type a value in any of the following boxes:

•	H [image] lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the object horizontally

•	V [image] lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the object vertically

If you want to change the object's anchor point, enable the Use anchor point check box, and enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set.

4	Click Apply.

 Note

•	 If you move the skew anchor point, you can reset it to the center again.

 Tip

•	You can also skew an object interactively by dragging one of its skew handles.

Related Topics

Skewing and stretching objects

To stretch an object


To stretch an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Arrange [image] Transformations [image] Size.

3	Enable the Non-proportional check box.

4	In the Transformations Docker window/palette, type a value in the following boxes:

•	H [image] lets you specify the width of a selected object

•	V [image] lets you specify the height of a selected object

5	Click Apply.

 Note

•	The new values that you enter to stretch an object are the basis for a new ratio of the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the object. When you disable the Non-proportional check box, any resizing of the object is based on this new ratio. To revert the object to its original one-to-one proportions before transforming it again, you must disable the Non-proportional check box and then retype the original values.

 Tips

•	You can stretch the sides of an object proportionally by disabling the Non-proportional check box, typing a value in either the H or V box, and pressing Enter.

•	You can also stretch an object from its center by pressing Shift (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) and dragging a corner selection handle.

•	You can also stretch an object in increments of 100% by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Option + Shift (Mac OS), and dragging a corner selection handle.

Related Topics

Skewing and stretching objects

To skew an object


Smudging objects

Smudging lets you distort an object by dragging along its outline. When applying smudging to an object, you can control the extent and shape of the distortion whether you activate the controls for the graphics tablet stylus or use the settings that apply to a mouse.

The smudging effect responds to both the angle of rotation [image] or bearing [image] and the tilt angle of a graphics tablet stylus. Rotating the stylus changes the angle of the smudging effect and tilting the stylus flattens the brush tip and changes the shape of the smudging. If you are using a mouse, you can simulate the bearing and tilt of the stylus by specifying values. Increasing the bearing angle from 0 - 359° changes the angle of the brush stroke. As you decrease the tilt angle from 90° - 1°, you change the smudging shape by flattening the brush tip.

Smudging can respond to the pressure of a stylus on a tablet where the smudging widens with more pressure and narrows with less. If you are using a mouse or want to override stylus pressure, you can enter real values to simulate the pressure of a stylus on a graphics tablet. Negative values to -10 create a narrowing distortion, 0 maintains an even stroke width, and positive values to 10 create an expanding distortion.

Whether you are using a stylus or a mouse, you must specify the nib size. The nib size determines the width of the smudging applied to an object.

You can apply the smudging effect to the inside and outside of an object.

Related Topics

To smudge an object


To smudge an object

1	Select an object using the Pick tool.

2	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Smudge brush tool.

3	Drag around the outline to distort it.

You can also
Change the size of the brush nib	Type a value in the Size of the nib box on the property bar.
Change the size of the brush nib when using the graphics stylus	Click the Use stylus pressure button on the property bar and apply pressure to the stylus.
Widen or narrow the smudging	Type a value between -10 and 10 in the Add dry out to the effect box on the property bar.
Specify the shape of the smudging	Type a value between 1 and 90 in the Enter a fixed value for tilt settings box on the property bar.
Change the shape of the smudging when using the graphics stylus	Click the Use stylus tilt button on the property bar.
Specify the angle of the nib shape for smudging	Type a value between 0 and 359 in the Enter a fixed value for bearing settings box on the property bar.
Change the angle of the nib shape for smudging when using the graphics stylus	Click the Use stylus bearing button on the property bar.
Smudge the inside of an object	Click the outside of an object and drag inwards.
Smudge the outside of an object	Click the inside of an object an drag outwards.
 Note

•	You cannot apply smudging to Internet or embedded objects, linked images, grids, masks, or mesh-filled objects. You cannot apply smudging to objects with blend and contour effects.

 Tips

•	To make the tilt angle, bearing angle, and pressure sensitivity respond to the graphics tablet stylus, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the smudged object, and click a command in the submenu.

•	To get the minimum and maximum values for the smudging controls, right-click (Windows) or Control + click the control on the property bar and click Settings.

Related Topics

Smudging objects


Roughening objects

The roughening effect lets you apply a jagged or spiked edge to objects, including lines, curves, and text. You can control the size, angle, direction, and number of the indentations whether you activate the graphics tablet stylus or apply settings to a mouse.

The roughening effect is determined either by movements of a graphics tablet stylus, by fixed settings, or by automatically applying perpendicular spikes to the line. Tilting the stylus toward and away from the tablet's surface increases and decreases the size of the spikes. If you are using a mouse, you can specify the tilt angle from 1 - 90. You can determine the direction of the spikes by changing the angle of rotation (or bearing) of the stylus as you apply the roughening effect to an object. When you are using a mouse, you can set the bearing angle from 0 - 359°. You can also increase or decrease the number of spikes that are applied as you drag.

The roughening effect also responds to the pressure of the stylus on the tablet. The more pressure you apply, the more spikes are created in the roughened area. If you are using a mouse, you can specify values to simulate the stylus pressure.

You can also change the brush nib size.

Related Topics

To roughen an object


To roughen an object

1	Select an object using the Pick tool.

2	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Roughen brush tool.

3	Point to the area on the outline you want to roughen, and drag the outline to distort it.

You can also
Specify the size of the roughening spikes	Type a value from .01" to 2" in the Size of the nib box on the property bar.
Change the number of spikes in a roughened area	Type a value between 1 and 10 in the Enter a value for frequency of spikes box on the property bar.
Change the number of spikes in a roughened area when using a graphics stylus	Click the Use stylus pressure button on the property bar.
Specify the height of the roughening spikes	Type a value between 1 and 90 in the Enter a fixed value for tilt settings box on the property bar.
Increase the number of roughening spikes as you drag	Type a value between -10 and 10 in the Add dry out to the effect box on the property bar.
Change the height of the roughening spikes when using a graphics stylus	Click the Use stylus tilt button on the property bar.
Specify the direction of the roughening spikes	Choose Fixed direction from the Spike direction list box. Type a value between 0 and 359 in the Enter a fixed value for bearing settings box on the property bar.
Change the direction of the roughening spikes when using a graphics stylus	Choose Stylus setting from the Spike direction list box on the property bar.
Create roughening spikes perpendicular to the path or outline	Choose Auto from the Spike direction list box on the property bar.
 Note

•	Objects with distortions, envelopes, and perspective applied to them are converted to curve objects before the roughening effect is applied.

 Tips

•	To make the tilt angle and bearing angle responsive to the graphics tablet stylus, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the roughened object, and select a command from the submenu.

•	To get the minimum and maximum values for the roughening controls, right-click (Windows) or Control + click the control on the property bar and click Settings.

Related Topics

Roughening objects


Applying distortion effects

You can apply three types of distortion effects to shape objects.

Distortion effect	Description
Push and pull	Lets you push the edges of an object in or pull the edges of an object out
Zipper	Lets you apply a saw tooth effect to the edges of the object. You can adjust the amplitude and frequency of the effect.
Twister	Lets you rotate an object to create a swirl effect. You can choose the direction of the swirl, as well as the origin, degree, and amount of rotation.

After you distort an object, you can change the effect by altering the center of distortion. This point is identified by a diamond-shaped handle, around which a distortion appears. It is similar to a mathematical compass, where the pencil moves around a stationary point. You can place the center of distortion anywhere in the drawing window, or choose to center it in the middle of an object so that the distortion is distributed evenly and the shape of the object changes in relation to its center.

You can create an even more dramatic effect by applying a new distortion to an already distorted object. You don't lose the effect of the original distortion if, for example, you apply a zipper distortion on top of a twister distortion. The CorelDRAW application also lets you remove and copy distortion effects.

Related Topics

To distort an object

To remove a distortion

To copy a distortion


To distort an object

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive distortion tool.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons and specify the settings you want:

•	Push and pull distortion

•	Zipper distortion

•	Twister distortion

3	Point to where you want to place the center of distortion, and drag until the object is the shape you want.

You can also
Change the center of distortion	Drag the diamond-shaped position handle to a new location.
Adjust the number of points on a zipper distortion	Move the slider on the center of the distortion handle.
Apply more than one distortion to an object	Click another distortion type on the property bar, click an object, and drag.
 Note

•	You can reapply the effects to distorted objects.

 Tip

•	You can center a distortion by clicking the Center distortion button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Applying distortion effects

To remove a distortion

To copy a distortion


To remove a distortion

1	Select a distorted object.

2	Click Effects [image] Clear distortion.

 Note

•	Removing a distortion this way clears the most recent distortion you've applied.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a distortion from a selected object by clicking the Clear distortion button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Applying distortion effects

To distort an object

To copy a distortion


To copy a distortion

1	Select the object to which you want to copy a distortion.

2	Click Effects [image] Copy effect [image] Distortion from.

3	Click a distorted object.

Related Topics

Applying distortion effects

To distort an object

To remove a distortion


Shaping objects using envelopes

CorelDRAW lets you shape objects, including lines, artistic text, and paragraph text frames by applying envelopes to them. Envelopes are made of multiple nodes that you can move to shape the envelope and, as a result, change the shape of the object. You can apply a basic envelope that conforms to the shape of an object, or you can also apply a preset envelope. After you apply an envelope, you can edit it, or add a new envelope to continue changing the object's shape. CorelDRAW also lets you copy and remove envelopes.

You can edit an envelope by adding and positioning its nodes. Adding nodes gives you more control over the shape of the object contained in the envelope. CorelDRAW also lets you delete nodes, move multiple nodes simultaneously, change nodes from one type to another, and change a segment of an envelope to a line or curve. For more information about the different types of nodes, see "Working with curve objects."

You can also change the mapping mode of an envelope to specify how the object fits to the envelope. For example, you can stretch an object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then apply the horizontal mapping mode to compress it horizontally so that it fits the shape of the envelope.

Related Topics

To apply an envelope

To copy an envelope

To edit an envelope's nodes and segments

To change the mapping mode


To apply an envelope

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive envelope tool.

3	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Envelope straight line mode [image] creates envelopes based on straight lines, adding perspective to objects

•	Envelope single arc mode [image] creates envelopes with an arc shape on one side, giving objects a concave or convex appearance

•	Envelope double arc mode [image] creates envelopes with an S shape on one or more sides

•	Envelope unconstrained mode [image] creates freeform envelopes, that let you change the properties of the nodes,and add and delete the nodes

4	Click the object.

5	Drag the nodes to shape the envelope.

If you want to reset the envelope, press Esc before releasing the mouse.

You can also
Apply a preset envelope	Click the Add preset button on the property bar and click an envelope shape.
Apply an envelope to an object with an envelope	Click the Add new envelope button on the property bar, and drag the nodes to change the shape of the envelope.
Remove an envelope	Click Effects [image] Clear envelope.
 Tip

•	You can prevent the object's straight lines from being converted to curves by enabling the Keep lines button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Shaping objects using envelopes

To copy an envelope

To edit an envelope's nodes and segments

To change the mapping mode


To copy an envelope

1	Select an object to which you want to copy an envelope.

2	Click Effects [image] Copy effect [image] Envelope from.

3	Select the object from which you want to copy the envelope.

 Tip

•	You can also copy an envelope by selecting an object, clicking the Copy envelope properties button on the property bar, and selecting an object with the envelope you want to copy.

Related Topics

Shaping objects using envelopes

To apply an envelope

To edit an envelope's nodes and segments

To change the mapping mode


To edit an envelope's nodes and segments

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive envelope tool.

2	Select an object with an envelope.

3	Double-click the envelope to add a node or double-click a node to delete it.

You can also
Move several envelope nodes at once	Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar, marquee select the nodes you want to move, and drag any node to a new position.
Move opposing nodes an equal distance in the same direction	Press Shift, select two opposing nodes, and drag them to a new position.
Move opposing nodes an equal distance in the opposite direction	Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears raised, press Shift, select two opposing nodes, and drag them to a new position.
Change an envelope node type	Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears pressed, and click either the Make node a cusp, the Make node smooth, or the Make node symmetrical button.
Change an envelope segment to a straight line or curve	Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears pressed, click a line segment, and click the Convert curve to line button or the Convert line to curve button.
Related Topics

Shaping objects using envelopes

To apply an envelope

To copy an envelope

To change the mapping mode


To change the mapping mode

1	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive envelope tool.

2	Click an object with an envelope.

3	On the property bar, choose one of the following from the Mapping mode list box:

•	Horizontal [image] stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then compresses the object horizontally to fit the shape of the envelope

•	Original [image] maps the corner handles of the object's selection box to the envelope's corner nodes. The other nodes are mapped linearly along the edge of the object's selection box.

•	Putty [image] maps the corner handles of the object's selection box to the envelope's corner nodes

•	Vertical [image] stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then compresses the object vertically to fit the shape of the envelope

4	Drag the nodes or the nodes' control points.

 Note

•	You can't change the mapping mode of paragraph text frames to which you've applied an envelope.

Related Topics

Shaping objects using envelopes

To apply an envelope

To copy an envelope

To edit an envelope's nodes and segments


Splitting and erasing portions of objects

You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You can split a closed object along a straight or jagged line. CorelDRAW lets you choose between splitting an object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two or more subpaths. You can specify whether you want to close paths automatically or keep them open.

CorelDRAW lets you erase unwanted portions of bitmaps and vector objects. Erasing automatically closes any affected paths and converts the object to curves. If you erase connecting lines, CorelDRAW creates subpaths rather than individual objects.

Related Topics

To split an object

To break a path

To erase portions of an object


To split an object

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Knife tool.

2	Position the Knife tool over the object's outline where you want to start cutting.

The Knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly.

3	Click the outline to start cutting.

4	Position the Knife tool where you want to stop cutting, and click again.

You can also
Split an object along a freehand line	Point to where you want to start the cut, and drag to where you want it to end.
Split an object along a Bézier line	Press Shift, click where you want to start cutting an object, and click each time you want to change the direction of the line. If you want to constrain the line by 15-degree increments, press Shift + Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS).
Split an object into two subpaths	Click the Leave as one object button on the property bar.
 Notes

•	By default, objects are split into two objects and paths are automatically closed.

•	When you use the Knife tool on a selected object, the object becomes a curve object.

Related Topics

Splitting and erasing portions of objects

To break a path

To erase portions of an object


To break a path

To	Do the following
Break a path	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool. Click the Break curve button on the property bar.
Extract a broken path from an object	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool. Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a path, and click Break apart. Select a segment, node, or group of nodes that represents the portion of the path you want to extract, and click the Extract subpath button on the property bar.
Related Topics

Splitting and erasing portions of objects

To split an object

To erase portions of an object


To erase portions of an object

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Eraser tool.

3	Drag over the object.

You can also
Change the size of the eraser nib	Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on the property bar, and press Enter.
Change the shape of the eraser nib	Click the Circle/square button on the property bar.
Maintain all the nodes of the area being erased	Disable the Auto-reduce on erase button on the property bar.
 Note

•	When you erase portions of objects, any affected paths are automatically closed.

 Tips

•	You can erase in straight lines by clicking where you want to start erasing, and then clicking where you want to finish erasing. Press Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) if you want to constrain the line's angle.

•	You can also erase an area of a selected object by double-clicking the area with the Eraser tool.

Related Topics

Splitting and erasing portions of objects

To split an object

To break a path


Trimming objects

Trimming creates irregularly shaped objects by removing object areas that overlap. You can trim almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot trim paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones.

Before you trim objects, you must decide which object you want to trim (the target object) and which object you want to use to perform the trimming (the source object). For example, if you want to create a star-shaped cut out of a square object, the star is the source object because you are using it to trim the square. The square is the target object because it's the object you want to trim. The source object trims the part of the target object it overlaps.

The target object retains its fill and outline attributes. For example, if you trim a rectangle that is overlapped by a circle, the area of the rectangle that was covered by the circle is removed, creating an irregular shape.

CorelDRAW lets you trim objects in different ways. You can use a front object as the source object to trim an object behind it, as well as use the back object to trim a front object. You can also remove hidden areas of overlapping objects, so that only the visible areas remain in the drawing. Removing the hidden areas can reduce file size when you convert vector graphics to bitmaps.

Related Topics

To trim an object

To trim front and back objects

To trim overlapping areas among objects


To trim an object

1	Select the source objects.

2	Hold down Shift and click the target object.

3	Click Arrange [image] Shaping [image] Trim.

 Note

•	If you marquee select the objects, CorelDRAW trims the bottom-most selected object. If you select multiple objects individually, the last object selected is trimmed.

 Tip

•	You can also trim objects by marquee selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Trim button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Trimming objects

To trim front and back objects

To trim overlapping areas among objects


To trim front and back objects

1	Marquee select the source and target objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Shaping, and click one of the following:

•	Back minus front [image] removes the front object from the back one

•	Front minus back [image] removes the back object from the front one

 Notes

•	You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object so that the object inside the PowerClip object will assume the new shape of the PowerClip container. For information about PowerClip objects, see "Creating PowerClip objects".

•	Linked objects such as drop shadows, text on a path, artistic media, blends, contours, and extrusions are converted to curve objects before they are trimmed.

Related Topics

Trimming objects

To trim an object

To trim overlapping areas among objects


To trim overlapping areas among objects

1	Marquee select the objects you want to trim.

2	Click Arrange [image] Shaping [image] Simplify.

 Notes

•	You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object, so that the object inside the PowerClip object assumes the new shape.

•	Linked objects such as drop shadows, text on a path, artistic media, blends, contours, and extrusions are converted to curve objects before they are trimmed.

Related Topics

Trimming objects

To trim an object

To trim front and back objects


Welding and intersecting objects

You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or intersect almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones.

You can weld objects to create one object with a single outline. The new object uses the welded objects' perimeter as its outline and adopts the fill and outline properties of the target object. All intersecting lines disappear.

You can weld objects regardless of whether they overlap each other. If you weld objects that do not overlap, they form a weld group that acts as a single object. In both cases, the welded object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object.

You can weld single objects with intersecting lines so that the object breaks into several subpaths, but its appearance remains the same.

Intersecting creates an object from the area where two or more objects overlap. The shape of this new object can be simple or complex, depending on the shapes you intersect. The new object's fill and outline attributes depend on the object you define as the target object.

Related Topics

To weld an object

To intersect objects

To intersect multiple objects


To weld an object

1	Select the source object or objects.

2	Hold down Shift, and click the target object.

3	Click Arrange [image] Shaping [image] Weld.

 Tip

•	You can also weld objects by marquee-selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Weld button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Welding and intersecting objects

To intersect objects

To intersect multiple objects


To intersect objects

1	Select the source object.

2	Hold down Shift, and select the target object.

3	Click Arrange [image] Shaping [image] Intersect.

 Tip

•	You can also intersect objects by selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Intersect button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Welding and intersecting objects

To weld an object

To intersect multiple objects


To intersect multiple objects

1	Marquee select the source object or objects.

2	Hold down Shift, and click each target object.

3	Click Arrange [image] Shaping [image] Intersect.

 Tip

•	You can also intersect objects by marquee-selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Intersect button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Welding and intersecting objects

To weld an object

To intersect objects


Blending objects

CorelDRAW lets you create blends, such as straight-line blends, blends along a path, and compound blends.

A straight-line blend shows a progression in shape and size from one object to another. The outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects progress along a straight-line path across the color spectrum. The outlines of intermediate objects show a gradual progression in thickness and shape.

After you create a blend, you can copy or clone its settings to other objects. When you copy a blend, the object takes on all the blend-related settings, except for their outline and fill attributes. When you clone a blend, changes you make to the original blend (also called the master) are applied to the clone.

You can fit objects along part or all of a path's shape, and you can add one or more objects to a blend to create a compound blend.

You can change the appearance of a blend by adjusting the number and spacing of its intermediate objects, the blend's color progression, the nodes the blends map to, the blend's path, and the start and end objects. You can fuse the components of a split or compound blend to create a single object.

You can also split and remove a blend.

Related Topics

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To blend objects

To	Do the following
Blend along a straight line	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive blend tool. Select the first object, and drag over the second object. If you want to reset the blend, press Esc as you drag.
Blend an object along a freehand path	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive blend tool. Select the first object. Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS) and drag to draw a line to the second object.
Fit a blend to a path	Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive blend tool. Click the blend. Click the Path properties button on the property bar. Click New path. Using the curved arrow, click the path to which you want to fit the blend.
Stretch the blend over an entire path	Select a blend that is already fitted on a path. Click the Miscellaneous blend options button on the property bar, and enable the Blend along full path check box.
Create a compound blend	Using the Interactive blend tool, drag from an object to the start or end object of another blend.
Related Topics

Blending objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To copy or clone a blend

1	Select the two objects you want to blend.

2	Click Effects, and click one of the following:

•	Copy effect [image] Blend from

•	Clone effect [image] Blend from

3	Select the blend whose attributes you want to copy or clone.

 Note

•	You can't copy or clone a compound blend.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

1	Select a blend.

2	Click the Use steps or fixed spacing for blend button on the property bar.

3	Type a value in the Number of steps or offset between blend shapes box on the property bar.

4	Press Enter.

 Tip

•	You can set object and color acceleration rates by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding slider.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

1	Select a blend.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following:

•	Direct blend

•	Clockwise blend

•	Counterclockwise blend

 Note

•	You can't create color progressions using blended objects filled with bitmaps, texture, patterns, or PostScript fills.

 Tip

•	You can set how fast the object's colors transform from the first to the last object by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding sliders.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To map the nodes of a blend

1	Select a blend.

2	Click the Miscellaneous blend options button on the property bar.

3	Click the Map nodes button on the property bar.

4	Click a node on the start object and on the end object.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To	Do the following
Select the start or end object	Select a blend, click the Start and end object properties button on the property bar, and click Show start, or Show end.
Change the start or end object of a blend	Select a blend, click the Start and end object properties button on the property bar, and click New start, or New end. Click an object outside the blend that you want to use as the start or end of the blend.
Fuse the start or end object in a split or compound blend	Press Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and click a start, middle, or end object in a blend. Click the Miscellaneous options button on the property bar. If you have selected the start object, click the Fuse start button. If you have selected the end object, click the Fuse end button.
 Tip

•	You can reverse the direction of the blend by clicking Arrange [image] Order [image] Reverse order.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To change the blend path

1	Select a blend.

2	Click the Path properties button on the property bar, and click New path.

3	Click the path you want to use for the blend.

You can also
Detach a blend from a path	Click the Path properties button on the property bar, and click Detach from path.
Change the path of a selected freehand blend	Click the blend path with the Shape tool, and drag a path's node.
 Tip

•	To select the blend path, click the Path properties button and click Show path.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To split a blend

To remove a blend


To split a blend

1	Select a blend.

2	Click the Miscellaneous options button on the property bar.

3	Click the Split button.

4	Click the intermediate object at the point at where you want to split the blend.

 Note

•	You can't split a blend at the intermediate object that is immediately adjacent to the start or end object.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To remove a blend


To remove a blend

1	Select a blend.

2	Click Effects [image] Clear blend.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a selected blend by clicking the Clear blend button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Blending objects

To blend objects

To copy or clone a blend

To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend fitted to a path

To set the color progression for intermediate objects in a blend

To map the nodes of a blend

To work with the start or end objects in a blend

To change the blend path

To split a blend


Creating PowerClip objects

CorelDRAW lets you place vector objects and bitmaps, such as photos, inside other objects, or containers. A container can be any object, for example artistic text or a rectangle. When you place an object into a container that is larger than the container, the object, called the content, is cropped to fit the form of the container. This creates a PowerClip object.

You can create more complex PowerClip objects by placing one PowerClip object inside another PowerClip object to produce a nested PowerClip object. You can also copy the contents of one PowerClip object to another PowerClip object.

After you create a PowerClip object you can modify the content and the container. For example, you can lock the content, so that when you move the container, the content moves with it. CorelDRAW also lets you extract the content from a PowerClip object, so that you can delete the content or modify it without affecting the container.

Related Topics

To create a PowerClip object

To copy the content of a PowerClip object

To edit the content of a PowerClip object

To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object

To extract the content of a PowerClip object


To create a PowerClip object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] PowerClip [image] Place inside container.

3	Click the object you want to use as the container.

If you want to create a nested PowerClip object, drag the PowerClip object inside a container.

Related Topics

Creating PowerClip objects

To copy the content of a PowerClip object

To edit the content of a PowerClip object

To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object

To extract the content of a PowerClip object


To copy the content of a PowerClip object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] Copy effect [image] PowerClip from.

3	Click a PowerClip object.

Related Topics

Creating PowerClip objects

To create a PowerClip object

To edit the content of a PowerClip object

To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object

To extract the content of a PowerClip object


To edit the content of a PowerClip object

1	Select a PowerClip object.

2	Click Effects [image] PowerClip [image] Edit contents.

3	Edit the contents of the PowerClip object.

4	Click Effects [image] PowerClip [image] Finish editing this level.

 Note

•	While you edit, the container displays in Wireframe mode and cannot be selected.

Related Topics

Creating PowerClip objects

To create a PowerClip object

To copy the content of a PowerClip object

To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object

To extract the content of a PowerClip object


To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object

•	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a PowerClip object, and click Lock Contents to PowerClip.

 Note

•	If you move the container while the content is unlocked, the content remains stationary and is not visible until you move the container over it.

Related Topics

Creating PowerClip objects

To create a PowerClip object

To copy the content of a PowerClip object

To edit the content of a PowerClip object

To extract the content of a PowerClip object


To extract the content of a PowerClip object

1	Select a PowerClip object.

2	Click Effects [image] PowerClip [image] Extract contents.

 Note

•	You must extract the contents of each level in a nested PowerClip separately.

Related Topics

Creating PowerClip objects

To create a PowerClip object

To copy the content of a PowerClip object

To edit the content of a PowerClip object

To lock or unlock the content of a PowerClip object


Reference: Shaping objects

Objects created in CorelDRAW follow a path that gives them their defining shape. When this path is broken or cut, subpaths remain.

Paths and subpaths

•	Paths outline an object's shape and are often visible as one or more line or curve segments. You can disconnect line segments from one another to create subpaths. Even though they are not connected, subpaths are still part of the defining path of the original object; however, you can extract a subpath to create two separate objects: the extracted subpath and the object it was extracted from.

•	Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is constructed. For example, a single curve object with subpaths is often created when text is converted to curves. The letter "O," for instance, is composed of two ellipses: the outside ellipse that defines the letter's shape and the inside ellipse that defines the "hole." The ellipses are subpaths that compose the single curve object, "O". One of the basic reasons for creating an object with subpaths is that you can produce objects with holes in them. In the preceding example, you can see objects underneath the center of the letter "O".


Getting started in CorelDRAW

Drawings are the work that you create and edit in CorelDRAW.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	starting and opening drawings

•	finding and inserting drawing content

•	exploring the basic features of CorelDRAW

•	working with templates

•	undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

•	accessing drawing information

•	zooming and panning

•	previewing a drawing

•	working with views

•	backing up and recovering files

•	saving drawings

•	closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW


Starting and opening drawings

CorelDRAW lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, from a template, or from an existing drawing.

A blank page gives you the freedom to specify every aspect of a drawing.

A template provides you with a starting point and leaves the amount of customization up to you. The templates included with CorelDRAW are available under the following categories:

•	Full page

•	Label

•	Envelope

•	Side-fold

•	Web

For more information about creating and using templates, see "Working with templates".

Basing a new drawing on an existing drawing lets you reuse objects and page settings. CorelDRAW lets you open existing drawings saved to a variety of file formats. For information about the file formats you can open in CorelDRAW, see "File formats."

Related Topics

To start CorelDRAW (Windows)

To start CorelDRAW (Mac OS)

To start a drawing

To open a drawing


To start CorelDRAW (Windows)

•	Click Start [image] All programs [image] Corel graphics product name [image] CorelDRAW 11.

Related Topics

Starting and opening drawings

To start CorelDRAW (Mac OS)

To start a drawing

To open a drawing


To start CorelDRAW (Mac OS)

•	Double-click the CorelDRAW 11 icon in the application's folder.

 Tip

•	You can also start CorelDRAW from the Dock after you have installed the application. To add the CorelDRAW icon to the Dock, drag the icon from the application folder to the left of the line in the Dock.

Related Topics

Starting and opening drawings

To start CorelDRAW (Windows)

To start a drawing

To open a drawing


To start a drawing

To	Do the following
Start a drawing from a blank page	Click File [image] New.
Start a drawing from a CorelDRAW template	Click File [image] New from template, click the tab that corresponds to the template category you want, and choose a template.
 Tip

•	You can specify a layout style (template) by clicking Layout [image] Page setup (Windows) or Document setup (Mac OS), clicking Layout in the list of categories, and choosing a layout style from the Layout list box.

Related Topics

Starting and opening drawings

To start CorelDRAW (Windows)

To start CorelDRAW (Mac OS)

To open a drawing


To open a drawing

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Locate the folder where the drawing is stored.

3	Click a filename.

4	Click Open.

 Tips

•	You can also open a drawing by clicking the Open button on the toolbar.

•	(Windows) If you want to view a thumbnail of the drawing, click the Preview check box.

Related Topics

Starting and opening drawings

To start CorelDRAW (Windows)

To start CorelDRAW (Mac OS)

To start a drawing


Finding and inserting drawing content

You can use clipart, photo images, and sounds stored on the Corel content CDs or that are available online. The digital content manual contains pictures of the graphics available on the CD and their folder locations.

In Windows, you can also access online images directly from Corel on the Web through the Scrapbook Docker window.

Mac OS X has a content find-and-search tool, Sherlock. You can use Sherlock to browse for images using the thumbnail views or use keywords to search for content on the CDs.

Related Topics

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert an image or sound file


To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

1	Click Window [image] Dockers [image] Scrapbook [image] Browse.

2	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

3	Double-click an icon in the CD list and navigate to a folder.

You can also
Browse for files on your computer or network	Double-click the Desktop icon, and navigate to a folder.
Browse for images online	Click the Content on the Web button.
 Note

•	To browse for images online, you must be connected to the Internet.

 Tip

•	To change your browsing view in the Scrapbook Docker window, click the flyout arrow, click View, and choose a view type.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting drawing content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert an image or sound file


To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

1	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

2	Double-click the Sherlock icon in the Dock.

3	Double-click the contents CD icon in the list of disks.

4	Choose the folder you want to browse.

 Tips

•	When you insert a CD into the CD drive, the CD's icon displays on your desktop. You can double-click it to browse through the content folders inside.

•	For help on using Sherlock, click Help [image] Sherlock Help from the desktop.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting drawing content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert an image or sound file


To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

1	Click Window [image] Dockers [image] Scrapbook [image] Search.

2	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

3	Type a keyword in the Search for text box.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting drawing content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To insert an image or sound file


To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

1	Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive.

2	Double-click the Sherlock icon in the Dock.

3	Enable the CD icon check box in the list of disks.

4	Enable the File names option.

5	Type a keyword.

6	Click the magnifying glass button.

 Tip

•	For help on using Sherlock, click Help [image] Sherlock Help.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting drawing content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To insert an image or sound file


To insert an image or sound file

•	Drag the image or sound file to the drawing window.

Related Topics

Finding and inserting drawing content

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Windows)

To search for clipart, photos, and sound files (Mac OS)


Exploring the basic features of CorelDRAW

CorelDRAW has a virtually unlimited number of tools and capabilities to help you create drawings. The following table provides you with the basic features of CorelDRAW so that you can get started.

For information on	See
Drawing lines	Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes
Drawing shapes	Drawing shapes
Creating and manipulating objects	Working with objects
Adding color to objects	Filling objects
Adding text to a drawing	Adding and formatting text
Creating drawings for use on the World Wide Web	Publishing to the Web
Printing drawings	Printing


Working with templates

A template is a set of styles and page layout settings that govern the layout and appearance of a drawing. You can use the default template (CorelDRAW.cdt) or choose one from a wide variety of preset templates available in the application. For information on starting a drawing from a template, see "Starting and opening drawings". If none of the preset templates meets your requirements, you can create a template based on styles you create or styles taken from other templates. For example, if you regularly put together a newsletter, you can save the newsletter's page layout settings and styles to a template.

When you create a new drawing using a template, CorelDRAW formats the page using the template's page layout settings and loads the template's styles in the new file.

You can edit a template by making changes to the styles, page layout settings, or objects. For example, if you like a template but want to make it more versatile, you can add styles that you've created or that you've taken from another template. For information on setting page layout options, see "Specifying the page layout". After you have started a drawing with a template, you can load a different template. When you load a template, you can choose to load just the styles or to load styles, page layout settings, and objects.

Related Topics

To create a template

To edit a template

To create a new file based on a saved template

To load styles from another template


To create a template

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Type a name in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

3	Choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Save as type list box (Windows) or choose CorelDRAW template from the Format list box (Mac OS).

4	 Locate the folder where you want to save the template.

5	Click Save.

Related Topics

Working with templates

To edit a template

To create a new file based on a saved template

To load styles from another template


To edit a template

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Files of type list box (Windows) or CorelDRAW template from the Show list box (Mac OS).

3	Locate the folder where the template is stored.

4	Double-click a template filename.

5	In the Open dialog box, enable the Open for editing check box.

 Tip

•	To preview the contents of a template, enable the Preview check box.

Related Topics

Working with templates

To create a template

To create a new file based on a saved template

To load styles from another template


To create a new file based on a saved template

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Files of type list box (Windows) or CorelDRAW template from the Show list box (Mac OS).

3	Locate the folder where the template is stored.

4	Double-click a template filename.

5	Enable the New from template check box in the Open dialog box.

If, in addition to loading the template's styles, you also want to load page settings and objects, enable the With contents check box.

Related Topics

Working with templates

To create a template

To edit a template

To load styles from another template


To load styles from another template

1	Click Tools [image] Graphic and text styles.

2	On the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette, click the flyout button and click Template [image] Load.

3	Locate the folder where the template is stored.

4	Click a template whose styles you want to load.

5	Click Open.

 Note

•	When you use the Load command, only the styles are loaded. CorelDRAW does not use the template's page layout settings and does not add objects saved with the template to the page.

Related Topics

Working with templates

To create a template

To edit a template

To create a new file based on a saved template


Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

You can undo the actions you perform in a drawing, starting with the most recent action. If you don't like the result of undoing an action, you can redo it. Reverting to the last saved version of a drawing also lets you remove one or more actions. Certain actions applied to objects, such as stretching, filling, moving and rotating, can be repeated to create a stronger visual effect.

Customizing the undo settings lets you increase or decrease the number of actions that you can undo or redo.

Related Topics

To undo, redo, and repeat actions

To customize the undo settings


To undo, redo, and repeat actions

To	Do the following
Undo an action	Click Edit [image] Undo.
Redo an action	Click Edit [image] Redo.
Undo or redo a series of actions	Click Tools [image] Undo Docker (Windows) or Undo palette (Mac OS). Choose the action that precedes all the actions you want to undo, or choose the last action you want to redo.
Revert to the last saved version of a drawing	Click File [image] Revert.
Repeat an action	Click Edit [image] Repeat.
 Notes

•	When you undo a series of actions, all actions listed below the action you choose are undone.

•	When you redo a series of actions, the action you choose and all actions listed between it and the last undone action are redone.

 Tips

•	You can repeat an action on another object or group of objects by selecting the object or objects and clicking Edit [image] Repeat.

•	You can also undo or redo actions by clicking the Undo button or Redo button on the Standard toolbar.

Related Topics

Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

To customize the undo settings


To customize the undo settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click General.

3	Type a value in the Regular box.

 Note

•	The value you specify is limited only by your computer's memory resources. The higher the value you specify, the greater the demand on memory resources.

Related Topics

Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions

To undo, redo, and repeat actions


Accessing drawing information

You can access as you work drawing information such as the number of pages, fonts, text statistics, color models used, and the types of objects the drawing contains. You can also save and print this information.

Related Topics

To access drawing information


To access drawing information

1	Click File [image] Document info.

2	Enable the check box beside each type of information you want to display.

You can also
Save drawing information	Click Save as, specify a folder and filename, and click Save.
Print drawing information	Click Print.
Related Topics

Accessing drawing information


Zooming and panning

You can change the view of a drawing by zooming in to get a closer look or by zooming out to see more of the drawing. You can experiment with a variety of zoom options to determine the amount of detail you want.

Another way in which you can view specific areas of a drawing is by panning. When you work at high magnification levels or with large drawings, you may not be able to see the whole drawing. Panning lets you view areas that aren't displayed by moving the page around in the drawing window.

While you are panning, you can zoom in and out. While you are zooming, you can pan. This saves you from having to alternate between the two tools.

You can specify zooming and panning settings to zoom in quickly to detailed parts of a drawing and zoom out to the larger context.

Related Topics

To zoom

To pan in the drawing window

To establish default settings for zooming and panning


To zoom

1	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Zoom tool.

2	On the property bar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Zoom in

•	Zoom out

•	Zoom to selected

•	Zoom to all objects

•	Zoom to page

•	Zoom to page width

•	Zoom to page height

 Note

•	The Zoom to selected button is available only when you select one or more objects before you open the Zoom flyout.

 Tips

•	When you are not editing text, you can also access the Zoom tool by pressing the Z key.

•	You can also zoom in by double-clicking or dragging anywhere in the drawing window using the Hand tool. To zoom out, double right-click (Windows) or Control + double-click (Mac OS) in the drawing window.

Related Topics

Zooming and panning

To pan in the drawing window

To establish default settings for zooming and panning


To pan in the drawing window

1	Open the Zoom flyout, and click the Hand tool.

2	Drag in the drawing window until the area you want to view displays.

 Tips

•	When you are not editing text, you can also access the Hand tool by pressing the H key.

•	If you want to pan in the drawing window while zoomed in on the drawing, click the Navigator button in the bottom-right (Windows) or bottom-left (Mac OS) corner of the drawing window or the N key. Drag the cross-haired pointer around in the Navigator pop-up window.

Related Topics

Zooming and panning

To zoom

To establish default settings for zooming and panning


To establish default settings for zooming and panning

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, Hand tool.

3	To specify what you want the Zoom or Hand tool to do when you right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) it in the drawing window, enable one of the following options:

•	Zoom out [image] zooms out by a factor of two

•	Context menu [image] displays a menu of commands that you can choose from to zoom to a specific level

Related Topics

Zooming and panning

To zoom

To pan in the drawing window


Previewing a drawing

You can preview a drawing to see how it will look when you print and export. When you preview a drawing, only the objects on the drawing page and in the immediate area of the drawing window are displayed, and you can see all layers that are set to print in Object Manager. If you want to get a closer look at specific objects in a drawing, you can select and preview them, too. When you preview selected objects, the rest of the drawing is hidden.

Before you preview a drawing, you can specify the preview mode. The preview mode affects the speed at which your preview displays and the amount of detail that is displayed in the drawing window.

You can also display consecutive pages on the screen at the same time and create objects that span two pages.

Related Topics

To preview a drawing

To preview selected objects

To specify the full screen preview mode

To view facing pages


To preview a drawing

•	Click View [image] Full-screen preview.

Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window.

Related Topics

Previewing a drawing

To preview selected objects

To specify the full screen preview mode

To view facing pages


To preview selected objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click View [image] Preview selected only.

3	Click View [image] Full-screen preview.

Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window.

 Note

•	If Preview selected only mode is enabled and no objects are selected, Full screen preview displays a blank screen.

 Tip

•	You can disable Preview selected only mode after you return to the application window by clicking View [image] Preview selected only.

Related Topics

Previewing a drawing

To preview a drawing

To specify the full screen preview mode

To view facing pages


To specify the full screen preview mode

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Display.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Use normal view [image] displays the drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps without using anti-aliasing

•	Use enhanced view [image] displays the drawing with or without PostScript fills with anti-aliasing to display a sharper version of your drawing

 Tip

•	You can have PostScript fills display when you preview in Enhanced mode by enabling the Show PostScript fills in enhanced view check box.

Related Topics

Previewing a drawing

To preview a drawing

To preview selected objects

To view facing pages


To view facing pages

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Layout [image] Page setup.

•	(Mac OS) Click Layout [image] Document setup.

2	In the Document, Page list of categories, click Layout.

3	Enable the Facing pages check box.

4	Choose one of the following settings from the Start on list box:

•	Left side [image] starts the document on a left-facing page

•	Right side [image] starts the document on a right-facing page

 Note

•	You will be unable to view facing pages if the document uses a Tent card or Top fold card layout style, or if it contains multiple page orientations. The Left side option is only available for the Full page and Book layout styles.

Related Topics

Previewing a drawing

To preview a drawing

To preview selected objects

To specify the full screen preview mode


Working with views

As you work, CorelDRAW lets you display a drawing in any of the following modes:

•	Simple wireframe [image] displays an outline of the drawing by hiding fills, extrusions, contours, drop shadows, and intermediate blend shapes; also displays the bitmaps in monochrome. It lets you quickly preview basic elements in a drawing.

•	Wireframe [image] displays simple wireframe in addition to intermediate blend shapes.

•	Draft [image] displays a drawing's fills and bitmaps using a low resolution. Eliminates some detail to allow you to focus on the color balances in a drawing.

•	Normal [image] displays a drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps. Refreshes and opens slightly faster than enhanced view.

•	Enhanced [image] displays a drawing with PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics.

The view you choose affects the amount of time it takes for a drawing to refresh or open. For example, a drawing displayed in Simple wireframe view takes less time to refresh or open than does a drawing displayed in Enhanced view.

You can save a view of any part of a drawing so that you can return to that view later. For example, you can save a Wireframe view of an object at 230% magnification, and then switch to this specific view at any time.

Related Topics

To choose a viewing mode

To save a view

To switch to a saved view


To choose a viewing mode

•	Click View, and click one of the following modes:

•	Simple wireframe

•	Wireframe

•	Draft

•	Normal

•	Enhanced

Related Topics

Working with views

To save a view

To switch to a saved view


To save a view

1	Click Tools [image] View manager.

2	Use the Zoom tools on the View manager Docker window/palette to set up a view.

3	Click Add current view.

You can also
Rename a view	Double-click a view name and type a new name.
Delete a saved view	Click a view and click Delete current view.
 Note

•	If you disable the Page icon beside a saved view on the View manager Docker window/palette, CorelDRAW switches to the magnification level only, not the page, when you switch to that view. Similarly, if you disable the Magnifying glass icon, CorelDRAW switches to the page only, not the magnification level.

Related Topics

Working with views

To choose a viewing mode

To switch to a saved view


To switch to a saved view

1	If the View manager Docker window/palette is not open, click Tools [image] View manager.

2	Click a view on the View manager Docker window/palette.

 Tip

•	You can also switch to a saved view by selecting it from the Zoom levels list box on the toolbar.

Related Topics

Working with views

To choose a viewing mode

To save a view


Backing up and recovering files

CorelDRAW can automatically save backup copies of drawings and prompt you to recover them when you restart the program in the event of a system error.

The auto backup feature saves drawings that you have open and modified. During any working session with CorelDRAW, you can set the time interval for automatically backing up files and specify where you want the files to be saved: by default in your temporary folder or to a specified folder.

You can recover backed-up files from the temporary or specified folder when you restart CorelDRAW. Backup files are stored in either the temporary or the user-specified folder. You can choose not to recover a file; however, that file is automatically erased when you shut down the program normally.

Related Topics

To specify auto backup settings

To recover a backup file


To specify auto backup settings

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Workspace list of categories, click Save.

3	Enable the Auto-backup every check box, and choose a value from the Minutes list box.

4	In the Always back-up to area, enable one of the following options:

•	Temporary folder [image] lets you save an auto backup file in the temporary folder

•	Specific folder [image] lets you specify the folder for an auto backup file

You can also
Create a backup file every time you save	Enable the Make backup on save check box.
Disable auto backup	Choose Never from the Minutes list box.
 Notes

•	Auto backup files are named auto_backup_of_filename and can be saved in any folder you specify. Backup files created when you save a drawing are named backup_of_filename and are always stored in the same folder as the original drawing.

•	All open or modified files other than CorelDRAW file format (.cdr) will be backed up as .cdr files.

 Tip

•	You can cancel the creation of an auto backup file by pressing Esc while saving is in progress.

Related Topics

Backing up and recovering files

To recover a backup file


To recover a backup file

1	Restart CorelDRAW.

2	Click OK in the File recovery dialog box.

3	Save and rename the file in specified folder.

 Notes

•	Recovered files are named GraphicsX.cdr, where X is the numbered increment.

•	If you click Cancel, CorelDRAW ignores the backup file and deletes it when you exit the program normally.

Related Topics

Backing up and recovering files

To specify auto backup settings


Saving drawings

CorelDRAW lets you save a drawing as you work.

CorelDRAW offers advanced options that let you assign notes, keywords, and thumbnails to drawings so that you can find them more easily.

By default, drawings are saved to the CorelDRAW file format (.cdr); however, advanced save options let you choose other file formats as well. If you are saving a drawing to use in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported by that application. You can also save a drawing to a previous version of CorelDRAW. For information about file formats supported by CorelDRAW, see "File formats." For information about saving files to other formats, see "Exporting files."

A drawing can also be saved as a template, allowing you to create other drawings with the same properties. CorelDRAW lets you save selected objects in a drawing. If you are working on a large drawing, saving only the selected objects reduces the file size, which can decrease the time it takes to load the drawing. For information about saving a drawing as a template, see "Working with templates."

Related Topics

To save a drawing

To save only selected objects


To save a drawing

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

•	If you want to save notes or keywords with the file, type them in the corresponding box.

•	If you want to specify advanced settings, click Advanced, and specify the settings you want in the Preferences (Windows) dialog box or Options (Mac OS) dialog box.

3	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as list box (Mac OS).

4	Click Save.

 Tips

•	If you want to save changes made to a previously saved drawing, click File [image] Save.

•	You can also save a drawing by clicking the Save button on the Standard toolbar.

Related Topics

Saving drawings

To save only selected objects


To save only selected objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click File [image] Save as.

3	Enable the Selected only check box.

4	Locate the folder where you want to save the file.

5	Type a filename in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

6	Click Save.

Related Topics

Saving drawings

To save a drawing


Closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW

You can close one or all open drawings at any time before quitting CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

To close drawings

To quit CorelDRAW


To close drawings

To close	Do the following
One drawing	Click File [image] Close.
All open drawings	Click Window [image] Close all.
Related Topics

Closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW

To quit CorelDRAW


To quit CorelDRAW

•	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click File [image] Exit.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences [image] Quit CorelDRAW 11.

 Tip

•	You can also quit CorelDRAW by pressing Alt + F4 (Windows) or Command + Q (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW

To close drawings


Working with graphic, text, and color styles

The CorelDRAW application has three types of styles you can create and apply in drawings: graphic, text, and color. After you create a style, you can edit it and apply it to any number of graphic and text objects. When you edit a style, all the unlocked objects using that style are automatically updated, letting you make design changes to many objects in one step.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles

•	customizing the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette

•	creating and applying color styles

•	editing and sorting color styles

•	moving and copying color styles


Creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles

A style is a set of formatting attributes. When you apply a style to an object, all the attributes of the style are applied to that object in one step. Styles can save you considerable time if you must apply the same formatting to several objects.

There are graphic styles and text styles. A graphic style consists of fill and outline settings that you can apply to graphic objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and curves. For example, if you have a group of objects in a drawing that use one graphic style, you can simultaneously change their fill by editing the graphic style. For more information on applying fills see "Filling objects." For more information about changing the appearance of outlines, see "Formatting lines and outlines."

A text style is a set of text settings such as font type and size. Text styles can also include fill and outline attributes. For example, you can create a style that applies a 72 point AvantGarde font with a texture fill. There are two types of text styles: artistic and paragraph. You can also change the properties of default artistic and paragraph text. For example, you can change the properties of default artistic text, so that every artistic text object you create has the same formatting. For information about default text, see "Changing the appearance of text."

You can create a graphic or text style from the properties of an existing object or from scratch, at which time the style is saved. When you apply a style to an object, CorelDRAW overrides the existing text or graphic properties with the properties of the current style. To use the style in another drawing, you can copy the style to the new drawing or save the style in a template. For more information about templates, see "Working with templates." If you copy or import a style with the same name as an existing style, CorelDRAW renames the style by adding a number to the style name. At any point, you can rename a style, unless it is a default style. You can also change the properties of an object back to its previous style if you made a mistake or decide that the previous style was better suited to that object.

After you create a style, you can edit its properties and find any object using a given style. For example, you can find all objects that use the default graphic style. Finding objects assigned a specific style makes editing that style even more efficient.

Related Topics

To create a graphic or text style from an object

To create or edit a graphic or text style

To find objects assigned a specific graphic or text style


To create a graphic or text style from an object

1	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) an object whose style properties you want to save.

2	Click Styles [image] Save style properties.

3	Enable one or more of the following check boxes:

•	Text

•	Fill

•	Outline

4	Type a name for the style in the Name box.

 Note

•	When you create a style from an existing object, CorelDRAW does not automatically apply the style to an object. If you want an object to use the style, you must apply the style. For information about applying a style, see "To create or edit a graphic or text style."

 Tip

•	You can also create a graphic or text style from an object by dragging the object to the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles

To create or edit a graphic or text style

To find objects assigned a specific graphic or text style


To create or edit a graphic or text style

1	Click Tools [image] Graphic and text styles.

2	In the Graphics and text styles Docker window/palette, click the flyout button.

3	Click New, and click one of the following style types:

•	Graphic style

•	Artistic text style

•	Paragraph text style

4	Choose a style from the list.

5	Click the flyout button and click Properties.

6	Click Edit beside a property.

7	Modify any text, fill, or outline properties.

You can also
Apply a style to an object	Select an object, and double-click a style.
Copy object properties	Choose a style, click the flyout button, click Copy properties from, and click the object.
Delete a style	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a style, and click Delete.
Rename a style	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a style, click Rename, type a new name, and press Enter.
Revert to an object's style	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) an object using the Pick tool, and click Styles [image] Revert to style.
Related Topics

Creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles

To create a graphic or text style from an object

To find objects assigned a specific graphic or text style


To find objects assigned a specific graphic or text style

1	Click Tools [image] Graphic and text styles.

2	Choose a style from the list in the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette.

3	Click the flyout button, and click Find.

Related Topics

Creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles

To create a graphic or text style from an object

To create or edit a graphic or text style


Customizing the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette

You can specify what types of styles [image] graphic, artistic text, or paragraph text [image] are displayed in the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette. You can also specify that only the styles available to selected objects will display. For example, when you select artistic text, only artistic text styles appear in the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette.

If you are using several styles to format a drawing, displaying only the styles applicable to the selected object makes it easier to find the style you want. As you select graphic objects and text objects, CorelDRAW automatically refreshes the Docker window/palette and displays only the relevant styles.

Related Topics

To specify which styles display in the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette


To specify which styles display in the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette

1	Click Tools [image] Graphic and text styles.

2	Click the flyout button in the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette.

3	Click Show and click any of the following options:

•	Graphic styles [image] to display graphic styles

•	Artistic text styles [image] to display artistic text styles

•	Paragraph text styles [image] to display paragraph text styles

•	Auto-view [image] to display only those styles available to a selected object

Related Topics

Customizing the Graphic and text styles Docker window/palette


Creating and applying color styles

A color style is a color you save and apply to objects in a drawing. Since an infinite number of colors are available in CorelDRAW, color styles can make it easier to apply the exact color you want.

When you create a color style, the new style is saved to the active drawing. After you create a color style, you can apply it to objects in the drawing. You can also delete color styles if you no longer require them.

One powerful feature of color styles is that you can create a shade or series of shades based on a color style. The original color style is referred to as the "parent" color, and the shades are referred to as "child" colors. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent color but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, PANTONE Hexachrome, and Custom spot color palettes, child and parents are linked to one another but have different tint levels.

CorelDRAW has an Auto-create feature for creating color styles from selected objects. For example, you can import a drawing and Auto-create color styles from an object in the drawing. When you create color styles from an object, the color style is automatically applied to that object so that if you decide to change a color style, the object's related color will also be updated. For more information on importing files, see "Importing files."

When you use the Auto-create feature, you can choose to create few or many parent color styles. After you have converted all colors to color styles, you can, for example, use one parent color to control all red objects, or many parents, one for each shade of red in the drawing.

When creating child colors, colors added from a color-matching system are converted to the parent color's color model so that they can be grouped into appropriate parent-child groups automatically.

Related Topics

To create a color style

To create a child color

To create a series of child colors

To create parent and child colors from an object


To create a color style

1	Click Tools [image] Color styles.

2	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, click the New color style button.

3	Select a color from the New color style dialog box.

You can also
Apply a color style	Select an object, and double-click the name of the style you want to apply in the Color styles Docker window/palette.
Delete a color style	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the color style in the Color styles Docker window/palette, and click Delete.
 Tips

•	You can also create a color style from an object or the color palette by dragging a color to the Color styles Docker window/palette.

•	You can also apply a color style to an object by dragging a color from the Color styles Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Creating and applying color styles

To create a child color

To create a series of child colors

To create parent and child colors from an object


To create a child color

1	Click Tools [image] Color styles.

2	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, choose the color style to which you want to link a child color.

3	Click the New child color(s) button.

4	In the Create a new child color dialog box, specify the settings you want.

5	Type a name in the Color name box.

 Tip

•	You can also create a child color by typing values in the Saturation and Brightness boxes.

Related Topics

Creating and applying color styles

To create a color style

To create a series of child colors

To create parent and child colors from an object


To create a series of child colors

1	Click Tools [image] Color styles.

2	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, choose the color style to which you want to link a child color.

3	Click the New child color(s) button.

4	In the Number of shades area, type a value in the Create box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Lighter shades [image] creates child colors that are lighter than the parent

•	Darker shades [image] creates child colors that are darker than the parent

•	Both [image] creates an equal number of light and dark child colors

6	Adjust the Shade similarity slider.

Move the slider to the left to create very different shades; move the slider to the right to create very similar shades.

 Tip

•	You can also create a series of child colors by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) a color style and clicking Create a child color.

Related Topics

Creating and applying color styles

To create a color style

To create a child color

To create parent and child colors from an object


To create parent and child colors from an object

1	Click Tools [image] Color styles.

2	Select an object or a group of objects.

3	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, click the Auto create color styles button.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Use fill colors

•	Use outline colors

5	Enable the Automatically link similar colors together check box to link similar colors together under their appropriate parent colors.

6	Click the Convert child palette colors to CMYK check box.

If you want to convert colors added from a color-matching system to CMYK so that they can be grouped under an appropriate parent color, enable this check box. If you want these colors to represent separate color styles, disable the check box.

 Tip

•	If you enable the Automatically link similar colors check box, move the Parent creation index slider to determine the number of parent colors created. To test different slider values, click Preview.

Related Topics

Creating and applying color styles

To create a color style

To create a child color

To create a series of child colors


Editing and sorting color styles

You can edit both parent and child colors in CorelDRAW. When you change the hue of a parent color, all of its child colors are updated, based on the new hue and the original saturation and brightness values. For color styles using the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, PANTONE Hexachrome, and Custom spot color palettes, if you change the color of a parent, all child colors are updated, based on the new color and the original tint.

If you want to change the color of the object later, you can edit the parent color, and CorelDRAW will automatically adjust the child colors. For example, if you change a parent color from red to yellow, CorelDRAW converts the child colors of the red parent to shades of yellow.

Sorting color styles allows you to locate a style in less time. Instead of having color styles appearing randomly in a list, you can sort color styles alphabetically by name, or you can have all parent colors with child colors listed first.

Related Topics

To edit a parent or child color


To edit a parent or child color

1	Click Tools [image] Color styles

2	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, choose the parent or child color you want to edit.

3	Click the Edit color style button.

4	Select a color from either of the following dialog boxes:

•	Edit color style [image] for parent colors

•	Edit child color [image] for child colors

You can also
Rename a color style	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a color style, click Rename, type a new name for the color, and press Enter.
Sort colors by name	Click Tools [image] Color styles, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the folder whose color styles you want to sort, and click Sort [image] By names.
Sort by links	Click Tools [image] Color styles, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the folder whose color styles you want to sort, and click Sort [image] By color styles with children.
 Tips

•	You can also edit a parent or child color by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the color and clicking Edit color.

•	You can also rename a color style by clicking the color style, pausing, clicking the color style a second time, typing the new name, and pressing Enter.

Related Topics

Editing and sorting color styles


Moving and copying color styles

You can move a child color from one parent to another. The child color will change color based on the new hue and the original saturation, brightness, or tint levels. You can also copy color styles from one drawing to another.

Related Topics

To move a child color

To copy a color style from one drawing to another


To move a child color

1	Click Tools [image] Color styles.

2	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, drag the child color under another parent color using the Pick tool.

Related Topics

Moving and copying color styles

To copy a color style from one drawing to another


To copy a color style from one drawing to another

1	Open the drawing with the color style you want to copy.

2	Open the drawing to which you want to copy the style.

3	Click Tools [image] Color styles.

4	In the Color styles Docker window/palette, drag the color style to another drawing folder.

Related Topics

Moving and copying color styles

To move a child color


Working with symbols

The CorelDRAW application lets you create objects and save them as symbols. Symbols are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. Each time you insert a symbol into a drawing, you create an instance of the symbol. Symbol definitions, as well as information about instances, are stored in the library, which is part of the CorelDRAW (CDR) file. Using symbols for objects that appear many times in a drawing helps to reduce file size.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating, editing, and deleting symbols

•	using symbols in drawings

•	sharing symbols between drawings

For information about modifying symbol instances and about unsupported object types, see "Reference: Working with symbols."


Creating, editing, and deleting symbols

Symbols are objects that are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. You can have multiple instances of a symbol in a drawing with little impact on file size. Symbols make editing a drawing quicker and easier, as changes made to a symbol are automatically inherited by all instances.

Symbols are created from objects. When you convert an object to a symbol, the new symbol is added to the library, and the selected object becomes an instance. You can also create a symbol from multiple objects.

You can edit a symbol; any changes you make affect all instances in a drawing. You can also delete a symbol from the library.

Related Topics

To convert an object to a symbol

To edit a symbol

To delete a symbol


To convert an object to a symbol

1	Select an object or multiple objects.

2	Click Edit [image] Symbol [image] New symbol.

 Note

•	Symbols cannot span layers. If you convert objects on different layers to a symbol, the objects are combined on the topmost object's layer. For more information about layers, see "Working with layers."

 Tip

•	You can also convert an existing object or objects to a symbol by dragging the object or objects to the Library Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Creating, editing, and deleting symbols

To edit a symbol

To delete a symbol


To edit a symbol

1	In the Library Docker window/palette, choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

If you want to name or rename the symbol, double-click the symbol's name box, and type a name.

2	Click the Edit symbol button.

3	Modify the objects on the drawing page.

4	Click the Finish editing symbol tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing window.

 Notes

•	Changes made to a symbol are automatically made to all instances in the active drawing.

•	While working in symbol edit mode, you cannot add layers or save a drawing.

 Tips

•	You can also edit a symbol by selecting an instance in the drawing window, and clicking the Edit symbol button on the property bar.

•	While editing a symbol, you can insert an instance of another symbol, which creates a nested symbol. You cannot, however, insert an instance of the same symbol.

Related Topics

Creating, editing, and deleting symbols

To convert an object to a symbol

To delete a symbol


To delete a symbol

1	In the Library Docker window/palette, choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

2	Click the Delete symbol button.

 Note

•	When you delete a symbol, it is removed from the library, and all instances of the symbol are removed from the drawing.

Related Topics

Creating, editing, and deleting symbols

To convert an object to a symbol

To edit a symbol


Using symbols in drawings

You can insert a symbol into a drawing, which creates a symbol instance. You can modify certain properties of a symbol instance, such as size and position, without affecting the symbol definition stored in the library. You can revert a symbol instance to an object or objects while preserving its properties. You can also delete a symbol instance.

Related Topics

To insert a symbol instance

To modify a symbol instance

To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects

To delete a symbol instance


To insert a symbol instance

1	Open the Library Docker window/palette by clicking Edit [image] Symbol [image] Library.

2	Choose a symbol from the Symbols list.

3	Click Insert.

 Tip

•	You can also insert a symbol instance by dragging a symbol from the Library Docker window/palette to the drawing window.

Related Topics

Using symbols in drawings

To modify a symbol instance

To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects

To delete a symbol instance


To modify a symbol instance

1	Select a symbol instance.

2	Make any changes.

 Notes

•	If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated as if they were a group. You cannot modify individual objects in a symbol instance.

•	Not all properties of a symbol instance can be modified. For a list of properties that can be modified, see "Modifying symbol instances."

 Tip

•	When a symbol instance is selected, you can modify many object properties on the property bar.

Related Topics

Using symbols in drawings

To insert a symbol instance

To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects

To delete a symbol instance


To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects

1	Select a symbol instance.

2	Click Edit [image] Symbol [image] Revert to object(s).

 Note

•	The symbol remains in the library.

 Tip

•	You can also revert a symbol instance to an object by right-clicking the symbol instance (Windows) or Control + clicking the symbol instance (Mac OS) and clicking Revert to object(s).

Related Topics

Using symbols in drawings

To insert a symbol instance

To modify a symbol instance

To delete a symbol instance


To delete a symbol instance

1	Select a symbol instance.

2	Press Delete.

 Note

•	The symbol remains in the library.

Related Topics

Using symbols in drawings

To insert a symbol instance

To modify a symbol instance

To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects


Sharing symbols between drawings

In CorelDRAW, each drawing has its own library of symbols, which is part of the CorelDRAW (CDR) file. You can share symbols between drawings by copying and pasting. Copying symbols to the Clipboard leaves the originals in the library.

You can also copy and paste instances of a symbol to and from the Clipboard. Pasting a symbol instance places the symbol in the library and also places an instance of the symbol in the drawing. Subsequent pasting will place another instance of the symbol in the drawing without adding to the library. If a modified symbol instance is pasted into a drawing, the new instance maintains the properties of the original instance, and the new symbol definition in the library maintains the properties of the original symbol. Symbol instances are copied and pasted in the same way other objects are. For more information, see "Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects."

Related Topics

To copy or paste symbols


To copy or paste symbols

To	Do the following
Copy symbols to the Clipboard	In the Library Docker window/palette, choose the symbol or symbols from the Symbols list, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS), and click Copy.
Paste symbols from the Clipboard	In the Library Docker window/palette, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS), and click Paste.
 Note

•	If a pasted symbol has the same name as an existing symbol, the new name is appended with an increment number. For example, a pasted symbol named "logo" would be renamed "logo1."

Related Topics

Sharing symbols between drawings


Reference: Working with symbols

This reference section contains additional information about working with symbols.

Related Topics

Modifying symbol instances

Unsupported object types


Modifying symbol instances

The following object properties can be modified for symbol instances. If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated collectively as a single object, just as if they were grouped.

Property	Notes
Position	Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Positioning objects."
Size	Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Sizing and scaling objects."
Scale	Percentage is relative to the symbol definition. Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Sizing and scaling objects."
Skew	See "Skewing and stretching objects."
Rotation angle	Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Rotating and mirroring objects."
Transparency	Uniform transparency only. (Windows) Click the Symbol effects tab in the Object properties Docker window. (Mac OS) Choose Symbol effects from the list box on the Object properties palette. For more information, see "Applying transparencies."
Mirroring	Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Rotating and mirroring objects."
Wrap paragraph text	(Windows) Click the General tab in the Object properties Docker window. (Mac OS) Choose General from the list box on the Object properties palette. Can also be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text."
Order	Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Changing the order of objects."
Name	The name of an instance is displayed in the Object manager Docker window/palette. Click twice to change it.
Related Topics

Reference: Working with symbols

Unsupported object types


Unsupported object types

Most objects in CorelDRAW can be converted to symbols, with the following exceptions.

Unsupported object type	Notes
(Windows) Linked or embedded objects	Includes barcodes
Objects with lenses that are not frozen	Lenses must be frozen.
Control objects in link groups	All related objects in the link group must be included in the symbol. For example, if an object has a drop shadow, you cannot convert the object without the drop shadow.
Internet objects	Buttons, radio buttons, text fields, Java Applets, and embedded files
Print merge fields
Linked bitmaps
Placed PDF or EPS files
Locked object	Object must be unlocked.
Paragraph text
Connector and dimension lines	Must be broken apart or included with the linked object or objects
Guidelines
Rollovers	You cannot convert a rollover to a symbol; however, you can include a symbol instance in a rollover state.
Related Topics

Reference: Working with symbols

Modifying symbol instances


Adding and formatting text

The CorelDRAW application lets you use text to create documents or annotate drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	adding and selecting text

•	changing the appearance of text

•	aligning and spacing text

•	shifting and rotating text

•	finding, editing, and converting text

•	moving text

•	fitting text to a path

•	formatting paragraph text

•	combining and linking paragraph text frames

•	wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

•	embedding graphics and adding special characters

•	displaying nonprinting characters


Adding and selecting text

There are two types of text you can add to drawings [image] artistic text and paragraph text. Artistic text can be used to add short lines of text to which you can apply a wide range of effects, such as drop shadows. Paragraph text can be used for larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements. You can add both paragraph and artistic text directly in the drawing window.

You can add artistic text along an open or closed path. You can also fit existing artistic and paragraph text to a path. For more information, see "Fitting text to a path."

When adding paragraph text, you must first create a text frame. By default, paragraph text frames remain the same size regardless of how much text they contain. Any text that continues past the bottom-right border of the text frame is hidden until you either enlarge the text frame or link it to another text frame. You can fit text to a frame, which automatically adjusts the point size of text so that the text fits perfectly in the frame. For information about fitting text to a frame, see "To fit text to a paragraph text frame." You can also have paragraph text frames automatically expand and shrink as you type, so that the text fits perfectly in the frame.

You can insert a paragraph text frame inside a graphic object. This lets you use objects as containers for text so that you can use different shapes for text frames. You can also separate text from an object. When you do, the text retains its shape, and you can move or modify the text and the object independently.

When you import or paste text, you have the option of maintaining formatting, maintaining fonts and formatting, or discarding fonts and formatting. Maintaining fonts ensures that imported and pasted text retains its original font type. Maintaining formatting ensures that formatting information such as bullets, columns, and bold or italic formatting is preserved. If you choose to discard fonts and formatting, the imported or pasted text takes on the properties of the selected text object, or if none is selected, the default font and formatting properties. For more information about importing files, see "Importing files." For more information about pasting, see "To paste an object into a drawing."

To modify text, you must first select it. You can select entire text objects or specific characters.

Related Topics

To add artistic text

To add paragraph text

To set options for importing and pasting text

To select text


To add artistic text

•	Click anywhere in the drawing window using the Text tool, and type.

Related Topics

Adding and selecting text

To add paragraph text

To set options for importing and pasting text

To select text


To add paragraph text

To	Do the following
Add paragraph text	Click the Text tool. Drag in the drawing window to size the paragraph text frame, and type.
Add paragraph text inside an object	Click the Text tool. Move the pointer over the object's outline, and click the object when the pointer changes to an Insert in object pointer. Type inside the frame.
Separate a paragraph text frame from an object	Select the object using the Pick tool, and click Arrange [image] Break paragraph text inside a path apart.
Have paragraph text frames automatically adjust to fit text	Click Tools [image] Options (Windows) or click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences (Mac OS). In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Expand and shrink paragraph text frames to fit text check box.
 Note

•	Enabling the Expand and shrink paragraph text frames to fit text check box affects only new text frames. Existing paragraph text frames remain fixed in size.

 Tip

•	You can adjust the size of a paragraph text frame by clicking the text frame using the Pick tool, and dragging any selection handle.

Related Topics

Adding and selecting text

To add artistic text

To set options for importing and pasting text

To select text


To set options for importing and pasting text

1	Import or paste the text.

2	In the Importing / pasting text dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Maintain fonts and formatting

•	Maintain formatting only

•	Discard fonts and formatting

If you want to use the same formatting options whenever you import or paste text, enable the Don't show this warning again check box.

 Notes

•	Clicking Cancel will cancel the import or paste operation.

•	If you choose to maintain fonts and a required font is not installed on your computer, the PANOSE font matching system substitutes the font for you. For more information, see "Substituting unavailable fonts."

 Tip

•	You can re-enable the Importing / pasting text dialog box by clicking Tools [image] Options (Windows) or clicking CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences (Mac OS), clicking Warnings in the Workspace list of categories, and enabling the Pasting and importing text check box.

Related Topics

Adding and selecting text

To add artistic text

To add paragraph text

To select text


To select text

To select	Do the following
An entire text object	Click the text object using the Pick tool.
Specific characters	Drag across the text using the Text tool.
 Tip

•	You can select multiple text objects by holding down Shift and clicking each text object using the Pick tool.

Related Topics

Adding and selecting text

To add artistic text

To add paragraph text

To set options for importing and pasting text


Changing the appearance of text

You can change the default text style, so that all new artistic or paragraph text you create has the same properties.

You can enhance artistic text and paragraph text by modifying their character properties. For example, you can change the font type and size or make the text bold or italic. You can also change the position of text to subscript or superscript, which is useful if a drawing contains scientific notation. You can add underlines, strikethrough lines, and overlines to text. You can change the thickness of these lines, as well as the distance between the lines and the text. You can also change the color of text.

You can change the case of text to lowercase or uppercase without deleting or replacing letters.

You can increase or decrease font size by a specified increment amount. By default, the unit of measure is points. You can change this setting for the active drawing and all subsequent drawings you create.

Greeking text lets you increase the redraw speed by representing text under a certain size with lines. This is useful when showing prototypes of documents or drawings. You can make text readable again by reducing the greeking value or by zooming in on the text.

Related Topics

To change the default text style

To change character properties

To change the color of text

To change text case

To resize text

To greek text


To change the default text style

1	Click a blank space in the drawing window using the Pick tool.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Character tab.

4	Specify the properties you want.

Following each property change you make, by default you must specify whether the changes are applied to artistic text, paragraph text, or both. You can override this default by disabling the Auto apply button next to the Apply button.

 Tip

•	You can make the style of an existing text frame or object the default style by clicking Tools [image] Graphic and text styles, and dragging the text frame or object over either the Default artistic text or the Default paragraph text icon on the Graphic and text Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Changing the appearance of text

To change character properties

To change the color of text

To change text case

To resize text

To greek text


To change character properties

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Character tab.

4	Specify the character attributes you want.

 Tips

•	You can also make selected text bold, italic or underlined by clicking the Bold button, Italic button, or Underline button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Changing the appearance of text

To change the default text style

To change the color of text

To change text case

To resize text

To greek text


To change the color of text

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Click a color on the color palette.

 Tip

•	You can change the color of an entire text object by deselecting any text and dragging a color swatch from the color palette to the text object.

Related Topics

Changing the appearance of text

To change the default text style

To change character properties

To change text case

To resize text

To greek text


To change text case

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Change case.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Sentence case [image] capitalizes the initial letter of the first word in each sentence

•	Lowercase [image] makes all text lowercase

•	Uppercase [image] makes all text uppercase

•	Title case [image] capitalizes the initial letter of each word

•	Toggle case [image] reverses the case; all uppercase letters become lowercase and all lowercase letters become uppercase

Related Topics

Changing the appearance of text

To change the default text style

To change character properties

To change the color of text

To resize text

To greek text


To resize text

To	Do the following
Specify the amount by which to resize text	Click Tools [image] Options (Windows) or click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences (Mac OS). In the list of categories, click Text, and type a value in the Keyboard text increment box. If you want to change the default unit of measure, choose a unit from the Default text units list box.
Increase the size of text	Select the text using the Text tool, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and press 8 on the number pad.
Decrease the size of text	Select the text using the Text tool, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and press 2 on the number pad.
 Note

•	(Windows) You must be in Num lock mode to increase or decrease the size of text.

Related Topics

Changing the appearance of text

To change the default text style

To change character properties

To change the color of text

To change text case

To greek text


To greek text

1	Do one of the following:

(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, click Text.

3	Type a value in the Greek text below box.

Related Topics

Changing the appearance of text

To change the default text style

To change character properties

To change the color of text

To change text case

To resize text


Aligning and spacing text

You can align both paragraph and artistic text horizontally. Aligning paragraph text lines up text relative to the paragraph text frame. You can horizontally align all paragraphs or only selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame. You can vertically align all paragraphs in a paragraph text frame.

Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text, it is aligned with the entire text object. If characters have not been shifted horizontally, applying no alignment produces the same result as applying left alignment.

You can change character and word spacing in selected paragraphs, or in an entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. Changing character and word spacing is also referred to as kerning. You can change the line spacing of text, which is also referred to as leading. Changing the line spacing for artistic text applies the spacing to lines of text separated by a carriage return. For paragraph text, line spacing applies only to lines of text within the same paragraph. You can also change the spacing before and after paragraphs in paragraph text.

You can also kern selected characters. Kerning balances the optical space between letters.

Related Topics

To align text horizontally

To align paragraph text vertically

To change the spacing of text

To apply range kerning to selected characters


To align text horizontally

1	Select the text object using the Pick tool.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Paragraph tab.

4	Choose an item from the Alignment list box.

 Tip

•	To align selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame, select them using the Text tool.

Related Topics

Aligning and spacing text

To align paragraph text vertically

To change the spacing of text

To apply range kerning to selected characters


To align paragraph text vertically

1	Select the paragraph text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Columns tab.

4	Choose an alignment option from the Vertical justification list box.

Related Topics

Aligning and spacing text

To align text horizontally

To change the spacing of text

To apply range kerning to selected characters


To change the spacing of text

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Paragraph tab.

4	In the Spacing area, type values in any of the boxes.

 Notes

•	Character and word spacing can only be applied to entire paragraphs, or to an entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. For information about adjusting character and word spacing for selected characters, see "To apply range kerning to selected characters."

•	Values represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values range from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000 percent.

 Tip

•	You can also change the spacing between words and characters proportionately by selecting the text object using the Shape tool and dragging the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the bottom-right corner of the text object. Drag the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the bottom-left corner of the text object to change the line spacing proportionately.

Related Topics

Aligning and spacing text

To align text horizontally

To align paragraph text vertically

To apply range kerning to selected characters


To apply range kerning to selected characters

1	Select two or more characters using the Text tool.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Character tab.

4	Type a value in the Range kerning box.

Related Topics

Aligning and spacing text

To align text horizontally

To align paragraph text vertically

To change the spacing of text


Shifting and rotating text

Shifting artistic and paragraph text vertically and horizontally can create an interesting effect. You can also rotate characters. Straightening text pulls the text into its original position. You can return vertically shifted characters to the baseline without affecting their rotation angle.

Related Topics

To shift or rotate a character

To straighten a shifted or rotated character

To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline


To shift or rotate a character

1	Select the character or characters.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Character tab.

4	In the Shift area, type a value in one of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal [image] a positive number moves characters to the right, and a negative number moves characters to the left

•	Vertical [image] a positive number moves characters up, and a negative number moves characters down

•	Rotate [image] a positive number rotates characters counter-clockwise, and a negative number rotates characters clockwise

 Tip

•	You can also shift or rotate characters whose nodes you select using the Shape tool by typing values in the Horizontal shift box, Vertical shift box, or Angle of rotation box on the property bar.

Related Topics

Shifting and rotating text

To straighten a shifted or rotated character

To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline


To straighten a shifted or rotated character

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Straighten text.

Related Topics

Shifting and rotating text

To shift or rotate a character

To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline


To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline

1	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select the text object, and select the node to the left of the character.

3	Click Text [image] Align to baseline.

Related Topics

Shifting and rotating text

To shift or rotate a character

To straighten a shifted or rotated character


Finding, editing, and converting text

You can find text in a drawing and replace it automatically. You can edit text directly in the drawing window, or in a dialog box.

CorelDRAW lets you convert artistic text to paragraph text if you require more formatting options, and paragraph text to artistic text if you'd like to apply special effects.

You can also convert both paragraph and artistic text to curves. This transforms characters into single line and curve objects, letting you add, delete, or move the nodes of individual characters to alter their shape. For more information, see "Working with curve objects." When you convert text to curves, the appearance of the text is preserved, including font, style, character position and rotation, spacing, and any other text settings and effects. Any linked text objects are also converted to curves. If you convert paragraph text in a fixed-sized frame to curves, any text that overflows the frame is deleted. For information about fitting text to a frame, see "Formatting paragraph text."

Related Topics

To find text

To find and replace text

To edit text

To convert text


To find text

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace [image] Find text.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case check box (Windows) or Case sensitive check box (Mac OS).

3	Click Find next (Windows) or Find (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Finding, editing, and converting text

To find and replace text

To edit text

To convert text


To find and replace text

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace [image] Replace text.

2	Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case check box (Windows) or Case sensitive check box (Mac OS).

3	Type the replacement text in the Replace with box.

4	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Find next (Windows) / Find (Mac OS) [image] finds the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box

•	Replace [image] replaces the selected occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box. If no occurrence is selected, Replace finds the next occurrence.

•	Replace all [image] replaces every occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box

Related Topics

Finding, editing, and converting text

To find text

To edit text

To convert text


To edit text

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Edit text.

3	Make changes to the text in the Edit text dialog box.

You can also
Edit text in the drawing window	Select the text using the Text tool, and edit it.
 Note

•	You cannot edit text that has been converted to curves.

Related Topics

Finding, editing, and converting text

To find text

To find and replace text

To convert text


To convert text

To convert	Do the following
Paragraph text to artistic text	Select the text using the Pick tool, and click Text [image] Convert to artistic text.
Artistic text to paragraph text	Select the text using the Pick tool, and click Text [image] Convert to paragraph text.
Artistic or paragraph text to curves	Select the text using the Pick tool, and click Arrange [image] Convert to curves.
 Note

•	You cannot convert paragraph text to artistic text when the paragraph text is linked to another frame, has special effects applied to it, or overflows its frame.

 Tip

•	You can also convert text to curves by right-clicking the text (Windows) or Control + clicking the text (Mac OS) using the Pick tool, and clicking Convert to curves.

Related Topics

Finding, editing, and converting text

To find text

To find and replace text

To edit text


Moving text

CorelDRAW lets you move paragraph text between frames, and artistic text between artistic text objects. You can also move paragraph text to an artistic text object, and artistic text to a paragraph text frame.

Related Topics

To move text


To move text

1	Select the text using the Text tool.

2	Drag the text to another paragraph text frame or artistic text object.

You can also
Move text within the same frame or object	Select the text, and drag it to a new position.
Move or copy selected text to a new text object	Right-click (Windows) or hold down Control (Mac OS) and drag the text to a new position, and click Copy here or Move here.
(Mac OS) Move a copy of selected text	Hold down Option, and drag the text to a new position.
Related Topics

Moving text


Fitting text to a path

You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed object (for example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Artistic text can be fitted to an open or closed path. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only.

After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text's position relative to that path. For example, you can place the text on the opposite side of the path, or you can adjust the distance between the text and the path.

CorelDRAW treats text fitted to a path as one object; however, you can separate the text from the object if you no longer want it to be part of the path. When you separate text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the object to which it was fitted. Straightening the text reverts it to its original appearance.

Related Topics

To add text along a path

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To separate text from a path

To straighten text


To add text along a path

1	Select a path using the Pick tool.

2	Click Text [image] Fit text to path.

3	Type along the path.

 Notes

•	If the text is fitted to a closed path, the text is centered along the path. If the text is fitted to an open path, the text flows from the point of insertion.

•	You can't fit text to the path of another text object.

 Tip

•	You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool, and pointing to a path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want the text to begin, and type.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To separate text from a path

To straighten text


To fit text to a path

1	Select a text object using the Pick tool.

2	Click Text [image] Fit text to path.

The pointer changes to a thick, black arrow.

3	Click a path.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To add text along a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To separate text from a path

To straighten text


To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

1	Using the Pick tool, select the text fitted to a path.

2	Choose a setting from any of the following list boxes on the property bar:

•	Distance from path [image] the distance between the text and the path to which it is fit

•	Vertical placement [image] the vertical alignment of the text relative to the path

•	Horizontal offset [image] the horizontal position of the text along the path

•	Text orientation [image] the angle at which the text sits on the path

•	Text placement [image] the side of the path on which the text is fitted

 Tips

•	You can also change the horizontal position of fitted text by selecting it with the Shape tool, and dragging the character nodes you want to reposition.

•	Using the Pick tool, you can move text along the path by dragging the small red node that displays beside the text.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To add text along a path

To fit text to a path

To separate text from a path

To straighten text


To separate text from a path

1	Select the fitted text using the Pick tool.

2	Click Arrange [image] Break text apart.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To add text along a path

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To straighten text


To straighten text

1	Select the fitted text using the Pick tool.

2	Separate the text from the path.

3	Click Text [image] Straighten text.

Related Topics

Fitting text to a path

To add text along a path

To fit text to a path

To adjust the position of text fitted to a path

To separate text from a path


Formatting paragraph text

CorelDRAW offers various formatting options for paragraph text.

You can fit text to a paragraph text frame. Fitting text to a frame increases or decreases the point size of text so that it fits the text frame exactly.

You can use columns to lay out text-intensive projects such as newsletters, magazines, and newspapers. You can create columns of equal or varying widths and gutters.

Applying drop caps to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter and insets it into the body of text. You can customize a drop cap by changing its settings. For example, you can change the distance between the drop cap and the body of text, or specify the number of lines of text you want to appear beside the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap at any point, without deleting the letter.

You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can have text wrap around bullets, or you can offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. CorelDRAW lets you customize bullets by changing their size, position, and distance from text. After you add a bullet, you can remove it without deleting the text.

You can add tabs to indent paragraph text. You can also remove tabs and change tab alignment. Setting trailing leader tabs automatically creates dots that precede the tab.

Indenting changes the space between a paragraph text frame and the text that it contains. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, all but the first line of a paragraph (a hanging indent), or from the right side of the frame. You can also remove an indent without deleting or retyping text.

Hyphenating splits words between lines when the whole word does not fit on one line. You can have CorelDRAW hyphenate automatically. You can specify hyphenation settings such as the minimum number of letters before and after a hyphen, and the hot zone.

Paragraph text frame formatting can be applied to selected frames only, selected frames and frames they are currently linked to, or to all selected and subsequently linked frames. For information about setting these options, see "To choose paragraph text frame formatting options."

Related Topics

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add a drop cap

To add bullets

To add a tab

To indent paragraph text

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To fit text to a paragraph text frame

1	Select a paragraph text frame.

2	Click Text [image] Fit text to frame.

 Note

•	If you fit text to linked paragraph text frames, CorelDRAW adjusts the size of text in all of the linked text frames. For more information about linking frames, see "Combining and linking paragraph text frames."

Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add a drop cap

To add bullets

To add a tab

To indent paragraph text

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To add columns to paragraph text frames

1	Select a paragraph text frame.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Columns tab.

4	Type a value in the Number of columns box.

5	Specify the settings and options you want.

 Tip

•	You can change the size of columns and gutters by dragging a side selection handle in the drawing window with the Text tool.

Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add a drop cap

To add bullets

To add a tab

To indent paragraph text

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To add a drop cap

1	Select the paragraph text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Effects tab.

4	Choose Drop cap from the Effect type list box.

5	Click one of the following icons:

•	Dropped [image] wraps text around the drop cap

•	Hanging indent [image] offsets the drop cap from the body of text

You can also
Specify the number of lines beside a drop cap	Type a value in the Dropped lines box.
Specify the distance between the drop cap and the body of text	Type a value in the Distance from text box.
Remove drop caps	Choose None from the Effect type list box.
Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add bullets

To add a tab

To indent paragraph text

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To add bullets

1	Select the paragraph text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Effects tab.

4	Choose Bullet from the Effect type list box.

5	Choose a font from the Font list box.

6	Open the Symbol picker, and click a symbol.

7	Click one of the following icons:

•	Bulleted [image] wraps text around the bullet

•	Hanging indent [image] adds a bullet with a hanging indent. Type a value in the Position box to specify the distance the bullet is indented from the paragraph text frame.

You can also
Change the bullet size	Type a value in the Size box.
Raise or lower a bullet	Type a value in the Baseline shift box.
Change the bullet symbol	Type the bullet's ASCII number in the Symbol # box.
Remove bullets	Choose None from the Effect type list box.
Change the amount of space between the bullet and text	Click the Paragraph tab and type the same value in the First line and Left boxes.
 Note

•	Bullets are inserted at the beginning of each new line that is preceded by a return.

Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add a drop cap

To add a tab

To indent paragraph text

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To add a tab

1	Select the paragraph text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Tabs tab.

4	Click the Plus (+) button.

5	Click the new cell in the Tabs column, and type a value.

You can also
Change the alignment of tabs	Click the cell in the Alignment column, and choose an alignment option from the list box.
Set tabs with trailing leader characters	Click the cell in the Leadered column. If you want to change the default character, choose a character from the Character list box. If you want to change the default spacing, specify a value in the Spacing box.
Delete a tab	Click the cell and click the Minus (-) button.
 Tip

•	You can also add, move, or delete tabs on the horizontal ruler at the top of the drawing window. Click to add a tab, drag a tab marker to move it, and drag a tab marker off the ruler to delete it. For information about rulers, see "Setting up the rulers."

Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add a drop cap

To add bullets

To indent paragraph text

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To indent paragraph text

1	Select the paragraph text.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Paragraph tab.

4	Type values in the following boxes in the Indents area:

•	First line [image] indents the first line of paragraph text.

•	Left [image] creates a hanging indent in which all but the first line of text is indented.

•	Right [image] indents the right side of paragraph text

 Tips

•	You can remove indents by typing 0 in the First Line, Left, and Right boxes.

•	You can indent an entire paragraph by typing the same value in the First line and Left boxes.

Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add a drop cap

To add bullets

To add a tab

To hyphenate paragraph text automatically


To hyphenate paragraph text automatically

1	Select the paragraph text frame or a paragraph.

2	Click Text [image] Format text.

3	Click the Paragraph tab.

4	Click Hyphenation settings, and enable the Automatic hyphenation check box.

5	Specify the settings you want.

Related Topics

Formatting paragraph text

To fit text to a paragraph text frame

To add columns to paragraph text frames

To add a drop cap

To add bullets

To add a tab

To indent paragraph text


Combining and linking paragraph text frames

You can combine paragraph text frames. You can also break paragraph text frames apart into subcomponents [image] columns, paragraphs, bullets, lines, words, and characters. Every time you break apart a text frame, the subcomponents are placed into separate paragraph text frames.

Linking paragraph text frames directs the flow of text from one text frame to another if the amount of text exceeds the size of the first text frame. If you shrink or enlarge a linked paragraph text frame, or change the size of the text, the amount of text in the next text frame is automatically adjusted. You can link paragraph text frames before or after you type text.

You cannot link artistic text. However, you can link a paragraph text frame to an open or closed object. When you link a paragraph text frame to an open object (for example, a line), the text flows along the path of the line. Linking a text frame to a closed object (for example, a rectangle) inserts a paragraph text frame and directs the flow of text inside the object. If text exceeds the open or closed path, you can link the text to another text frame or object. You can also link to paragraph text frames and objects across pages.

After linking paragraph text frames, you can redirect the flow from one object or text frame to another. When you select the text frame or object, a blue arrow indicates the direction of the text flow. You can hide or display these arrows.

You can remove links between multiple paragraph text frames, and between paragraph text frames and objects. When you have only two linked paragraph text frames and you remove the link, the text flows into the remaining paragraph text frame. Removing a link between paragraph text frames with a series of links redirects the flow of text into the next paragraph text frame or object.

By default, CorelDRAW applies paragraph formatting such as columns, drop caps, and bullets to only the selected paragraph text frames; however, you can change your settings so that formatting is applied to all linked frames, or all selected and subsequently linked frames. For example, if you apply columns to the text in one text frame, you can choose whether you want all of the linked frames to also be formatted in columns. For information about paragraph formatting, see "Formatting paragraph text."

Related Topics

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

To link paragraph text frames and objects

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

To remove links between text frames or objects

To choose paragraph text frame formatting options


To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

1	Select a text frame.

If you are combining text frames, hold down Shift and select subsequent text frames using the Pick tool.

2	Click Arrange, and click one of the following:

•	Combine

•	Break paragraph text apart.

 Notes

•	Text frames with envelopes, text fitted to a path, and linked frames cannot be combined.

•	If you select a text frame with columns first, the combined text frame will have columns.

Related Topics

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

To link paragraph text frames and objects

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

To remove links between text frames or objects

To choose paragraph text frame formatting options


To link paragraph text frames and objects

1	Select the starting text frame using the Text tool.

2	Click the Text flow tab [image] at the bottom of the text frame or object.

If the frame cannot hold all the text, the tab contains an arrow [image].

3	When the pointer changes to a Link to pointer, click the frame or object into which you want to continue the text flow.

If the frame or object is on a different page, first click the corresponding Page tab on the Document Navigator.

 Notes

•	If a text frame is linked, the Text flow tab changes [image], and a blue arrow indicates the direction of text flow. If the linked text is on another page, the page number and a dashed blue line are displayed. To hide or display these indicators, see "To choose paragraph text frame formatting options."

•	To link paragraph text frames successfully, the text frames cannot be automatically sized. For information, see "Adding and selecting text."

Related Topics

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

To remove links between text frames or objects

To choose paragraph text frame formatting options


To change text flow to a different text frame or object

1	Using the Pick tool, click the Text flow tab [image] at the bottom of the text frame or object from which you want to change the link.

2	Select the new text frame or object into which you want the text flow to continue.

Related Topics

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

To link paragraph text frames and objects

To remove links between text frames or objects

To choose paragraph text frame formatting options


To remove links between text frames or objects

1	Click the text frame to which another text frame is linked.

2	Click Arrange [image] Break paragraph text apart.

 Note

•	The linked text frames can be on different pages.

Related Topics

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

To link paragraph text frames and objects

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

To choose paragraph text frame formatting options


To choose paragraph text frame formatting options

1	Do one of the following:

(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph.

If you want to hide or display the text flow indicators, disable or enable the Show linking of text frames check box.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	To all linked frames [image] applies paragraph formatting to selected frames and all frames linked to them

•	To selected frames only [image] applies paragraph formatting to only the selected frames

•	To selected and subsequent frames [image] applies paragraph formatting to selected frames and any frames later linked to these frames.

Related Topics

Combining and linking paragraph text frames

To combine or break apart paragraph text frames

To link paragraph text frames and objects

To change text flow to a different text frame or object

To remove links between text frames or objects


Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

You can change the shape of text by wrapping paragraph text around an object, artistic text, or a paragraph text frame. You can wrap text using contour or square wrapping styles. The contour wrapping styles follow the curve of the object. The square wrapping styles follow the bounding box of the object. You can also adjust the amount of space between paragraph text and the object or text, as well as remove any wrapping style you apply.

Related Topics

To wrap paragraph text around an object or text

To remove a wrapping style


To wrap paragraph text around an object or text

1	Select the object or text around which you want to wrap text.

2	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Properties.

3	Do one of the following:

(Windows) In the Object properties Docker window, click the General tab.

(Mac OS) On the Object properties palette, choose General from the list box.

4	Choose a wrapping style from the Wrap paragraph text list box.

If you want to change the amount of space between wrapped text and the object or text, type a value in the Text wrap offset box.

5	Click the Text tool, and drag to create a paragraph text frame over the object or text.

6	Type text in the paragraph text frame.

 Tip

•	You can wrap existing paragraph text around a selected object by applying a wrapping style to the object and dragging the paragraph text frame over the object.

Related Topics

Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

To remove a wrapping style


To remove a wrapping style

1	Select the wrapped text or the object it wraps.

2	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Properties.

3	Do one of the following:

(Windows) In the Object properties Docker window, click the General tab.

(Mac OS) On the Object properties palette, choose General from the list box.

4 Choose None from the Wrap paragraph text list box.

Related Topics

Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text

To wrap paragraph text around an object or text


Embedding graphics and adding special characters

You can embed a graphic object or bitmap in text. The graphic object or bitmap is treated as a text character. As a result, you can apply formatting options according to the type of text in which you embed the graphic object. You can also remove an embedded object from text, after which the object returns to its original state.

You can add special characters to text as text objects or as graphic objects. When you add special characters as text, you can format the characters as you do the text. When you add special characters as graphic objects, the characters are curves. Consequently, you can edit them as you would other graphic objects.

If you are using Windows, you can also change objects, such as company logos or modified letters, into special characters, and then add them to a character set. This lets you add an object to text as a text or graphic object. The object is automatically resized to match the proportions of other characters in the set.

You can create patterns with special characters by tiling them across the page. Each character in the pattern is a separate object to which you can apply effects. You can change the spacing between the rows and columns in which the characters are arranged.

Related Topics

To embed a graphic object in text

To remove an embedded object from text

To add a special character as a text object

To add a special character as a graphic object

To create a special character from an object (Windows)

To create a pattern using a special character


To embed a graphic object in text

1	Select a graphic object.

2	Click Edit, and click one of the following:

•	Cut

•	Copy

3	Using the Text tool, click where you want to embed the graphic object.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Related Topics

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

To remove an embedded object from text

To add a special character as a text object

To add a special character as a graphic object

To create a special character from an object (Windows)

To create a pattern using a special character


To remove an embedded object from text

1	Select an object using the Text tool.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Click the Pick tool, and click outside the text object.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Related Topics

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

To embed a graphic object in text

To add a special character as a text object

To add a special character as a graphic object

To create a special character from an object (Windows)

To create a pattern using a special character


To add a special character as a text object

1	Using the Text tool, click where you want to add the special character.

2	Click Text [image] Insert character.

3	Choose a category from the list box.

4	Double-click a character in the list.

The size of the character is determined by the font size of the text.

Related Topics

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

To embed a graphic object in text

To remove an embedded object from text

To add a special character as a graphic object

To create a special character from an object (Windows)

To create a pattern using a special character


To add a special character as a graphic object

1	Click Text [image] Insert character.

2	Choose a category from the list box.

3	Type a value in the Character size box.

4	Drag a special character from the list to the drawing page.

 Note

•	The special character is inserted with the default graphic style. For information about graphic styles, see "Working with graphic, text, and color styles."

Related Topics

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

To embed a graphic object in text

To remove an embedded object from text

To add a special character as a text object

To create a special character from an object (Windows)

To create a pattern using a special character


To create a special character from an object (Windows)

1	Select an object.

2	Click Tools [image] Create [image] Character.

3	Type a category name, or choose an existing category from the list.

 Notes

•	To add a character to a character set, the object must have a closed path. If the object contains multiple objects, you must combine all of the objects. For more information, see "Combining objects."

•	You must use TrueType fonts to create special characters.

Related Topics

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

To embed a graphic object in text

To remove an embedded object from text

To add a special character as a text object

To add a special character as a graphic object

To create a pattern using a special character


To create a pattern using a special character

1	Click Text [image] Insert character.

2	Choose a category from the list box.

3	Click a special character in the list.

4	Click the flyout button, and click Tile special character.

If you want to change the row and column spacing, click the flyout button, click Tile options, and type values in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes.

5	Drag the special character to the drawing page.

Related Topics

Embedding graphics and adding special characters

To embed a graphic object in text

To remove an embedded object from text

To add a special character as a text object

To add a special character as a graphic object

To create a special character from an object (Windows)


Displaying nonprinting characters

You can specify which nonprinting characters, such as spaces and tabs, display. For example, if you choose to display nonprinting characters, each space you add displays as a tiny black dot. When enabled, nonprinting characters display only when you add or edit text.

Related Topics

To specify which nonprinting characters display

To display nonprinting characters


To specify which nonprinting characters display

1	Do one of the following:

(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, click Text.

3	In the Non-printing character display list, enable the check boxes you want.

Related Topics

Displaying nonprinting characters

To display nonprinting characters


To display nonprinting characters

1	Select a text object.

2	Click Text [image] Edit text.

3	Click the Nonprinting characters button.

 Tip

•	You can also display or hide nonprinting characters in the drawing window by clicking the Text tool, and clicking the Nonprinting characters button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Displaying nonprinting characters

To specify which nonprinting characters display


Automating application tasks

CorelDRAW tasks can be automated using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) and Corel scripts.

In this section, you'll learn about:

•	automating using VBA

•	running Corel scripts

For more information about available VBA resources, see "Reference: Automating application tasks."


Automating using VBA

Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is an object-oriented programming language that lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. CorelDRAW lets you record a series of operations as a VBA macro and run it in the drawing window. For example, you can create a VBA macro that draws a rectangle and fills it with a two-color fountain fill.

VBA is an embedded subset of the Microsoft Visual Basic (VB) development environment. Even though VBA uses the Visual Basic programming language, it is considered "for applications" because it is integrated into another application in order to customize the functionality of that application.

VBA enables you to build custom solutions within your application that can automate and extend application functionality, integrate with other applications, and shorten the development cycle of custom business solutions. It allows you to create solutions that reuse and extend your application. By incorporating VBA, Corel provides an international programming language to users.

For more information about working in VBA, see "CorelDRAW VBA Help."

Related Topics

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


Using VBA macros

VBA allows you to record and run macros that automate a series of tasks within an application.

You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once you have saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and access the macro. You can also access a macro from an open global macro storage (gms) file. After you have developed the macro, you should edit it to remove any bugs in the program by stepping through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to ensure that the macro will have the desired outcome. You can play the macro before or after debugging it.

For more detailed instruction relating to VBA and its programming environment, consult the "Microsoft Visual Basic Help" from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


To record a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Record.

2	Type a name for the script in the Macro name box.

3	Perform the actions you want to record.

4	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Stop.

 Tip

•	You can also record a VBA macro by clicking Tools [image] Undo Docker, performing the actions you want to record in the drawing window and clicking the Save list to a VBA macro button in the Undo Docker window.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


To run a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose the macro you want to play from the Macros in list box.

3	Click Run.

 Note

•	You can access  a macro  from either an open global macro storage (gms) file or an open document from the Macros in list box.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


To edit a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image]  Play.

2	Choose the macro you want to edit.

3	Click Edit.

4	Use the Visual Basic Editor to edit the macro.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


Working in the VBA Editor

When you work in the VBA Editor, you can create a new object, such as a dialog box, which is known as a form. You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box. You can set the object's properties in the Properties dialog box. You can also set the object's properties at run time by programming a method.

Each document that you create with VBA has a corresponding project. In order to customize your document with VBA coding procedures, you must open the project file in the Visual Basic Editor.

For more detailed information on constructing code procedures and setting properties, consult the "Microsoft Visual Basic Help" from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	Use the Visual Basic Editor to create a project.

 Note

•	For more information about working with VBA, consult the "Microsoft Visual Basic Help" from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

Installing Add-ins

To load or unload an Add-in


Installing Add-ins

You can install Add-ins by following the documentation provided by a third party developer. Add-ins are separate modules that extend the functionality of the application. Most Add-ins automatically load when the application starts up; however, you can override this specification through the Add-in manager. If an Add-in doesn't load immediately, double-check the Add-in manager to make sure it is included in the list of Add-ins.

You can also unload an Add-in if you want to temporarily remove it from the user interface.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

To load or unload an Add-in


To load or unload an Add-in

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Add-in manager.

2	Enable the Loaded/unloaded check box.

 Tips

•	You can view a list of all Add-ins in the Add-In manager dialog box.

•	Depending on the specifications included upon the creation of the Add-in, you may be able to access it directly by clicking Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Add-ins.

Related Topics

Automating using VBA

Using VBA macros

To record a VBA macro

To run a VBA macro

To edit a VBA macro

Working in the VBA Editor

To create a project using Visual Basic Editor

Installing Add-ins


Running Corel scripts

CorelDRAW lets you run Corel scripts in the drawing window. Scripts are short programs that automate drawing tasks. For example, you can run a script that applies a preset fill to a selected object.

If you want to view scripts from the application window, you can display and run scripts through the Corel scripts manager Docker window.

Related Topics

To run a Corel script

To display the Corel scripts manager Docker window


To run a Corel script

1	Click Tools [image] Run script.

2	Choose the script you want to run.

3	Click Open.

 Tip

•	You can also run a Corel script from the Corel scripts manager Docker window. See "To display the Corel scripts manager Docker window."

Related Topics

Running Corel scripts

To display the Corel scripts manager Docker window


To display the Corel scripts manager Docker window

1	Click Tools [image] Customization

2	In the Workspace, Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose Window from the list box.

4	Drag the Corel scripts manager button to a command bar.

 Note

•	After you have customized a command bar with the Corel scripts manager button, you click the button to open the Corel scripts manager Docker window.

Related Topics

Running Corel scripts

To run a Corel script


Reference: Automating application tasks

You have access to the following VBA resources:

Sample VBA macros

CorelDRAW includes new samples of VBA macros. They supply users with additional functionality, demonstrate the capabilities of VBA in CorelDRAW, and provide sample code to VBA developers.

For more information about the macros, please refer to "Overview of sample macros." in the CorelDRAW Visual Basic Help file.

XML Web Services

You can receive XML web services from within the CorelDRAW application by consulting the Microsoft VBA Web Service References Tool included.

To learn more about this tool, please refer to the "Overview of XML Web services".


Creating Web-enabled objects

CorelDRAW lets you create Web-enabled objects for optimum viewing in browsers. You can convert text to a Web-compatible format so that it can be edited in a browser, add Web form objects such as options and check boxes, and create interactive rollovers from CorelDRAW objects.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using preset Internet objects

•	optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web

•	creating rollovers

•	creating Web-compatible text

•	working with bookmarks and hyperlinks


Using preset Internet objects

CorelDRAW provides you with a set of Internet objects, such as options, Java applets, text edit boxes, and check boxes to use when designing an HTML page. You can customize Internet objects by adjusting their parameters.

If a document contains form-related Internet objects such as check boxes, you need a CGI script address to enable these Internet objects to work once the document is published to the World Wide Web as an HTML file.

After you create a preset Internet object, you can save it as an HTML page. For information about optimizing, see "Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web."

Related Topics

To add or customize an Internet object

To save objects to a Web-compatible format


To add or customize an Internet object

To	Do the following
Add an Internet object	Click Edit [image] Insert Internet object, and click the object you want. Click where you want to place the Internet object.
Customize an Internet object	Do one of the following: • (Windows) Right-click an Internet object, and click Properties. In the Object properties Docker window, click the Internet tab, and specify the attributes you want to add. • (Mac OS) Control + click an Internet object, and click Properties. On the Object properties palette, choose Internet from the list box, and specify the attributes you want to add.
Add a CGI Script address to an Internet object	Deselect any objects, and do one of the following: • (Windows) Right-click, and click Properties. Click the Form tab, and type the CGI script address in the URL of CGI script box. Choose an HTML equivalent method from the Method list box and a frame type from the Target list box. • (Mac OS) Control + click, and click Properties. Click Form from the list box. Type the CGI script address in the URL of CGI script box. Choose an HTML equivalent method from the Method list box and a frame type from the Target list box.
 Note

•	All Internet objects, except for Java applets and embedded files, require a CGI script address to function properly after you publish a drawing to the World Wide Web.

Related Topics

Using preset Internet objects

To save objects to a Web-compatible format


To save objects to a Web-compatible format

1	Click File [image] Publish to the Web [image] HTML.

2	Choose the HTML layout from the HTML layout method list box.

3	Choose a destination folder.

4	Choose an image subfolder.

5	Choose an export range.

 Tip

•	You can check to see whether there are any issues by clicking the Issues tab.

Related Topics

Using preset Internet objects

To add or customize an Internet object


Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web

You can save objects and optimize them for the World Wide Web.

When you optimize an image for the Web, you can export to a GIF, JPEG, JPEG 2000, PNG 8-bit, and PNG 24-bit file type, choose a Web preset, and compare the previewed results. The Web presets are optimized for color, dithering, compression, and smoothing, depending on the file type you choose. You can compare up to four file types by viewing their download speed, image quality, file size, color range, and compression size as well as by panning and zooming in the image.

You can also add and delete Web presets of your own.

Related Topics

To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format


To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format

1	Click File [image] Publish to the Web [image] Web image optimizer.

2	Choose a speed from the Connection speed list box.

3	Choose one of the following pane display options:

•	Single pane

•	Double-vertical panes

•	Double-horizontal panes

•	Four panes

4	Keep one pane as the original image. In one or more of the other panes, choose from the following list boxes below the preview window:

•	File type

•	Web preset

You can also
Edit preset settings for a single preview area	Click Advanced. In the Export dialog box, customize the preset options. If you select GIF or PNG8 file formats, you can modify the color palette and settings in the Convert to paletted dialog box.
Save the current configuration of settings for a preview area	Click the Save settings button for each area where you want to save the settings.
Save a custom preset	Click Add.
Delete a preset	Click Delete.
Display file information below each preview window	Enable the Preview check box.
Pan to another section of the image	Drag in the preview window of the original image.
Zoom in the preview window	Choose a magnification from the Zoom level list box.
 Note

•	Some browsers require a plug-in to display JPEG 2000 files.

 Tip

•	You can compare file types with the original image by choosing Original from the File type list box in one of the panes.

Related Topics

Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web


Creating rollovers

Rollovers are interactive objects that change in appearance when you click or point to them. You can create rollovers using objects.

To create a rollover, you add the following rollover states:

•	Normal [image] the default state of a button when no mouse activity is associated with the button

•	Over [image] the state of a button when the pointer passes over it

•	Down [image] the state of a clicked button

To edit the rollover states, you can view the rollover states and their properties.

To publish a rollover to the Internet, you must save the rollover to a Web-compatible file format by publishing to HTML or to the Macromedia Flash (SWF) format. For information on publishing to the Web, see "Publishing to the Web."

For more information about creating and editing objects such as rollovers, see "Working with objects."

Related Topics

To create a rollover object

To edit a rollover object

To view the rollover states

To view rollover properties


To create a rollover object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] Rollover [image] Create rollover.

 Note

•	You cannot create a rollover from a clone.

Related Topics

Creating rollovers

To edit a rollover object

To view the rollover states

To view rollover properties


To edit a rollover object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Effects [image] Rollover [image] Edit rollover.

3	Specify the attributes of each state.

4	Click Effects [image] Rollover [image] Finish editing rollover.

 Note

•	You cannot close a drawing in which you are editing a rollover. You must finish editing first.

 Tip

•	You can also edit a rollover object by clicking the Edit rollover button on the Internet toolbar.

Related Topics

Creating rollovers

To create a rollover object

To view the rollover states

To view rollover properties


To view the rollover states

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Window [image] Toolbars [image] More toolbars. In the Workspace, Customization list of categories, click Command bars and ensure the Internet check box is enabled. Click OK.

•	(Mac OS) Click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Internet.

2	On the Internet toolbar, choose between the Normal, Over, and Down states from the Active rollover state list box.

 Tip

•	You can preview a rollover object's states in the drawing page by clicking View [image] Enable rollovers. To quit previewing the rollover so that you can edit it, click View [image] Enable rollovers.

Related Topics

Creating rollovers

To create a rollover object

To edit a rollover object

To view rollover properties


To view rollover properties

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Object manager.

2	Click the page and layer where the rollover resides.

3	Click the rollover name, and expand the Normal, Over, and Down states.

Related Topics

Creating rollovers

To create a rollover object

To edit a rollover object

To view the rollover states


Creating Web-compatible text

When you convert paragraph text to Web-compatible text, you can edit the text of the published document in an HTML editor. You can change text font characteristics, including the font type, size, and style. The Web-compatible text sizes, numbered 1 through 7, correspond to particular point sizes between the 10-point and 48-point range. For more information about formatting text, see "Formatting paragraph text."

The default Web font style is used automatically, unless you override it with another font. If you choose to override it, the default font is used when visitors to your Web site don't have the same font installed on their computers. The bold, italic, and underline text styles are also available. You can apply uniform fills, but not outlines, to Web-compatible text.

Any non-Web-compatible text in your drawing is converted to bitmaps when you publish your drawing to the World Wide Web as HTML.

Related Topics

To make text Web-compatible


To make text Web-compatible

To	Do the following
Change paragraph text to Web-compatible text	Select the paragraph text. Click Text [image] Make text web compatible.
Make new text Web-compatible	Do one of the following: • (Windows) Click Tools [image] Options. In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Make all new paragraph text frames web compatible check box. • (Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences. In the list of categories, click Workspace, Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Make all new paragraph text frames Web compatible check box.
 Notes

•	Ensure that the Web-compatible text does not intersect or overlap other objects or extend beyond the boundaries of the drawing page; otherwise the text will be converted to a bitmap, and it will lose its Internet properties.

•	Artistic text cannot be converted to Web-compatible text and is always treated as a bitmap. However, you can convert it to paragraph text and then make it Web compatible. For information on converting text, see "Finding, editing, and converting text."

Related Topics

Creating Web-compatible text


Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

CorelDRAW lets you create bookmarks and hyperlinks in your Web document. You can apply these to rollovers, bitmaps, and other objects.

Bookmarks

To create an internal link in an HTML file, you can assign a bookmark to text or to an object. You can then assign a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to an object that links to the bookmark. The object containing a URL has a hotspot, an area that activates a hyperlink when clicked in a browser.

Hyperlinks

Within a document, hyperlinks connect to any object that has been assigned a bookmark, or the hyperlink can connect to any document on the World Wide Web by using that document's URL. You can also set a hotspot that follows the outline of the object, or fills the object's bounding box.

CorelDRAW applies a crosshatch pattern to an object containing a hyperlink. You can change the color of the crosshatch pattern as well as its background fill.

After you create hyperlinks, you can display and verify them.

Related Topics

To assign a bookmark

To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

To display hyperlinked objects

To verify links in a Web document


To assign a bookmark

1	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) an object, and click Properties.

2	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click the Internet tab.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Internet from the list box.

3	Choose Bookmark from the Behavior list box.

4	Type the name of the bookmark.

Related Topics

Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

To display hyperlinked objects

To verify links in a Web document


To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

1	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) an object, and click Properties.

2	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click the Internet tab.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Internet from the list box.

3	Choose URL from the Behavior list box.

4	Type a URL address.

You can also
Specify what frame will display when the rollover is clicked	Choose a target frame from the Target list box.
Add a description of the object for text-only browsers	Type the text in the Alt comments text box.
Define the hotspot area	Choose Object shape or Object's bounding box from the Define hotspot using list box.
 Note

•	URLs to external Web sites must contain the http:// prefix. Other supported protocols include mailto:, ftp:, and file:.

 Tip

•	You can rename a bookmark and create a hyperlinked bookmarked object from a document object by using the Internet bookmark manager Docker window/palette.

Related Topics

Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

To assign a bookmark

To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

To display hyperlinked objects

To verify links in a Web document


To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Properties.

2	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click the Internet tab.

•	(Mac OS) Choose Internet from the list box.

3	Open the Cross-hatch color picker, and click a color.

4	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

 Note

•	If you choose a hyperlinked object first and then change the crosshatch and background hotspot colors, the change applies to the selected object only. If you change the hotspot colors with no object selected, the default colors are changed for this drawing and for future sessions of CorelDRAW.

Related Topics

Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

To assign a bookmark

To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

To display hyperlinked objects

To verify links in a Web document


To display hyperlinked objects

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Window [image] Toolbars [image] More toolbars. In the Workspace, Customization list of categories, click Command bars and ensure the Internet check box is enabled. Click OK.

•	(Mac OS) Click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Internet.

2	On the Internet toolbar, enable the Show hotspots button.

All objects to which you've assigned URLs display in the crosshatch and background hotspot colors.

Related Topics

Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

To assign a bookmark

To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

To verify links in a Web document


To verify links in a Web document

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Link manager.

2	In the list, verify that all URL links display a green check mark.

3	Click the Refresh button to verify any broken links.

 Tip

•	If you want to test a link by opening a URL in a Web browser, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) the object, and click Jump to hyperlink in browser.

Related Topics

Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks

To assign a bookmark

To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site

To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors

To display hyperlinked objects


Publishing to the Web

You can ensure that your CorelDRAW files and objects publish to HTML successfully by setting document elements to be Web-compatible, selecting the settings you want, and checking Preflight issues. You can then publish to HTML. The resulting HTML code and images can be used in HTML authoring software for creating a Web site or page.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	preparing files and objects for Web publishing

•	publishing to HTML


Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

You can prepare your files and objects for the Web by setting preferences and verifying the objects before you export them.

The CorelDRAW application provides options for publishing your document to the World Wide Web. You can determine layout options, set link colors, and select HTML text preferences. Among the text export options, you can export Web-compatible text as plain text so that users can copy and reuse the text, or you can export all text as images so that the text will always display as you designed it.

You can export your graphics to preset JPEG, GIF, or PNG formats. You can also publish your document as a single image, from which CorelDRAW creates an image map. An image map is a hypergraphic whose hotspots link to different URLs [image] including pages, locations, and images [image] when you view the HTML document with a browser. Note that large image maps might cause slow downloads for those with a slow Internet connection.

You can check the download times of your Web page objects through a browser preview.

Related Topics

To change text export preferences

To change link export preferences

To change image export preferences

To change HTML layout export preferences

To preview a Web page

To set Web preflight options


To change text export preferences

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to Web, and click Text.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Export Web-compatible text as text [image] exports the Web-compatible text as text

•	Export all text as images [image] exports the text as images and ensures compatibility for all browsers

•	Export Web-compatible text as text using TrueDoc [image] exports the text using TrueDoc for use in Netscape Communicator

 Note

•	Exporting all text as images can increase download times because of the larger file sizes.

Related Topics

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

To change link export preferences

To change image export preferences

To change HTML layout export preferences

To preview a Web page

To set Web preflight options


To change link export preferences

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to the Web, and click Links.

3	Enable the Underline check box.

4	Enable the following check boxes, and select a color for each:

•	Normal link

•	Active link

•	Visited link

 Note

•	The link colors set in the Options / Preferences dialog box are exported with the file, eliminating any conflict between link color and your document's page background color.

Related Topics

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

To change text export preferences

To change image export preferences

To change HTML layout export preferences

To preview a Web page

To set Web preflight options


To change image export preferences

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to the Web, and click Image.

3	In the Export image using area, enable one of the following image format options:

•	JPEG

•	GIF

•	PNG

4	Set any bitmap options.

You can also
Apply anti-aliasing	Enable the Anti-alias check box.
Create a Client-side image map	Enable the Client check box.
Create a Server-side image map	Enable the Server check box, and choose a format.
Related Topics

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

To change text export preferences

To change link export preferences

To change HTML layout export preferences

To preview a Web page

To set Web preflight options


To change HTML layout export preferences

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Publish to the Web.

3	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Position tolerance [image] lets you specify the number of pixels text can be automatically nudged to avoid introducing rows or columns that are only a few pixels in size

•	Image white space [image] lets you specify the number of pixels that can occur in an empty cell before it's merged with an adjacent cell. This lets you avoid splitting a single graphic that spans adjacent cells. Cells or tables are used to position Internet objects in your Web document when you choose the HTML Tables layout method

•	Position white space [image] lets you specify the amount of white space allowed in an image

Related Topics

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

To change text export preferences

To change link export preferences

To change image export preferences

To preview a Web page

To set Web preflight options


To preview a Web page

1	Click File [image] Publish to the Web [image] HTML.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click the Browser preview button.

Related Topics

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

To change text export preferences

To change link export preferences

To change image export preferences

To change HTML layout export preferences

To set Web preflight options


To set Web preflight options

1	Click File [image] Publish to the Web [image] HTML.

2	Click the Issues tab.

3	Click Settings.

4	In the Issues to check for list, expand the Web publishing tree.

5	Deselect the issues you do not want to check.

Related Topics

Preparing files and objects for Web publishing

To change text export preferences

To change link export preferences

To change image export preferences

To change HTML layout export preferences

To preview a Web page


Publishing to HTML

CorelDRAW provides several options for publishing your document or selection for use on the World Wide Web. You can choose several options such as image format, HTML layout, export range, and file transfer protocol (FTP) site parameters for uploading your files.

Related Topics

To publish to the Web


To publish to the Web

1	Click File [image] Publish to the Web [image] HTML.

2	Set the following options in the Publish to the Web dialog box:

•	General [image] contains options for HTML layout, folder for HTML file and images, and FTP site and export range. You can also select, add, and remove presets.

•	Details [image] contains details of HTML files produced, and allows you to change the page name and file name.

•	Images [image] lists all images for the current HTML export. You can set individual objects to JPEG, GIF, and PNG formats. Click Options to select presets for each image type.

•	Advanced [image] provides options for generating JavaScript and Cascading Style Sheets.

•	Summary [image] shows statistics for files according to various download speeds

•	Issues [image] displays a list of potential issues, including explanations, suggestions, and tips

 Note

•	CorelDRAW assigns the extension .htm to documents you publish in the HTML format. By default, HTML files share the same name as the CorelDRAW (CDR) source file and are saved in the last folder you used to store exported Web documents.

Related Topics

Publishing to HTML


Working with objects

Working with objects is an essential part of creating drawings.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	selecting objects

•	copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

•	positioning objects

•	aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

•	changing the order of objects

•	sizing and scaling objects

•	rotating and mirroring objects

•	grouping objects

•	combining objects


Selecting objects

Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects, hidden objects, and a single object in a group or a nested group, and each object in the order in which it is created. You can also select all objects at once and deselect objects.

Related Topics

To select objects

To deselect objects


To select objects

To select	Do the following
An object	Click an object using the Pick tool.
Multiple objects	Hold down Shift, and click each object you want to select.
An object, starting with the first object created and moving toward the last object created	Press Shift + Tab until a selection box displays around the object you want to select.
An object, starting with the last object created and moving toward the first object created	Press Tab until a selection box displays around the object you want to select.
All objects	Click Edit [image] Select all [image] Objects.
An object in a group	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and click an object in a group.
An object in a nested group	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS), and click an object you want to select until a selection box displays around it.
A hidden object	Hold down Alt (Windows) or Option (Mac OS), and click the topmost object until a selection box displays around the hidden object you want to select.
Multiple hidden objects	Hold down Shift + Alt (Windows) or Shift + Option (Mac OS) and click the topmost object until a selection box displays around the hidden objects you want to select.
A hidden object in a group	Hold down Ctrl + Alt (Windows) or Command + Option (Mac OS) and click the topmost object until a selection box displays around the hidden object you want to select.
 Note

•	The status bar displays a description of each hidden object as you select it.

 Tip

•	You can also select one or more objects by dragging around the object or objects using the Pick tool.

Related Topics

Selecting objects

To deselect objects


To deselect objects

To deselect	Do the following
All objects	Click the Pick tool, and click a blank space in the drawing window.
A single object in multiple selected objects	Hold down Shift, and click the object using the Pick tool.
Related Topics

Selecting objects

To select objects


Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

CorelDRAW gives you two ways to copy objects. You can cut or copy an object to place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing or you can duplicate an object. Cutting an object to the Clipboard removes it from the drawing; copying an object to the Clipboard leaves the original in the drawing; and duplicating an object places a copy directly in the drawing window, not the Clipboard. Duplicating is also faster than copying and pasting. You can copy entire objects or their properties.

When you no longer need an object, you can delete it.

Related Topics

To cut or copy an object

To paste an object into a drawing

To duplicate an object

To copy an object's fill properties to another object

To delete an object


To cut or copy an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Edit, and click one of the following:

•	Cut

•	Copy

 Tip

•	You can also cut or copy an object by right-clicking (Windows) or Control + clicking (Mac OS) the object, and clicking Cut or Copy.

Related Topics

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

To paste an object into a drawing

To duplicate an object

To copy an object's fill properties to another object

To delete an object


To paste an object into a drawing

•	Click Edit [image] Paste.

Related Topics

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

To cut or copy an object

To duplicate an object

To copy an object's fill properties to another object

To delete an object


To duplicate an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Duplicate.

Related Topics

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

To cut or copy an object

To paste an object into a drawing

To copy an object's fill properties to another object

To delete an object


To copy an object's fill properties to another object

1	Click the Pick tool.

2	Select the object to which you want to copy another object's properties.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy properties from.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Outline pen

•	Outline color

•	Fill

•	Text properties

5	Click OK.

6	Click the object whose properties you want to copy.

 Tip

•	(Windows) You can copy fill or outline properties or both by clicking an object with the right-mouse button, dragging over another object, and choosing Copy fill here, Copy outline here, or Copy all properties.

Related Topics

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

To cut or copy an object

To paste an object into a drawing

To duplicate an object

To delete an object


To delete an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete (Windows) or Clear (Mac OS)

 Tip

•	You can also delete an object by right-clicking (Windows) or by Control + clicking (Mac OS) the object and pressing Delete.

Related Topics

Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects

To cut or copy an object

To paste an object into a drawing

To duplicate an object

To copy an object's fill properties to another object


Positioning objects

You can position objects by dragging them to a new location, by nudging, or by specifying their horizontal and vertical position.

The values you set in super nudging, and micro nudging allow you to move objects into place by increments. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.1-inch increments, but you can change the nudge values to suit your needs.

When you specify the position of an object, you can set horizontal and vertical coordinates that are relative to the object's center anchor point or to another anchor point. You can also position objects by placing them at specific horizontal and vertical coordinates in the drawing window according to the object's anchor point.

Related Topics

To move an object

To move an object to another page

To nudge an object

To set nudge distances

To position an object by x and y coordinates

To position an object using a different anchor point


To move an object

•	Drag an object to a new position in the drawing.

 Tip

•	You can move an object to another page by dragging the object over a page number tab and then dragging over the page.

Related Topics

Positioning objects

To move an object to another page

To nudge an object

To set nudge distances

To position an object by x and y coordinates

To position an object using a different anchor point


To move an object to another page

1	Drag the object over a page number tab of the page you want to move the object to.

2	Drag the object over the page.

Related Topics

Positioning objects

To move an object

To nudge an object

To set nudge distances

To position an object by x and y coordinates

To position an object using a different anchor point


To nudge an object

To	Do the following
Nudge a selected object by the nudge distance	Press an Arrow key.
Nudge a selected object by a fraction of the nudge distance	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and press an Arrow key.
Nudge a selected object by a multiple of the nudge distance	Hold down Shift, and press an Arrow key.
Related Topics

Positioning objects

To move an object

To move an object to another page

To set nudge distances

To position an object by x and y coordinates

To position an object using a different anchor point


To set nudge distances

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the Document list of categories, click Rulers.

3	Type a value in the Nudge box.

4	Type a value in one of the following boxes:

•	Super nudge

•	Micro nudge

 Tip

•	You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a value in the Nudge offset box on the property bar.

Related Topics

Positioning objects

To move an object

To move an object to another page

To nudge an object

To position an object by x and y coordinates

To position an object using a different anchor point


To position an object by x and y coordinates

1	Select an object.

2	On the property bar, type values in the following boxes:

•	x [image] lets you position the object on the x axis

•	y [image] lets you position the object on the y axis

3	Press Enter.

Related Topics

Positioning objects

To move an object

To move an object to another page

To nudge an object

To set nudge distances

To position an object using a different anchor point


To position an object using a different anchor point

1	Select an object.

2	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Transformations [image] Position.

3	Disable the Relative position check box in the Transformations Docker window/palette.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	H [image] lets you specify a value for the horizontal position of an object

•	V [image] lets you specify a value for the vertical position of an object

5	Enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point that you want to set.

6	Click Apply.

 Notes

•	By default, the point of origin (0,0) is at the lower-left corner of the drawing page.

•	When you enable the Relative position check box on the Transformations Docker window/palette, the H and V boxes identify the position of the center anchor point as 0,0. When you specify a different position in the H and V boxes, the values represent a change from the object's current position as measured from the center anchor point.

Related Topics

Positioning objects

To move an object

To move an object to another page

To nudge an object

To set nudge distances

To position an object by x and y coordinates


Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

CorelDRAW lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing as well as snap objects to one another.

You can align objects to each other and to parts of the drawing page such as the center, edges, and grid. When you align objects to objects, you can line them up by their centers or by their edges.

CorelDRAW lets you align multiple objects to the center of the drawing page horizontally or vertically. Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge of the page and to the nearest point on a grid.

You can distribute objects at equal intervals in a specified area.

When you snap one object to another, you select an object and drag it to the second [image] or target [image] object. The selected object's nodes or the point at which the cursor has selected the object can be used to snap to one of the following areas in the target object: nodes, areas between nodes, center, or bounding box.

You can choose the distance at which objects will snap to one another by setting the snapping threshold.

Related Topics

To align an object to an object

To align an object to the page center

To align an object to the page edge

To distribute objects

To snap objects

To set snapping threshold


To align an object to an object

1	Select the objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Align and distribute, and click one of the following:

•	Align left

•	Align right

•	Align top

•	Align bottom

•	Align centers horizontally

•	Align centers vertically

 Note

•	The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edges is determined by the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the last object created will be used. If you select the objects one at a time the last object selected will be the reference point for aligning the others.

 Tip

•	You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

To align an object to the page center

To align an object to the page edge

To distribute objects

To snap objects

To set snapping threshold


To align an object to the page center

1	Select an object.

If you want to align multiple objects, marquee select the objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Align and distribute, and click one of the following:

•	Center to page [image] aligns all objects to the page center

•	Center to page vertically [image] aligns objects to the page center along a vertical axis

•	Center to page horizontally [image] aligns objects to the page center along a horizontal axis

Related Topics

Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

To align an object to an object

To align an object to the page edge

To distribute objects

To snap objects

To set snapping threshold


To align an object to the page edge

1	Select an object.

If you want to align an object group, select the group.

2	Click Arrange [image] Align and distribute [image] Align and distribute.

3	Click the Align tab.

4	Enable the check boxes that correspond to the horizontal and vertical alignment you want.

If you want to align objects vertically, enable the Left, Center, or Right option.

If you want to align objects horizontally, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom option.

5	In the Align to area, enable the Edge of page option.

 Tips

•	You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar.

•	You can align an object to the grid by clicking Align to grid.

Related Topics

Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

To align an object to an object

To align an object to the page center

To distribute objects

To snap objects

To set snapping threshold


To distribute objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Align and distribute [image] Align and distribute.

3	Click the Distribute tab.

4	Enable the check boxes that correspond to the distribution you want.

5	In the Distribute area, enable a check box that corresponds to the distribution area.

Related Topics

Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

To align an object to an object

To align an object to the page center

To align an object to the page edge

To snap objects

To set snapping threshold


To snap objects

1	Click View [image] Snap to objects setup.

2	Enable the Snap to objects check box.

3	Enable one of the following check boxes in the Object(s) being moved area:

•	Use cursor position [image] snaps to the spot where you clicked the selected object

•	Use object nodes [image] snaps at any of the selected object's nodes

4	Enable one of the following check boxes in Object(s) in drawing window:

•	Snap to nodes [image] snaps to any of the target object's nodes

•	Snap between nodes [image] snaps to any point between two nodes on a path

•	Snap to object center point [image] snaps to the center of the target object

•	Snap to bounding box [image] snaps to the bounding box of the target object

 Notes

•	A new node is created when you use Snap between nodes. If the new node is deleted, snapping will switch automatically to the nearest node.

•	An object's center point is identified by an X in the bounding box.

Related Topics

Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

To align an object to an object

To align an object to the page center

To align an object to the page edge

To distribute objects

To set snapping threshold


To set snapping threshold

1	Click View [image] Snap to objects setup.

2	Choose one of the following snapping distances from the Snapping threshold list box:

•	Low [image] snaps objects at four screen pixels

•	Medium [image] snaps objects at eight screen pixels

•	High [image] snaps objects at 16 screen pixels

Related Topics

Aligning, distributing, and snapping objects

To align an object to an object

To align an object to the page center

To align an object to the page edge

To distribute objects

To snap objects


Changing the order of objects

You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer by sending objects to the front or back, or behind or in front of other objects. You can also position objects precisely in the stacking order, as well as reverse the stacking order of multiple objects.

Related Topics

To change the order of an object

To reverse the order of multiple objects


To change the order of an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Arrange [image] Order, and click one of the following:

•	To front [image] moves the selected object to the front of all other objects

•	To back [image] moves the selected object behind all other objects

•	Forward one [image] moves the selected object forward one position

•	Back one [image] moves the selected object behind one position

•	In front of [image] moves the selected object in front of a specific object

•	Behind [image] moves the selected object behind a specific object

Related Topics

Changing the order of objects

To reverse the order of multiple objects


To reverse the order of multiple objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Order [image] Reverse order.

Related Topics

Changing the order of objects

To change the order of an object


Sizing and scaling objects

CorelDRAW lets you size and scale objects. In both cases, you change the dimensions of an object proportionally by preserving its aspect ratio. You can size an object's dimensions by specifying values or changing the object directly. Scaling changes an object's dimensions by a specified percentage.

You can change an object's anchor point from its center to any of its eight selection handles.

Related Topics

To size an object

To scale an object


To size an object

To	Do the following
Size a selected object	Drag any of the corner selection handles.
Size a selected object from its center	Hold down Shift, and drag one of the selection handles.
Size a selected object to a multiple of its original size	Hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) and drag one of the selection handles.
Stretch a selected object as you size it	Hold down Alt (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) and drag one of the selection handles.
 Tip

•	You can also set a precise size for the object by typing values in the Object size boxes on the property bar.

Related Topics

Sizing and scaling objects

To scale an object


To scale an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Transformations [image] Scale.

3	In the Transformations Docker window/palette, type values in the following boxes:

•	H [image] lets you specify a percentage by which you want to scale the object horizontally

•	V [image] lets you specify a percentage by which you want to scale the object vertically

If you want to change the object's anchor point, enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set.

If you want to maintain the aspect ratio, disable the Non-proportional check box.

 Tip

•	You can also scale an object by dragging a selection handle.

Related Topics

Sizing and scaling objects

To size an object


Rotating and mirroring objects

CorelDRAW lets you rotate and create mirror images of objects.

You can rotate an object in a drawing by specifying horizontal and vertical coordinates. You can move the center of rotation to a specific ruler coordinate or to a point that is relative to the current position of the object.

Mirroring an object flips it from left to right or top to bottom. By default, the mirror anchor point is in the center of the object.

Related Topics

To rotate an object

To rotate an object around a ruler coordinate

To mirror an object


To rotate an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Transformations [image] Rotate.

3	Disable the Relative center check box in the Transformations Docker window/palette.

To rotate an object around a point relative to its current position, enable the Relative center check box.

4	Type a value in the Angle box.

You can also
Specify the point around which you want to rotate the object	Type values in the H and V boxes to specify the horizontal and vertical positions. Click Apply.
 Tip

•	You can also rotate a selected object by dragging a rotation handle clockwise or counterclockwise.

Related Topics

Rotating and mirroring objects

To rotate an object around a ruler coordinate

To mirror an object


To rotate an object around a ruler coordinate

1	Select an object.

2	Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Free transform tool.

3	Disable the Relative to object button on the property bar.

4	Type values in any of the following Center of rotation position boxes:

•	x [image] lets you specify the point on the horizontal ruler around which the object will rotate

•	y [image] lets you specify the point on the vertical ruler around which the object will rotate

5	Type a value in the Angle of rotation box on the property bar.

6	Press Enter.

Related Topics

Rotating and mirroring objects

To rotate an object

To mirror an object


To mirror an object

1	Select an object.

2	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Transformations [image] Scale.

3	In the Transformations Docker window/palette, click one of the following:

•	Horizontal mirror [image] lets you flip the object left to right

•	Vertical mirror [image] lets you flip the object top to bottom

If you want to flip the object on a specific anchor point, enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set.

4	Click Apply.

 Tips

•	You can also mirror a selected object by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS) and dragging a selection handle to the opposite side of the object.

•	You can open the Transformations Docker window/palette by clicking Arrange [image] Transformations and selecting an option from the flyout.

Related Topics

Rotating and mirroring objects

To rotate an object

To rotate an object around a ruler coordinate


Grouping objects

You can group objects in CorelDRAW.

When you group two or more objects, they are treated as a single unit. This lets you apply the same formatting, properties, and other changes to all the objects within the group at the same time. CorelDRAW also lets you group other groups to create nested groups.

You can also add and remove objects to and from a group and delete objects that are members of a group. If you want to edit a single object in a group, you can ungroup the objects.

Related Topics

To group objects

To add an object to a group

To remove an object from a group

To ungroup objects


To group objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Group.

You can create a nested group, by selecting two or more groups of objects and clicking Arrange [image] Group.

 Note

•	You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, once grouped, the objects will reside on the same layer.

 Tip

•	You can also group objects by clicking Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Object manager, and dragging an object's name in the Object manager Docker window/palette over the name of another object.

Related Topics

Grouping objects

To add an object to a group

To remove an object from a group

To ungroup objects


To add an object to a group

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palette [image] Object manager.

2	In the Object manager Docker window/palette, drag the name of the object to the name of the group you want to add it to.

Related Topics

Grouping objects

To group objects

To remove an object from a group

To ungroup objects


To remove an object from a group

1	Click Window [image] Dockers / Palettes [image] Object manager.

2	Double-click the name of the group in the Object manager Docker window/palette.

3	Drag an object from the group to a position outside the group.

If you're removing an object from a group, click the object in the object list, and drag it out of the group.

If you want to delete an object that's in a group, select the object in the object list and click Edit [image] Delete.

Related Topics

Grouping objects

To group objects

To add an object to a group

To ungroup objects


To ungroup objects

1	Select one or more groups.

2	Click Arrange [image] Ungroup.

Tips

•	You can also ungroup objects by clicking the Ungroup button on the property bar.

•	You can also ungroup all the nested groups in an object by clicking the Ungroup all button.

Related Topics

Grouping objects

To group objects

To add an object to a group

To remove an object from a group


Combining objects

CorelDRAW lets you combine objects.

Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common fill and outline attributes. You can combine rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text. CorelDRAW converts these objects to a single curve object. If you need to modify the attributes of an object that is combined, you can break the combined object apart.

You can extract a subpath from a combined object to create two separate objects.

Related Topics

To combine objects

To break apart a combined object

To extract a subpath from a combined object


To combine objects

1	Select the objects.

2	Click Arrange [image] Combine.

 Note

•	Combined text objects become larger blocks of text.

Tip

•	You can also combine selected objects by clicking the Combine button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Combining objects

To break apart a combined object

To extract a subpath from a combined object


To break apart a combined object

1	Select a combined object.

2	Click Arrange [image] Break curve apart.

 Note

•	If you break apart a combined object that contains artistic text, the text breaks apart into lines first, then into words. Paragraph text breaks into separate paragraphs.

Related Topics

Combining objects

To combine objects

To extract a subpath from a combined object


To extract a subpath from a combined object

1	Select a segment, node, or group of nodes on a combined object using the Shape tool.

2	Click the Extract subpath button on the property bar.

 Note

•	After you have extracted the subpath, the path's fill and outline properties are removed from the combined object.

Related Topics

Combining objects

To combine objects

To break apart a combined object


Workspace tour

Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of CorelDRAW will help you easily follow this user guide's concepts and procedures.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	CorelDRAW terminology and concepts

•	CorelDRAW application window

•	CorelDRAW workspace tools


CorelDRAW terminology and concepts

Before you get started with CorelDRAW, you should be familiar with the following terms.

Term	Description
object	An element in a drawing such as an image, shape, line, text, curve, symbol, or layer.
drawing	The work you create in CorelDRAW: for example, custom artwork, logos, posters, and newsletters
vector graphic	An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn.
bitmap	An image composed of grids of pixels or dots
Docker window/palette	A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task
flyout	A button that opens a group of related tools or menu items
artistic text	A type of text to which you can apply special effects, such as shadows
paragraph text	A type of text to which you can apply formatting options, and which can be edited in large blocks


CorelDRAW application window

When you launch CorelDRAW, the application window opens containing a drawing window. The rectangle in the center of the drawing window is the drawing page where you create your drawing. Although more than one drawing window can be opened, you can apply commands to the active drawing window only.

Consult "Workspace tour" chapter in the CorelDRAW User Guide for a labeled example of an application window.

Part	Description
Menu bar	The area containing pull-down menu options
Property bar	A detachable bar with commands that relate to the active tool or object. For example, when the text tool is active, the text property bar displays commands that create and edit text.
Toolbar	A detachable bar that contains shortcuts to menu and other commands
Title bar	The area displaying the title of the currently open drawing
Rulers	Horizontal and vertical borders that are used to determine the size and position of objects in a drawing
Toolbox	A floating bar with tools for creating, filling, and modifying objects in the drawing
Drawing window	The area outside the drawing page bordered by the scroll bars and application controls
Drawing page	The rectangular area inside the drawing window. It is the printable area of your work area.
Docker window/palette	A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task
Color palette	(Windows)  A dockable bar that contains color swatches. (Mac OS) A free floating bar that contains the current color mode
Status bar	An area at the bottom of the application window that contains information about object properties such as type, size, color, fill, and resolution. The status bar also shows the current mouse position.
Document navigator	The area at the bottom left of the application window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages
Navigator	A button at the bottom-right corner (Windows) or bottom-left corner (Mac OS) that opens a smaller display to help you move around a drawing
 Notes

•	To toggle between displaying and hiding the status bar, click Window [image] Toolbars [image] Status bar.

•	To toggle between displaying and hiding the rulers, see "To hide or display the rulers."


CorelDRAW workspace tools

Application commands are accessible through the menu bar, toolbars, toolbox, property bar, and Docker windows (Windows) and palettes (Mac OS). The property bar and Docker windows/palettes provide access to commands that relate to the active tool or current task. The property bar, Docker windows/palettes, toolbars, and toolbox can be opened, closed, and moved around your screen at any time.

You can customize many of these workspace tools to suit your needs. For more information, see "Customizing your application."

Related Topics

Standard toolbar

More about toolbars

Exploring the toolbox

Property bar

Docker windows and palettes

Status bar


Standard toolbar

The standard toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts to many of the menu commands.

On Windows, the standard toolbar displays by default. To display the standard toolbar on Mac OS, see "To customize toolbar position and display."

For information about customizing the position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

Click this button	To
	Start a new drawing
	Open a drawing
	Save a drawing
	Print a drawing
	Cut selected objects to the Clipboard
	Copy selected objects to the Clipboard
	Paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing
	Undo an action
	Restore an action that was undone
	Import a drawing
	Export a drawing
	Set a zoom level
	(Windows) Start Corel applications
	(Windows) Launch to Corel Graphics Community Web site
Related Topics

CorelDRAW workspace tools

More about toolbars

Exploring the toolbox

Property bar

Docker windows and palettes

Status bar


More about toolbars

In addition to the standard toolbar, CorelDRAW has toolbars for specific kinds of tasks. For example, the Text toolbar contains commands relevant to using the Text tool. If you use a toolbar frequently, you can display it in the workspace at all times.

For information about customizing the position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars."

The table below describes toolbars other than the standard toolbar.

Toolbar	Description
Text	Contains commands for formatting and aligning text
Zoom	Contains commands for zooming in and out of a drawing page by specifying percentage of original view, clicking the Zoom tool, and selecting a page view
Internet	Contains commands for Web-related tools for creating rollovers and publishing to the Internet
Print merge	Contains commands for print merge items that combine text with a drawing such as creating and loading data files, creating data fields for variable text, and inserting print merge fields
Transform	Contains commands for skewing, rotating, and mirroring objects
(Windows) Visual Basic for Applications	Contains commands for editing, testing, and running VBA commands
 Tip

•	(Mac OS) You can add or remove toolbars by clicking Window [image] Toolbars [image] More toolbars, and enabling or disabling a toolbar.

Related Topics

CorelDRAW workspace tools

Standard toolbar

Exploring the toolbox

Property bar

Docker windows and palettes

Status bar


Exploring the toolbox

Flyouts open to display a set of related CorelDRAW tools. A small arrow in the bottom right-hand corner of a toolbox button indicates a flyout: for example, the Shape edit flyout. Clicking a flyout arrow opens a set of related tools. Clicking and dragging the grab handles at the end of the flyout sets the flyout in its expanded form.

The following table provides descriptions of the flyouts and tools in the CorelDRAW toolbox.

Flyouts

Flyout	Description
Shape edit	Lets you access the Shape, Knife, Eraser, Smudge brush, Roughen brush, and Free transform tools
Zoom	Lets you access the Zoom and Hand tools
Curve	Lets you access the Freehand, Bézier, Artistic media, Polyline, Pen, 3 point curve, Dimension, and Interactive connector tools
Rectangle	Lets you access the Rectangle and 3 point rectangle tools
Ellipse	Lets you access the Ellipse and 3 point ellipse tools
Object	Lets you access the Graph paper, Polygon, and Spiral tools
Perfect Shapes	Lets you access the Basic shapes, Arrow shapes, Flowchart shapes, Star shapes, and Callout shapes tools
Interactive tools	Lets you access the Interactive blend, Interactive contour, Interactive distortion, Interactive envelope, Interactive extrude, Interactive drop shadow, and Interactive transparency tools
Eyedropper	Lets you access the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools
Outline	Lets you access the Color Docker window/palette, Outline pen and the Outline color dialog boxes, and a selection of outlines of various widths
Fill	Lets you access the Color Docker window/palette, Fill color, Fountain fill, Pattern fill, Texture fill, and PostScript fill, dialog boxes
Interactive fill	Lets you access Interactive fill and Interactive mesh fill tools
Tools

Tool	Description
	The Pick tool lets you select and size, skew, and rotate objects.
	The Shape tool lets you edit the shape of objects.
	The Knife tool lets you cut through objects.
	The Eraser tool lets you remove areas of your drawing.
	The Smudge brush tool lets you distort a vector object by dragging along its outline.
	The Roughen brush tool lets you distort the outline of a vector object by dragging along the outline.
	The Free transform tool lets you transform an object by using the Free rotation, Angle rotation, Scale, and Skew tools.
	The Zoom tool lets you change the magnification level in the drawing window.
	The Hand tool lets you control which part of the drawing is visible in the drawing window
	The Pen tool lets you draw curves one segment at a time.
	The Polyline tool lets you draw lines and curves in preview mode.
	The Freehand tool lets you draw single line segments and curves.
	The Bézier tool lets you draw curves one segment at a time.
	The 3 point curve tool lets you draw a curve by defining the start, end, and center points.
	The Artistic media tool provides access to the Brush, Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure tools.
	The Dimension tool lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, or angular dimension lines.
	The Interactive connector tool lets you join two objects with a line.
	The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and squares.
	The 3 point rectangle tool lets you draw a rectangle by dragging to create the rectangle baseline and clicking to define its height.
	The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles.
	The 3 point ellipse tool lets you draw an ellipse by dragging to create the center line of the ellipse and clicking to define its height.
	The Polygon tool lets you draw symmetrical polygons and stars.
	The Spiral tool lets you draw symmetrical and logarithmic spirals.
	The Graph paper tool lets you draw a grid of lines similar to that on graph paper.
	The Basic shapes tool lets you choose from a full set of shapes, including hexagram, a smiley face, and a right-angle triangle.
	The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows of various shape, direction, and number of heads.
	The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw flowchart symbols.
	The Star shapes tool lets you draw ribbon objects and explosion shapes.
	The Callout shapes tool lets you draw callouts and labels.
	The Text tool lets you type words directly on the screen as artistic or paragraph text.
	The Interactive blend tool lets you blend two objects.
	The Interactive contour tool lets you apply a contour to an object.
	The Interactive distortion tool lets you apply a Push or Pull distortion, a Zipper distortion, or a Twister distortion to an object.
	The Interactive envelope tool lets you distort an object by dragging the nodes of the envelope.
	The Interactive extrude tool lets you apply the illusion of depth to objects.
	The Interactive drop shadow tool lets you apply a drop shadow to an object.
	The Interactive transparency tool lets you apply transparencies to objects.
	The Eyedropper tool lets you select a fill from an object on the drawing window.
	The Paintbucket tool lets you fill an object on the drawing window after selecting a fill using the Eyedropper tool.
	The Interactive fill tool lets you apply various fills.
	The Interactive mesh tool lets you apply a mesh grid to an object.
	The Fill tool lets you set the fill properties.
Related Topics

CorelDRAW workspace tools

Standard toolbar

More about toolbars

Property bar

Docker windows and palettes

Status bar


Property bar

The property bar displays the most commonly used functions that are relevant to the active tool or to the task you're performing. Although it looks like a toolbar, the property bar content changes depending on the tool or task.

For example, when you click the Text tool in the Toolbox, the property bar displays only text-related commands, such as text, formatting, alignment, and editing tools.

You can customize the contents and position of the property bar to suit your needs. For more information, see "Customizing the property bar."

Related Topics

CorelDRAW workspace tools

Standard toolbar

More about toolbars

Exploring the toolbox

Docker windows and palettes

Status bar


Docker windows and palettes

Docker windows (Windows) and palettes (Mac OS) display the same type of controls as a dialog box, such as command buttons, options, and list boxes. Unlike most dialog boxes, you can keep Docker windows/palettes open while working on a document, so you can readily access the commands to experiment with different effects.

An example is the Object properties Docker window/palette. When this Docker window/palette is open, you can click an object in the drawing window and view formatting, dimensions, and other properties of the object.

In Windows, Docker windows can be either docked or floating. Docking a Docker window attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a Docker window detaches it from other parts of the workspace, so it can be easily moved around. You can also collapse Docker windows to save screen space.

Related Topics

CorelDRAW workspace tools

Standard toolbar

More about toolbars

Exploring the toolbox

Property bar

Status bar


Status bar

The status bar displays information about selected objects (such as color, fill type, and outline) cursor position, and relevant commands.

See "Customizing the status bar" for information about customizing the contents and appearance of the status bar.

The graphic below shows some of the information displayed in a status bar.

Related Topics

CorelDRAW workspace tools

Standard toolbar

More about toolbars

Exploring the toolbox

Property bar

Docker windows and palettes


Customizing your application

You can customize your application by arranging command bars and commands to suit your needs. Command bars include menus, toolbars, the property bar, and the status bar.

Help topics are based on the application's default settings. When you customize command bars, commands, and buttons, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	saving defaults

•	using multiple workspaces

•	customizing keyboard shortcuts

•	customizing menus

•	customizing toolbars

•	customizing the property bar

•	customizing the status bar

•	customizing feedback sounds


Saving defaults

Many application settings apply to the active drawing only. These include page layout options, grid and ruler settings, guideline settings, style options, save options, and Web publishing options. Saving the current settings as defaults lets you use the settings of the active drawing for all new drawings you create. You can also choose to save only specific settings as defaults.

Related Topics

To save current settings as defaults

To save specific settings as defaults


To save current settings as defaults

•	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Save settings as default.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Save settings as default.

Related Topics

Saving defaults

To save specific settings as defaults


To save specific settings as defaults

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, click Document.

3	Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box.

4	Enable the check boxes that correspond to the options you want to save.

Related Topics

Saving defaults

To save current settings as defaults


Using multiple workspaces

A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. You can create, choose, and delete workspaces. You can also reset the current workspace to the default settings. This lets you undo changes you make to a workspace.

You can also export and import workspaces to and from other computers that use the same application. For example, you can customize a workspace and share it with a group of users.

Related Topics

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To create a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Click New.

4	Type the name of the workspace in the Name of new workspace box.

5	From the Base new workspace on list box, choose an existing workspace on which to base the new workspace.

If you want to include a description of the workspace, type a description in the Description of new workspace box.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To choose a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Enable the check box beside a workspace in the Workspace list.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To delete a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Choose a workspace from the Workspace list.

4	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the default workspace.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To reset the current workspace

•	Hold down F8 (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), and start the application.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To import a workspace

To export a workspace


To import a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Click Import.

4	In the Import workspace dialog box, click Browse.

5	Choose the folder where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the file.

7	Follow the instructions on screen.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To export a workspace


To export a workspace

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the list of categories, click Workspace.

3	Click Export.

4	Enable the check boxes beside the workspace items you want to export.

5	Click Save.

6	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

7	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Click Save.

9	Click Close.

 Note

•	The workspace items available for export are Docker windows (Windows), palettes (Mac OS), toolbars (including the property bar and toolbox), menus, status bar, and shortcut keys.

 Tip

•	(Windows) You can email a workspace as an attachment by clicking Email in the Export workspace dialog box.

Related Topics

Using multiple workspaces

To create a workspace

To choose a workspace

To delete a workspace

To reset the current workspace

To import a workspace


Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Although your application already has preset keyboard shortcuts, you can change these or add your own shortcuts to suit your working style. You can assign keyboard shortcuts to the commands and text styles that you use the most, and you can delete keyboard shortcuts. Assigning a keyboard shortcut to a text style lets you quickly change the style of selected text.

You can print a list of keyboard shortcuts. You can also export a list of keyboard shortcuts to the CSV file format [image] a comma delimited format that is easily opened by word processors and spreadsheet applications.

When you change keyboard shortcuts, the changes are saved in a file called an accelerator table. Your application comes with two accelerator tables which can be customized to suit your work habits:

•	Main table [image] contains all non-text-related shortcut keys

•	Text editing table [image] contains all text-related shortcut keys

Related Topics

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.

5	Choose a command category from the top list box.

6	Click a command in the Commands list.

The shortcut keys currently assigned to the selected command are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box.

7	Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination.

If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box.

8	Click Assign.

 Note

•	If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut.

 Tips

•	You can reset all keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all.

•	You can view all of the existing keyboard shortcuts by clicking View all.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.

5	Choose Apply styles from the top list box.

6	Choose a text style from the list.

The shortcut keys currently assigned to applying the selected style are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box.

7	Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination.

If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box.

8	Click Assign.

 Note

•	If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut.

 Tip

•	You can all reset keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To delete a keyboard shortcut

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box.

5	Choose a command category from the top list box.

6	Click a command in the Commands list.

7	Click a shortcut key in the Current shortcut keys box.

8	Click Delete.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

To print keyboard shortcuts

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To print keyboard shortcuts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Click View all.

5	Click Print.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To export a list of keyboard shortcuts


To export a list of keyboard shortcuts

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

4	Click View all.

5	Click Export to CSV.

6	Choose the folder where you want to save the file.

7	Type a filename in the File name box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS).

8	Click Save.

Related Topics

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command

To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style

To delete a keyboard shortcut

To print keyboard shortcuts


Customizing menus

Corel customization features let you modify the menu bar and the menus it contains. You can change the order of menus and menu commands; add, remove, and rename menus and menu commands; and add and remove menu command separators. You can also reset menus to the default setting.

The customization options apply to the menu bar menus as well as to context menus that you access by right-clicking (Windows) or Control-clicking (Mac OS).

Help topics are based on the application's default settings. When you customize menus and menu commands, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes.

Related Topics

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To change the order of menus and menu commands

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

3	In the application window, drag a menu on the menu bar to the left or right.

If you want to change the order of a menu command, click a menu on the menu bar, click a menu command, and drag it up or down.

If you want to change the order of context menu commands, right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) in the application window to display the context menu, and drag a menu command to a new position.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To rename a menu or menu command

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Click a menu or command in the list.

A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu.

5	Click the Appearance tab.

6	Type a name in the Caption box.

 Note

•	(Windows) An ampersand (&) before a letter in the Caption box indicates a shortcut. Menus are displayed by pressing Alt + the letter. Commands are invoked by pressing the letter when the menu is displayed.

 Tip

•	You can reset the name to the default by clicking Restore defaults.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To add or remove an item on the menu bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

If you want to remove an item, drag it off the menu bar.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag an item to the menu bar.

A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. All other items in the list are commands.

 Notes

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

•	(Mac OS) Only menus, and not menu commands, can be added to the menu bar.

•	(Mac OS) You cannot remove the Help menu from the menu bar.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To add or remove a command on a menu

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

If you want to remove a command from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command off the menu.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a command to a menu in the application window.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command separator on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To add or remove a command separator on a menu

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

If you are using the Mac OS, a temporary menu bar displays below the application's menu bar.

If you want to remove a command separator from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command separator off the menu.

3	Choose User menus from the top list box.

4	Click Separator and drag it onto a menu in the application window.

 Note

•	(Mac OS) Menu bar changes must be made to the temporary menu bar. The changes are copied to the application's menu bar when you return to the application window.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)


To reset menus to the default setting (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Choose Menu bar from the list.

4	Click Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing menus

To change the order of menus and menu commands

To rename a menu or menu command

To add or remove an item on the menu bar

To add or remove a command on a menu

To add or remove a command separator on a menu


Customizing toolbars

You can customize toolbar position and display. For example, you can move or resize a toolbar, and you can choose to hide or display a toolbar.

Toolbars can be either docked or floating. Docking a toolbar attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a toolbar pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around.

You can create, delete, and rename custom toolbars. You can customize toolbars by adding, removing, and arranging toolbar items. You can adjust toolbar appearance by resizing buttons; adjusting the toolbar border; and displaying images, captions, or both. You can also edit toolbar button images.

When moving, docking, and undocking toolbars, you use the grab area of the toolbar.

For a	The grab area is
Docked toolbar (Windows)	identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar
Docked toolbar (Mac OS)	identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar
Floating toolbar (Windows)	the title bar. If the title is not displayed, the grab area is identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar.
Floating toolbar (Mac OS)	the area below, or to the right of, the Close button
Related Topics

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To customize toolbar position and display

To	Do the following
Move a toolbar	Click the toolbar's grab area, and drag the toolbar to a new position.
Dock a toolbar	Click the toolbar's grab area, and drag the toolbar to any edge of the application window.
Undock a toolbar	Click the toolbar's grab area, and drag the toolbar away from the edge of the application window.
Resize a floating toolbar (Windows)	Point to the edge of the toolbar and, using the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the toolbar.
Resize a floating toolbar (Mac OS)	Drag the resize handle at the bottom-right corner of the toolbar.
Hide or display a toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, and disable or enable the check box next to the toolbar name.
Hide or display a toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, and disable or enable the check box next to the toolbar name.
Reset a toolbar to its default setting (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Reset.
Reset a toolbar to its default setting (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Reset.
Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To	Do the following
Add a custom toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click New, and type a name.
Add a custom toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click New, and type a name.
Delete a custom toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Delete.
Delete a custom toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Delete.
Rename a custom toolbar (Windows)	Click Tools [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar name twice, and type a new name.
Rename a custom toolbar (Mac OS)	Click Edit [image] Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar name, and type a new name.
Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To add or remove an item on a toolbar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a toolbar item from the list to a toolbar in the application window.

If you want to remove an item from a toolbar, drag the toolbar item off the toolbar.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To arrange toolbar items

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	On the toolbar in the application window, drag the toolbar item to a new position.

If you want to move a toolbar item to another toolbar, drag the toolbar item icon from one toolbar to the other.

 Tip

•	You can copy a toolbar item to another toolbar by holding down Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) while dragging a toolbar item.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To modify toolbar appearance

To edit a toolbar button image


To modify toolbar appearance

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Click a toolbar name in the list.

If you want to choose multiple toolbars, hold down Ctrl (Windows) or Shift (Mac OS), and click the other toolbar names.

4	Choose a size from the Button list box.

5	In the Border box, click an arrow to specify a value from 1 to 10 pixels for the toolbar border.

6	From the Default button appearance list box, choose one of the following:

•	Caption below image

•	Caption only

•	Caption to right of image

•	Image only

(Windows) If you want to hide the title when the toolbar is floating, disable the Show title when toolbar is floating check box.

 Tip

•	You can reset a built-in toolbar to its default settings by clicking Reset.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To edit a toolbar button image


To edit a toolbar button image

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Click a toolbar command.

5	Click the Appearance tab.

6	Edit the button image using the options in the Image area.

 Note

•	When you choose either Small or Medium in the Size list box, you edit the small or medium versions of a particular button image. You cannot edit the large version of a button image. For information about how to display all buttons as small, medium, or large, see "To modify toolbar appearance."

 Tip

•	You can reset toolbar button images to the default settings by clicking Restore defaults.

Related Topics

Customizing toolbars

To customize toolbar position and display

To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar

To add or remove an item on a toolbar

To arrange toolbar items

To modify toolbar appearance


Customizing the property bar

You have control over the placement and content of the property bar. You can move the property bar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the application window creates a floating property bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the application window docks it, making it part of the window border.

When moving, docking, or undocking the property bar, you use the grab area of the property bar, which is the same as the grab area of a toolbar. For more information about the grab area, see "Customizing toolbars."

You can also set up a custom property bar by adding, removing, and rearranging toolbar items. This lets you customize what appears on the property bar when you choose various tools. For example, when the Text tool is active, you can have the property bar display additional commands for text-related tasks such as increasing or decreasing font size, or changing case.

Related Topics

To position the property bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar


To position the property bar

To	Do the following
Move the property bar	Click the property bar's grab area, and drag the property bar to a new position.
Undock the property bar	Click the property bar's grab area, and drag the property bar away from the edge of the application window.
Dock the property bar	Click the property bar's grab area, and drag the property bar to any edge of the application window.
Related Topics

Customizing the property bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar


To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a toolbar item from the list to the property bar.

If you want to remove an item from the property bar, drag the toolbar item icon off the property bar.

 Note

•	The new item is displayed on the property bar for the active tool or task. When the property bar content changes, the item is not displayed. The new item is displayed again when the related tool or task is activated.

Related Topics

Customizing the property bar

To position the property bar

To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar


To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position on the property bar.

Related Topics

Customizing the property bar

To position the property bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar


Customizing the status bar

The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as color, fill type, and outline. The status bar also shows the current mouse position and relevant commands. You can customize the status bar by resizing it. If you want to see more of the application window, you can hide the status bar. You can also customize the status bar by adding, removing, and resizing toolbar items.

Related Topics

To resize the status bar

To hide the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To resize the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Click Status bar, and enable the check box.

4	Type a value from 12 in the Number of lines when docked box (Windows) or Number of lines box (Mac OS).

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To hide the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To hide the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Disable the check box beside Status bar.

 Tip

•	You can also switch between hiding and displaying the status bar by clicking Window [image] Toolbars [image] Status bar.

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To resize the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Commands.

3	Choose a command category from the top list box.

4	Drag a toolbar item from the list to the status bar.

If you want to remove a toolbar item from the status bar, drag the item off the status bar.

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To resize the status bar

To hide the status bar

To resize toolbar items on the status bar


To resize toolbar items on the status bar

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Customization.

•	(Mac OS) Click Edit [image] Customization.

2	In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars.

3	Click Status bar, and enable the check box.

4	Choose one of the following options from the Button list box:

•	Small

•	Medium

•	Large

 Note

•	Only toolbar items you have added to the status bar are affected by resizing. The size of the default icons remains unchanged.

Related Topics

Customizing the status bar

To resize the status bar

To hide the status bar

To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar


Customizing feedback sounds (Windows)

Your application supports sounds through the Windows operating system. These sounds, which provide feedback through audio cues, are associated with certain user interface events. Though your application registers events available for sound cues, it does not supply any sounds. You can assign feedback sounds to specific events. Once assigned, feedback sounds are enabled by default, but you can disable them.

Related Topics

To assign feedback sounds (Windows)

To disable feedback sounds (Windows)


To assign feedback sounds (Windows)

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar.

2	Click Settings [image] Control panel.

3	Double-click Sounds.

4 From the Sound events list, choose an event below the application name.

6	Choose a sound from the Name list box.

 Note

•	For more information about feedback sounds, consult your operating system's Help file.

Related Topics

Customizing feedback sounds (Windows)

To disable feedback sounds (Windows)


To disable feedback sounds (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, click General.

3	Disable the Enable sounds check box.

 Note

•	You must restart the application for the disable command to take effect.

Related Topics

Customizing feedback sounds (Windows)

To assign feedback sounds (Windows)


Glossary

A

Accelerator table

Anchor point

Animation file

Anti-aliasing

Arrow keys

Artistic text

Aspect ratio

B

Base color

Bézier line

Bit depth

Bitmap

Black and white

Bleed

Blend

Bookmark

Bounding box

Brightness

C

Calligraphic angle

Cascading style sheets

Center of rotation

CGI Script

Character

Child color

Choke

Clipart

Clipboard

Clone

Closed object

Closed path

CMYK

Color channel

Color gamut

Color mode

Color model

Color palette

Color profile

Color separation

Color space

Color swatch

Color value

Combined object

Compound blend

Concave

Content

Contours

Contrast

Control object

Control points

Convex

Curve object

D

Desktop

Diacritical marks

Dimension lines

Dithering

Document navigator

Dpi

Drawing

Drawing page

Drawing window

Drop shadow

Duotone

E

Envelope

Extrusion

F

Feathering

File transfer protocol

Fill

Filter

Floating object

Font

Fountain fill

Fountain steps

Freehand marquee select

G

GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)

Glyph

Grab area

Grayscale

Greeking

Grid

Group

Guideline

Gutter

H

Halftone

Handles

Hot zone

Hotspot

HSB

HTML

Hue

Hyperlink

I

Icon

Image map

Image resolution

Imagesetter

Insert

Interlacing

J

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

Justify

K

Kerning

L

Lab

Leader tabs

Leading

Library

Lightness

Lossless

Lossy

LZW

M

Marquee-select

Master layer

Master object

Master page

Mesh fill

Micro nudge

Miter limit

Moire pattern

Multiple select

N

Nested group

Nested PowerClip objects

Nodes

Noise

Nonprinting characters

Nudge

O

Object

One-point perspective

Opacity

Open object

Origin

Outline

Output resolution

Overexposure

P

Paletted color mode

Pan

Paragraph text

Parent color

Path

Pattern fill

PANOSE

PANTONE process colors palette

Pixel

PNG

Point

PostScript fills

PowerClip effect

PowerClip object

Process color

Progressive

Q

QuickCorrect

R

Rasterized image

Render

Resolution

RGB

Rotate

Ruler

S

Saturation

Scale

Scratch disk

Segment

Selection box

Simple wireframe view

Size

Skew

Snap

Source object

Splash Screen

Split blend

Spot color

Spread

Style

Subpaths

Subscript

Super nudge

Superscript

Swap disk

Swatch

Symbol

Symbol instance

T

Target object

Template

Text frame

Text styles

Texture fill

Threshold

Thumbnail

Tiling

Tint

Tone

Transparency

TrueType fonts

Two-point perspective

U

Underexposure

Uniform fill

URL

V

Vanishing point

Vector graphic

Vector object

W

Watermark

Weld

White point

Wireframe view

Z

ZIP

Zoom


Accelerator table (definition)
accelerator table

A file that contains a list of shortcut keys. Different tables are active depending on the task that you are performing.


Anchor point (definition)
anchor point

The point that remains stationary when you stretch, scale, mirror, or skew an object. Anchor points correspond to the eight handles that display when an object is selected, as well as the center of a selection box marked by an X.


Animation file (definition)
animation file

A file that supports moving images; for example, animated GIF and QuickTime (MOV).


Anti-aliasing (definition)
anti-aliasing

A method of smoothing curved and diagonal edges in images. Intermediate pixels along edges are filled to smooth the transition between the edges and the surrounding area.


Arrow keys (definition)
arrow keys

Direction keys that move or "nudge" selected objects in small increments. You can also use arrow keys to position the cursor when you type or edit text onscreen or in a dialog box.


Artistic text (definition)
artistic text

A type of text created with the Text tool. Use artistic text to add short lines of text, such as titles, or to apply graphic effects, such as fitting text to a path, creating extrusions and blends, and creating all other special effects. An artistic text object can contain up to 32,000 characters.


Aspect ratio (definition)
aspect ratio

The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3.


Base color (definition)
base color

The color of the object that appears under a transparency. The base color and the color of the transparency combine in various ways depending on the merge mode you apply to the transparency.


Bézier line (definition)
Bézier line

A straight or curved line made up of segments connected by nodes. Each node has control points that allow the shape of the line to be modified.


Bit depth (definition)
bit depth

The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap. For example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be black or white. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal to 2 to the power of the bit depth.


Bitmap (definition)
bitmap

An image composed of grids of pixels or dots.

See also vector graphic.


Black and white (definition)
black-and-white color mode

A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors [image] black and white [image] with no gradations. This color mode is useful for line art and simple graphics.


Bleed (definition)
bleed

The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the page. The bleed ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and trimming.


Blend (definition)
blend

An effect created by transforming one object into another through a progression of shapes and colors.


Bookmark (definition)
bookmark

An indicator for marking an address on the Internet.


Bounding box (definition)
bounding box

The invisible box indicated by the eight selection handles surrounding a selected object.


Brightness (definition)
brightness

The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color mode, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. For example, a brightness value of 0 produces black, and a brightness value of 255 produces white.


Calligraphic angle (definition)
calligraphic angle

The angle that controls the orientation of a pen to the drawing surface, like the slant of the nib on a calligraphy pen. A line drawn at the calligraphic angle has little or no thickness, but widens as its angle gets farther from the calligraphic angle.


Cascading style sheets (definition)
cascading style sheets (CSS)

An extension to HTML that allows styles such as color, font, and size to be specified for parts of a hypertext document. Style information can be shared by multiple HTML files.

See also HTML.


Center of rotation (definition)
center of rotation

The point around which an object rotates.


CGI Script (definition)
CGI script

An external application that is executed by an HTTP server in response to an action you perform in a Web browser, such as clicking a link, image, or another interactive element of a Web page


Character (definition)
character

A letter, number, punctuation mark, or other symbol.


Child color (definition)
child color

A color style created as a shade of another color style. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent, but have different saturation and brightness levels.

See also parent color.


Choke (definition)
choke

In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object into the foreground object.


Clipart (definition)
clipart

Ready-made images that can be imported into Corel applications and edited if required.


Clipboard (definition)
Clipboard

An area that is used to temporarily store cut or copied information. The information is stored until new information is cut or copied to the Clipboard, replacing the old.


Clone (definition)
clone

A copy of an object or an area of an image that is linked to a master object or image area. Most changes made to the master are automatically applied to its clones.

See also symbol.


Closed object (definition)
closed object

An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are connected.


Closed path (definition)
closed path

A path whose start point and end point are connected.


CMYK (definition)
CMYK

A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). CMYK printing produces true blacks and a wide tonal range. In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages; therefore, a value of 100 for an ink means that the ink is applied at full saturation.


Combined object (definition)
combined object

An object created by combining two or more objects and converting them into a single curve object. A combined object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the last selected object. Sections where an even number of objects overlapped have no fill. Sections where an odd number of objects overlapped are filled. The outlines of the original objects remain visible.


Color channel (definition)
color channel

An 8-bit grayscale version of an image. Each channel represents one level of color in the image; for example, RGB has three color channels, while CMYK has four. When all the channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image.

See also RGB and CMYK.


Color gamut (definition)
color gamut

The range of colors that can be reproduced or perceived by any device. For example, a monitor displays a different color gamut than a printer, making it necessary to manage colors from original images to final output.


Color mode (definition)
color mode

A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up an image. Black-and-white, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and paletted are examples of color modes.


Color model (definition)
color model

A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB (red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), and CIE L*a*b (Lab) are examples of color models.


Color palette (definition)
color palette

A collection of solid colors from which you can choose colors for fills and outlines.


Color profile (definition)
color profile

A description of the color-handling capabilities and characteristics of a device.


Color separation (definition)
color separation

In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image. In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) must be made.


Color space (definition)
color space

In electronic color management, a virtual representation of a device or the color gamut of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by color management software.

See also Color gamut.


Color swatch (definition)
color swatch

A solid-colored patch in a color palette.


Color value (definition)
color value

A set of numbers that define a color in a color mode. For example, in the RGB color mode, color values of 255 for red (R) and zero for both green (G) and blue (B) result in the color red.


Compound blend (definition)
compound blend

A blend created by blending the start or end object of one blend with another object.


Concave (definition)
concave

Hollowed or rounded inward like the inside of a bowl.


Content (definition)
content

The object or objects that appear inside a container object when you apply PowerClip effects.


Contours (definition)
contour

An effect created by adding evenly spaced concentric shapes inside or outside the borders of an object.


Contrast (definition)
contrast

The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast values indicate greater differences and fewer gradations between dark and light.


Control object (definition)
control object

The original object used to create effects such as envelopes, extrusions, drop shadows, contours, and objects created with the Artistic media tool. Changes made to the control object control the appearance of the effect.


Control points (definition)
control points

The points that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape tool. Control points determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node.


Convex (definition)
convex

Curved or rounded outwards like the exterior of a sphere or circle.


Curve object (definition)
curve object

An object that has nodes and control points, which you can manipulate to change the object's shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line.


Desktop (definition)
desktop

The area in a drawing where you can experiment and create objects for future use. This area is outside the borders of the drawing page. You can drag objects from the desktop area to the drawing page when you decide to use them.


Diacritical marks (definition)
diacritical mark

An accent mark above, below, or through a written character; for example, the acute () and grave (`) accents.


Dimension lines (definition)
dimension line

A line that displays the size of objects or the distance or angle between objects.


dithering

A process used to simulate a greater number of colors when only a limited number of colors is available.


Document navigator (definition)
document navigator

The area at the bottom-left of the application window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages.  The document navigator also displays the page number of the active page and the total number of pages in a drawing.


dpi (definition)
dpi (dots per inch)

A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 600 dpi. Image setters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution.


Drawing (definition)
drawing

A document you create in CorelDRAW.


Drawing page (definition)
drawing page

The portion of a drawing window enclosed by a rectangle with a shadow effect.


Drawing window (definition)
drawing window

The portion of the application window on which you can create, add, and edit objects.


Drop shadow (definition)
drop shadow

A three-dimensional shadow effect that gives objects a realistic appearance.


Duotone (definition)
duotone

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using 256 shades of up to four tones. An image in the duotone color mode is simply a grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors.


Envelope (definition)
envelope

A closed shape that can be placed around an object to change the object's shape. An envelope consists of segments connected by nodes. Once an envelope has been placed around an object, the nodes can be moved to change the shape of the object.


Extrusion (definition)
extrusion

A feature that lets you apply a three-dimensional perspective by projecting lines from an object to create the illusion of depth.


Feathering (definition)
feathering

The level of sharpness along a drop shadow's edges.


Fill (definition)
fill

A color, bitmap, fountain, or pattern applied to an area of an image.


Filter (definition)
filter

An application that translates digital information from one form to another.


Floating object (definition)
floating object

A bitmap with no background. Floating objects are also referred to as photo objects or cutout images.


Font (definition)
font

A set of characters with a single style (such as italic), weight (such as bold), and size (such as 10 point) for a typeface such as Times New Roman.


Fountain fill (definition)
fountain fill

A smooth progression of two or more colors applied to an area of an image that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. Two-color fountain fills have a direct progression from one color to another, while custom fills may have a progression of many colors.


Fountain steps (definition)
fountain steps

The shades of color that make up the appearance of a fountain fill. The more steps in a fill, the smoother the transition from the beginning color to the end color.


Freehand marquee select (definition)
freehand marquee select

To marquee select objects or nodes by holding down the Option key while dragging the Shape tool and controlling the shape of the marquee box enclosure as if you were drawing a freehand line.

See also marquee select.


File transfer protocol (definition)
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A method of moving files between two computers. Many Internet sites have established repositories of material that can be obtained using FTP.


GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) (definition)
GIF

A graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily exchanged between computers. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 or fewer colors to the Internet.


Glyph (definition)
glyph

Diamond-shaped handles that can be dragged to alter the form of a shape.


Grab area (definition)
grab area

The area of a command bar that can be dragged. Dragging the grab area moves the bar, while dragging any other area of the bar has no effect. The location of the grab area depends on the operating system you are using, the orientation of the bar, and whether the bar is docked or undocked. Command bars with grab areas include toolbars, the toolbox, and the property bar.


Grayscale (definition)
grayscale

A color mode that displays images using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white).


Greeking (definition)
greeking

A method of representing text using either words that have no meaning or a series of straight lines.


Grid (definition)
grid

A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical dots that are used to help draw and arrange objects.


Group (definition)
group

A set of objects that behaves as one unit. Operations you perform on a group apply equally to each of its objects.


Guideline (definition)
guideline

A horizontal, vertical, or slanted line that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object placement.


Gutter (definition)
gutter

The space between columns of text, also called the alley. In printing, the white space formed by the inside margins of two facing pages.


Halftone (definition)
halftone

An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes to represent different tones.


Handles (definition)
handles

A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize or mirror the object. If you click a selected object, the shape of the handles changes to arrows so that you can rotate and skew the object.


Hotspot (definition)
hot spot

The area of an object that you can click to jump to the address specified by a URL.


Hot zone (definition)
hot zone

The distance from the right margin at which hyphenation begins.


HSB (definition)
HSB (hue, saturation, brightness)

A color model that defines three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, and so on); brightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense).


HTML (definition)
HTML

The World Wide Web authoring standard comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page.


Hue (definition)
hue

The property of a color that allows it to be classified by its name. For example, blue, green, and red are all hues.


Hyperlink (definition)
hyperlink

An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another place in that document or to another document.


Icon (definition)
icon

A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other application item.


Image map (definition)
image map

A graphic in an HTML document that contains clickable areas that link to locations on the World Wide Web, to other HTML documents, or to graphics.


Image resolution (definition)
image resolution

The number of pixels per inch in a bitmap measured in ppi (pixels per inch) or dpi (dots per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance to the bitmap; high resolutions can produce smoother images but result in larger file sizes.


Imagesetter (definition)
imagesetter

A high-resolution device that creates film or film-based paper output used in the production of plates for printing presses.


Insert (definition)
insert

To import and place a photo image, clipart object, or sound file into a drawing.


Interlacing (definition)
interlacing

In GIF images, a method that lets you display a Web-based image on the screen at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality improves.


JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) (definition)
JPEG

A format for photographic images that offers compression with some loss of image quality. Because of their compression (up to 20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images are widely used in Internet publishing.


Justify (definition)
justify

To modify the spacing between characters and words so that the edges on the left, right, or both margins of a block of text are even.


Kerning (definition)
kerning

The space between characters, and the adjustment of that space. Often, kerning is used to place two characters closer together than usual, for example WA, AW, TA, or VA. Kerning increases readability and makes letters appear balanced and proportional, especially at larger font sizes.


Lab (definition)
Lab

A color model that contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two chromatic components: "a" (green to red) and "b" (blue to yellow).


Leader tabs (definition)
leader tabs

A row of characters placed between text objects to help the reader follow a line across white space. Leader tabs are often used in place of tab stops, especially before text that is flush right such as in a list or table of contents.


Leading (definition)
leading

The spacing between lines of text. Leading is important for both readability and appearance.


Library (definition)
library

The area in a CorelDRAW (CDR) file that contains symbol definitions and information about instances.


Lightness (definition)
lightness

The level of brightness that is shared between a transparency and the object to which it is applied. For example, if a transparency is applied to an object whose color appears bright, the transparency color will take on a comparable brightness. The same holds true for a transparency that is applied to an object whose color appears dark [image] the transparency will take on a comparable darkness.


Lossless (definition)
lossless

A kind of file compression that maintains the quality of an image that has been compressed and decompressed.


Lossy (definition)
lossy

A kind of file compression that results in noticeable degradation of image quality.


LZW (definition)
LZW

A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time. LZW compression is commonly used on GIF and TIFF files.


Marquee-select (definition)
marquee select

To select objects or nodes by dragging the Pick tool or Shape tool diagonally and enclosing objects in a marquee box with a dotted outline.


master object (definition)
master object

An object that has been cloned. Most changes you make to the master object are automatically applied to the clone.


Master layer (definition)
master layer

A layer on a master page whose objects appear on every page of a multipage drawing. A master page can have more than one master layer.


Master page (definition)
master page

A page that controls the master settings for the Grid, Guideline, and Desktop layers plus one initial active layer.


Mesh fill (definition)
mesh fill

A type of fill that lets you add patches of color to the inside of a selected object.


Micro nudge (definition)
micro nudge

To move an object in small increments.

See also nudge and super nudge.


Miter limit (definition)
miter limit

A value that determines when two lines that meet at a sharp angle switch from a pointed (mitered) joint to a squared-off (beveled) joint.


Moire pattern (definition)
moiré pattern

The visual effect of radiating curves created by superimposing two regular patterns.  For example, a moiré pattern can result by overlapping two halftone screens of  different angles, dot spacing, and dot size. Moiré patterns are the undesirable result of rescreening an image with a different halftone screen or with the same halftone screen on an angle different from the original.


Multiple select (definition)
multiple select

To select multiple objects using the Pick tool or multiple nodes using the Shape tool.


Nested group (definition)
nested group

A group of two or more groups that behaves as one object.


Nested PowerClip objects (definition)
nested PowerClip objects

Containers that hold other containers to form complex PowerClip objects.


Nodes (definition)
nodes

The square points at each end of a line or curve segment. You can change the shape of a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes.


Noise (definition)
noise

In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a television screen.


Nonprinting characters (definition)
nonprinting characters

Items that appear on the screen but do not print. They include the rulers, guidelines, table gridlines, hidden text, and formatting symbols, such as spaces, hard returns, tabs, and indents.


Nudge (definition)
nudge

To move an object in increments.

See also micro nudge and super nudge.


Object (definition)
object

A generic term for any item you create or place in a drawing. Objects include lines, shapes, graphics, and text.


One-point perspective (definition)
one-point perspective

An effect created by lengthening or shortening one side of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in one direction.


Opacity (definition)
opacity

The quality of an object that makes it difficult to see through. If an object is 100% opaque, you cannot see through it. Opacity levels under 100% increase the ability to see through objects.

See also transparency.


Open object (definition)
open object

An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are not connected.


Origin (definition)
origin

The point in the drawing window at which the rulers intersect.


Output resolution (definition)
output resolution

The number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser printer, produces.


Outline (definition)
outline

The line that defines the shape of an object.


Overexposure (definition)
overexposure

Excessive light in an image that gives it a washed-out appearance.


Paletted color mode (definition)
paletted color mode

An 8-bit color mode that displays images using up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to control the colors used throughout the conversion process more precisely.


Pan (definition)
pan

To move the drawing page around in the drawing window. Panning changes the page view in the same way that scrolling moves the drawing up, down, to the left, or to the right in the drawing window. When working at high magnification levels where not all of the drawing is displayed, you can quickly pan to see parts of the drawing that were previously hidden.


PANOSE (definition)
PANOSE font matching

A feature that lets you choose a substitute font if you open a file that contains a font not installed on your computer. You can make a substitution for the current working session only, or you can permanently make a substitution so that when you save and reopen the file, the new font automatically displays.


PANTONE process colors palette(definition)
PANTONE process colors

The colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color System, which is based on the CMYK color model.


Paragraph text (definition)
paragraph text

A text type that allows you to apply formatting options and directly edit large blocks of text.


Parent color (definition)
parent color

An original color style that you can save and apply to objects in a drawing. You can create child colors from the parent color.

See also child color.


Path (definition)
path

The basic component from which objects are constructed. A path can be open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, a circle), and it can be made up of a single line or curve segment or many joined segments.


Pattern fill (definition)
pattern fill

A fill consisting of a series of repeating vector objects or images.


Pixel (definition)
pixel

A colored dot that is the smallest part of a bitmap.

See also resolution.


PNG (definition)
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)

A graphic file format designed for use in online viewing. This format can import 24-bit color graphics.


Point (definition)
point

A unit of measure used primarily in typesetting to define type sizes. There are approximately 72 points to an inch and 12 points to a pica.


PostScript fills (definition)
PostScript fill

A type of texture fill designed using the PostScript language


PowerClip effect (definition)
PowerClip effect

A way of arranging objects that lets you contain one object inside another


PowerClip object (definition)
PowerClip object

An object created by placing objects (contents objects) inside other objects (container objects). If the contents object is larger than the container object, the contents object is automatically cropped. Only the contents that fit inside the container object are visible.


Process color (definition)
process color

In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color).


Progressive (definition)
progressive

In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear on screen in its entirety, at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves.


QuickCorrect (definition)
QuickCorrect

A feature that automatically displays the fully worded form for abbreviations or the correct form for errors as you type. You can use QuickCorrect to capitalize words or to correct common spelling and typographic errors automatically; for example, QuickCorrect can replace "asap" with "as soon as possible" and "hte" with "the."


Rasterized image (definition)
rasterized image

An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphics files to bitmap files, you create rasterized images.


Render (definition)
render

To capture a two-dimensional image from a three-dimensional model.


Resolution (definition)
resolution

The amount of detail that an image file contains, or that an input, output, or display device is capable of producing. Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch) or ppi (pixels per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance; high resolutions can produce higher quality images but result in larger file sizes.


RGB (definition)
RGB

A color mode in which the three colors of light (red, green, and blue) are combined in varying intensities to produce all other colors. A value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green and blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color.


Rotate (definition)
rotate

To reposition and reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation.


Ruler (definition)
ruler

A horizontal or vertical bar marked off in units that is used to determine the size and position of objects. By default, the rulers display on the left side and along the top of the application window, but they can be hidden or moved.


Saturation (definition)
saturation

The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has 100% saturation contains no white. A color with 0% saturation is a shade of gray.


Scale (definition)
scale

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by a specified percentage. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1" and a width of 2" that is scaled by 150% results in a height of 1.5" and a width of 3". The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained.


Scratch disk (definition)
scratch disk

(Mac OS)  Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory available in your computer.


Segment (definition)
segment

The line or curve between nodes in a curve object.


Selection box (definition)
selection box

An invisible rectangle with eight visible handles that appears around any object you select using the Pick tool.


Simple wireframe view (definition)
simple wireframe view

An outline view of a drawing that hides fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome.

See also wireframe view.


Size (definition)
size

To change an object's horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by changing one of the dimension's values. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1" and a width of 2" can be sized by changing the value of the height to 1.5".  A width of 3" automatically results from the new height value. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained.


Skew (definition)
skew

To slant an object vertically, horizontally, or both.


Snap (definition)
snap

To force an object that is being drawn or moved to align automatically to a point on the grid, a guideline, or another object.


Source object (definition)
source object

The object you use to perform a shaping action on another object, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting. The source object receives the fill and outline attributes of the target object.

See also target object.


Splash Screen (definition)
splash screen

The screen that appears when CorelDRAW starts. It monitors the progress of the startup process and provides information about copyright and registration.


Split blend (definition)
split blend

A single blend that is broken into two or more components to create a compound blend. The object where the blend is split becomes the end object for one component of the blend and start object for the other.


Spot color (definition)
spot color

In commercial printing, a solid ink color that prints individually, one plate per spot color.


Spread (definition)
spread

In commercial printing, a type of trap that is created by extending the foreground object into the background object.


Style (definition)
style

A set of attributes that controls the appearance of a specific type of object. There are three style types: graphic styles, text styles (artistic and paragraph), and color styles.


Subpaths (definition)
subpaths

Paths that are part of one object.


Subscript (definition)
subscript

Text characters that are positioned below the baseline of the other characters in a line of text.


Super nudge (definition)
super nudge

To move an object in large increments. The super nudge value is multiplied by the nudge value to obtain the distance by which the object is moved.

See also nudge and micro nudge.


Superscript (definition)
superscript

Text characters that are positioned above the baseline of the other characters in a line of text.


Swap disk (definition)
swap disk

(Windows)  Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory available in your computer.


Swatch (definition)
swatch

One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in the color palette.


Symbol (definition)
symbol

A reusable object or group of objects. A symbol is defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing.


Symbol instance (definition)
symbol instance

An occurrence of a symbol in a drawing. A symbol instance automatically inherits any changes made to the symbol. You can also apply unique properties to each instance, including size, position, and uniform transparency.


Target object (definition)
target object

The object you perform a shaping action on, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting with another object. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes while copying these attributes to the source objects used to perform the action.

See also source object.


Template (definition)
template

A predefined set of information that sets the page size, orientation, ruler position, and grid and guideline information. A template may also include graphics and text that can be modified.


Text frame (definition)
text frame

The rectangle that appears as a series of dashed lines around a block of paragraph text created using the Text tool.


Text styles (definition)
text style

A set of attributes that controls the appearance of text. There are two text style types: artistic text styles and paragraph text styles.


Texture fill (definition)
texture fill

A fractally generated fill that, by default, fills an object or image area with one image instead of with a series of repeating images.


Threshold (definition)
threshold

A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap.


Thumbnail (definition)
thumbnail

A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration.


Tiling (definition)
tiling

The technique of repeating a small image across a large surface. Tiling is often used to create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages.


Tint (definition)
tint

The lighter shade of a spot color.


Tone (definition)
tone

The variations in a color or the range of grays between black and white.


Transparency (definition)
transparency

The quality of an object that makes it easy to see through. Setting lower levels of transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or image.

See also opacity.


TrueType fonts (definition)
TrueType fonts

A font specification developed by Apple. TrueType fonts print the way they appear on the screen and can be resized to any height.


Two-point perspective (definition)
two-point perspective

An effect created by lengthening or shortening two sides of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in two directions.


Underexposure (definition)
underexposure

The lack of light in an image that makes it too dark.


Uniform fill (definition)
uniform fill

A type of fill used to apply one solid color to your image.

See also fill.


URL (definition)
URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet.


Vanishing point (definition)
vanishing point

A marker that appears when you select an extrusion or an object to which perspective has been added. With an extrusion, the vanishing point marker indicates the depth (parallel extrusion) or the point at which the extruded surfaces would meet if extended (perspective extrusion). In both cases, the vanishing point is indicated by an X.


Vector graphic (definition)
vector graphic

An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Vector graphics are created as collections of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels.

See also bitmap.


Vector object (definition)
vector object

A specific object within a drawing that is created as a collection of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels. Vector objects are generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn.


Watermark (definition)
watermark

A small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the image pixels which carries information about the image. This information survives normal editing, printing, and scanning.


Weld (definition)
weld

To combine two objects into a single curve object with a single outline. A source object is welded to a target object to create a new object that takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object.


White point (definition)
white point

The measurement of white on a color monitor that influences how highlights and contrast display.


Wireframe view (definition)
wireframe view

An outline view of a drawing that hides fills but displays extrusions, contour lines, and intermediate blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome.

See also simple wireframe view.


Zoom (definition)
zoom

To reduce or magnify the view of a drawing. You can zoom in to see details or zoom out for a broader view.


ZIP (definition)
ZIP

A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time.


Welcome to CorelDRAW

CorelDRAW is an intuitive graphics design application that gives designers a more enjoyable work experience. CorelDRAW is built and designed to meet the demands of today’s working designer to create ads or collateral for print or for the Web.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	Corel Corporation

•	registering Corel products

•	customer support

•	customer feedback

•	documentation conventions

•	installing and uninstalling applications

•	getting Help

•	using CorelTUTOR

•	VBA programming guide (Windows)

•	other resources


About Corel Corporation

Founded in 1985, Corel Corporation (www.corel.com) is a leading technology company that offers software for home and small business users, creative professionals and enterprise customers. With its headquarters in Ottawa, Canada, Corel’s common stock trades on the Nasdaq Stock Market under the symbol CORL and on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol COR.


Registering Corel products

Registering Corel products is important. Registration provides you with timely access to the latest product updates, valuable information about product releases, and access to free downloads, articles, tips and tricks, and special offers. Also, when you register a product, you are eligible for 30 days of free technical support.

You can register when you install the application, or choose to register at a later date.

You can register using the following methods:

•	online [image] you can launch online registration if you are connected to the Internet when you install the Corel graphics application. If no Internet connection is detected, a list of options displays in a dialog box.

•	FTP [image] you can complete the registration form and it will be sent automatically when an Internet connection is detected

•	by phone [image] you can call the Corel Customer Service Center nearest you

For more information about registering a Corel product, visit www.corel.com/support/register.


Customer support

Corel Support Services can provide you with prompt and accurate information about Corel product features, specifications, pricing, availability, services, and technical support.

World Wide Web

For information about Corel technical and customer service support, visit www.corel.com/support.

Online service options	Description
Support newsgroups	Let you exchange information, tips and techniques with other users of Corel products
Corel Knowledge Base	Lets you read, print, and download documents that contain answers to many technical questions or problems
FAQs	Answers common user questions
Downloads	Lets you download service packs, printer drivers, network administration guides, and product information
Telephone

You can telephone Corel Support Services with your questions. For information about the levels of service that Corel provides, visit www.corel.com/support.

•	North America [image] you can call Corel Support Services by calling our 1-800-772-6735 toll-free line. The hours of operation are 8:30 a.m. to 7:30 p.m., Monday to Friday, Eastern Standard Time (EST).

•	Outside North America [image] you can call a local authorized Corel Support Services partner from a toll line at +353-1-213-3912.

Mail, fax, and email

•	You can send specific customer-service questions to Corel Support Services representatives by mail, fax, and email.

Corel Corporation
Support Services
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario
Canada K1Z 8R7

fax: 1-613-761-9176

email: custserv@corel.com


Customer feedback

If you have any comments or suggestions about CorelDRAW or Corel R.A.V.E., you can send them by email to drawsuggest@corel.com. If you have any comments or suggestions about the user guides, Help, and tutorials, you can send them by email to drawdoc@corel.com or by regular mail to the address below. You can check the product Web site for the latest news, tips and tricks, and product upgrade information. Go to www.corel.com and follow the links to the product site.

Creative Products Documentation Manager
Corel Corporation
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
K1Z 8R7


Documentation conventions

The table below describes important conventions used in the user guide and Help.

Convention	Description	Examples
Menu [image] Menu command	Click the menu item followed by the menu command.	Click File [image] Open.
list box	A list of options that drops down when a user clicks the down arrow button.	Choose a value from the Force field list box on the property bar.
Docker window (Windows) palette (Mac OS)	A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task.	Double-click the name of the group in the Timeline Docker window/palette.
Enter	Enter key (Windows) Return key (Mac OS)	Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on the property bar, and press Enter.
	A note contains information that is important to the preceding steps. It can describe conditions under which the procedure can be performed.	You can't copy or clone a compound blend. If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes.
	A tip contains suggestions for performing the preceding steps. It can present alternatives to the steps, and other benefits and uses of the procedure.	You can also create a hyperlink using the Internet toolbar. Trimming an object can reduce the  drawing file size.


Installing and uninstalling applications

The application's Installer makes it easy to install Corel applications and components. It lets you

•	install any Corel applications included in your software package

•	add components to a currently installed application

•	refresh files and configurations of currently installed applications

Related Topics

To install an application (Windows)

To install an application (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To install an application (Windows)

1	Close all applications.

2	Insert Disc 1 in the CD drive.

If the installation wizard does not start automatically, click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run. Type D:\Setup, where D is the letter that corresponds to the CD drive.

3	Follow the instructions in the installation wizard and enable one of the following options:

•	Typical [image] to install the default applications and components

•	Compact [image] to install the minimum components for the application to operate

•	Custom [image] to choose applications and writing tool components

4	Follow the instructions for installing and registering the application.

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install an application (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To install an application (Mac OS)

1	Close all applications.

2	Insert Disc 1 in the CD drive.

3	Double-click the CD icon on your desktop and double-click the Installer.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Easy install [image] to install the default applications and components

•	Custom install [image] to choose applications and components

5	Follow the instructions for installing and registering the application.

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install an application (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Windows)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To uninstall applications (Windows)

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Control Panel.

If your operating system is Windows 2000 or earlier, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control Panel.

2	Double-click Add/Remove programs.

3	Choose a Corel application from the list, click Change/Remove, and enable the Remove all option in the dialog box.

If your operating system is Windows 2000 or earlier, click the Remove button.

4	Follow the InstallShield wizard instructions.

 Note

•	You can choose whether the uninstalling process will remove user files such as preference, presets, user-created fills, customized files, and so on.

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install an application (Windows)

To install an application (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Mac OS)


To uninstall applications (Mac OS)

1	Drag the Corel application folder to the Trash.

2	Open the Users\username\Library folder where you have Mac OS installed. (username is your Mac OS username: for example, jsmith)

If you do not have a user profile, open Users\ Corel\ Library.

3	Drag the folder Preferences\Corel application Preferences to the Trash. (application is the name of the installed Corel application: for example, Corel Graphics Suite 11 Preferences.)

Related Topics

Installing and uninstalling applications

To install an application (Windows)

To install an application (Mac OS)

To uninstall applications (Windows)


Getting help

Help is available through the following tools:

•	User guide [image] provides commonly used procedures and information. Chapters ending with From here tables contain keywords that direct you to additional topics in the Help.

•	Help [image] lets you access Help directly from the user interface and find topics using the contents topic, index, and word/phrase search tool

•	ToolTips [image] lets you access tips for using the application's icons and buttons. To view a ToolTip, position the cursor over an icon, button, or other application control.

Related Topics

To use Help (Windows)

To use Help (Mac OS)


To use Help (Windows)

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Contents [image] lets you browse through topics in the Help

•	Index [image] lets you use the index to find a topic

•	Search [image] lets you search the full text of the Help for a particular word. For example, if you are looking for information about RGB color mode, you can type "RGB" to display a list of relevant topics.

You can also
View Help for a dialog box	Click the Help button.
Print a specific Help topic	Open a Help topic, click the frame you want to print, and click Print.
Related Topics

Getting help

To use Help (Mac OS)


To use Help (Mac OS)

1	Click Help [image] Help topics.

2	Choose a section title from the contents list.

3	Click a topic title.

You can also
Search for a topic by keyword	Type a keyword and click Ask.
Print a specific Help topic	Click File [image] Print. Select a printer and printer options, then click Print.
View Help for a dialog box	Click the Help button [image].
 Note

•	The Help button returns you to the Mac OS Help Center.

 Tip

•	To return to the contents page from a procedure or overview topic, click the Table of contents button at the bottom of the page.

Related Topics

Getting help

To use Help (Windows)


Using CorelTUTOR

CorelTUTOR provides a series of project-based tutorials that introduce you to basic and advanced features of CorelDRAW and Corel R.A.V.E.

Related Topics

To access CorelTUTOR


To access CorelTUTOR

•	Click Help [image] CorelTUTOR.

Related Topics

Using CorelTUTOR


VBA Programming Guide (Windows)

The new VBA Programming Guide for CorelDRAW 11 will help you automate tasks and create custom solutions using VBA in CorelDRAW. If you installed CorelDRAW using the Typical install, or a Custom install that included VBA, then the guide is accessible from a link in the CorelDRAW VBA Help.


Other resources

Corel has training partnerships with other firms and provides professional services for its software products. The Designer Web site contains a wealth of graphics resources.

Training

Corel Training Events

•	Maximize your skills and attend a Corel Training Camp [image]  special intensive Training Events held throughout North America on various Corel products. All Training Camps are delivered by a Corel Training Specialist, with hands-on instruction, exercises and practical real-world projects. To look at the training schedule or to register for a course, please visit: www.corel.com/trainingschedule.

Corel Customized Training

•	Once you have Corel applications running on your computers, our team of expert Corel Training Specialists can help you make the most of them with customized training, tailored to the specific needs of your work environment. We will help you develop a custom curriculum which is practical and relevant to the needs of your organization. For more information about Corel Customized Training, please visit www.corel.com/customizedtraining.

Corel Training Partners (CTP)

•	CTP's are independent, officially accredited local organizations that provide training on Corel products and are located worldwide for your convenience. To find a partner near you, please visit www.corel.com/trainingpartners

Corel Corporate Services

Corel is committed to getting you up and running quickly with time and money-saving workflow solutions. To simplify the process of deploying Corel applications across your organization, our Corporate Services department offers a comprehensive range of cost-effective services to meet your technology needs. This group brings together highly skilled experts from across the company who are dedicated to providing top-notch solutions. Our knowledgeable team is ready to offer assistance through all stages of your project, from application development and support to software systems integration and training.

For more information on Corel Corporate Services, please contact proservices@corel.com.

Designer.com

Users are encouraged to visit the Corel's Designer.com Web site. It contains articles, tips and tricks, free clipart, product news, tutorials, and other graphics resources to inspire, excite, and illuminate. Visit www.designer.com to start.


Adobe Illustrator (AI) technical notes

Exporting an Adobe Illustrator file

•	To make export conversion easier, avoid combining objects in a file.

•	During export conversion, objects can become complex, making it difficult to edit them in other drawing applications or in CorelDRAW if you re-import them. To avoid this problem, keep a copy of the image in CorelDRAW (CDR) format , and use CorelDRAW for all editing.

•	If you create a file that will be printed in other applications, such as Adobe PageMaker, export it using the encapsulated PostScript filter (EPS), not the Adobe Illustrator (AI) filter . The encapsulated PostScript filter supports more drawing effects than the Adobe Illustrator filter and generally yields better results.

•	Fountain fills are exported as a series of filled bands, similar to the effect achieved by blending. You can set the number of bands by clicking (Windows) Tools [image] Options or (Mac OS) Application name [image] Preferences. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and type a number in the Preview fountain steps box. The maximum number of bands supported is 256.

•	To accurately reproduce calligraphic outlines, corner styles, and line caps, click Tools [image] Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and enable the Calligraphic text check box in the Clipboard area. The outlines will export as a group of polygons that match the appearance of the outlines in the application but add significantly to the size of the exported file.

Importing an Adobe Illustrator file

•	Adobe Illustrator 9 and 10 use Portable Document Format (PDF) files for their native format using the extension .ai These files can be imported using the PDF import filter. For instructions about how to import a PDF, see "Portable Document Format (PDF)."

•	Corel applications provide full support for all AI file formats up to and including Adobe Illustrator 10. Corel applications cannot import AI files containing bitmaps linked as EPS files.

•	Imported Adobe Illustrator graphics come into the application as a group of objects. Click Arrange [image] Ungroup to manipulate objects in the imported graphic.


Windows Bitmap (BMP) technical notes

Exporting a Windows Bitmap file

•	Raster images such as bitmaps are mapped pixel by pixel to the page, so if you enlarge a bitmap in an application, the resolution will not increase. You'll see an apparent loss of resolution and your bitmap will appear "jagged."

Importing a Windows Bitmap file

•	You can import Windows Bitmap files conforming to the Windows and OS/2 BMP specification.

•	Windows Bitmap files may be either black & white, 16 colors, grayscale, paletted, or RGB color (24-bit), and will print accordingly, depending on your printer.

•	Run-length encoding (RLE) compression may be used on all bitmaps, except RGB color (24-bit), and black and white bitmaps.

•	The resolution can range from 72 to 300 dpi and go higher if you choose custom settings

•	The maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.


CorelDRAW (CDR) technical notes

•	Imported CorelDRAW files appear as a group of objects. Click Arrange [image] Ungroup to manipulate individual objects in the imported graphic.

•	In CorelDRAW, you can edit images from CorelDRAW 5 and later. Images created in CorelDRAW 3 and 4 can be edited in CorelDRAW if there are no WFO fonts in the image.


Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) technical notes

Importing a Computer Graphics Metafile

•	The CGM filter accepts only markers supported by the CGM file format standard. Private-use markers are ignored.

•	Text is editable, provided the file is exported from the source application using the correct text options. The typeface you see may not correspond to the one used in the source application; however, you can easily change this in the Corel application.

Exporting a Computer Graphics Metafile

•	The CGM export filter supports radial and linear fountain fills but not square or conical ones.

•	PostScript textures are converted to solid gray fills.

•	You can set the number of bands used to represent fountain fills in the exported file by clicking Tools [image] Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Display, and type a number in the Preview fountain steps box.


Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) technical notes

•	The following versions are available: 5. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10.

•	This file format is available in CorelDRAW, CorelTRACE, and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. They import Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) files as bitmaps.


Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) technical notes

•	This filter is available in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, Corel R.A.V.E, and CorelTRACE.

•	Corel PHOTO-PAINT files may be either black & white, grayscale, paletted, CMYK color (32-bit), RGB color (24-bit), and LAB.


Corel DESIGNER (DSF) technical notes

•	Guidelines and grid settings are not converted.

•	Snap points are not converted.

•	Objects on some pages may be grouped together. You may want to select the group and then ungroup it before editing.

•	Properties are not converted, except URLs.

•	Object names are not converted.

•	OLE data is not converted.

•	Curvygons are converted to curves.

•	Dimension and callout objects are converted to curves, their labels are converted to text objects, and the objects are grouped.

•	Any part of a graphic that is outside the extents that CorelDRAW can support cannot be accessed. You should resize the graphic before converting.

•	Sticky lines are converted to curves. They no longer stay attached to objects.

•	Enhanced line styles are converted to the default line style shown in the CorelDRAW Export Setup dialog box.

•	Gradient transparency may be offset in some cases.

•	Hatch fills are rendered but are actually part of the object fill. They are separate objects but are grouped.

•	Bitmap fills may not be scaled properly.

•	Unclosed, filled lines are converted to two objects: one for the line and one for the fill.

•	Block text in Corel DESIGNER comes in as paragraph text in CorelDRAW. Freeform text comes in as Artistic text.

•	Warped text is converted to curves.

•	Repelled text (block text that wraps around an object) is converted to multiple text objects.

•	Each character in text on a path is converted to a separate text object.

•	Each line of a non-rectangular text object (text that was placed within an object) is converted to a separate text object.

•	Tab stops may stretch or shrink if there is a lot of transformations to block text.

•	Block text that was scaled by dragging the bounding box will use the smaller of the two scaling dimensions (vertical or horizontal).

•	Text flowing between containers is not preserved; each container is converted to a separate object.

•	Small caps text won't always come in with the exact same dimensions.

•	Superscipt and subscript characters won't come in with the identical place and size.


Encapsulated PostScript technical notes

Exporting an Encapsulated PostScript file

•	On a PostScript printer, graphics exported to the encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format print from other applications exactly as they do from a Corel graphics application.

•	You can save a header to the Tagged Image File format (TIFF) or Windows Metafile format (WMF) in black and white, 4-bit grayscale or color, or 8-bit grayscale or color. You can set the header resolution between 1 and 300 dots per inch (dpi); the default header resolution is 72 dpi. If the application importing the EPS file has a limitation on the image header size, you might receive an error message stating that the file is too large. To reduce file size, in the EPS export dialog box, choose Black and White from the Type box, and lower the header resolution before exporting the file. The setting determines only the resolution of the header and has no impact on the print quality of a drawing. Color headers are useful when viewing placed EPS files. If the application in which you are going to use the file does not support color headers, try exporting with a mono header instead. You can also export without a header.

•	Along with the graphic, exported EPS files contain a filename, program name, and date.

•	To save font information in an EPS file, enable the Include fonts check box in the Export text as area.

•	No fonts are saved if you export text as curves.

•	If a font used in the file is not resident on the printer or has not been saved in the file, either the text will print in Courier font or the drawing will not print.

Importing an Encapsulated PostScript file

•	The encapsulated PostScript file is imported in a placeable format by default. The applications display a thumbnail, or preview, in the active file.

•	If the encapsulated PostScript file contains a placeable header (that is, a small bitmap representation of the image), the placeable header is imported and displayed. The EPS information remains attached to the header and is used when the image is printed to a PostScript printer.

•	The PostScript Interpreted filter converts the objects in the encapsulated PostScript file to native CorelDRAW objects on import.

•	When you import a file with large or complex gradient fills, you may generate a large number of objects.


GIF technical notes

•	You can save movies you create in Corel R.A.V.E. and Corel PHOTO-PAINT as animated GIF files. You can also open and edit animated GIF files in Corel R.A.V.E. and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

•	Corel applications import versions 87A and 89A of the GIF file format, but export only to version 89A. Version 87A supports basic features and interlacing. The newer version, 89A, includes all features found in 87A plus the ability to use transparent colors and to include comments and other data of the image file.

•	Corel applications support the following color depths when importing animated GIF files: black and white (1-bit), 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), and 256 color paletted (8-bit).

•	The GIF file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 pixels by 64,535 pixels and uses LZW compression.

•	You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by (Windows) clicking in the Original window using the Zoom tool. You can zoom out by (Windows) right-clicking or (Mac OS) Control + clicking in the Original window with the Zoom tool.


HTML technical notes

Importing an HTML file

•	The HTML import filter can be installed during a custom installation (Import/Export File Types - Internet File Types). It extracts editable information from a Web document and brings objects into CorelDRAW in a manner similar to the original layout.

•	Imported HTML files that exceed the boundaries of the drawing page continue down the workspace without a page break.

Exporting an HTML file

•	All objects that are not within the boundaries of the drawing page are ignored on export.

•	Overlapping HTML text frames cause difficulties during export. As a solution, try exporting the file to the GIF or JPEG file format.


JPEG technical notes

•	You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by (Windows) clicking in the Original window using the Zoom tool. You can zoom out by (Windows) right-clicking or (Mac OS) Control + clicking in the Original window with the Zoom tool.


JPEG 2000 (JP2 or JPC) technical notes
JPEG 2000 (JP2) technical notes

•	JPEG 2000 standard files offer better image compression and storage of metadata such as dimensions, tone scale, color space, and intellectual property rights.

•	A region of interest in a JP2 image is an area where the compression ratio in a transmitted image is lower, which results in higher fidelity for that part of the image.

•	JPEG 2000 codestream files are optimized for network transmissions, resisting bit errors and, therefore, data loss on low bandwidth channels.

•	Not all Web browsers support JPEG 2000 formats. You might require a plugin to view these files.

•	CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT support exporting JPEG 2000 files in 24-bit RGB, 8-bit grayscale, and 16-bit grayscale colors.

•	CMYK, 48-bit RGB, and black-and-white images are not supported for export.


QuickTime (MOV) technical notes

•	QuickTime Movie (MOV) files are animation files that support 24-bit and 8-bit color. Multiple tracks are not supported.

•	You can export to the QuickTime format from Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Corel R.A.V.E.


PICT (PCT) technical notes

•	Corel graphics applications can import vector drawings and bitmaps contained in PICT (PCT) files.

•	Objects that contain a fill and an outline will open as a group of two objects. One object will be the outline and the other the fill.

•	PICT fills are often bitmap patterns, and the Corel application tries to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns.

•	Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color.

•	Text in PICT files opens as editable text. If a typeface in the imported file is not available on your computer, it is converted to the font that it most closely resembles.

Text alignment may not quite agree with the original file. This is due to the differences in font size, and inter-character and inter-word spacing between the two formats. Any misalignment is easily corrected.


PaintBrush (PCX) technical notes

Exporting a PaintBrush (PCX) file

•	Bitmaps may be either black and white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit).

•	Run-length encoding (RLE) compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.

•	These files may contain one, two, or four color planes.

•	This file format is supported in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, and Corel CAPTURE.

Importing a PaintBrush (PCX) file

•	PCX files can be imported if they conform to the following PCX specifications: 2.5, 2.8, and 3.0.

•	Bitmaps may be either black and white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit).

•	RLE compression is supported and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535.

•	These files may contain one, two, or four color planes. Files containing three color planes or more than four color planes cannot be imported.

•	This file format is supported in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, Corel CAPTURE, and Corel R.A.V.E.


Portable Document Format (PDF) technical notes

Publishing a Portable Document Format file

•	The Portable Document Format engine is available by clicking File [image] Publish to PDF in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Importing a Portable Document Format file

•	Imports Portable Document Format and Adobe Illustrator 9 and 10 files..


Portable Network Graphics (PNG) technical notes

•	You can import Portable Networks Graphics (PNG) files from 1-bit black and white to 24-bit color; 48-bit color is not supported.

•	Masks and indexed-color, grayscale, and true color images are supported. Masks, however, are not saved in 1-bit black and white or 8-bit paletted files.

•	LZ77 compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 30,000 x 30,000 pixels. Sample depths range from 1 to 16 bits.

•	The PNG file format is also robust, checking full-file integrity and detecting common transmission errors. The PNG file format can store gamma and chromatic data for improved color matching on different platforms.

•	You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by (Windows) clicking in the Original window using the Zoom tool. You can zoom out by (Windows) right-clicking or (Mac OS) Control + clicking in the Original window with the Zoom tool.


Adobe Photoshop (PSD) technical notes

Exporting an Adobe Photoshop file

•	This format supports 1-bit black and white up to 32-bit CMYK color images.

•	Layers are supported.

Importing an Adobe Photoshop file

•	Adobe Photoshop files with mono, grayscale, and color up to 32-bit CMYK are supported. Duotone and multi-tone Adobe Photoshop images are converted to grayscale when loaded into Corel PHOTO-PAINT.


Macromedia Flash (SWF) technical notes

•	Macromedia Flash (SWF) files cannot be imported into CorelDRAW. You can, however, link, embed, export, and publish Macromedia Flash files to the Web.


Targa (TGA) technical notes

•	The following features are supported: uncompressed color-mapped images, uncompressed RGB images, run-length encoding (RLE) compressed color-mapped images, RLE-compressed RGB images (types 1, 2, 9, and 10 as defined by the AT&T Electronic Photography and Imaging Center), and masks.

•	The type of file produced depends on the number of colors exported. For example, 24-bit color Targa (TGA) files are exported as RLE-compressed RGB bitmaps.

•	You can import TGA files from 8-bit grayscale to 24-bit RGB.

•	Masks are not saved in 1-bit black and white or 8-bit paletted files.

•	RLE compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels.


TIFF technical notes

Exporting a TIFF file

•	Masks are not saved in 1-bit black and white, 16-bit grayscale, and 48-bit RGB files.

Importing a TIFF file

•	Black and white, color, and grayscale TIFF files up to and including the 6.0 specification can be imported and exported.

•	TIFF files compressed using CCITT, Packbits 32773, or LZW compression can also be imported. However, you may notice additional loading time with these files since the application decodes the file compression.


WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) technical notes

•	This filter imports graphics created in WordPerfect applications.

•	Graphics Text Type 2 is not supported.

•	This file format is only available in CorelDRAW, Corel R.A.V.E., and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Corel PHOTO-PAINT imports WordPerfect Graphic files as bitmaps.


General notes on importing text files

•	When you import a text file into a Corel application, it appears almost the same as in the source application. However, some formatting attributes and page layout features may not be supported. In such cases, the application tries to simulate the results of a feature when a reasonable substitution can be made.

•	The following word processing features are not supported: headers, footers, footnotes and endnotes, embedded graphics, columns, tables, and macros.

•	Font matching support is included. You can modify font matching settings in coreldrw.ini. Fonts are converted by size and by family, provided the source file format includes font family information that the application can access.

•	Rich Text Format (.rtf) files are automatically converted to the Microsoft Windows ANSI (American National Standards Institute) character set. The Macintosh Character Set and Standard IBM PC Code Page 437 are also supported.

•	You can convert PC fonts so that they are readable on a Macintosh platform by using a third-party software tool.

•	Corel graphics applications attempt to make the closest match possible of characters. Font matching is used if the imported text font is not on the user's system. However, if a match cannot be made, the font characters will appear in the application as unrecognizable text.

•	Conversion of font sizes is supported. The following table shows font family conversion capabilities.

Word processing application	From .rtf to Corel graphics
WordPerfect	All fonts supported
Microsoft .rtf	All fonts supported
Microsoft Word PC	All fonts supported
Ami Professional	All fonts supported
Microsoft Word Macintosh	Limited font support
Word for Windows	All fonts supported
"All fonts supported" means that Corel graphics applications support all font families supported by that application.

"Limited font support" means that CorelDRAW supports only selected fonts from the fonts supported by that application. This typically includes Standard PostScript fonts and the Standard HP PCL fonts.

•	When converting Macintosh files, font support is limited by the supported font families of the PC formats.

•	Fonts converted to formats other than those listed in the table above will map to fonts that Corel graphics applications find as the best fit.

•	You may encounter alignment problems when converting from and to a proportional and nonproportional font. Therefore, if you import a document created in a nonproportional font to a proportional font, some pages that have more text on a page than the original document.

•	Source documents that contain a table of contents and indexing convert into the appropriate functions in an .rtf file.

•	Data that is automatically outlined converts to regular text.

•	Style sheet properties are converted to RTF. The file will appear as in the source application; however, the style sheet from the original application is not imported.

•	Text contained within a frame or a positioned object is retained.


AutoCAD Data Interchange Format (DXF) technical notes

•	This file format is available in CorelDRAW, Corel R.A.V.E., and Corel PHOTO-PAINT, which imports AutoCAD files as bitmaps.

•	The Data Exchange File (DXF) filter is supported in AutoCAD 2.5, 2.6, R9, R10, R11, R13, R14, and R2000 (R15).

•	AutoCAD 2000/2002 is supported.

•	Layers are retained on import and export.

Exporting a AutoCAD Data Interchange Format file

•	CorelDRAW saves drawings in a vector format accepted by computer-aided design/computer-aided manufacturing (CAD/CAM) programs and devices, such as AutoCAD and certain computer-driven sign and glass cutters.

•	Only the outlines of objects are exported.

•	All line weights are converted to solid lines 0.003 inches thick.

•	Texture fills are replaced with a solid gray fill. All other fills are ignored.

•	Filled objects with no outlines have an outline appended to them on export.

•	The following features are not supported: calligraphic pen effects, dashed and dotted lines, and arrowheads.

Importing a AutoCAD Data Interchange Format file

•	The DXF filter imports vector graphics created in AutoCAD 12, AutoCAD 13, AutoCAD 14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002.

•	If a DXF file is too complex to import into CorelDRAW, configure your AutoCAD output device as an HP7475 plotter and perform a plot-to-file of the drawing. Then you should be able to import this plot file using the HPGL import filter. Newer versions of AutoCAD allow you to create EPS files.

•	Corel graphics applications try to center the imported image. The image is scaled down if the coordinates are larger than the maximum page size available in CorelDRAW [image] 150' x 150'.

•	Solid and trace entities are filled.

•	A point is imported as an ellipse of minimum size.

•	Files exported as "Entities only" may come into the Corel application incorrectly due to a lack of header information.

•	Various justifications on text entries may not be preserved. Normal text placement (no justification) works best.

•	If the DWG file contains a font that is not on the user's computer, PANOSE font matching dialog box will let the user replace the font with an available one.


AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) technical notes

•	The AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) filter is supported in AutoCAD 2.5, 2.6, R9, R10, R11, R13, R14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002.

•	CorelDRAW 11 supports only AutoCAD 12, AutoCAD 13, AutoCAD 14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002 DWG files.

•	If the DWG file contains a font that is not on your computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets you replace the font with an available one.


Windows Metafile (WMF) technical notes

Importing a Windows Metafile

•	CorelDRAW substitutes fonts that are missing from a Windows Metafile Format file from similar fonts available on your computer.

•	The following features are not supported: PANOSE font matching and rotated and skewed bitmaps.

•	There is no preview available for WMF files.

Exporting a Windows Metafile

•	The Windows Metafile Format is used to export graphics to Windows applications.

•	A header contains additional information, such as sizing. Therefore, a WMF file can successfully be exported from CorelDRAW if the header is included.

•	Text is maintained as text when exported, and WMF files can be very large. This can cause problems in applications which limit the size of imported files.

•	The Windows Metafile Format is 16 bits, while CorelDRAW is 32 bits. When you export a WMF file, the 32-bit numbers are converted to 16 bits. For example, lines that are 0.01388 inches and thinner appear as hairlines because there isn't enough precision in the WMF filter to specify these widths accurately.


HPGL Plotter (PLT) technical notes

Importing a PLT file

•	Corel applications support versions 1 and 2 of PLT file formats although some features of version 2 are not supported.

•	You can import images larger than the Corel application's maximum page size by enabling the Scale option in the HPGL options dialog box, which lets you resize the imported image.

•	The curve resolution factor can be set to a value between 0.0 and 1.0 inches. The value can be very precise; up to eight decimal places are accepted. A setting of 0.0 results in the highest resolution, but it also greatly increases file size. A curve resolution of 0.004 inches is recommended.

•	The PLT file format does not contain color information. Instead, the various objects in a PLT file have certain pen numbers associated with them. When imported into a Corel application, each pen number is assigned a specific color. You can specify the color assigned to a particular pen, so that you can match the original colors of the graphic.

•	The Pen selection list contains 256 pens although not all of the pens may be assigned. You can change the color assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new color for that pen from the Pen color list box. Choosing Custom colors brings up a color definition dialog box that allows you to define a custom color using RGB values.

•	You can change the pen width assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new width for that pen from the Pen width list box.

•	You can change the pen velocity by choosing the pen and then choosing a new velocity for that pen from the Pen velocity list box. This is only useful for exporting PLT files.

•	You can set a defined pen to the Unused option. You can also reset the current Pen Library pen settings back to the previously saved settings.

•	Corel applications support numerous dotted, dashed, and solid line types of the PLT file format. The pattern number of a line in a PLT file is translated to a line type pattern.

•	Text in PLT files imports into a Corel application as editable text. Text strings are assigned the default font, but they can subsequently be assigned any typeface and size. Imported text has no fill color, only an outline color.

Exporting a PLT file

•	Only the outlines of objects are exported to the PLT file format.

•	Dotted lines, dashed lines, and arrowheads are mapped to standard line types of the PLT file format.

•	Bézier curves are converted to line segments.

•	Outline thickness and calligraphic settings are lost.

•	Outline colors are limited to eight: black, blue, red, green, magenta, yellow, cyan, and brown.


PostScript (PS) technical notes

•	The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import PostScript (PS), Printer (PRN), and encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files.

•	The PostScript information is converted to objects.

•	The PostScript Interpreted import filter lets you import multiple pages. In contrast, the EPS filter is used only to import EPS files and displays the EPS bitmap header or, if there is no header, a gray box.

•	The PostScript Interpreted import filter converts RGB bitmaps to CMYK.

•	Font information is maintained only if the font was embedded in the original file prior to import.

•	Files that are too large may not import into some applications due to memory limitations. This problem can be caused by complex gradient fills that increase the number of objects in a graphic.

•	EPS file formats (EPS placeable, PostScript Interpreted) may not import properly if you choose All files from the Files of type list box. To import PostScript Interpreted files successfully, choose the PostScript Interpreted import filter.


Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) technical notes

Exporting an SVG file

•	Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) allows three types of graphic objects: vector graphic shapes (for example, paths consisting of straight lines and curves), images, and text.

•	Object, layer, and group names are also supported. Where the names are the same, the SVG file will append unique numbers to the object ids.

•	Drop shadows are rasterized in SVG files.

•	Text fitted to a path is exported as individual characters and can increase file size as a result.

•	Non-RGB colors are converted to the RGB color space using ICC (International Color Consortium) profiles.

•	All CorelDRAW symbols are supported on export as SVG symbols.

•	Graphical objects can be grouped, styled, transformed, and combined into previously rendered objects.

•	You can export text as editable characters, so that after you publish an SVG graphic to the Web, text continues to be recognized as text. Text strings can be restyled, copied and pasted, or indexed by search engines. Text can also be edited by SVG-capable editing programs, eliminating the need for maintaining multiple versions of graphic images for editing.

•	The SVG standard allows the use of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to define font, text, and color properties of objects on a page.

Importing an SVG file

•	Clipped and masked objects are imported into CorelDRAW as PowerClip objects.


True Type Fonts (TTF) technical notes

•	TrueType fonts (TTF) print as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts print as they appear on screen and can be resized to any height.

•	TrueType fonts exported from CorelDRAW are unhinted.

•	Each exported character must comprise a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange [image] Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects.

•	Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported.

•	Avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the examples below:


Adobe Type 1 Fonts technical notes

•	Most Type 1 fonts are single master fonts that permit only style editing; for example, Roman, italic, bold. A single master Type 1 font contains two files: a Printer Font Metrics (PFM) file and a Printer Font Binary (PFB) file.

Some Type 1 fonts are also available in multiple master format. You can customize design elements of multiple master fonts such as weight, width, style, and optical size. A multiple master base font is the multiple master font itself, from which you create variations called multiple master instances. A multiple master base font is composed of a PFM file, a PFB file, and a Multiple Master Metrics (MMM) file. A multiple master instance is composed of a PFM file and a PostScript Printer Stub (PSS) file.

•	Adobe Type 1 fonts exported from CorelDRAW are unhinted.

•	Each exported character must comprise a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange [image] Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects.

•	Avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the examples below:

•	Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported.

•	Adobe Type 1 fonts you create are compatible with Adobe TypeManager version 2.0, but not with earlier versions.


OS/2 Bitmap technical notes

•	Corel applications support Standard Version 1.3 and Enhanced Version 2.0 or later versions of the OS/2 Bitmap file format.

•	Corel applications support the following color depths when importing and exporting BMP files: 1-bit black and white, 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale, 16-color (4-bit) and 256-color (8-bit) paletted, and 24-bit RGB.

•	The OS/2 Bitmap file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 x 64,535 pixels. OS/2 uses Run-length encoding (RLE) compression.


Kodak Photo CD image technical notes

•	PCD images are derived from 35mm film negatives or slides that have been converted to digital format and stored on a CD.

•	Kodak Photo CD (PCD) images may be subject to copyright. The Corel application will not display a warning message about this.

•	Other Kodak-compatible applications may install Kodak's pcdlib.dll file in the Windows folder instead of the Windows\System folder. This will produce an error message.

•	When you import Photo CD files, a dialog box will display prompting you to choose the desired file resolution and color. The resolution is limited to 72 dpi and the maximum image size is 2048 x 3072 pixels.

•	You can import the following color modes: RGB (24 bit), paletted (8 bit), and grayscale (8 bit).

•	Click on the Enhancement tab if you want to color-correct the image before importing it.

•	The Image size indicator will update to reflect the choices you have made regarding resolution and color.

•	This file format is available in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, CorelTRACE, and Corel R.A.V.E.

GamutCD color correction

This color correction method uses gamut mapping to enhance the color fidelity and tonal ranges of the CD image.

Set active area	Use the mouse to specify an active area within the image in the view field. This ensures GamutCD will base its color correction on the area of the photo that you are going to use and removes any black borders left from the original scan.
Set neutral colors	Define neutral colors by clicking on pure whites, blacks, and grays within the active area.
White in image	Choose this option if an image has pure white elements. If you do not have any white elements, disable this option. Otherwise, the gamut mapping will over-brighten your image as it maps the lightest elements of your image to white. This option will assist GamutCD in enhancing the tonal range of an image and removing color cast. If the white element in an image is not pure white, you may want to lower the setting from 255 in the number box to the right.
Black in Image	Choose this option if you have pure black elements in an image. If the image does not have any black elements, disable this option. Otherwise, the gamut mapping will darken your image since it maps the darkest elements of your image to black. This option will assist GamutCD in enhancing the tonal range of an image and removing color cast. If the black element in an image is not pure black, you may want to raise the setting from 0 in the number box to the right.
Kodak color correction

This color correction method allows you to alter color tints, adjust brightness and color saturation, as well as make adjustments to the level of contrast.

Remove scene	Turns off the Scene balance adjustment.
Balance adjustment	The photo finisher applied at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk.
Color metric	Allows you to adjust contrast by preset amounts.
Show out-of-gamut	If the changes you've made are too extreme, the preview colors will display out-of-gamut pixels as pure red or pure blue.


DOC technical notes
Microsoft Word (DOC) technical notes

•	The following Microsoft Word (DOC) versions are available: Microsoft Word 97/2000, Microsoft Word for Windows 6/7, Microsoft Word for Windows 2.x, Microsoft Word 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 5.5.

•	The embedded-field method for building indexes in Microsoft Word is supported, while the style-implied method for building indexes is not.

•	The Corel application tries to match the fonts in the file you are importing with the same or similar fonts, depending on the fonts installed on your computer. However, Microsoft Word's Normal text style is converted to the default text style. To set the default text style, click Tools [image] Customization. In the list of categories, double-click Document, double-click Styles, and choose a text style.

•	Whenever possible, the application automatically converts characters available in the sets "Symbol" or "MS Linedraw" to the corresponding Windows character set entries.

•	Most fonts are proportionally spaced and text is reflowed when imported. As a result, soft line and page breaks often appear in new locations if you are converting to a fixed-pitch or nonscalable font.

•	When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size, and this may affect the placement of text.

•	Footnotes or endnotes created in Microsoft Word 3.x, 4.x, 5.0, or 5.5 are not supported.

•	For more information, see "General notes on importing text files"


WPD technical notes
 WordPerfect Document (WPD) technical notes

•	The WPD filter imports text files created in WordPerfect 4.2, 5.0, 5.1, Corel WordPerfect 6, 7, 8, and WordPerfect 9 and 10.

•	The following features are not supported: index functions, text in table of contents, and style sheets.

•	Equations and formulas created in WordPerfect's equation language are converted to regular text.

•	Graphic features like HLine and VLine are not converted.

•	When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size which may affect the placement of text.

•	CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 11 applications substitute fonts missing from an Enhanced Metafile (.emf) file to similar fonts available on your computer. Multiple pages are not supported.

•	For more information, see "General notes on importing text files"


New features


 Working with bitmaps

You can convert a vector graphic to a bitmap. Also, you can import and crop bitmaps in the CorelDRAW application.

You can also add color masks, watermarks, special effects, and change the color and tone of the images.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	converting vector graphics to bitmaps

•	adding bitmaps

•	cropping and editing bitmaps

•	using watermarks to identify bitmaps

•	working with colors in bitmaps

•	applying special effects to bitmaps

•	applying color and tone effects

•	transforming color and tone effects


Converting vector graphics to bitmaps

When you convert a vector graphic to a bitmap, you can apply special effects in the CorelDRAW application that are unavailable to vector graphic or objects.

As you convert the vector, you can select the color mode of the bitmap. A color mode determines the number and kind of colors that make up the bitmap, so that file size is also affected.

You can also determine settings such as the aliasing, background transparency, and color profile of the image as you convert it from a vector graphic.

For more information about color modes, see "Changing color modes in bitmaps."

Related Topics

To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap


To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap

1	Select an object.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Convert to bitmap.

3	Choose a color mode from the Color list box.

4	Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box.

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Anti-aliasing [image] smooths the edges of the bitmap

•	Transparent background [image] makes the background of the bitmap transparent

•	Apply ICC profile [image] applies the International Color Consortium profiles to standardize colors across devices and color spaces

 Tip

•	Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background.

Related Topics

Converting vector graphics to bitmaps


Adding bitmaps

You can import a bitmap into a drawing either directly or by linking it to an external file. When you link to an external file, edits to the original file are automatically updated in the imported file.

Related Topics

To import a bitmap


To import a bitmap

1	Click File [image] Import.

2	Choose the folder where the bitmap is stored.

3	Select the file.

If you want to link the image to the drawing, enable the Link bitmap externally check box.

4	Click Import.

5	Click where you want to place the bitmap.

If you want to center the image on the drawing page, press Enter.

 Notes

•	Ensure that All file formats is chosen from the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS) when you import an image.

•	The status bar provides information about the bitmap, including color mode, size, and resolution after it has been placed on the page.

 Tips

•	You can import a bitmap in its original size by pressing Spacebar when you click the Import button.

•	Linking to a bitmap results in a smaller file size than importing the bitmap directly.

Related Topics

Adding bitmaps


Cropping and editing bitmaps

After you add a bitmap to a drawing, you can crop, resample, resize, and inflate the image.

Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. When you resample a bitmap, you can change the image size, the resolution, or both by adding or removing pixels. For example, if you make an image larger without resampling, you can lose details because the image's pixels are spread over a greater area. By resampling, you can add pixels to preserve more detail from the original image. Resizing an image maintains the same number of pixels in a smaller or larger area. For example, you can lose details when you make an image larger without resampling, because the image's pixels are spread over a greater area. Upsampling adds pixels to maintain some of the original's details.

Related Topics

To crop a bitmap

To resample a bitmap

To resize a bitmap


To crop a bitmap

1	Open the Shape flyout, and click the Shape tool.

2	Select a bitmap.

3	Drag the bitmap's corner nodes to the shape you want.

If you want to add a node, double-click the node boundary by using the Shape tool where you want the node to display.

4	Click Bitmaps [image] Crop bitmap.

 Note

•	You cannot crop a bitmap comprised of more than one object.

 Tip

•	You can also crop a selected bitmap after you drag the bitmap's corner nodes by clicking the Crop bitmap button on the property bar.

Related Topics

Cropping and editing bitmaps

To resample a bitmap

To resize a bitmap


To resample a bitmap

1	Select a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Resample.

3	In the Resolution area, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

If you want to maintain the proportions of the bitmap, enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box.

If you want to maintain the file size, enable the Maintain original size check box.

 Tips

•	You can also resample a selected bitmap by clicking the Resample button on the property bar.

•	Enable the Anti-alias check box to minimize the jagged appearance of curves.

Related Topics

Cropping and editing bitmaps

To crop a bitmap

To resize a bitmap


To resize a bitmap

1	Select a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Resample.

3	Choose a unit of measure from the list box beside the Width and Height boxes.

4	Type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Width

•	Height

If you want to minimize the jagged appearance of curves, enable the Anti-alias check box.

 Tips

•	You can maintain the proportions of the bitmap by enabling the Maintain aspect ratio check box and typing a value in either the Width or Height box.

•	You can also resample the bitmap as a percentage of its original size by typing values in the % boxes.

Related Topics

Cropping and editing bitmaps

To crop a bitmap

To resample a bitmap


Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

A Digimarc watermark embeds copyright details, contact information, and image attributes in an image. A watermark makes subtle changes to the brightness of pixels in an image. These changes cannot be readily seen; however at high magnification, you might notice changes in the brightness of some pixels. Digimarc watermarks aren't affected by normal editing, printing, and scanning.

Detecting watermarks

When you open an image in CorelDRAW, you can check for a watermark. If a watermark is present, a copyright symbol displays on the title bar. You can find information about the watermarked image by reading the embedded message and by linking to the contact profile in the Digimarc database.

Embedding watermarks

In CorelDRAW, you can also embed Digimarc watermarks in images. First, you must obtain a unique Creator ID by subscribing to Digimarc's online service. The Creator ID includes contact details, such as name, phone number, address, email and World Wide Web addresses.

Once you have a Creator ID, you can embed a watermark in an image. You can specify the copyright year, image attributes, and the durability of a watermark. You can also specify the target output method for an image, such as print or Web.

Digimarc watermarks do not prevent unauthorized image use or copyright infringement. But the watermarks do communicate copyright claims. They also provide contact information for those who want to use or license an image.

For more information about Digimarc, see www.digimarc.com.

Related Topics

To detect a watermark

To get a Creator ID

To embed a watermark


To detect a watermark

1	Click Bitmaps [image] Plug-ins [image] Digimarc [image] Read watermark.

2	Click Web lookup to view the Web page with contact details, or call the Digimarc fax-back service at the listed fax number.

Related Topics

Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

To get a Creator ID

To embed a watermark


To get a Creator ID

1	Click Bitmaps [image] Plug-ins [image] Digimarc [image] Embed watermark.

2	Click Personalize.

3	In the Personalize creator ID dialog box, click Register, and follow the instructions on the Digimarc Web site.

4	In the Personalize creator ID dialog box, type your Creator ID in the Creator ID box.

Related Topics

Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

To detect a watermark

To embed a watermark


To embed a watermark

1	Click Bitmaps [image] Plug-ins [image] Digimarc [image] Embed watermark.

2	In the Copyright year(s) box, type a year or years.

3	In the Image attributes area, enable the check boxes for the applicable attributes.

4	Choose an option from the Target output list box.

5	Type a value in the Watermark durability box.

Higher values increase the persistence of the watermark under common image modifications such as dithering, cropping, compression, and scaling.

If you want to confirm the information available to viewers when they detect the watermark, enable the Verify check box.

 Notes

•	In the Copyright year(s) box, you cannot type a year before 1922 or after the current year. Separate the years with commas.

•	In the Target output box, Monitor and Web require a DPI setting of less than 200, while Printer requires a dpi setting of 300 or higher.

 Tip

•	Combine all objects with the background before adding a watermark. For more information about combining objects with the background, see "Combining objects".

Related Topics

Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps

To detect a watermark

To get a Creator ID


Working with colors in bitmaps

CorelDRAW lets you change colors in monochrome images, apply PostScript halftone screens to optimize color and black-and-white bitmaps for printing, hide and show colors, and mask colors.

Monochrome bitmaps have two colors: black and white. You can replace the black and white pixels by any color on a color palette.

If you plan to print to a PostScript printer, you can optimize color or black-and-white printing by applying a halftone screen to an image. Halftone screens break down an image into small dots or lines for clearer printing, continuous tones, and special effects. However, you can only see the screen's effect on the bitmap after you print it on a PostScript printer. For information about making changes to halftone screens, see "To customize a halftone screen."

You can hide and display selected colors by masking them. Hiding colors in a bitmap lets objects or backgrounds show through the image. Hiding a color can also alter the apparent shape of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap shows a person on a black background, you can hide the background so that the bitmap appears to take on the shape of the person rather than a rectangular shape. Also, hiding colors in bitmaps can increase the speed at which objects are rendered on the screen. You can also display certain colors in a bitmap to change the image's appearance or see where a particular color has been applied. You can mask as many as 10 colors in a bitmap.

Color masking also lets you change selected colors without altering the other colors in an image. You can also save a bitmap color mask to a file and open the file for future use.

Related Topics

To color a monochrome bitmap

To apply a screen to a bitmap

To hide or display a color in a bitmap

To open a bitmap color mask file

To change a masked color


To color a monochrome bitmap

1	Select a bitmap using the Pick tool.

2	Right-click (Windows) or Control + click (Mac OS) a color on the color palette to change the color of the foreground (black) pixels.

3	Click a color on the color palette to change the color of the background (white) pixels.

Related Topics

Working with colors in bitmaps

To apply a screen to a bitmap

To hide or display a color in a bitmap

To open a bitmap color mask file

To change a masked color


To apply a screen to a bitmap

1	Select a bitmap using the Pick tool.

2	Open the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog button.

3	Click the Palettes tab.

4	Choose Pantone matching system from the Palette list box.

5	Click Options and click PostScript options.

6	Choose an option from the Type list to set the dot shape or line type.

7	Type a value in the Frequency box to set the number of dots or lines that display in every inch of the screen.

8	Type a value in the Angle box to set the angle of the dots or lines that display on the screen.

Related Topics

Working with colors in bitmaps

To color a monochrome bitmap

To hide or display a color in a bitmap

To open a bitmap color mask file

To change a masked color


To hide or display a color in a bitmap

1	Select the bitmap using the Pick tool.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Bitmap color mask.

3	Enable the one of the following options:

•	Hide colors

•	Show colors

4	Enable the check box next to the channel that you want to hide or display

5	Move the Tolerance slider to set the color tolerance for the color.

6	Click the Color selector button.

7	Click the bitmap, and click the color that you want to hide or display.

8	Click Apply.

 Note

•	Higher tolerance levels target a broader range of colors around the color you select. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW hides or displays pastel blue, electric blue, and so on.

Related Topics

Working with colors in bitmaps

To color a monochrome bitmap

To apply a screen to a bitmap

To open a bitmap color mask file

To change a masked color


To open a bitmap color mask file

1	Click Bitmaps [image] Bitmap color mask.

2	Click the Open mask button.

3	Choose the folder where the color mask file is stored.

4	From the Files of type list box (Windows) or Show list box (Mac OS), choose a file type.

5	Double-click the file.

 Note

•	Bitmap color mask files have the filename extension .INI.

Related Topics

Working with colors in bitmaps

To color a monochrome bitmap

To apply a screen to a bitmap

To hide or display a color in a bitmap

To change a masked color


To change a masked color

1	Click Bitmaps [image] Bitmap color mask.

2	Choose a color from the list of masked colors.

3	Click the Edit color button.

4	Use the controls in the Select color dialog box to edit the color.

You can also
Save a bitmap color mask	Click the Save mask button. Choose the folder where you want to save the current color mask. Type a name for the file in the File name list box (Windows) or Save as box (Mac OS). Click Save.
 Tip

•	You can also change a masked color by clicking the Color selector button, selecting another color from the bitmap, and clicking Apply.

Related Topics

Working with colors in bitmaps

To color a monochrome bitmap

To apply a screen to a bitmap

To hide or display a color in a bitmap

To open a bitmap color mask file


Applying special effects to bitmaps

You can apply a wide range of special effects to bitmaps, such as three-dimensional and artistic effects.

Adding plug-in filters to CorelDRAW provides additional features and effects that you can use to edit images. You can add plug-in filters and you can remove them when you no longer need them.

Special effect type	Description
3-D	Lets you create the illusion of three-dimensional depth. The 3-D effects include embossing, page curl, and perspective.
Art strokes	Lets you apply hand-painted techniques. The art stroke media and styles include crayon, impressionist, pastels, watercolor, and pen and ink.
Blur	Lets you blur an image to simulate gradual change, movement, or speckling. The blur effects include Gaussian blur, motion blur, and zoom.
Camera	Lets you simulate the effect produced by diffusion filters of a diffusion lens.
Color transform	Lets you create photographic illusions by using color reduction and replacements. The color transform effects include half-tones, psychedelic, and solarizing.
Contour	Lets you highlight and enhance the edges of an image. The contour effects include edge tracing and highlighting.
Creative	Lets you apply a variety of textures and shapes to an image. The creative effects include fabric, glass block, crystal fragments, vortex, and stained glass.
Distort	Lets you distort image surfaces. The distort effects include ripples, blocks, swirl, and tile.
Noise	Lets you modify the graininess of an image. The noise effects include adding noise, applying dust and scratch, and diffusing to change an image's granularity.
Sharpen	Lets you create a sharpening effect to focus and enhance edges. The sharpen effects include accentuating edge detail and sharpening smooth areas.
Plug-ins	Lets you apply effects from a third-party filter to bitmaps in CorelDRAW. An installed plug-in appears at the bottom of the Bitmaps menu.

CorelDRAW automatically inflates a bitmap to make a special effect cover the entire image. You can disable the automatic inflate and manually specify how much you want to inflate the bitmap.

Related Topics

To apply a special effect

To add a plug-in filter (Windows)

To add a plug-in filter (Mac OS)

To inflate a bitmap manually


To apply a special effect

1	Select a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps, choose a special effect type, and click an effect.

3	Adjust any special effect settings.

Related Topics

Applying special effects to bitmaps

To add a plug-in filter (Windows)

To add a plug-in filter (Mac OS)

To inflate a bitmap manually


To add a plug-in filter (Windows)

1	Click Tools [image] Options.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Plug-ins.

3	Click Add.

4	Choose a folder containing a plug-in.

 Tip

•	To remove a plug-in filter, click a plug-in folder from the Plug-in folders list, and click Remove.

Related Topics

Applying special effects to bitmaps

To apply a special effect

To add a plug-in filter (Mac OS)

To inflate a bitmap manually


To add a plug-in filter (Mac OS)

•	Drag the plug-in filter to the Plugins folder in the application's folder.

If you want to remove a plug-in filter, drag it from the Plugins folder.

 Note

•	CorelDRAW only supports Photoshop 7 compatible plug-ins.

Related Topics

Applying special effects to bitmaps

To apply a special effect

To add a plug-in filter (Windows)

To inflate a bitmap manually


To inflate a bitmap manually

1	Select a bitmap.

2	Click Bitmaps [image] Inflate bitmap [image] Manually inflate bitmap.

3	Type a number representing the pixel amount to inflate in the Width and Height boxes or a percentage amount to inflate the bitmap in the Percentage boxes. Use the original bitmap size as reference.

4	Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box to inflate the bitmap proportionally.

 Tip

•	To automatically inflate the bitmap to cover the entire image, enable the Auto inflate bitmap check box.

Related Topics

Applying special effects to bitmaps

To apply a special effect

To add a plug-in filter (Windows)

To add a plug-in filter (Mac OS)


Applying color and tone effects

CorelDRAW lets you apply color and tone to a bitmap. For example, you can replace colors, shift them between different color modes and adjust the brightness, lightness, and darkness of colors.

By applying color and tone effects, you can restore detail lost in shadows or highlights, remove color casts, correct underexposure or overexposure, and generally improve the quality of the bitmaps.

You can apply the following color and tone effects.

Effect	Description
Hue-Saturation-Lightness	Lets you adjust the color channels in a bitmap and change the position of colors in the spectrum. This effect allows you to change colors and their richness, as well as the percentage of white in an image.
Color balance	Lets you add cyan or red, magenta or green, and yellow or blue to selected tones in a bitmap
Selective color	Lets you change color by changing the percentage of spectrum CMY process colors from the red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta color spectrums in a bitmap. For example, decreasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum results in a color shift toward yellow.
Sample/Target balance	Lets you adjust color values in a bitmap with sample colors taken from the image. You can choose sample colors from the dark, midtone, and light ranges of an image and apply target colors to each of the sample colors.
Desaturate	Lets you reduce the saturation of each color in a bitmap to zero, remove the hue component, and convert each color to its grayscale equivalent. This creates a grayscale image without changing the color mode.
Level equalization	Lets you increase contrast by setting input values to map the darkest pixels in the bitmap to black and the lightest to white. You can decrease contrast so that all tones in a bitmap are represented by a specific tonal range.
Local equalization	Lets you enhance contrast near edges to reveal detail in both light and dark regions. You can set the height and width around the region to accentuate contrast.
Brightness-contrast-intensity	Lets you adjust the brightness of all colors and the difference between light and dark areas.
Gamma	Lets you accentuate detail in low contrast areas without affecting shadows or highlights.
Tone curve	Lets you perform color corrections precisely by controlling individual pixel values. By changing pixel brightness values, you can make changes to shadows, midtones, and highlights.
Related Topics

To apply a color or tone effect


To apply a color or tone effect

1	Select a bitmap.

2	Click Effects [image] Adjust, and click a color or tone effect.

3	Specify any settings.

Related Topics

Applying color and tone effects


Transforming color and tone effects

You can transform the color and tone of an object to produce a special effect. For example, you can create an image that looks like a photographic negative or flatten the appearance of an image.

The color and tone transform effects are

•	Deinterlace [image] lets you remove lines from scanned or interlaced images.

•	Invert [image] lets you reverse the colors of an object. Inverting an object creates the appearance of a photographic negative.

•	Posterize [image] lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an image. Posterize removes gradations and creates larger areas of flat color.

Related Topics

To transform a color and tone effect


To transform a color and tone effect

1	Select a bitmap.

2	Click Effects [image] Transform.

3	Click a transform effect:

•	Interlace [image] set the effect level

•	Invert [image] the color and tone will invert automatically.

•	Posterize [image] set the effect level

Related Topics

Transforming color and tone effects


Moving from Adobe Illustrator to CorelDRAW

Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW have many similarities, which makes it easy to move from one graphics application to the other. Although they share the most basic drawing and design capabilities, Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW are distinguished by some differences in both terminology and tools. Understanding these differences lets you make a quick transition to CorelDRAW.

In this section you'll learn about

•	comparing terminology

•	comparing tools


Comparing terminology

The terms and concepts in Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW differ for some features. Many terms have similar meanings but are referred to by different names. Adobe Illustrator terms are listed below with their CorelDRAW equivalents.

Adobe Illustrator term	CorelDRAW term
Anchor points	Nodes
Artwork	Drawing
Compound object	Curve object
Gradient fill	Fountain fill
Mask	PowerClip
Outline view	Wireframe view
Path	Curve
Placing images	Inserting images
Rasterizing	Converting to a bitmap
Stroke	Outline
Swatches palette	Color palettes
Unite	Weld


Comparing tools

The following table lists Adobe Illustrator tools and the corresponding CorelDRAW tools. Many of the tools create the same result but operate slightly differently.

Adobe Illustrator tool	CorelDRAW tool
Add anchor point tool	Shape tool, see "To add or remove a node"
Area type tool	Text tool, see "To add paragraph text"
Blend tool	Interactive blend tool, see "To blend objects"
Convert anchor point tool	Shape tool, see "To make a curve cusp, smooth, or symmetrical"
Delete anchor point tool	Shape tool, see "To add or remove a node"
Direct selection tool	Shape tool, see "To select a node"
Drop shadow tool	Interactive drop shadow tool, see "To add a drop shadow"
Gradient tool	Interactive fill tool, see "Applying fountain fills"
Line segment tool	Freehand tool, see "To draw a straight line" or Polyline tool, see "Drawing lines"
Measure tool	Dimension tool
Mesh tool	Interactive mesh fill tool, see "To apply a mesh fill to an object"
Paint bucket tool	Interactive fill tool, see "To apply a uniform fill"
Paintbrush tool	Artistic media tool, see "To draw a calligraphic line" or Brush tool, see "Applying brush strokes"
Path type tool	Text tool, see "To fit text to a path"
Pencil tool	Freehand tool, see "To draw a curved line"
Pucker tool	Interactive envelope tool, see "To apply an envelope"
Rectangular grid tool	Graph paper tool, see "To draw a grid"
Reflect tool	Mirror buttons, see "To mirror an object"
Reshape tool	Shape tool, see "To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes"
Rotate tool	Pick tool, see "To rotate an object"
Rounded rectangle tool	Rectangle tool, see "To round the corners of a rectangle or square"
Scissors tool	Knife tool, see "To split an object"
Selection tool	Pick tool, see "To select objects"
Size tool	Pick tool, see "To size an object"
Skew tool	Pick tool, see "Skewing and stretching objects"
Star tool	Polygon tool, see "To draw a polygon or a star" or Star shapes, see "To draw a pre-defined shape"
Symbol sprayer tool	Object sprayer tool, see "To spray a line"
Twirl tool	Interactive twister distortion tool, see "To distort an object"
Twist tool	Interactive twister distortion tool, see "To distort an object"
Type tool	Text tool, see "To add paragraph text"
Warp tool	Smudge brush tool, see "To smudge an object" or Envelope tool, see "Shaping objects using envelopes"
Wrinkle tool	Roughen brush tool, see "To roughen an object"


New drawing tools


3 point curve tool

The 3 point curve tool lets you draw a curve by defining the start, end, and center points.


3 point rectangle tool

The 3 point rectangle tool lets you draw a rectangle by dragging to create the rectangle baseline and clicking to define its height.


3 point ellipse tool

The 3 point ellipse tool lets you draw an ellipse by dragging to create the center line of the ellipse and clicking to define its height.


Pen tool

The Pen tool lets you draw curves one segment at a time.


 Polyline tool

The Polyline tool lets you draw lines and curves in preview mode.


Symbols


Symbols

CorelDRAW 11 lets you create objects and save them as symbols, which are then stored in the library. Symbols are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing, so using symbols for objects that appear many times in a drawing helps to reduce file size.


New shaping tools


Smudge brush tool

The Smudge brush tool lets you distort a vector object by dragging along its outline.


Roughen brush tool

The Roughen brush tool lets you distort the outline of a vector object by dragging along the outline.


New trimming tools

CorelDRAW 11 provides enhanced options for trimming objects. You can use a front object as the source object to trim an object behind it, use the back object to trim a front object, or remove hidden areas of overlapping objects so that only the visible areas remain in the drawing.


Enhanced object features


Snapping objects to each other

CorelDRAW 11 lets you snap objects to each other. You can snap to an object's nodes, areas between nodes, center, or bounding box.


Closing paths

CorelDRAW 11 lets you quickly create a closed object from line segments by selecting which lines you want to connect and the shape of the connecting line (straight or curved).


Aligning objects

CorelDRAW 11 makes it easier than ever to align objects to each other and to parts of the drawing page such as the center, edges, and grid.


New text features


Importing and pasting text

When you import or paste text, you now have the option of maintaining formatting, maintaining fonts and formatting, or discarding fonts and formatting.


Converting paragraph text to curves

Converting paragraph text to curves transforms characters into single line and curve objects, letting you apply effects to formatted text.


Writing tools popgraphics


Main word list
A Main Word List is a list of specialized words that Spell Checker uses for a particular language, company, or field (such as legal and medical). The English, French, Spanish, Italian, German, and Dutch versions of CorelDRAW include a .MOR file (for example, the English file is WT9_1EN.MOR). Spell Checker can search other Main Word Lists you have installed, such as medical word lists. You can create a Main Word List file using the Spell Utility.


Document word list
A Document Word List contains words and phrases that you want Spell Checker to skip, replace, or display alternatives for in the current document only. Spell Checker scans this list first when you perform a spell check.


Spell utility
The Spell Utility is a separate application that you run from the Start button. The filename is WT9_1SPTLEN.exe (installed to X:\Program Files\Corel\Shared\WritingTools\9_1 folder where X is the drive where the application is installed).


User word list
A User Word List is a list of words and phrases that Spell Checker and Grammatik use to check for errors. You can add words to a User Word List so that the writing tools will skip or replace these words, or display alternatives for them. For example, you can specify replacements for words that you often mistype or misspell. Or, you can add words (such as your name) that you don't want Spell Checker or Grammatik to flag as incorrect.

You can also create multiple User Word Lists. User Word List files have the extension .UWL. The User Word List that ships with WordPerfect is WT9_1XX.UWL (where "XX" is the code for your language).

Each document has its own User Word List, to which you can add words and phrases that pertain specifically to that document.

Spell Checker and Grammatik always scan the Document User Word List first.


Coordinates
A coordinate term is a type of general word for example, as "oak" is a type of "tree." Its coordinates are words that are also types of a more general word. For example, "bike" is a type of "motor vehicle;" some of its coordinates are "car," "truck," "tank," and "golf cart."


Add button
If spell checking is enabled during a proofreading session, Grammatik flags words it does not find in its dictionary or your User Word List. If a flagged word is spelled correctly and you use it often in your writing, click the Add button to add the word to your User Word List.


Analysis
Use the options on the Analysis menu to analyze your writing style. The options are Parse Tree, Parts Of Speech, Basic Counts reports, Flagged reports, Readability reports.


Exit
Use Exit or Close to exit any open documents and then exit Grammatik.


Auto replace
Auto Replace lets you substitute correct words for misspelled or mistyped words. For example, if you tend to type "freind" instead of "friend," you can add "freind" to the User Word List. If Quick Correct is enabled, the word is automatically replaced every time you type it.


Replace
Replace lets you substitute a replacement word or phrase for an error Grammatik has detected.


Replace all
Replace All lets you substitute a replacement word or phrase for every occurrence of an error.


Resume
Resume lets you continue checking your document after you have edited text manually.


Skip
Skip lets you ignore an error that you don't want to change. Grammatik skips the current error but flags other occurrences of the error.


Consecutive nouns
The Consecutive Nouns option lets you specify how many consecutive nouns Grammatik allows before it flags an error. For example, if you set the value to 3, the following phrase is flagged as an error:

"quality assurance analysis report"


Consecutive prepositional phrases
The Consecutive Prepositional Phrases options lets you specify how many consecutive prepositional phrases Grammatik allows before it flags an error. For example, if you set the value to three, the following sentence would be flagged as an error: "One of the many duties of the office of President of this company is to appear at all press conferences."


Long sentence length
The Long Sentence Length option lets you specify how many words Grammatik allows in a sentence before it flags an error.


Spell numbers below or equal to
The Spell Numbers Below Or Equal To option lets you specify the range of numbers that should be spelled out ("nine") instead of written as a numeral ("9"). Set the value to 0 if you don't want numerals to be flagged as errors.


Words allowed in split infinitive
The Words Allowed In Split Infinitive option lets you specify how many words Grammatik allows in a split infinitive before it flags an error. Grammatik counts the number of words between the first word ("to") and the last word (base verb) of an infinitive, and reports an error when the number exceeds the maximum allowed. For example, if you set this value to 1, the phrase "to boldly go" is not flagged because only one word comes between "to" and "go." However, the phrase "to very boldly go" is flagged because two words are between the split infinitive.


Skip all
Skip All lets you ignore a word or phrase for the rest of the proofreading session.


Start
Start lets you begin proofreading.


Undo
Undo lets you undo the last word or phrase replacement.


Abbreviation
An abbreviation is a shortened version of a word. For example: etc. is an abbreviation of etcetera.


Adjective
An adjective modifies a noun. Example: a "good" book.


Adverb
An adverb modifies a verb or an adjective. Examples: go "quickly," a "very" good book.


Auxiliary verb
An auxiliary verb is a form of "be," "have," or "do." Examples: "is" coming, "had" not run, "did" he say.


Determiner
A determiner is a type of adjective. Examples: "a," "an," "the," "some," "these," "any."


Comparative or superlative
Comparative and superlative are forms of adjectives or adverbs that indicate a degree of comparison. Examples: happier, slowest.


Conjunction
A conjunction joins words, phrases, or clauses. Examples: the book "and" the pen, "because" it is late.


Infinitive
An infinitive is a verb form that uses "to" and a base verb. Examples: to read, to go.


Interjection
An interjection is an exclamation. Examples: hi!, oh!, hey!


Modal
A modal is a type of auxiliary verb. Examples: will, must, can, should, might.


Number
A number is a unit of measure. Examples of a number are: three, 497, 6:00.


Past tense
The past is the past tense of a verb. Examples: He "wrote" the book. We "went" to the store.


Past participle
A past participle is a past-tense form of a verb. Example: the note was "written" in ink.


Plural noun
A plural noun is the plural form of a noun. Examples of a plural noun are: "books," "children."


Possessive noun
A possessive noun is a possessive form of a noun, indicating ownership. Examples: "dog's" leg, "students'" cars, "Joe's" son.


Preposition
A preposition relates nouns and pronouns to other words. Examples: folder "of" notes, gift "for" you.


Third person
The third person is a present form of a verb. Examples: he "waits," she "brushes" her hair, "does" it sing.


Present participle
A present participle is a form of a verb, usually created by adding "ing." Examples: He is "writing" a book. She is "going" to bed.


Pronoun
A pronoun takes the place of a noun. Examples: "I," "me," "you," "mine," "yourself," "these," "who," "which."


Punctuation
A punctuation clarifies the meaning of a phrase or statement by inserting punctuation marks. Examples: period (.), comma (,), question mark (?).


Singular noun
A singular noun is the name of one person, place, thing, or idea. Examples: "Tom," "Canada," "pen," "health."


Verb
A verb shows action or existence. Examples: "read" the book, it "is" informative.


Main clause
A main clause is complete meaning without any other sentence component. Example: "We will have the meeting today."


Subordinate clause
A subordinate clause is also called a dependent clause. A subordinate clause cannot stand alone. It depends on another clause to complete its meaning. Example: We will have the meeting today, "since everyone is here."


Relative clause
A relative clause is a type of subordinate clause that acts like an adjective, describing a noun or pronoun before it. A relative clause usually starts with a relative pronoun like "who," "whom," or "what." Example: The employees "who used the dental plan" appreciated the change.


Wh clause
A Wh- Clause is referred is a specialized subordinate clause starting with "when," "how," "why," or "where." A wh-clause can act like a noun, an adverb, or an adjective. Examples: We knew "where she would go," I will tell you "when I go."


That clause
A that clause is a specialized subordinate clause starting with "that." Example: We were sure "that you would pay us."


Subject
The subject of a clause performs the action. A subject can be one word or several. Examples: "John" ran, "The cats" meowed, "All the children and their mothers" took naps.


Verb
A verb or verb phrase shows action in the verb. Verbs can contain one or several words. VERB is used for a single word. For example: John "ran." A VERB PHRASE is used when several words make up the verb. For example: He "has gone" (VERB PHRASE).


Direct object
A direct object receives the action. Example: Bob gave her "an apple".


Indirect object
An Indirect Object tells "to whom" or "for whom." Example: Bob gave an apple to "her."


Prepositional phrase
A prepositional phrase is a preposition and its object, plus any modifiers. Prepositional phrases usually function as adjectives, adverbs, or nouns. Example: We came back "for the second show."


Relative pronoun
A relative pronoun introduces a subordinate clause and links it with an independent clause. Example: The noise "that" scared you was made by the boy "who" lives next door.


Phrasal
A phrasal is a preposition that is part of a verb phrase, but separated from it. Example: put the book "down."


Formal formality level
The Formal Formality Level is a formality level that uses strict rules of diction and usage.


Informal formality level
The Informal Formality Level is a formality level that allows for relaxed use of the language; this level allows colloquial expressions.


Standard formality level
The Standard Formality Level is a formality level that allows for moderate, everyday language.


Checking style
A checking style is a preset writing style that Grammatik refers to when proofreading text. There are 11 preset checking styles. Depending on which checking style you choose, a specific set of proofreading criteria is used to check your document.


Rule class
A rule class is a group of related grammar and style rules. Grammatik uses rule classes to detect common writing problems.


Fiction checking style
The Fiction checking style is a checking style that makes allowances for the writer's artistic license. Many rule classes are disabled, and informal language is acceptable. The Formality level is Informal.


Advertising checking style
The Advertising checking style is a checking style for advertising copy and other marketing literature designed to make a sale. The emphasis is on mechanics and grammatical accuracy rather than on style. Certain rule classes are disabled. The Formality level is Informal.


Documentation or speech checking style
The Documentation Or Speech checking style is a checking style for documentation targeted at a general, non-scientific audience. Jargon and special terminology are challenged. It has a low passive voice threshold. The Formality level is Standard.


Technical or scientific checking style
The Technical Or Scientific checking style is a checking style for scientific publications containing long, complex noun phrases and a technical vocabulary. The passive voice threshold is high. The Formality level is Formal.


Informal memo or letter checking style
The Informal Memo Or Letter checking style is a checking style for informal memos and letters. This style allows industry-specific jargon. The Formality level is Informal.


Formal memo or letter checking style
The Formal Memo or Letter checking style is a checking style that requires a formal tone and a strict interpretation of grammar and style rules. This style is appropriate for correspondence, meeting minutes, and legal documents. It requires language that is more formal than an inter-office memo. The Formality level is Formal.


Student composition checking style
The Student Composition checking style is a checking style for long documents. The Formality level is Formal.


Spelling plus checking style
The Spelling Plus checking style is a checking style that quickly checks for spelling errors and simple rules such as punctuation and capitalization. The Formality level is Standard.


Quick check checking style
The Quick Check checking style is the default checking style. This style is appropriate for most types of documents written for a general audience, such as general correspondence, informal reports, essays, and speeches. The Formality level is Standard.


Very strict checking style
The Very Strict checking style is a checking style for writing that requires a formal tone and a strict interpretation of grammar and style rules. This style is appropriate for correspondence, meeting minutes, and legal documents. The Formality level is Formal.


Grammar As-You-Go checking style
The Grammar-As-You-Go checking style marks words or phrases that indicate incorrect grammar or use as you type.


Options menu
The Options menu items let you specify how Grammatik proofreads your documents.


Split infinitives
A split infinitive is a verb in its infinitive form (to be, to run) that is split by intervening modifiers. For example, in the split infinitive "to boldly go," the adverb "boldly" splits the infinitive "to go."


Base verb
A base verb is the form of a verb that comes after "to" in an infinitive, or after a modal like "would."


Synonyms
Synonyms are words with the same meaning. For example, if you look up "happy," Thesaurus lists words such as "glad," "carefree," and "lighthearted."


Antonyms
Antonyms are words with an opposite meaning. For example, if you look up "slow," thesaurus lists words such as "fast" and "quick."


Related words
Related words are words that have a similar meaning to a word that you look up. For example, if you look up "old," Thesaurus lists words such as "senior," "original," and "outdated."


Examples
An example illustrates terms and rules. For example, if you look up "city," Thesaurus lists examples of cities, such as "New York City," "Tokyo," and "Paris."


Phonetic suggestions
The Show Phonetic Suggestions option lets you view a list of words that sound like the word in the Replace With (or Insert Word) box. For example, Spell Checker suggests words such as "trail," "trial," or "trill" to replace "traail."


UWL examples
Here are examples of how you can use the Adding Words to a User Word List feature:

•	If you often type incorrectly, you can define the correctly spelled word as a replacement. For example, you can specify "the" as a replacement for "hte."

•	You can replace abbreviations or acronyms with words or phrases. For example, you can define Chief Executive Officer as the replacement for the acronym CEO.

•	You can define multiple alternatives for a word. For example, you can define "United States of America," "United States," and "U.S.A." as replacements for the word "usa." During a spell checking or proofreading session, you can choose which alternative phrase you want to use to replace "usa."


Active voice
Grammatik lets you change a passive sentence to an active sentence. For example, Grammatik suggests the following three replacements for the sentence "A good time was had:"

•	They had a good time

•	We had a good time

•	<SUBJECT> had a good time

If you choose a replacement that begins with <SUBJECT>, Grammatik prompts you to type a subject for the sentence.


Readability formula

Grammatik displays a readability formula based on the language used in your application. United States English uses the Flesch-Kincaid formula. This is a widely-used formula that determines the school grade level that a reader needs to understand a document. A grade level score of 6-10 is considered the most effective for a general audience.

Languages other than United States English may use different scoring systems. For example, UK English uses the Flesch Reading Ease Score. This number is high for readable writing and low for complex writing. Many companies require writing that matches one of the following Flesch Reading Ease Scores.

Score	Reading Difficulty

90-100	Very easy

80-90	Easy

70-80	Fairly easy

60-70	Standard

50-60	Fairly difficult

30-50	Difficult

0-30	Very difficult

The Flesch Reading Ease Score formula is as follows: 206.835 -- (1.015 x average words / sentence) -- (84.6 x average syllables / word)

•	passive voice [image] too many passive constructions can make your work boring or difficult to understand.

•	sentence complexity [image] long sentences or sentences with complex structure are often difficult to understand.

•	vocabulary complexity [image] long words or unusual words may be too difficult for most readers.


Select word from
For example, to replace the verb "read" in the sentence "I read a magazine in the doctor's waiting room yesterday," with the correct form of the verb "peruse," choose "perused" from the Select Word Form dialog box. The sentence is now displayed as "I perused a magazine in the doctor's waiting room yesterday."


Hypernym
A hypernym is a superordinate of a word. For example, the hypernym of cat is animal.


Hyponym
A hyponym is a subordinate of a word. For example, the hyponym of animal is cat.


Related information
Related information gives you information related to a topic. For example, the related information of "tree" is "plants," "leaves," and "roots."


Cross references
Cross references lets you find specific information from other documents. For example, you can use cross references to look up information on "trees" in a document that you are working in with information on "trees" from another document.


Phrases
For example, you can use Phrases to ______________


Description
The Description is the name of the language you want to add. For example, the description of "Danish," is "Danish."


Language code
The Language Code is a 2 character code on the right side of the language. For example, the language code for Croatian is "HR."


Same verb
For example, "read," which appears the same when you use it in the sentence "I am going to read that book tomorrow," and in the sentence "I read that book yesterday."


multiple speech
For example, "wonder," which appears the same when you use it in the sentence "I wonder what is going to happen today," and in the sentence "I looked upon the scene with wonder."


disclaimer
The expanded thesaurus file and the dictionary contain words that may be offensive to some people. These words are included in the file to enable relational searches. It is not our intention to offend nor to promote the use of these terms.


Using writing tools

Writing tools let you correct errors in spelling and grammar, correct mistakes automatically, and help to refine your writing style.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using QuickCorrect

•	using the spelling checker and Grammatik

•	using the thesaurus

•	assigning different languages to text

•	customizing the writing tools

•	using checking styles

•	using rule classes

•	analyzing a drawing

•	using user word lists

•	working with languages

•	checking statistics

For more information about using the writing tools, see "Reference: Using writing tools"


Using QuickCorrect

QuickCorrect automatically corrects misspelled words and capitalization errors. You can customize QuickCorrect by specifying which types of errors you want corrected.

Adding words to QuickCorrect lets you replace words and abbreviations that you often mistype. The next time you type the misspelled word, QuickCorrect corrects the word automatically. You can use this feature to create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. For example, you can store the phrase "for your information" under the abbreviation "FYI" so that each time you type "FYI" followed by a space, it is replaced with the phrase.

You can have QuickCorrect add corrections made with the spelling checker to its word list so that the next time you misspell the word the same way, it is automatically corrected.

You can also undo a QuickCorrect correction.

Related Topics

To customize QuickCorrect

To add words to QuickCorrect

To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect

To undo a QuickCorrect correction


To customize QuickCorrect

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Capitalize first letter of sentences

•	Change straight quotes to typographic quotes

•	Correct two initial, consecutive capitals

•	Capitalize names of days

•	Replace text while typing

 Notes

•	The Correct two initial, consecutive capitals option doesn't make a change when a capital letter is followed by a space or period, or if a word contains other capital letters.

•	Instead of enabling the Capitalize first letter of sentences check box, you can change the text case to sentence case. For more information, see "To change text case."

Related Topics

Using QuickCorrect

To add words to QuickCorrect

To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect

To undo a QuickCorrect correction


To add words to QuickCorrect

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Enable the Replace text while typing check box.

3	In the Replace box, type the text to be replaced.

4	Type the replacement text in the With box.

5	Click Add.

 Tip

•	You can use this feature to create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. Type the abbreviation in the Replace box, and the word or phrase in the With box.

Related Topics

Using QuickCorrect

To customize QuickCorrect

To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect

To undo a QuickCorrect correction


To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect

1	Do one of the following:

•	(Windows) Click Tools [image] Options.

•	(Mac OS) Click CorelDRAW 11 [image] Preferences.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling.

3	Enable the Add corrections to QuickCorrect check box.

Related Topics

Using QuickCorrect

To customize QuickCorrect

To add words to QuickCorrect

To undo a QuickCorrect correction


To undo a QuickCorrect correction

•	Click Edit [image] Undo QuickCorrect.

Related Topics

Using QuickCorrect

To customize QuickCorrect

To add words to QuickCorrect

To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect


Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

The writing tools let you check your text in many ways. By using the spelling checker and Grammatik, you can check the spelling and grammar in an entire drawing, part of a drawing, or only selected text.

You can manually edit text and then resume checking the drawing.

The spelling checker and Grammatik replace words or phrases in two ways: you can choose a word, or define an automatic replacement for a word. Defining automatic replacement words is useful for words that are regularly misspelled. Automatic replacement words are stored in a user word list file. For more information about user word list files, see "Using user word lists."

You can skip a writing error once but flag subsequent occurrences of the problem, or you can skip the error for the rest of the proofreading session.

Related Topics

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To check an entire drawing

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Choose Document from the Check list box.

3	Click Start.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To check part of a drawing

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	From the Check list box, choose one of the following:

•	Paragraph

•	Selected text

•	Sentence

•	Word

3	Click one of the following:

•	Start [image] begins a new check

•	Resume [image] continues an interrupted check

 Note

•	The options available from the Check list box vary according to the type of drawing you are checking.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To check selected text

1	Select the text you want to check.

2	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

By default, the Auto start command is enabled for the Spelling checker and Grammatik. If you want to disable the Auto start command, click Options [image] Auto start; to check a drawing, you must click the Start button in the Writing tools dialog box.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To edit text manually

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	When the checking stops on a word or phrase, click where you want to make changes.

3	Edit the text.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To replace a word or phrase

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	When the checking stops, choose a word or phrase from the Replacements list.

3	Click Replace.

 Tip

•	If the spelling checker does not offer replacement words, you can edit text manually in the Replace with box.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To define automatic replacements

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	When the checking stops on a word, click Auto replace.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To skip an error once

To skip all occurrences of an error


To skip an error once

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	When the checking stops, click Skip once.

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip all occurrences of an error


To skip all occurrences of an error

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	When the checking stops, click Skip all.

 Tip

•	You can also skip all occurrences of a word for all proofreading sessions by adding it to a User word list. For more information about user word list files, see "Using user word lists."

Related Topics

Using the spelling checker and Grammatik

To check an entire drawing

To check part of a drawing

To check selected text

To edit text manually

To replace a word or phrase

To define automatic replacements

To skip an error once


Using the thesaurus

You can use the thesaurus to refine your writing style. The thesaurus lets you look up options such as synonyms, antonyms, and related words.

You can replace a word using the thesaurus. When you look up a word, the thesaurus provides a short definition and a list of the lookup options selected. The thesaurus also maintains a history list of the words that you have looked up. Each time you start the thesaurus, it begins a new history list. For information about which languages support which lookup options, see "Languages and supported thesaurus lookup options."

The thesaurus automatically replaces a word with a suggested word, but you can also use the thesaurus to insert words.

Related Topics

To replace a word

To insert a word


To replace a word

1	Select a word.

2	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Thesaurus.

3	Click Look up.

4	In the list of categories, double-click a definition and click a word.

5	Click Replace.

You can also
Look up words suggested by the thesaurus	View definitions in the pane to the right of the suggested words.
Look up any word	Type a word in the list box at the top of the Thesaurus page. Click Look up.
Look up recently checked words	Choose a word from the list box at the top of the Thesaurus page.
 Note

•	In some instances, the thesaurus prompts you to select the correct form of the word you want to insert. This happens when you want to replace a word that is the same in the present or past tense (such as "read") or a word that can be used as multiple parts of speech (for example, "wonder", which can be used as either a noun or a verb).

 Tip

•	Click the left and right arrows to scroll through word lists.

Related Topics

Using the thesaurus

To insert a word


To insert a word

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Thesaurus.

2	Type a word in the box at the top of the Thesaurus page.

3	Click Look up.

4	In the drawing, click where you want to insert the word.

5	Choose a word from the list box.

6	Click Insert.

 Note

•	In some instances, the thesaurus prompts you to select the correct form of the word you want to insert. This happens when you want to replace a word that is the same in the present or past tense (such as "read") or a word that can be used as multiple parts of speech (for example, "wonder", which can be used as either a noun or a verb).

Related Topics

Using the thesaurus

To replace a word


Assigning different languages to text

A drawing can contain text that alternates between different languages. For example, if you have a French language module installed on your computer, you can include a French word or paragraph in English text. You can assign languages to text for use with the CorelDRAW writing tools. When you run the spelling checker, Grammatik, or the thesaurus, CorelDRAW checks words, phrases, and sentences according to their assigned language. This prevents foreign words from being marked as misspelled. You can use the writing tools the same way you would if the text were all in one language.

Related Topics

To assign a language


To assign a language

1	Select the text.

2	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Language.

3	Choose a language.

 Tip

•	You can also set the language you choose as the default language by enabling the Save as default writing tools language check box.

Related Topics

Assigning different languages to text


Customizing the writing tools

You can customize how the spelling checker checks spelling in a drawing. For example, you can choose how the spelling checker starts and whether it searches for misspelled words, irregular capitalization, duplicate words, or words with numbers.

You can customize how Grammatik checks grammar in a drawing. For example, you can customize Grammatik to start automatically, to prompt you before it automatically replaces words, and to show spelling suggestions for misspelled words.

You can customize the thesaurus to look up words or close automatically. The thesaurus can also be customized to suggest spelling suggestions for misspelled words and display multiple alternative word lists.

Related Topics

To set spelling checker options

To set Grammatik options

To set thesaurus options


To set spelling checker options

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Spell check.

2	Click Options, and click one of the following:

•	Auto start

•	Beep on misspelled

•	Recheck all text

•	Check words with numbers

•	Check duplicate words

•	Check irregular capitalization

•	Prompt before auto replacement

•	Show phonetic suggestions

 Note

•	Any options you change will be effective the next time you open the spelling checker.

Related Topics

Customizing the writing tools

To set Grammatik options

To set thesaurus options


To set Grammatik options

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options, and click one of the following:

•	Auto start

•	Prompt before auto replacement

•	Suggest spelling replacements

 Note

•	Any options you change will be effective the next time you open Grammatik.

Related Topics

Customizing the writing tools

To set spelling checker options

To set thesaurus options


To set thesaurus options

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Thesaurus.

2	Click Options, and click one of the following:

•	Auto look up

•	Auto close

•	Spelling assist

 Note

•	Any options you change will be effective the next time you open Thesaurus.

Related Topics

Customizing the writing tools

To set spelling checker options

To set Grammatik options


Using checking styles

A checking style is a preset writing style rule applied to a drawing. Using a checking style lets you check a drawing that has a specific type of writing. For example, you can choose an advertising checking style to check advertising copy or marketing materials.

You can create, delete, edit, and restore a checking style.

You can specify a maximum number of items when Grammatik checks the grammar of a drawing. For example, you can specify the maximum number of consecutive nouns that Grammatik allows.

Choosing a formality level lets Grammatik check a drawing for strict or relaxed use of language and diction. Each checking style has a default level of formality assigned to it. Each formality level focuses on a different style of writing. You can choose from three formality levels: informal, standard, and formal.

Related Topics

To select a checking style

To create a checking style

To delete a checking style

To edit a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items

To change a formality level


To select a checking style

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose one of the following:

•	Spelling plus

•	Quick check

•	Very strict

•	Formal memo or letter

•	Informal memo or letter

•	Technical or scientific

•	Documentation or speech

•	Student composition

•	Advertising

•	Fiction

•	Grammar As-You-Go

4	Click Select.

 Note

•	A checking style remains in effect until you disable the checking style or choose another one.

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To create a checking style

To delete a checking style

To edit a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items

To change a formality level


To create a checking style

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose Very strict from the list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Edit checking styles dialog box, disable any rule classes in the Rule classes list that you do not want to include.

6	Modify any of the settings.

7	Click Save as.

8	In the Save as checking style dialog box, type a name in the Custom style name box.

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To select a checking style

To delete a checking style

To edit a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items

To change a formality level


To delete a checking style

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list.

4	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You can delete custom checking styles, but you cannot delete preset checking styles.

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To select a checking style

To create a checking style

To edit a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items

To change a formality level


To edit a checking style

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style.

4	Click Edit.

5	Modify any of the settings.

6	Click Save.

 Note

•	When you save an edited checking style, an asterisk (*) is added to the style name.

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To select a checking style

To create a checking style

To delete a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items

To change a formality level


To restore an edited checking style

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose an edited checking style from the list.

4	Click Edit.

5	Click Restore.

If you want to save an edited or restored checking style with a new name, click Save as, and type the new name in the Save as checking style dialog box.

 Note

•	Custom checking styles saved with new names cannot be returned to default settings.

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To select a checking style

To create a checking style

To delete a checking style

To edit a checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items

To change a formality level


To specify the maximum number of certain items

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Maximum allowed area, type values in any of the following boxes:

•	Consecutive nouns

•	Consecutive prepositional phrases

•	Long sentence length

•	Spell numbers below or equal to

•	Words allowed in split infinitive

 Tip

•	Set the Spell numbers below or equal to value to zero if you do not want figures to be flagged as errors.

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To select a checking style

To create a checking style

To delete a checking style

To edit a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To change a formality level


To change a formality level

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Formality levels area, enable one of the following:

•	Informal

•	Standard

•	Formal

Related Topics

Using checking styles

To select a checking style

To create a checking style

To delete a checking style

To edit a checking style

To restore an edited checking style

To specify the maximum number of certain items


Using rule classes

Rule classes contain groups of grammar and style rules. Grammatik uses rule classes to detect common writing errors.

You can enable or disable rules at any time during a Grammatik session. When you disable a rule, Grammatik ignores all the errors associated with that rule during the current proofreading session. You can also choose which rule classes to apply during a Grammatik session or save a new set of rules as a Checking style.

Related Topics

To enable a rule

To disable a rule

To add rule classes

To save a set of rules as a new checking style


To enable a rule

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Turn on rules.

3	In the Turn on rules dialog box, choose the rules you want to enable from the Rules list.

 Note

•	The Turn on rules command is available only when you have disabled a rule during proofreading. Otherwise, it is grayed.

Related Topics

Using rule classes

To disable a rule

To add rule classes

To save a set of rules as a new checking style


To disable a rule

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Start a new grammar checking session.

3	When Grammatik alerts you to an error you do not want to flag, click Turn off.

Related Topics

Using rule classes

To enable a rule

To add rule classes

To save a set of rules as a new checking style


To add rule classes

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Checking styles.

3	In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Edit checking styles dialog box, enable any check boxes beside the rule classes in the Rule classes list that you want to add.

Related Topics

Using rule classes

To enable a rule

To disable a rule

To save a set of rules as a new checking style


To save a set of rules as a new checking style

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Save rules.

3	In the Save rules dialog box, click Save as.

4	In the Save as checking style dialog box, type a name in the Custom style name box.

 Note

•	The Save rules command is available only when a rule has been turned off.

Related Topics

Using rule classes

To enable a rule

To disable a rule

To add rule classes


Analyzing a drawing

Grammatik lets you analyze the grammatical structure of text in a drawing. You can analyze parts of a sentence and parts of speech. When Grammatik analyzes a sentence, it assigns a sentence part to each word or group of words. Grammatik uses Parse Tree to let you view the parts of a sentence. When Grammatik analyzes text, it assigns a part of speech to each word in a sentence. You can view the parts of speech that Grammatik assigns to a sentence.

You can view a basic counts report to analyze a writing style. The basic counts report determines if there are too many long words or if paragraphs are too long and complicated for the reader to easily understand.

You can also view a flagged errors report to analyze a writing style. The flagged errors report lists the types of errors flagged in a drawing and reports the number of times each error was flagged. You can also use this report to identify the types of grammar problems that often appear in a drawing.

Viewing a readability report lets you analyze the amount of skill required for a reader to understand the text in a drawing. Grammatik analyzes the readability of a drawing by comparing the text with a comparison document. You can choose from one of three Grammatik comparison documents, or you can add a custom comparison document.

Related Topics

To view a parse tree

To view parts of speech

To view a basic counts report

To view a flagged errors report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document

To add a comparison document


To view a parse tree

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Parse tree.

 Note

•	The location of the cursor determines the sentence that displays in the parse tree.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view parts of speech

To view a basic counts report

To view a flagged errors report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document

To add a comparison document


To view parts of speech

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Parts of speech.

 Note

•	The location of the cursor determines the sentence that displays in the Parts of speech dialog box.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view a parse tree

To view a basic counts report

To view a flagged errors report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document

To add a comparison document


To view a basic counts report

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Basic counts.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view a parse tree

To view parts of speech

To view a flagged errors report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document

To add a comparison document


To view a flagged errors report

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Flagged.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view a parse tree

To view parts of speech

To view a basic counts report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document

To add a comparison document


To view the readability of a drawing

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

2	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Readability.

3	In the Readability dialog box, choose a comparison document from the Comparison document list box.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view a parse tree

To view parts of speech

To view a basic counts report

To view a flagged errors report

To add a comparison document

To add a comparison document


To add a comparison document

1	Open the drawing you want to use as a comparison document.

2	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

3	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Readability.

4	In the Readability dialog box, click Add document.

 Note

•	Grammatik lets you add only one custom comparison document at a time. If you add a second document, it overwrites the first custom comparison document.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view a parse tree

To view parts of speech

To view a basic counts report

To view a flagged errors report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document


To add a comparison document

1	Open the movie you want to use as a comparison document.

2	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Grammatik.

3	Click Options [image] Analysis [image] Readability.

4	In the Readability dialog box, click Add document.

 Note

•	Grammatik lets you add only one custom comparison document at a time. If you add a second document, it overwrites the first custom comparison document.

Related Topics

Analyzing a drawing

To view a parse tree

To view parts of speech

To view a basic counts report

To view a flagged errors report

To view the readability of a drawing

To add a comparison document


Using user word lists

A word list is a list of words or phrases scanned when you proof text by using the writing tools. Writing tools scan two types of word lists: user word lists and main word lists. Each language comes with a default user word list. You can customize user word lists by adding, deleting, or replacing words. Main word lists are lists of specialized words used by the spell checker for a particular language, field or company.

You can choose a user word list to help proof a text. You can have up to 10 user word lists active simultaneously. For example, if you want the spelling checker to scan both the US English and the Canadian English main word lists, choose both lists. If you work in the medical profession, you can select a third-party medical word list that runs with the writing tools. Each language supported by the spelling checker has a default main word list. The active User Word Lists are scanned first; if the word or phrase is not found there, the active Main Word Lists are scanned. You can add, disable, or remove word lists.

You can add a word to a user word list so that the word is not flagged as an error. You can also add replacement words to a user word list, which lets you choose a replacement when the spelling checker or Grammatik stops on a word. To view some examples of how you can use this option click here.

You can edit or delete words in a User Word List at any time.

Related Topics

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To choose a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	Enable the User word list check box.

If there is only one user word list, no check box will display.

 Note

•	The default user word list for the language is always enabled.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To add a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	Click in the User word lists list where you want to position the new user word list.

4	Click Add list.

5	In the Add user word list dialog box, choose the new user word list.

6	Click Open.

 Notes

•	The filename extension for a user word list is .uwl.

•	When you check a drawing, the user word lists are scanned in the order they display in the User word lists list.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To disable a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	Disable the check box that corresponds to a user word list.

 Notes

•	The default user word list for the language is always enabled.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To remove a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Spell check.

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	Choose a user word list.

4	Click Remove list.

 Note

•	You cannot remove the default language word list.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To add a word to a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list.

4	Type a word in the Word/phrase box.

If you want to add a replacement word, type it in the Replace with box.

5	Click Add entry.

6	Click Close.

 Note

•	In the spelling checker, replacement words appear in the Replacements box.

 Tips

•	Click Add from the Spell checker or Grammatik pages to add the word to the current user word list.

•	You can also add short phrases to a user word list.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To add alternative words to a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list.

4	Type a word in the Word/phrase box.

5	Type a replacement word in the Replace with box.

6	Click Add entry.

7	Click Close.

 Tip

•	You can also add short phrases to a user word list.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To edit a word or phrase in a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	Choose the User word list that contains the word or phrase you want to edit.

4	Choose the word or phrase you want to edit.

5	Edit the word or phrase in the Replace with box.

6	Click Replace entry.

 Note

•	If the word list you want to edit does not appear in the User word lists dialog box, click Add list to open the list.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To delete a word or phrase from a user word list


To delete a word or phrase from a user word list

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

2	Click Options [image] User word lists.

3	Choose the word list you want to edit.

4	Choose the word or phrase you want to delete.

5	Click Delete entry.

Related Topics

Using user word lists

To choose a user word list

To add a user word list

To disable a user word list

To remove a user word list

To add a word to a user word list

To add alternative words to a user word list

To edit a word or phrase in a user word list


Working with languages

Many languages are available for use with the writing tools. You can choose a language for the current file or set it as the default language for all of the writing tools.

Many of the languages support hyphenation. Hyphenation lets you reduce the raggedness of text along the right margin by dividing a word that falls at the end of a line, instead of forcing the entire word to the next line. To check which languages support hyphenation, see "Writing tools supported languages."

Every language has specific ways of formatting dates, time, currency symbols, and other text. You can check for the formatting conventions of another language by adding a language to the writing tools. For example, the spelling checker can format all dates in a drawing according to French conventions (such as 12 avril 1996 for French).

If you no longer require a language, you can remove it.

You can set a data file to set the language file that the thesaurus uses to look up words.

Related Topics

To choose a language

To set the default language

To add a language

To remove a language

To set a data file


To choose a language

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

•	Thesaurus

2	Click Options [image] Language.

3	In the Select language dialog box, choose a language from the Language list.

 Tip

•	To see only the languages supported by the current writing tool, enable the Show available languages only check box.

Related Topics

Working with languages

To set the default language

To add a language

To remove a language

To set a data file


To set the default language

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

•	Thesaurus

2	Click Options [image] Language.

3	In the Select language dialog box, choose a language from the Language list.

4	Enable the Save as default writing tools language check box.

 Tip

•	To see only the languages supported by the current writing tool, enable the Show available languages only check box.

Related Topics

Working with languages

To choose a language

To add a language

To remove a language

To set a data file


To add a language

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

•	Thesaurus

2	Click Options [image] Language.

3	Click Add.

4	In the Add language code dialog box, type the language code and description of the language that you want to add.

Related Topics

Working with languages

To choose a language

To set the default language

To remove a language

To set a data file


To remove a language

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools, and click one of the following:

•	Spell check

•	Grammatik

•	Thesaurus

2	Click Options [image] Language.

3	Choose a language from the list.

4	Click Remove.

 Note

•	You can remove only languages you have added.

Related Topics

Working with languages

To choose a language

To set the default language

To add a language

To set a data file


To set a data file

1	Click Text [image] Writing tools [image] Thesaurus.

2	Click Options [image] Set data file.

3	In the Open dialog box, choose the data file.

4	Click Open.

Related Topics

Working with languages

To choose a language

To set the default language

To add a language

To remove a language


Checking statistics

You can check text statistics to count text elements, including the number of lines, words, characters, and the names of the fonts and styles used. You can either display statistics for selected text objects or for the entire drawing. If no text is selected, all text elements in the drawing, including tab and space characters, are counted.

Related Topics

To count text elements for an entire drawing


To count text elements for an entire drawing

1	Click a blank space in the drawing window.

2	Click Text [image] Text statistics.

You can also
Count text elements for selected text	Select a block of text. Click Text [image] Text statistics.
 Tip

•	If you want to display information about the styles used, enable the Show style statistics check box.

Related Topics

Checking statistics


Reference: Using writing tools

Additional information about writing tools supported options and parts of speech is available in the following topics:

•	languages and supported thesaurus lookup options

•	writing tools supported languages

•	analyzing parts of a sentence

Related Topics

Languages and supported thesaurus lookup options

Writing tools supported languages

Analyzing parts of a sentence


Languages and supported thesaurus lookup options

The following table lists the languages and the thesaurus options they support.

Language	Synonym	Antonym	Related Words	Related Information	Cross-References	Hypernym	Hyponym	Phrases
Catalan
Danish
Dutch
English [image] US
English [image] UK
English [image] CE
English [image] OZ
Finnish
French [image] National
French [image] Canada
German [image] National
German [image] Swiss
Italian
Norwegian
Portuguese [image] National
Portuguese [image] Brazilian
Spanish [image] National
Spanish [image] Latin American
Swedish
Related Topics

Reference: Using writing tools

Writing tools supported languages

Analyzing parts of a sentence


Writing tools supported languages

The following table lists languages, codes, and which writing tools are available for them.

Language	Code	Spelling checker	Grammatik	Thesaurus	Hyphenation
Afrikaans	AF	Yes	No	No	No
Catalan	CA	Yes	No	Yes	No
Czech	CZ	Yes	No	No	No
Danish	DK	Yes	No	Yes	No
Dutch	NL	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
English [image] U.S.	US	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
English [image] U.K.	UK	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
English [image] Canada	CE	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
English [image] Australia	OZ	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Finnish	SU	No	No	Yes	No
French [image] Canada	CF	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
French [image] National	FR	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
Galician	GA	Yes	No	No	No
German [image] National	DE	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
German [image] Swiss	SD	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
Greek	GR	Yes	No	No	No
Icelandic	IS	Yes	No	No	No
Italian	IT	Yes	No	Yes	No
Japanese	JP	Yes	No	No	No
Norwegian	NO	Yes	No	Yes	No
Portuguese [image] Brazil	BR	Yes	No	Yes	No
Portuguese [image] Portugal	PO	Yes	No	Yes	No
Russian	RU	Yes	No	No	No
Slovak	SL	Yes	No	No	No
Spanish [image] America	EA	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
Spanish [image] National	ES	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
Swedish	SV	Yes	No	Yes	No
Turkish	TR	Yes	No	No	No
Related Topics

Reference: Using writing tools

Languages and supported thesaurus lookup options

Analyzing parts of a sentence


Analyzing parts of a sentence

The abbreviations that identify parts of a sentence or speech are listed below. Click any of the following for a brief explanation.

•	3v

•	<>

•	abrv

•	adj

•	adv

•	aux

•	bv

•	c/s

•	cj

•	det

•	direct object

•	ij

•	indirect object

•	inf

•	main clause

•	mod

•	num

•	phrasal

•	pn

•	poss

•	ppt

•	prep phr

•	pres-p

•	prn

•	pv

•	relative clause

•	rel prn

•	sn

•	subject

•	subordinate clause

•	that clause

•	verb or verb phrase

•	wh- clause

Related Topics

Reference: Using writing tools

Languages and supported thesaurus lookup options

Writing tools supported languages